Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual
<Complete Guide>
Digital Camera
DC-S9
Please read these instructions carefully before using this product.
Register online at
http://shop.panasonic.com/support/register
(U.S. customers only)
DVQP3138ZD
F0524KN3095
The firmware has been updated to improve camera capabilities, add functionality,
and enhance security.
•
For details, refer to the “Firmware Update” pages.
2
About Operating Instructions
This document, “Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual <Complete
Guide>”, includes detailed explanations of all the functions and operations
of the camera.
•
Images and illustrations used in this document are for explaining the functions.
Symbols Used in This Document
Black icons show conditions in which functions can be used, and gray icons show
conditions in which functions cannot be used.
Example:
Pictures/Videos
Recording mode
Operating symbols
In this document, camera operation is explained using the following symbols:
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
About Operating Instructions
3
(A) :
Front dial
(B) 3421:
Cursor button up/down/left/right
(C) :
[MENU/SET] button
(D) :
Control dial
•
Other symbols, such as icons shown on the camera screen, are also used in
explanations.
•
This document describes the procedure for selecting menu items as follows:
Example) Set [Picture Quality] of the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu to [STD.].
[] [] [Picture Quality] Select [STD.]
About Operating Instructions
4
Notification classification symbols
In this document, notifications are classified and described using the following
symbols:
: To confirm prior to using the function
: Hints for better use of the camera and tips for recording
: Notifications and supplementary items regarding specifications
: Related functions and information
•
Description in this document is based on the interchangeable lens (S-R2060).
5
Contents
About Operating Instructions 2
Introduction 17
Before Use.................................................................................18
Standard Accessories................................................................20
Lenses That Can Be Used.........................................................22
Memory Cards That Can Be Used.............................................23
Names of Parts ..........................................................................26
Camera.............................................................................................. 27
Supplied Lens.................................................................................... 31
Monitor Displays................................................................................ 34
Getting Started 36
Attaching a Shoulder Strap........................................................37
Charging the Battery..................................................................39
Battery Insertion ................................................................................ 40
Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging .............................. 42
Using the Camera While Supplying It with Power
(Supplying Power) ............................................................................. 45
Notifications Regarding Charging/Power Supply............................... 46
[Power Save Mode] ........................................................................... 48
Inserting Cards (Optional)..........................................................51
Attaching a Lens........................................................................54
How to Extend/Retract the Lens [When the Interchangeable Lens
(S-R1840) Is Attached]...................................................................... 56
Removing a Lens .............................................................................. 57
Attaching a Lens Hood ...................................................................... 58
Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle.................................61
Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)............63
Contents
6
Basic Operations 67
How to Hold the Camera ...........................................................68
Selecting the Recording Mode...................................................70
Camera Setting Operations .......................................................71
Monitor Display Settings ............................................................77
Switching the Display Information ..................................................... 77
Quick Menu................................................................................80
Control Panel .............................................................................82
Menu Operation Methods ..........................................................84
[Reset] ............................................................................................... 89
Entering Characters...................................................................90
Intelligent Auto Mode.................................................................91
Recording Using Touch Functions.............................................97
Touch AF/Touch Shutter ................................................................... 97
Touch AE......................................................................................... 100
Taking Pictures 102
Basic Picture Operations .........................................................103
[Aspect Ratio] ..........................................................................106
[Picture Size]............................................................................108
[Picture Quality] .......................................................................110
Recording Videos 112
Basic Video Operations ...........................................................113
[System Frequency].................................................................120
[Rec. File Format] ....................................................................122
[Rec Quality] ............................................................................123
[Image Area of Video]..............................................................136
Contents
7
Focus / Zoom 138
Selecting the Focus Mode .......................................................139
Using AF ..................................................................................141
[AF-Point Scope] ............................................................................. 146
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] ............................................................ 148
[Focus Limiter]................................................................................. 151
[AF Assist Light] .............................................................................. 153
[Focus Frame Moving Speed] ......................................................... 154
[AF Micro Adjustment] ..................................................................... 155
Selecting the AF Mode ............................................................159
Automatic Detection ........................................................................ 162
[Tracking]......................................................................................... 167
[Full Area AF] .................................................................................. 168
[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]/[Zone].................................................... 171
[1-Area+]/[1-Area]............................................................................ 173
[Pinpoint] ......................................................................................... 175
AF Area Operations .................................................................177
Move the Position of the AF Area.................................................... 177
Changing the Size of the AF Area ................................................... 179
Resetting the AF Area ..................................................................... 180
Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position
([AF+AE])......................................................................................... 181
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]....................................................... 182
Record Using MF.....................................................................183
[Focus Peaking]............................................................................... 188
Recording with Zoom...............................................................190
[Crop Zoom(Photo)]......................................................................... 191
[Hybrid Zoom(Photo)] ...................................................................... 194
[Crop Zoom(Video)]......................................................................... 197
[Hybrid Zoom(Video)] ...................................................................... 201
Contents
8
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer 204
Selecting the Drive Mode.........................................................205
Taking Burst Pictures...............................................................207
High Resolution mode .............................................................215
Recording with Time Lapse Shot.............................................221
Recording with Stop Motion Animation....................................229
Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos ....................234
Recording Using the Self-timer................................................236
Bracket Recording ...................................................................241
[Silent Mode]............................................................................249
[Synchro Scan(Photo)].............................................................251
[Min. Shutter Speed]................................................................253
[Shutter Delay] .........................................................................254
Image Stabilizer.......................................................................255
Image Stabilizer Settings................................................................. 258
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity 266
[Metering Mode].......................................................................267
Program AE Mode ...................................................................269
Program Shift .................................................................................. 271
Aperture-Priority AE Mode.......................................................273
Shutter-Priority AE Mode .........................................................276
Manual Exposure Mode...........................................................279
Available Shutter Speeds (Sec.) ..................................................... 282
[T] (Time)......................................................................................... 283
Preview Mode ..........................................................................284
Exposure Compensation .........................................................286
[i.Dynamic Range] ........................................................................... 289
Contents
9
Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock) ............................290
ISO Sensitivity .........................................................................292
[Dual Native ISO Setting] ................................................................ 296
[ISO Sensitivity (photo)]................................................................... 297
White Balance / Image Quality 298
White Balance (WB) ................................................................299
Adjusting the White Balance ........................................................... 305
[Photo Style] ............................................................................307
[Filter Settings].........................................................................320
[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]..................................................... 325
[REAL TIME LUT] ....................................................................326
[LUT Library] ............................................................................328
Base Photo Style of LUT files.......................................................... 332
Lens Compensation.................................................................334
[Vignetting Comp.]........................................................................... 334
[Color Shading Compensation] ....................................................... 335
[Diffraction Compensation] .............................................................. 339
Video Settings 340
Recording Modes Specifically for Video
(Creative Video/S&Q) ..............................................................341
Displays Suited to Video Recording ................................................ 342
Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos..................................... 343
Separating Settings for Recording Video and Pictures ................... 347
Using AF (Video) .....................................................................349
[Continuous AF]............................................................................... 349
[AF Custom Setting(Video)]............................................................. 351
[Enlarged Live Display(Video)] ........................................................ 352
Video Brightness and Coloring ................................................354
Contents
10
[Luminance Level] ........................................................................... 354
[Master Pedestal Level]................................................................... 356
Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee)......................... 357
[ISO Sensitivity (video)] ................................................................... 359
Audio Settings..........................................................................360
[Sound Rec Level Disp.].................................................................. 361
[Mute Sound Input] .......................................................................... 362
[Sound Rec Gain Level] .................................................................. 363
[Sound Rec Level Adj.].................................................................... 364
[Sound Rec Quality] ........................................................................ 365
[Sound Rec Level Limiter] ............................................................... 366
[Wind Noise Canceller].................................................................... 367
External Microphones (Optional) .............................................368
Setting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2: Optional) ................ 371
Reduction of Wind Noise................................................................. 372
Time Code ...............................................................................373
Setting the Time Code..................................................................... 374
Main Assist Functions..............................................................376
[Flicker Decrease (Video)]............................................................... 377
[SS/Gain Operation] ........................................................................ 378
[WFM/Vector Scope] ....................................................................... 380
[Luminance Spot Meter] .................................................................. 384
[Zebra Pattern] ................................................................................ 386
[Frame Marker]................................................................................ 388
Color Bars/Test Tone ...................................................................... 390
Special Video Recording 392
Slow & Quick Video .................................................................393
High Frame Rate Video ...........................................................400
[Focus Transition] ....................................................................402
Contents
11
[Live Cropping].........................................................................407
Log Recording .........................................................................412
[Log View Assist] ............................................................................. 416
HLG Videos .............................................................................417
[HLG View Assist]............................................................................ 420
Anamorphic Recording ............................................................421
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] ................................................... 423
[Synchro Scan(Video)].............................................................425
[Segmented File Recording] ....................................................427
List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be
Recorded .................................................................................428
HDMI Output (Video) 434
Connecting HDMI Devices.......................................................435
HDMI Output Image Quality.....................................................436
Images Output via HDMI ................................................................. 436
HDMI Output Settings..............................................................439
Outputting the Camera Information Display via HDMI..................... 440
Outputting Control Information to an External Recorder ................. 441
Outputting Audio via HDMI.............................................................. 442
Outputting the Enlarged Live Display (Video) via HDMI.................. 442
Playing Back and Editing of Images 443
Playing Back Pictures ..............................................................444
Playing Back Videos................................................................446
Video Repeat Playback ................................................................... 450
Extracting a Picture ......................................................................... 452
[Video Divide] .................................................................................. 453
Switching the Display Mode.....................................................455
Contents
12
Enlarged Display ............................................................................. 456
Thumbnail Screen ........................................................................... 458
Calendar Playback .......................................................................... 460
Group Images ..........................................................................461
Deleting Images.......................................................................463
[RAW Processing]....................................................................465
[Video Repair] ..........................................................................474
[Playback] Menu ......................................................................477
How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu......................... 477
[Playback] ([Playback Mode]) .......................................................... 479
[Playback] ([Process Image])........................................................... 482
[Playback] ([Add/Delete Info.])......................................................... 483
[Playback] ([Edit Image]) ................................................................. 484
[Playback] ([Others])........................................................................ 486
Camera Customization 487
Fn Buttons ...............................................................................488
Register Functions to the Fn Buttons .............................................. 490
Use the Fn Buttons.......................................................................... 501
[Dial Operation Switch] ............................................................502
Register Functions to the Dials........................................................ 502
Temporarily Change Dial Operation ................................................ 504
Quick Menu Customization......................................................505
Register to the Quick Menu ............................................................. 505
Custom Mode ..........................................................................512
Register in Custom Mode................................................................ 513
Using Custom Mode........................................................................ 515
Calling Up Settings.......................................................................... 516
[Custom] Menu ........................................................................517
[Custom] menu ([Image Quality])..................................................... 518
Contents
13
[Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter]) .................................................... 524
[Custom] menu ([Operation]) ........................................................... 530
[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]) ................................... 535
[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) ................................... 546
[Custom] menu ([IN/OUT])............................................................... 550
[Custom] menu ([Lens / Others]) ..................................................... 551
[Setup] Menu ...........................................................................554
[Setup] menu ([Card/File]) ............................................................... 555
[Setup] menu ([Monitor / Display]) ................................................... 559
[Setup] menu ([IN/OUT]) ................................................................. 561
[Setup] menu ([Setting]) .................................................................. 566
[Setup] menu ([Others])................................................................... 568
My Menu ..................................................................................572
Registration in My Menu.................................................................. 572
Edit My Menu .................................................................................. 573
List of Menu 574
[Photo] menu ...........................................................................575
[Video] menu............................................................................577
[Custom] menu ........................................................................580
[Setup] menu ...........................................................................584
[My Menu] ................................................................................586
[Playback] menu ......................................................................587
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth 588
Connecting to “LUMIX Lab” .....................................................590
Installing “LUMIX Lab” .................................................................... 591
Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection) ..................... 592
Using “LUMIX Lab” ..................................................................596
LUT Library Operations ................................................................... 596
Contents
14
Import images.................................................................................. 598
[Auto Transfer]................................................................................. 600
[Location Logging] ........................................................................... 602
Connecting to “LUMIX Sync”...................................................604
Installing “LUMIX Sync” .................................................................. 605
Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection) ..................... 606
Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection])........................... 612
Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone with Simple
Operations....................................................................................... 618
Using “LUMIX Sync” ................................................................620
[Remote shooting] ........................................................................... 622
[Shutter Remote Control]................................................................. 624
[Import images]................................................................................ 627
[Auto Transfer]................................................................................. 629
[Location Logging] ........................................................................... 631
[Remote Wakeup]............................................................................ 633
[Auto Clock Set]............................................................................... 635
[Camera settings copy].................................................................... 636
Sending Images from the Camera to a PC..............................637
Wi-Fi Connections ...................................................................641
[Via Network] ................................................................................... 642
[Direct] ............................................................................................. 646
Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings......................... 648
Fn Button Assigned with [Wi-Fi] ...................................................... 650
Send Settings and Selecting Images.......................................651
Image Send Settings ....................................................................... 651
Selecting Images............................................................................. 652
[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu ..................................................................653
Connecting to Other Devices 655
Connecting...............................................................................656
Contents
15
Viewing on a TV.......................................................................658
Importing Images to a PC ........................................................662
Copying Images to a PC ................................................................. 663
Installing Software ........................................................................... 666
Storing on a Recorder..............................................................667
Tethered Recording .................................................................668
Installing Software ........................................................................... 669
Operating the Camera from a PC.................................................... 670
Materials 671
Digital Camera Accessory System ..........................................672
Using Optional Accessories.....................................................673
Tripod Grip (Optional)...................................................................... 674
DC Coupler (Optional)..................................................................... 675
Monitor Displays ......................................................................676
Recording Screen............................................................................ 676
Playback Screen ............................................................................. 689
Message Displays....................................................................694
Troubleshooting .......................................................................698
Power, Battery................................................................................. 698
Recording ........................................................................................ 699
Video ............................................................................................... 704
Playback.......................................................................................... 705
Monitor ............................................................................................ 706
Wi-Fi Function ................................................................................. 707
TV, PC............................................................................................. 711
Others.............................................................................................. 712
Cautions for Use ......................................................................713
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording
Time with the Battery ...............................................................723
Contents
16
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time
with Cards................................................................................728
List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for
Copying....................................................................................736
List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode...758
Specifications...........................................................................765
Trademarks and Licenses .......................................................784
Introduction – Before Use
18
Before Use
Firmware of Your Camera/Lens
Firmware updates may be provided in order to improve camera capabilities or to add
functionality.
Make sure that the firmware of the camera/lens you purchased is the latest version.
We recommend using the latest firmware version.
•
To check the firmware version of the camera/lens, attach the lens to the camera and
select [Firmware Version] in the [Setup] ([Others]) menu. You can also update the
firmware in [Firmware Version]. ([Firmware Version]: 571)
•
For the latest information on the firmware or to download/update the firmware,
visit the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/download/index4.html
(English only)
Handling of the Camera
When using the camera, take care not to drop it, bump it, or apply undue force.
These may cause malfunction or damage to the camera and lens.
The camera is not dust resistant, splash resistant, or waterproof.
Avoid using the camera in places with excessive dust or sand, or where water
can come into contact with the camera.
If sand, dust, or liquid gets on the monitor, wipe it off with a dry soft cloth.
– Touch operations may be incorrectly recognized.
Do not place a hand inside the camera mount.
This may cause a failure or damage because the sensor is a precision device.
If you shake the camera while turning the camera off, a sensor may operate or a
rattling sound may be heard. This is caused by the image stabilizer mechanism
in the body. It is not a malfunction.
Introduction – Before Use
19
Condensation (When the Lens or Monitor is Fogged Up)
•
Condensation occurs when there are temperature or humidity differences. Take care
as this may lead to soiling, mold, and malfunctions in the lens and monitor.
•
If condensation occurs, turn off the camera and leave it for approx. 2 hours. The fog
will disappear naturally when the temperature of the camera becomes close to the
ambient temperature.
Be Sure to Perform Trial Recording in Advance
Perform trial recording in advance of an important event (wedding, etc.) to check that
recording can be performed normally.
No Compensation Regarding Recording
Please note that compensation cannot be provided in the event that recording could
not be performed due to a problem with the camera or a card.
Be Careful with Regard to Copyrights
Under copyright law, you may not use the images and audio you have recorded for
other than personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder.
Be careful because there are cases where restrictions apply to recording even for the
purpose of personal enjoyment.
Also Read “Cautions for Use” (Cautions for Use: 713)
Introduction – Standard Accessories
20
Standard Accessories
Check that all the accessories are supplied before using the camera.
•
The accessories and their shape will differ depending on the country or area where
the camera was purchased.
For details on the accessories, refer to “Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual
<Quick Start Guide>” (supplied).
*1 This is attached to the camera at the time of purchase.
≥Digital camera body
(This is referred to as camera in this document.)
≥Battery pack
(This is referred to as battery pack or battery in this document.)
•
Charge the battery before use.
≥Shoulder strap
≥Body cap
*1
≥Accessory shoe cover
*1
Items Supplied with DC-S9K (Lens Kit Product)
≥35 mm full-frame interchangeable lens:
S-R2060 “LUMIX S 20-60mm F3.5-5.6”
•
Dust and splash resistant
≥Lens hood
≥Lens cap
*2
≥Lens rear cap
*2
Introduction – Standard Accessories
21
*2 This is attached to the lens at the time of purchase.
•
The memory card is optional.
•
Consult the dealer or Panasonic if you lose the supplied accessories. (You can
purchase the accessories separately.)
Items Supplied with DC-S9H (Lens Kit Product)
≥35 mm full-frame interchangeable lens:
S-R28200 “LUMIX S 28-200mm F4-7.1 MACRO O.I.S.”
•
Dust and splash resistant
≥Lens hood
≥Lens cap
*2
≥Lens rear cap
*2
Items Supplied with DC-S9N (Lens Kit Product)
≥35 mm full-frame interchangeable lens:
S-R1840 “LUMIX S 18-40mm F4.5-6.3”
•
Dust and splash resistant
≥Lens cap
*2
≥Lens rear cap
*2
Introduction – Lenses That Can Be Used
22
Lenses That Can Be Used
The lens mount of this camera is compliant with the L-Mount standard of
Leica Camera AG.
It can be used with 35 mm full-frame interchangeable lenses and APS-C
size interchangeable lenses of this standard.
•
The interchangeable lenses used in the explanations are designated as follows in
this document.
– 35 mm full-frame interchangeable lens: full-frame lens
– APS-C-size interchangeable lens: APS-C lens
•
When there is no distinguishing the type of lens, the explanation will use lens.
•
Refer to catalogs/websites for information regarding supported lenses.
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/connect/index.html
(English only)
•
The angle of view while recording with an APS-C lens is equivalent to the angle
of view of a focal length of 1.5× when converted to the focal length of a 35 mm
film camera. (If a 50 mm lens is used, the angle of view will be equivalent to a
75 mm lens.)
•
As the image area narrows, the following function is not available when using an
APS-C lens:
– High Resolution Mode
•
Attaching commercially available accessories that do not comply with the
L-Mount standard may lead to operation failure or malfunction of the camera.
– If a failure or malfunction occurs due to this cause, the warranty will be void.
Introduction – Memory Cards That Can Be Used
23
Memory Cards That Can Be Used
This section describes the memory cards that can be used with this
camera. (As of May 2024)
•
The camera supports UHS-I/UHS-II UHS Speed Class 3 standard and UHS-II Video
Speed Class 90 standard SD cards.
•
SD memory cards, SDHC memory cards, and SDXC memory cards are referred to
by the generic name of SD cards or cards in this document.
•
For information on memory cards with confirmed operation, check the
following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/connect/index.html
(English only)
SD memory card/SDHC memory card/SDXC memory card (Maximum 512 GB)
Introduction – Memory Cards That Can Be Used
24
SD Cards That Can Be Used with This Camera
When using the following functions, use cards that have the correct SD
Speed Class, UHS Speed Class, and Video Speed Class.
•
Speed classes are standards to guarantee the minimum speed necessary for
continuous writing.
[Video Record]
Bit rate of the
recording quality
Speed Class
Example of
indication
72 Mbps or less
Class 10
UHS Speed Class 1 or higher
Video Speed Class 10 or higher
200 Mbps or less
UHS Speed Class 3
Video Speed Class 30 or higher
Introduction – Memory Cards That Can Be Used
25
•
You can prevent the writing and deleting of data by setting the write-protect
switch (A) on the SD card to “LOCK”.
•
The data stored on a card may be damaged due to electromagnetic waves, static
electricity or a failure of the camera or card. We recommend backing up
important data.
•
Keep the memory card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
(A)
Introduction – Names of Parts
27
Camera
(1) Stereo microphone (Audio Settings: 360)
•
Do not block the microphone with a finger. Audio will be difficult to record.
(2) Accessory shoe (Accessory shoe cover) (External Microphones (Optional):
368)
•
Keep the Accessory shoe cover out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
(3) Charging light (Charging Light Indications: 43)/
Network connection light (Checking operation of the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth
functions: 588)
(4) Front dial (Front Dial: 72)
(5) Shutter button (Basic Picture Operations: 103)
(6) [ ] (Recording distance reference mark) (Operations on the MF Assist
Screen: 185)
(7) Video rec. button (Basic Video Operations: 113)
(8) [ ] (Exposure compensation) button (Exposure Compensation: 286)
(9) Camera on/off switch (Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time):
63)
(10) Mode dial (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
(10)
(9)
(8)
(6)
(7)
(5)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
Introduction – Names of Parts
28
(11) Monitor (Monitor Displays: 34, Monitor Displays: 676)/
Touch screen (Touch Screen: 74)
(12) [LUT] button ([REAL TIME LUT]: 326)
(13) [AF ON] button ([AF ON] button: 143)
(14) [Q] (Quick menu) button (Quick Menu: 80)
(15) [ ] (Playback) button (Playing Back and Editing of Images: 443)
(16) Cursor buttons (Cursor Buttons: 73)
[ISO] (ISO sensitivity) button (3) (ISO Sensitivity: 292)
[ ] (Drive mode) button (4) (Selecting the Drive Mode: 205)
[ ] (AF mode) button (2) (Selecting the AF Mode: 159)
[WB] (White balance) button (1) (White Balance (WB): 299)
Fn buttons (Fn Buttons: 488)
3:Fn7, 1: Fn8, 4: Fn9, 2: Fn10
(17) [MENU/SET] button ([MENU/SET] Button: 73, Menu Operation Methods: 84)
(18) Control dial (Control Dial: 72)
(19) [DISP.] button (Switching the Display Information: 77)
(20) [ ] (Cancel) button (Menu Operation Methods: 84)/
[ ] (Delete) button (Deleting Images: 463)/
Fn button (Fn1) (Fn Buttons: 488)
(19)
(18)
(20)
(17)
(16)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(12)
(11)
Introduction – Names of Parts
29
(21) Speaker ([Beep]: 561)
(22) Tripod mount (Tripod: 721)
•
If you attempt to attach a tripod with a screw length of 5.5 mm (0.22 inch) or
more, you may not be able to securely fix it in place or it may damage the
camera.
(23) DC Coupler cover (DC Coupler (Optional): 675)
(24) Grip
(25) Card access light (Card Access Indications: 52)
(26) Card/Battery door (Battery Insertion: 40, Inserting Cards (Optional): 51)
(27) Release lever (Battery Insertion: 40, Inserting Cards (Optional): 51)
(28) HDMI socket (Connecting HDMI Devices: 435, HDMI socket: 656)
(29) USB port (Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging: 42, USB port: 657)
(30) Card slot (Inserting Cards (Optional): 51)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(23)
(22)
(21)
(25)
(26)
(24)
(27)
Introduction – Names of Parts
30
(31) Shoulder strap eyelet (Attaching a Shoulder Strap: 37)
(32) Lens release button (Removing a Lens: 57)
(33) Illumination sensor
(34) Self-timer light (Recording Using the Self-timer: 236)/
AF assist light ([AF Assist Light]: 153)
(35) [MIC] socket (External Microphones (Optional): 368)
(36) Lens lock pin (Lens fitting mark) (Attaching a Lens: 54)
(37) Sensor
(38) Contact points
(39) Mount
(40) Screw hole for function expansion
(32)
(40)(39)
(35)
(34)
(33)
(37)(36) (31)
(31)
(38)
Introduction – Names of Parts
31
Supplied Lens
S-R2060
(1) Lens surface
(2) Focus ring (Record Using MF: 183)
(3) Zoom ring (Recording with Zoom: 190)
(4) [AF/MF] switch (Using AF: 141, Record Using MF: 183)
•
You can switch between AF and MF.
If [MF] is set on either the lens or camera, operation will be with MF.
(5) Contact points
(6) Lens mount rubber
(7) Lens fitting mark (Attaching a Lens: 54)
•
Recording at or near the closest focusing distance at wide angle will degrade
image quality around the edges of the image. We recommend checking each
picture after you have taken it when recording.
(4)
(5) (6)(1) (2) (3) (7)
Introduction – Names of Parts
32
S-R28200
(1) Lens surface
(2) Focus ring (Record Using MF: 183)
(3) Zoom ring (Recording with Zoom: 190)
(4) O.I.S. switch (Image Stabilizer: 255)
(5) [AF/MF] switch (Using AF: 141, Record Using MF: 183)
•
You can switch between AF and MF.
If [MF] is set on either the lens or camera, operation will be with MF.
(6) Contact points
(7) Lens mount rubber
(8) Lens fitting mark (Attaching a Lens: 54)
•
Recording at or near the closest focusing distance at wide angle will degrade
image quality around the edges of the image. We recommend checking each
picture after you have taken it when recording.
(3)
(4)(1) (2) (5)
(6) (7) (8)
Introduction – Names of Parts
33
S-R1840
(1) Lens surface
(2) Focus ring (Record Using MF: 183)
(3) Zoom ring (Recording with Zoom: 190)
(4) [AF/MF] switch (Using AF: 141, Record Using MF: 183)
•
You can switch between AF and MF.
If [MF] is set on either the lens or camera, operation will be with MF.
(5) Contact points
(6) Lens mount rubber
(7) Lens fitting mark (Attaching a Lens: 54)
•
Attach and remove the lens only when the lens barrel is retracted.
•
A message is displayed if the lens barrel is retracted and recording is not
possible. Rotate the zoom ring to extend it. (How to Extend/Retract the Lens
[When the Interchangeable Lens (S-R1840) Is Attached]: 56)
•
Recording at or near the closest focusing distance at wide angle will degrade
image quality around the edges of the image. We recommend checking each
picture after you have taken it when recording.
(3)
(4)(1) (2) (5)
(6) (7)
Introduction – Names of Parts
35
(1) Photo Style ([Photo Style]: 307)
(2) Level gauge ([Level Gauge]: 544)
(3) Picture quality ([Picture Quality]: 110)/
Picture size ([Picture Size]: 108)
(4) AF area (AF Area Operations: 177)
(5) Focus mode (Selecting the Focus Mode: 139, Using AF: 141, Record Using
MF: 183)
(6) AF mode (Selecting the AF Mode: 159)
(7) Image stabilizer (Image Stabilizer: 255)
(8) Focus (green) (Basic Picture Operations: 103, Using AF: 141)/
Recording state (red) (Basic Video Operations: 113, High Resolution mode:
215)
(9) Recording mode (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
(10) Metering mode ([Metering Mode]: 267)
(11) Shutter speed (Basic Picture Operations: 103, Shutter-Priority AE Mode: 276)
(12) Aperture value (Basic Picture Operations: 103, Aperture-Priority AE Mode:
273)
(13) Exposure compensation value (Exposure Compensation: 286)/
Manual Exposure Assist (Manual Exposure Assist: 281)
(14) ISO sensitivity (ISO Sensitivity: 292)
(15) Card slot (Inserting Cards (Optional): 51)
(16) Number of pictures that can be taken (Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken
and Video Recording Time with Cards: 728)/
Number of pictures that can be taken continuously (Number of Pictures That
Can Be Taken Continuously: 212)
(17) Battery indication (Power Indications: 46)
•
Press [ ] to switch between display/hide of the level gauge.
Getting Started – Attaching a Shoulder Strap
37
Attaching a Shoulder Strap
Attach a shoulder strap to the camera with the following procedure to
prevent it from dropping.
1
2
3
Getting Started – Attaching a Shoulder Strap
38
•
Pull the shoulder strap and check that it will not come out.
•
Attach the opposite end of the shoulder strap with the same procedure.
•
Use the shoulder strap around your shoulder.
– Do not wrap the strap around your neck.
It may result in injury or accident.
•
Do not leave the shoulder strap where an infant can reach it.
– It may result in an accident by mistakenly wrapping around the neck.
4
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
39
Charging the Battery
≥ Battery Insertion: 40
≥ Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging: 42
≥ Using the Camera While Supplying It with Power (Supplying Power): 45
≥ Notifications Regarding Charging/Power Supply: 46
≥ [Power Save Mode]: 48
You can charge the battery in the camera body.
You can also turn on the camera and supply power from an electrical
outlet.
You can also use the Battery Charger (DMW-BTC15: optional).
• The battery that can be used with the camera is DMW-BLK22. (As of May
2024)
•
The battery is not charged at the time of purchase. Charge the battery before
use.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
40
Battery Insertion
•
Always use genuine Panasonic batteries (DMW-BLK22).
•
If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee the quality of this product.
•
Check that the lever (A) is holding the battery in place.
•
Check that the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF].
1
2
(A)
3
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
41
Removing the Battery
1 Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
2 Open the battery door.
3 Push the lever (A) in the direction of the arrow and then remove the battery.
•
Check that the card access lights are off before removing the battery. (Card
Access Indications: 52)
•
Ensure that no foreign objects are adhering to the inner side of the battery door.
•
Remove the battery after use.
(The battery will drain if left inserted in the camera for a long period of time.)
•
The battery becomes warm after use, during charging, and immediately after
charging.
The camera also becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.
•
Be careful when removing the battery as the battery will jump out.
(A)
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
42
Inserting a Battery into the Camera for Charging
(B) To the AC adaptor
1
Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
2
Insert the battery into the camera.
•
It is recommended to use the Panasonic AC Adaptor (DMW-AC11: optional)
or the supplied accessories of the Panasonic Battery Charger
(DMW-BTC15: optional) for charging.
•
You can charge with the camera body using a commercially available AC adaptor
and a USB connection cable.
*
Recommended specifications for the commercially available AC adaptor
–Supports 5 V/3 A (15 W) DC output
–USB Type-C terminal
*
Use a USB connection cable with 15 W output or better for charging.
•
You can also use an AC adaptor with 5 V/500 mA or better for charging.
However, charging time may be longer than with the recommended AC adaptor.
•
Operation is not guaranteed with all commercially available devices.
3
1
2
(C)
(B)
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
43
3
Connect the camera USB port and the AC adaptor using
the USB connection cable.
•
Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the
plug.
(Inserting these at an angle may cause deformation or malfunction.)
4
Connect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet.
•
The charging light (C) turns red and charging begins.
Charging Light Indications
Charging light (red)
On: Charging.
Off: Charging has completed.
Blinking: Charging error.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
44
Charging time: Approx. 240 min
•
Using either the camera body and the optional AC Adaptor (DMW-AC11) or the
camera body and the supplied accessories of the optional Battery Charger
(DMW-BTC15).
•
The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.
The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used.
The charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not
been used for a long time may be longer than normal.
•
You can also charge the battery by connecting a USB device (PC, etc.) and the
camera with the USB connection cable.
In that case, charging may take a while.
•
After charging, disconnect the connection to the power source.
•
While the charging light is blinking red, charging is not possible.
– The temperature of the battery or surroundings is either too high or too low.
Try charging at an ambient temperature between 10 °C and 30 °C (50 oF and
86 oF).
– The terminals of the battery are dirty.
Remove the battery and wipe off the dirt with a dry cloth.
•
Using charging methods other than those specified may result in fluid leakage,
overheating, combustion, rupturing, etc., and these may cause injury.
•
Even when the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF] thus turning the camera off, it
consumes power.
When the camera will not be used for a long time, remove the power plug from
the electrical outlet in order to save power.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
45
Using the Camera While Supplying It with Power
(Supplying Power)
When the battery is inserted into the camera for charging and the camera
is turned on, you can record while the camera is being supplied with power.
•
It is recommended to use the Panasonic AC Adaptor (DMW-AC11: optional) or
the supplied accessories of the Panasonic Battery Charger (DMW-BTC15:
optional) for supplying power.
•
You can supply power to the camera body using a commercially available AC
adaptor and USB connection cable.
*
Recommended specifications for the commercially available AC adaptor
–Supports 5 V/3 A (15 W) DC output
–USB Type-C terminal
*
Use a USB connection cable with 15 W output or better for supplying power.
•
Operation is not guaranteed with all commercially available devices.
•
[ ] is displayed in the screen while power is being supplied.
•
You can also supply power by using a USB connection cable to connect the
camera and a USB device (PC, etc.).
•
The battery cannot be charged while power is being supplied.
•
Turn off the camera before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor.
•
Remaining charge in the battery may decrease depending on usage conditions.
When the battery level is depleted, the camera will turn off.
•
Depending on the power supply capabilities of the connected device, it may not
be possible to supply power.
•
For information about the high temperature display (For information
about the high temperature display: 118)
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
46
Notifications Regarding Charging/Power Supply
Power Indications
Indication on monitor
(D) USB connection cable supplying power
(E) Battery indication
•
The battery level indicated on the screen is approximate.
The exact level varies depending on the environment and the operating conditions.
80 % or higher
60 % to 79 %
40 % to 59 %
20 % to 39 %
19 % or below
Blinking in red
Low battery
•
Charge or replace the battery.
(D) (E)
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
47
•
We recommend that genuine Panasonic batteries are used.
There is a possibility that the use of non-genuine batteries can cause
accidents or malfunctions that may lead to fire or explosion.
Please be advised that we are not liable for any accident or failure resulting
from the use of non-genuine batteries.
•
Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the power
plug.
Otherwise, a fire and/or electric shocks may be caused by short-circuiting or the
resulting heat generated.
•
Do not use USB extension cables or USB conversion adaptors.
•
The battery can be charged even when it still has some charge left, but it is not
recommended that the battery charge be frequently topped up while the battery
is fully charged.
•
If there is a power outage or other problem with the electrical outlet, then
charging may not complete successfully.
Reconnect the power plug.
•
Do not connect to keyboard or printer USB ports, or to USB hubs.
•
If the connected PC enters sleep status, then charging/power supply may stop.
•
If the battery indication does not go to [ ] even when charging is complete,
the battery may be deteriorating.
Try not to use that battery.
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
48
[Power Save Mode]
This is a function to automatically turn the camera to sleep (power save)
status or turn off the monitor if no operation is performed for a set time.
Reduces battery consumption.
[] [] Select [Power Save Mode]
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
49
•
To recover from [Sleep Mode] or [Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)], perform one of the following
operations:
– Press the shutter button halfway.
– Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF] and then [ON] again.
•
To recover from [Auto Monitor Off], press any button.
[Sleep Mode]
Sets the amount of time until the camera is put to sleep.
•
The power consumption of the camera may increase when
[Sleep Mode] is set to [OFF].
[Sleep
Mode(Wi-Fi)]
Sets the camera to sleep 15 minutes after being disconnected
from Wi-Fi.
•
The power consumption of the camera may increase when
[Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] is set to [OFF].
[Auto Monitor
Off]
Sets the amount of time it takes for the monitor to turn off.
(The camera is not turned off.)
Getting Started – Charging the Battery
50
•
[Power Save Mode] is not available in the following cases:
– While connected to a PC
– During video recording/video playback
– During a [Time Lapse Shot]
– When recording with [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)
– When recording with [Focus Transition]
– During a [Slide Show]
– During HDMI output for recording
Getting Started – Inserting Cards (Optional)
52
Card Access Indications
The card access light turns on while the card is being accessed.
•
You can set the folder and file name where to save the images:
([Folder / File Settings]: 556)
•
The card may be warm just after the camera has been used.
•
Do not perform the following operations during access.
The camera may operate incorrectly or the card and recorded images may
be damaged.
– Turn off the camera.
– Remove the battery or card or disconnect the power plug.
– Subject the camera to vibration, impacts, or static electricity.
Getting Started – Inserting Cards (Optional)
53
Removing a Card
1 Open the card door.
2 Push the card until it clicks and then pull the card out straight.
•
Check that the card access lights are off before removing the card.
Getting Started – Attaching a Lens
54
Attaching a Lens
≥ How to Extend/Retract the Lens [When the Interchangeable Lens
(S-R1840) Is Attached]: 56
≥ Removing a Lens: 57
≥ Attaching a Lens Hood: 58
You can attach the Leica Camera AG L-Mount standard lens to this
camera.
For information about the lens that can be used (Lenses That Can Be
Used: 22)
•
Check that the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF].
•
Change the lens in a location where there is not a lot of dirt and dust.
If dirt or dust gets on the lens (Dirt on the Image Sensor: 714)
•
Change the lens while the lens cap is attached.
Getting Started – Attaching a Lens
55
•
When removing the body cap, rotate it while pressing the lens release button (A).
(B) Lens fitting marks
•
Attach by rotating the lens until it clicks.
1
2
(A)
(B)
3
Getting Started – Attaching a Lens
56
How to Extend/Retract the Lens [When the
Interchangeable Lens (S-R1840) Is Attached]
(a) Lens retracted
(b) Ready for recording
How to Extend the Lens
Rotate the zoom ring in the direction of arrow (1) from position (A)
(the lens is retracted) to position (B) (18 mm to 40 mm) to extend the
lens.
•
When the lens barrel is retracted, images cannot be recorded.
How to Retract the Lens
Rotate the zoom ring in the direction of arrow (2) from position (B)
(18 mm to 40 mm) to position (A) to retract the lens.
•
At the 18 mm position, you will feel a click. Keep rotating to the (A) position.
•
When you are not recording images, we recommend that you retract the lens.
(1)
(A)
(a) (b)
(2)
(B)
Getting Started – Attaching a Lens
57
Removing a Lens
•
While pressing the lens release button (A), rotate the lens in the direction of the
arrow until it stops and then remove it.
•
When you have attached a lens that does not have a communication function
with this camera, after turning on the camera, a message asking for confirmation
of the lens information is displayed. You can register the focal length for the lens
when you select [Yes]. You can also select from amongst already registered lens
information. ([Lens Information]: 264)
•
You can change the settings so that the confirmation message is not displayed:
([Lens Info. Confirmation]: 553)
•
Insert the lens straight in.
Inserting this at an angle to attach it may damage the camera lens mount.
•
After removing the lens, be sure to attach the body cap and the lens rear cap.
(A)
Getting Started – Attaching a Lens
58
Attaching a Lens Hood
For recording against strong backlight, a lens hood can reduce the
inclusion of unwanted light in images and drop in contrast resulting from
the irregular reflection of light that occurs within the lens.
It allows you take more beautiful pictures by cutting out excess light.
When attaching the lens hood (flower shape) supplied with the
interchangeable lens (S-R2060)
• Hold the lens hood by placing your fingers as shown in the figure.
• Do not hold the lens hood in such a way that it will become bent.
Getting Started – Attaching a Lens
59
1
Align mark (C) ( ) on the lens hood with the mark on
the tip of the lens.
2
Rotate the lens hood in the direction of the arrow to
align mark (D) ( ) on the lens hood with the mark on the
tip of the lens.
≥Attach the lens hood by rotating it until it clicks.
(C)
(D)
Getting Started – Attaching a Lens
60
Removing the Lens Hood (S-R2060)
While pressing the lens hood button (E), rotate the lens hood in the
direction of the arrow and then remove it.
•
The lens hood can be attached in the reverse direction when carrying the
camera.
Example) S-R2060
1 Align mark (D) ( ) on the lens hood with the mark on the tip of the lens.
2 Attach the lens hood by rotating it in the direction of the arrow until it clicks.
(E)
(D)
Getting Started – Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle
61
Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle
At the time of purchase, the monitor is stowed in the camera body.
180°
1
90°
180°
2
3
Getting Started – Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle
62
•
The angles of adjustment are guides only.
•
Do not apply an excessive force to the monitor. This may cause damage or
malfunction.
•
When not using the camera, close the monitor with the monitor surface facing in.
•
You can set whether the screen flips or not depending on the facing or angle of
the monitor during recording:
([Monitor Display Settings]: 539)
Getting Started – Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)
63
Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the
First Time)
When you turn the camera on for the first time, a screen to set the time
zone and clock appears.
Be sure to set these settings before use to ensure images are recorded
with the correct date and time information.
1
Set the camera on/off switch to [ON].
≥If the language select screen is not displayed, proceed to Step
4
.
2
When [Please set the language] appears, press .
3
Set the language.
≥Press 34 to select the language and then press .
4
When [Please set the time zone] appears, press .
Getting Started – Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)
64
5
Set the time zone.
≥Press 21 to select the time zone and then press .
•
If you are using Daylight Savings [ ], press 3. (The time will move
forward by 1 hour.)
To return to the normal time, press 3 again.
(A) Time difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)
6
When [Please set the clock] appears, press .
(A)
Getting Started – Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)
65
7
Set the clock.
21: Select an item (year, month, day, hour, minute, or second).
34: Select a value.
To set the display order and time display format
≥To display the screen for setting the display order (B) and time
display format (C), select [Style] by pressing 21 and then press
.
(B) (C)
Getting Started – Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time)
66
8
Confirm your selection.
≥Press .
9
When [The clock setting has been completed.] appears,
press .
•
If the camera is used without setting the clock, it will be set to “0:00:00 1/1/2024”.
•
Clock settings are maintained for approx. 3 months using the built-in clock
battery even without the battery.
(Leave the fully-charged battery in the camera for approx. 24 hours to charge the
built-in battery.)
•
[Time Zone] and [Clock Set] can be changed from the menu:
([Time Zone]: 568, [Clock Set]: 568)
67
Basic Operations
This chapter describes basic camera operations and the Intelligent Auto
mode which helps you start recording immediately.
≥ How to Hold the Camera: 68
≥ Selecting the Recording Mode: 70
≥ Camera Setting Operations: 71
≥ Monitor Display Settings: 77
≥ Quick Menu: 80
≥ Control Panel: 82
≥ Menu Operation Methods: 84
≥ Entering Characters: 90
≥ Intelligent Auto Mode: 91
≥ Recording Using Touch Functions: 97
Basic Operations – How to Hold the Camera
68
How to Hold the Camera
To minimize camera shake, hold the camera so that it will not move during
recording.
Hold the camera with both hands, keep your arms still at your
side, and stand with your feet shoulder width apart.
≥ Hold the camera firmly by wrapping your right hand around the camera
grip.
≥ Support the lens from below with your left hand.
•
Do not cover the AF assist light (A) or microphone (B) with your fingers or other
objects.
(A)
(B)
Basic Operations – How to Hold the Camera
69
Vertical Orientation Detection Function
This function detects when pictures were recorded with the camera held
vertically orientated.
With the default settings, pictures are automatically played back vertically
oriented.
•
If you set [Rotate Disp.] to [OFF], pictures will be played back without being rotated.
([Rotate Disp.]: 480)
•
When the camera is tilted significantly up or down, the vertical orientation
detection function may not work correctly.
•
You can set whether or not to record the camera’s vertical orientation information
during video recording:
([Vertical Position Info (Video)]: 553)
Basic Operations – Selecting the Recording Mode
70
Selecting the Recording Mode
Rotate the mode dial to select the recording mode.
[iA]
Intelligent Auto mode (Intelligent Auto Mode: 91)
[P]
Program AE mode (Program AE Mode: 269)
[A]
Aperture-Priority AE mode (Aperture-Priority AE Mode: 273)
[S]
Shutter-Priority AE mode (Shutter-Priority AE Mode: 276)
[M]
Manual Exposure mode (Manual Exposure Mode: 279)
[]
Creative Video mode (Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/
S&Q): 341)
[S&Q]
Slow & Quick mode (Slow & Quick Video: 393)
[C1]/[C2]/[C3]
Custom mode (Custom Mode: 512)
Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations
71
Camera Setting Operations
When changing the camera settings, operate the camera using the
following operation parts.
(A) Front dial ( ) (Front Dial: 72)
(B) Control dial ( ) (Control Dial: 72)
(C) Cursor buttons (3421) (Cursor Buttons: 73)
(D) [MENU/SET] button ( ) ([MENU/SET] Button: 73)
(E) Touch screen (Touch Screen: 74)
(E) (D) (C) (B)
(A)
Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations
72
Front Dial
Rotate:
Selects an item or numeric value.
Control Dial
Rotate:
Selects an item or numeric value.
Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations
73
Cursor Buttons
Press:
Selects an item or numeric value.
[MENU/SET] Button
Press:
Confirms a setting.
•
Displays the menu during recording and playback.
Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations
74
Touch Screen
Operations can be performed by touching the icons, slide bars, menus,
and other items displayed on the screen.
Touch
Operation of touching and then lifting your finger from the touch screen.
Drag
Operation of moving a finger while it touches the touch screen.
Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations
75
Pinch (widen/narrow)
Operations of widening the distance between two fingers (pinch out) and
narrowing the distance between two fingers (pinch in) while they are
touching the touch screen.
•
If you will use a commercially available monitor protection sheet, observe the
precautions for the sheet.
(Visibility and operability may be impaired depending on the type of monitor
protection sheet.)
•
Touch operations can be disabled:
([Touch Settings]: 530)
Basic Operations – Camera Setting Operations
76
Touch Restricted Area
At the time of purchase, there is a restricted area on the touch screen that
does not accept some touch operations. This is to help prevent erroneous
operation of the camera while recording.
• The restriction can be lifted by setting [Touch Screen] in the [Touch
Settings] menu to [ON].([Touch Settings]: 530)
• Even within the touch restricted area, you will still be able to perform
operations with items such as touch icons in the Touch Tab.
(F) Touch restricted area (approximate)
(F)
Basic Operations – Monitor Display Settings
77
Monitor Display Settings
≥ Switching the Display Information: 77
Switching the Display Information
Press [DISP.].
≥ The display information is switched.
Recording Screen
(A) With information
(B) Without information
(C) Control panel
(D) Turned off (black)
999
ISO
AUTO
±
0
AFSAFS
L
FINE
999
AWB
Fn
0
0
AFS FINE
3:2
ISO
AUTO
OFF
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Basic Operations – Monitor Display Settings
78
•
Press [ ] to switch between display/hide of the level gauge.
This can also be set by using [Level Gauge]. ([Level Gauge]: 544)
•
Control panel operation (Control Panel: 82)
•
You can hide the control panel and black screen:
([Show/Hide Monitor Layout]: 545)
•
The display can be changed so that live view and display information do not
overlap:
([Monitor Display Settings]: 539)
•
You can display the outline for the live view:
([Framing Outline]: 545)
Basic Operations – Monitor Display Settings
79
Playback Screen
(E) With information
(F) Detailed information display
•
Pressing 34 switches the display information. (Detailed information display: 692)
(G) Without information
(H) Without blinking highlights
•
This is a screen without blinking highlights display that is shown when [Blinking
Highlights] of the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]) is set to [ON].
In other than this screen, overexposed parts of the screen will blink. ([Blinking
Highlights]: 541)
2024.12.1 10:00 100-0001 1/999
ISO
100
F
3.560
±
0
L
FINE
100
100-0001
ISO
0
F3.5
60
2024.12. 1 10:00
s
RGB
1/5
FINE
AFS
STD.
L
3:2
AWB
(E) (F) (G) (H)
Basic Operations – Quick Menu
80
Quick Menu
This menu enables you to quickly set functions that are frequently used
during recording without calling up the menu screen. You can also change
the Quick menu display method and the items to display.
1
Display the Quick menu.
≥Press [Q].
2
Select a menu item.
≥Rotate .
≥Selection is also possible by touching a menu item.
00 0
AWB
3:2
0 0
0
AUTO
ISO
Basic Operations – Quick Menu
81
3
Select a setting item.
≥Rotate .
≥Selection is also possible by touching a setting item.
4
Close the Quick menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥You can also close the menu by pressing [Q].
•
Some items cannot be set depending on the recording mode or camera settings.
•
The Quick menu can be customized:
(Quick Menu Customization: 505)
3:2
Basic Operations – Control Panel
82
Control Panel
This screen allows you to view the current recording settings on the
monitor. You can also touch the screen to change the settings.
In the [ ] mode (Creative Video mode)/[S&Q] mode (Slow & Quick
mode), the display changes to one especially for video.
•
For information about the screen (Control Panel: 684, Control Panel (Creative
Video Mode/Slow & Quick Mode): 687)
1
Display the control panel.
≥Press [DISP.] several times.
2
Touch the items.
Example) Changing the AF mode
999
AWB
Fn
ISO
AUTO
0
0
AFS
FINE
3:2
Basic Operations – Control Panel
83
3
Change the setting.
≥Touch the setting item.
•
Refer to the pages explaining each item for information on how to change the
settings.
4
Touch [Set].
•
Some items cannot be set depending on the recording mode or camera settings.
Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods
84
Menu Operation Methods
≥ [Reset]: 89
In this camera, the menu is used for setting a wide variety of functions and
performing camera customizations.
Menu operations can be performed using the cursors, dial, or by touch.
Configuration and operation parts of the menu
The menu can be operated by pressing 21 to move between menu screens.
Use the operation parts indicated below to operate the main tab, the sub tab, the page
tab, and menu items without moving to the corresponding menu levels.
•
You can also operate by touching the icons, menu items, and setting items.
(A) Main tab ([Q] button)
(B) Sub tab ( )
(C) Menu item
(D) Page tab ( )
(E) Setting item
(C)
(D)
(E)
(A)
(B)
Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods
85
1
Display the menu.
≥Press .
2
Select a main tab.
≥Press 34 to select a main tab and then press 1.
≥You can also perform the same operation by pressing [Q] to select
the main tab and then pressing .
Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods
86
3
Select a sub tab.
≥Press 34 to select a sub tab and then press 1.
≥You can also perform the same operation by rotating to select
the sub tab and then pressing .
•
If there are page tabs (D), then after the page tabs have finished switching,
the next sub tab is switched to.
4
Select a menu item.
≥Press 34 to select a menu item and then press 1.
≥You can also perform the same operation by rotating to select
the menu item and then pressing .
(D)
Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods
87
5
Select a setting item and then confirm your selection.
≥Press 34 to select a setting item and then press .
≥You can also perform the same operation by rotating to select
the setting item and then pressing .
6
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥You can also close the menu by pressing [ ] several times.
Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods
88
Displaying Descriptions About Menu Items and Settings
If you press [DISP.] while a menu item or setting item is selected, a
description about the item is displayed on the screen.
Grayed Out Menu Items
Menu items that cannot be set are displayed grayed out.
If you press while a grayed out menu item is selected, the reason why
it cannot be set is displayed.
•
The reason why a menu item cannot be set may not be displayed depending on the
menu item.
Basic Operations – Menu Operation Methods
89
[Reset]
Return each of the following settings to the default setting:
•
Recording settings
•
Network settings (settings of [Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth])
•
Setup and custom settings (other than [Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth])
[] [] Select [Reset]
•
If the setup and custom settings are reset, the [Playback] menu is also reset.
•
The [LUT Library] is returned to the default settings when setup and custom
settings are reset. Registered LUTs are deleted.
•
If the setup and custom settings are reset, [Lens Information] in [Image Stabilizer]
in the [Photo] ([Others (Photo)]) menu/[Video] ([Others (Video)]) menu is also
returned to the default setting.
•
The folder numbers and clock settings are not reset.
•
List of default settings and settings that can be reset (List of Default Settings/
Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 736)
Basic Operations – Entering Characters
90
Entering Characters
Follow the steps below when the character entry screen is displayed.
1
Enter characters.
≥Press 3421 to select characters and then press until the
character to enter is displayed. (Repeat this)
•
To repeatedly enter the same character, rotate or to the right to
move the entry position cursor.
•
If you select an item and press , you can perform the following
operations:
– [ ]: Change the character type to [A] (upper case characters), [a] (lower
case characters), [1] (numbers), and [&] (special characters)
–[] ]: Enter a blank
– [Delete]: Delete a character
– [ ]: Move the entry position cursor to the left
– [ ]: Move the entry position cursor to the right
•
When entering a password, (A) shows the number of characters you have
entered and the number of characters you can enter.
2
Complete entering.
≥Select [Set] and then press .
(A)
Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode
91
Intelligent Auto Mode
The [iA] mode (Intelligent Auto mode) can record images using settings
automatically selected by the camera.
The camera detects the scene to set the optimal recording settings
automatically to match the subject and recording conditions.
1
Set the recording mode to [iA].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode
92
2
Aim the camera at the subject.
≥When the camera detects the scene, the recording mode icon
changes.
(Automatic Scene Detection)
3
Adjust the focus.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥Once the subject is in focus, the focus icon lights.
(When the subject is not in focus, the indication blinks.)
•
[ ] of the AF mode works and the AF area is displayed aligned to any
humans.
Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode
93
4
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully to take pictures.
≥Press the video rec. button to record videos.
•
Backlight compensation operates automatically to prevent subjects from
appearing dark when there is a backlight.
Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode
94
Types of Automatic Scene Detection
*1 Detected when [Detecting Subject] ([Type of Subject]) in the [Photo] ([Focus])
menu is set to [HUMAN].
*2 Detected when [Detecting Subject] ([Type of Subject]) in the [Photo] ([Focus])
menu is set to [ANIMAL], [CAR] or [MOTORCYCLE].
Taking pictures Recording video
i-Portrait
*1
i-Scenery
i-Macro
i-Night Scenery
i-Food
i-Sunset
i-Low Light
*2
•
If none of the scenes are applicable, recording is with [ ] (standard setting).
•
Different scene types may be selected for the same subject depending on the
recording conditions.
•
When [Detecting Subject] ([Type of Subject]) is [ANIMAL], some subjects that are
not animals may be detected as animals.
Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode
95
AF Mode
Changing the AF mode.
•
Each press of [ ] (2) changes the AF mode.
•
The mode can also be changed by touching the screen.
•
[AF Detection Setting] is fixed to [ON].
•
The [Detecting Subject] setting is maintained for any recording mode other than [iA]
mode. (Automatic Detection: 162)
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] ([Full Area AF])
Detects subjects for recording and focuses.
•
You can switch the subject to be focused by touching one of the white AF areas.
Basic Operations – Intelligent Auto Mode
96
[ ] ([Tracking])
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], the AF area follows the movement of the
subject, maintaining focusing.
Aim the AF area over the subject and then press and hold the shutter button
halfway.
•
The camera will track the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway or fully.
•
For information about AF modes (Automatic Detection: 162, [Tracking]: 167)
Basic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions
97
Recording Using Touch Functions
≥ Touch AF/Touch Shutter: 97
≥ Touch AE: 100
Touch AF/Touch Shutter
Touch functions allow you to focus on the point that you touch, release the
shutter, etc.
•
With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed.
Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
([Touch Settings]: 530)
Basic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions
98
1
Touch [ ].
2
Touch the icon.
≥The icon switches each time you touch it.
(Touch AF)
Focus on the touched position.
(Touch Shutter)
Record with focus on the touched position.
(OFF)
3
(When set to anything other than OFF) Touch the
subject.
AF
Basic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions
99
•
When the Touch Shutter fails, the AF area first turns red and then disappears.
•
For information about operations to move the AF area (AF Area Operations:
177)
•
It is also possible to optimize the focus and brightness on the touched position:
(Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position ([AF+AE]): 181)
Basic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions
100
Touch AE
This function adjusts the brightness according to a touched position.
When a subject’s face appears dark, you can make the screen brighter to
match the face.
1
Touch [ ].
2
Touch [ ].
≥The Touch AE settings screen appears.
•
With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed.
Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
([Touch Settings]: 530)
AE
AF
Basic Operations – Recording Using Touch Functions
101
3
Touch the subject to which you wish to adjust the
brightness.
•
To return the position to which to adjust the brightness to the center, touch
[Reset].
4
Touch [Set].
How to Disable Touch AE
Touch [ ].
•
When the following function is being used, Touch AE is not available:
– [Live Cropping]
•
You can also adjust both the focus and brightness to those of the position you
touch. (At this time, Touch AE is not available):
(Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position ([AF+AE]): 181)
ュリヴヱハ
6HW
5HVHW
Taking Pictures – Basic Picture Operations
104
2
Adjust the focus.
≥Press the shutter button halfway (press it gently).
≥The aperture value (A) and shutter speed (B) are displayed.
(When the correct exposure cannot be obtained, the indications
blink in red.)
≥Once the subject is in focus, the focus icon (C) lights.
(When the subject is not in focus, the indication blinks.)
•
You can also perform the same operation by pressing [AF ON].
(C)
F3.5
F3.5
F3.560
60
60
(A)(B)
Taking Pictures – Basic Picture Operations
105
3
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully (press it further).
•
Recorded pictures can be displayed automatically by setting [Auto Review] of the
[Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]) menu. You can also change the picture
display duration to your preferred setting. ([Auto Review]: 535)
•
With the default settings, you cannot take a picture until the subject is
brought into focus.
If you set [Focus/Shutter Priority] in the [Custom] ([Focus/Shutter]) menu
to [BALANCE] or [RELEASE], you will be able to take a picture even when
the subject is not in focus. ([Focus/Shutter Priority]: 524)
Taking Pictures – [Aspect Ratio]
106
[Aspect Ratio]
You can select the image aspect ratio.
[] [] Select [Aspect Ratio]
[4:3]
Aspect ratio of a 4:3 monitor
[3:2]
Aspect ratio of a standard film camera
[16:9]
Aspect ratio of a 16:9 TV
[1:1]
Square aspect ratio
[65:24]
65:24 panoramic aspect ratio
[2:1]
2:1 panoramic aspect ratio
Taking Pictures – [Aspect Ratio]
107
•
[65:24] and [2:1] aspect ratios are not available when using the following
functions:
– [iA] mode
– Taking burst pictures
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
– High Resolution Mode
– [Filter Settings]
•
When using APS-C lenses, [65:24] and [2:1] are not available.
•
A frame for trimming (cropping) can be displayed on the recording screen:
([Frame Marker]: 388)
Taking Pictures – [Picture Size]
108
[Picture Size]
Sets the picture’s image size. The image size varies depending on the
[Aspect Ratio] or the lens used.
When an APS-C lens is used, the image area switches to the one for
APS-C, thereby narrowing the angle of view.
[] [] Select [Picture Size]
Taking Pictures – [Picture Size]
109
•
When [Hybrid Zoom(Photo)] is set, [Hy] is displayed on the image size.
•
When [Crop Zoom(Photo)] is set, [Cr] is displayed on the image size.
[Aspect
Ratio]
[Picture Size]
When using full-frame lenses When using APS-C lenses
[4:3]
[L] (21.5M) 5328×4000 [L] (9.5M) 3536×2656
[M] (10.5M) 3792×2848 [M] (5M) 2560×1920
[S] (5.5M) 2688×2016 [S] (2.5M) 1840×1376
[XS] (2M) 1712×1280 [XS] (2M) 1712×1280
[3:2]
[L] (24M) 6000×4000 [L] (10.5M) 3984×2656
[M] (12M) 4272×2848 [M] (5.5M) 2880×1920
[S] (6M) 3024×2016 [S] (3M) 2064×1376
[XS] (2.5M) 1920×1280 [XS] (2.5M) 1920×1280
[16:9]
[L] (20M) 6000×3368 [L] (9M) 3984×2240
[M] (10M) 4272×2400 [M] (4.5M) 2880×1624
[S] (5M) 3024×1704 [S] (2.5M) 2064×1160
[XS] (2M) 1920×1080 [XS] (2M) 1920×1080
[1:1]
[L] (16M) 4000×4000 [L] (7M) 2656×2656
[M] (8M) 2848×2848 [M] (3.5M) 1920×1920
[S] (4M) 2016×2016 [S] (2M) 1376×1376
[XS] (1.5M) 1280×1280 [XS] (1.5M) 1280×1280
[65:24] [L] (13M) 6000×2208
[2:1] [L] (18M) 6000×3000
•
When the following functions are being used, [Picture Size] is not available:
– [RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– High Resolution mode
Taking Pictures – [Picture Quality]
110
[Picture Quality]
Set the compression rate used for storing pictures.
[] [] Select [Picture Quality]
[FINE]
JPEG images that give priority to image quality.
File format: JPEG
[STD.]
JPEG images of standard image quality.
This is useful for increasing the number of recordable pictures without changing the
picture size.
File format: JPEG
[RAW+FINE]/[RAW+STD.]
This records RAW and JPEG images ([FINE] or [STD.]) simultaneously.
File format: RAW+JPEG
[RAW]
This records RAW images.
File format: RAW
Taking Pictures – [Picture Quality]
111
Note on RAW
RAW format refers to a data format of images that have not been processed on the
camera.
Playback and editing of RAW images require the camera or the dedicated
software.
The color depth of RAW images recorded with this camera is 12 bits.
•
You can process RAW images on the camera. ([RAW Processing]: 465)
•
Use software (“SILKYPIX Developer Studio” by Ichikawa Soft Laboratory) to
process and edit RAW files on a PC. (SILKYPIX Developer Studio SE: 666)
•
RAW images are always recorded in the [L] size of the [3:2] aspect ratio.
•
When you delete an image recorded with [RAW+FINE] or [RAW+STD.] on the
camera, both the RAW and JPEG images will be deleted simultaneously.
•
When the following function is being used, [Picture Quality] is not available:
– High Resolution mode
•
You can assign the function that records a RAW image and a JPEG image
simultaneously once only to an Fn button:
([1 Shot RAW+JPG]: 493)
•
Selects a Color Space setting from [sRGB] or [AdobeRGB]:
([Color Space]: 522)
112
Recording Videos
These are the basic operations and settings for recording videos.
•
Please also refer to the following chapters for more detailed information about
recording videos:
– Video Settings: 340
– Special Video Recording: 392
– HDMI Output (Video): 434
≥ Basic Video Operations: 113
≥ [System Frequency]: 120
≥ [Rec. File Format]: 122
≥ [Rec Quality]: 123
≥ [Image Area of Video]: 136
Recording Videos – Basic Video Operations
113
Basic Video Operations
It is possible to record video with a maximum resolution of 6K (5952×3968)
on this camera.
It also supports switching of the system frequency and the [MP4(Lite)]/
[MP4]/[MOV] recording file formats.
[ ] mode (Creative Video mode) and [S&Q] mode (Slow & Quick mode)
are recording modes specifically for video.
In the [S&Q] mode, you can record smooth slow motion video and quick
motion video by changing the frame rate.
1
Select the recording mode.
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
Recording Videos – Basic Video Operations
114
2
Start recording.
≥Press the video rec. button (A).
•
Release the video rec. button right after you press it.
3
Stop recording.
≥Press the video rec. button (A) again.
(A)
Recording Videos – Basic Video Operations
115
Screen Displays While Video Recording
The live view angle of view changes to the angle of view for video
recording, and video recording time (B) and elapsed recording time (C) are
displayed.
•
“h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second.
•
The recording state indication (D) and card access indication (E) turn red while
videos are being recorded.
•
If maintaining focus on the subject is difficult during video recording with AF,
press the shutter button halfway to re-adjust the focus.
24
m
59
s
24
m
59
s
24
m
59
s
3
s
3
s
3
s
(D) (C) (E) (B)
Recording Videos – Basic Video Operations
116
Exposure Control While Video Recording
Videos will be recorded using the aperture value, shutter speed, ISO
sensitivity, and Dual Native ISO settings below.
Recording
mode
Aperture value/shutter speed/ISO sensitivity/Dual Native
ISO setting
[iA]
The camera automatically makes the settings to suit the scene.
(Types of Automatic Scene Detection: 94)
[P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
The settings vary depending on the [Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]
in the [Custom] ([Image Quality]) menu. The default setting is
[ON]. ([Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]: 522)
[ON]: Records with values set automatically by the camera.
[OFF]: Records with the values set in the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.
[]/[S&Q]Records with manually set values.
Recording Videos – Basic Video Operations
117
Size Interval for Dividing Files
A new file will be created to continue recording if the file size exceeds the
following conditions.
(A) Using an SDXC memory card
(B) Using an SDHC memory card
[Rec. File
Format]
[Rec
Quality]
Card
used
File division
File size
[MP4(Lite)]/
[MP4]
[FHD]
(A)
4GB
(B)
[4K]
(A) 96 GB
(B) 4GB
[MOV] All
(A) 192 GB
(B) 4GB
Recording Videos – Basic Video Operations
118
•
If an operation such as a zoom or button operation is performed during video
recording, that operation sound may be recorded.
•
The lens operation sound (AF and image stabilizer) may be recorded to video.
•
If the operation sound of pressing the video rec. button to end recording bothers
you, try the following:
– Record the video about 3 seconds longer, and then divide the last part of the
video using [Video Divide] in the [Playback] ([Edit Image]) menu.
•
Depending on the type of card, the card access indication may appear for a while
after video recording. This is not a malfunction.
•
Even when playback is performed on a supported device, situations may occur
where image or sound quality is poor, recording information is not displayed
correctly, or playback is not possible, for example.
If you experience any of these, play them back on the camera.
•
Video recording is not possible while you are using the following functions:
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
•
For information about the high temperature display
When the temperature of the camera rises, [ ] appears blinking on the screen.
If you continue to use the camera, a message indicating that the camera cannot
be used is displayed on the screen and some functions, such as recording and
HDMI output, will be stopped. Wait for the camera to cool down and for the
message indicating that the camera can be used again. When the message
indicating that it can be used again is displayed, turn the camera off then on
again.
Recording Videos – Basic Video Operations
119
•
You can switch the recording screen display to suit video recording just as with
the [ ] mode:
([Video-Priority Display]: 549)
•
You can display a red frame on the recording screen that indicates that video is
being recorded:
([Red REC Frame Indicator]: 549)
Recording Videos – [System Frequency]
120
[System Frequency]
This changes the system frequency of videos that are recorded and played
back with the camera.
The default setting is for the system frequency to be set to the TV
broadcast system for the region where the camera was purchased.
[] [] Select [System Frequency]
[59.94Hz (NTSC)]
System frequency for regions using the NTSC broadcasting system
[50.00Hz (PAL)]
System frequency for regions using the PAL broadcasting system
[24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
System frequency for producing cinema film
Recording Videos – [System Frequency]
121
•
After changing the setting, turn the camera off and on.
•
If you record using a system frequency that differs from the broadcasting system
of your region, it may not be possible for you to properly play back videos on your
TV.
We recommend using the setting as it was at the time of purchase if you are
unsure about broadcasting systems or if you will not be involved in producing
cinema film.
•
After changing the setting, it is recommended to insert another card and format it
with this camera.
– Make the [System Frequency] setting the same for when you are recording and
playing back.
Recording Videos – [Rec. File Format]
122
[Rec. File Format]
Sets the recording file format of videos to be recorded.
[] [] Select [Rec. File Format]
[MP4(Lite)]
This MP4 file format is suitable for editing with smartphone apps.
[MP4]
This file format is suitable for playback on PCs.
[MOV]
This file format is suitable for image editing.
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
123
[Rec Quality]
Sets the image quality of videos to be recorded.
The image qualities you can select depend on the recording mode,
[System Frequency], and [Rec. File Format] settings.
The [Image Area of Video] setting items you can select depend on the [Rec
Quality] settings.
[Rec Quality] settings can also be made using [Filtering] ([Filtering]: 133)
to display only items that meet your conditions and [add to list] ([add to
list]: 134) to register recording qualities you use often.
•
The above shows some of the recording qualities available.
C4K (17:9)/APS-C
4K, FHD (16:9)/APS-C
3.3K(4:3)/APS-C
C4K30p/25p/24p (17:9)/Full
5.9K (16:9)/Full
6K, 3.8K(3:2)/Full
4K30p/25p/24p, FHD (16:9)/Full
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
125
[Rec. File Format]: [MP4(Lite)]
•
YUV, Bit value, Image compression: 4:2:0, 10 bit, Long GOP
•
Audio format: AAC (2ch)
(A) Recording frame rate
(B) Bit rate (Mbps)
(C) Video compression format (HEVC: H.265/HEVC)
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[Rec Quality]
[Image Area of Video]
Resolution
Aspect
ratio
(A) (B) (C)
FULL APS-C
[3.8K/10bit/50M/30p]
3840×2560
3:2 29.97p 50 HEVC
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
[Image Area of Video]
Resolution
Aspect
ratio
(A) (B) (C)
FULL APS-C
[3.8K/10bit/50M/25p]
3840×2560
3:2 25.00p 50 HEVC
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
126
[Rec. File Format]: [MP4]
•
YUV, Bit value, Image compression:
– [10bit] recording quality: 4:2:0, 10 bit, Long GOP
– [8bit] recording quality: 4:2:0, 8 bit, Long GOP
•
Audio format: AAC (2ch)
(A) Recording frame rate
(B) Bit rate (Mbps)
(C) Video compression format (HEVC: H.265/HEVC, AVC: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC)
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[Rec Quality]
[Image Area of Video]
Resolution
Aspect
ratio
(A) (B) (C)
FULL APS-C
[4K/10bit/100M/60p]
3840×2160
16:9 59.94p 100 HEVC
[4K/10bit/72M/30p]
3840×2160
16:9 29.97p 72 HEVC
[4K/8bit/100M/30p]
3840×2160
16:9 29.97p 100 AVC
[4K/10bit/72M/24p]
3840×2160
16:9 23.98p 72 HEVC
[4K/8bit/100M/24p]
3840×2160
16:9 23.98p 100 AVC
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p]
1920×1080
16:9 59.94p 28 AVC
[FHD/8bit/20M/30p]
1920×1080
16:9 29.97p 20 AVC
[FHD/8bit/24M/24p]
1920×1080
16:9 23.98p 24 AVC
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
[Image Area of Video]
Resolution
Aspect
ratio
(A) (B) (C)
FULL APS-C
[4K/10bit/100M/50p]
3840×2160
16:9 50.00p 100 HEVC
[4K/10bit/72M/25p]
3840×2160
16:9 25.00p 72 HEVC
[4K/8bit/100M/25p]
3840×2160
16:9 25.00p 100 AVC
[FHD/8bit/28M/50p]
1920×1080
16:9 50.00p 28 AVC
[FHD/8bit/20M/25p]
1920×1080
16:9 25.00p 20 AVC
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
127
[Rec. File Format]: [MOV]
•
YUV, Bit value, Image compression:
– [422/10-L] recording quality: 4:2:2, 10 bit, Long GOP
– [420/10-L] recording quality: 4:2:0, 10 bit, Long GOP
•
Audio format: LPCM (2ch)
: Only available in Creative Video mode.
(A) Recording frame rate
(B) Bit rate (Mbps)
(C) Video compression format (HEVC: H.265/HEVC, AVC: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC)
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[Rec Quality]
[Image Area of
Video]
Resolution
Aspect
ratio
(A) (B) (C)
FULL
APS-C
[6K/30p/420/10-L]
5952×3968
3:2 29.97p 200 HEVC
[6K/24p/420/10-L]
5952×3968
3:2 23.98p 200 HEVC
[6K/30p/420/10-L]
5952×3136
17:9 29.97p 200 HEVC
[6K/24p/420/10-L]
5952×3136
17:9 23.98p 200 HEVC
[5.9K/30p/420/10-L]
5888×3312
16:9 29.97p 200 HEVC
[5.9K/24p/420/10-L]
5888×3312
16:9 23.98p 200 HEVC
[3.3K/48p/422/10-L]
3328×2496
4:3 47.95p 200 AVC
[3.3K/48p/420/10-L]
3328×2496
4:3 47.95p 200 HEVC
[3.3K/30p/422/10-L]
3328×2496
4:3 29.97p 150 AVC
[3.3K/30p/420/10-L]
3328×2496
4:3 29.97p 150 HEVC
[3.3K/24p/422/10-L]
3328×2496
4:3 23.98p 150 AVC
[3.3K/24p/420/10-L]
3328×2496
4:3 23.98p 150 HEVC
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
128
[C4K/60p/422/10-L]
4096×2160
17:9 59.94p 200 AVC
[C4K/60p/420/10-L]
4096×2160
17:9 59.94p 200 HEVC
[C4K/48p/422/10-L]
4096×2160
17:9 47.95p 200 AVC
[C4K/48p/420/10-L]
4096×2160
17:9 47.95p 200 HEVC
[C4K/30p/422/10-L]
4096×2160
17:9 29.97p 150 AVC
[C4K/30p/420/10-L]
4096×2160
17:9 29.97p 150 HEVC
[C4K/24p/422/10-L]
4096×2160
17:9 23.98p 150 AVC
[C4K/24p/420/10-L]
4096×2160
17:9 23.98p 150 HEVC
[4K/60p/422/10-L]
3840×2160
16:9 59.94p 200 AVC
[4K/60p/420/10-L]
3840×2160
16:9 59.94p 200 HEVC
[4K/48p/422/10-L]
3840×2160
16:9 47.95p 200 AVC
[4K/48p/420/10-L]
3840×2160
16:9 47.95p 200 HEVC
[4K/30p/422/10-L]
3840×2160
16:9 29.97p 150 AVC
[4K/30p/420/10-L]
3840×2160
16:9 29.97p 150 HEVC
[4K/24p/422/10-L]
3840×2160
16:9 23.98p 150 AVC
[4K/24p/420/10-L]
3840×2160
16:9 23.98p 150 HEVC
[FHD/120p/422/10-L]
1920×1080
16:9
119.88p
150 AVC
[FHD/120p/420/10-L]
1920×1080
16:9
119.88p
150 HEVC
[FHD/60p/422/10-L]
1920×1080
16:9 59.94p 100 AVC
[FHD/60p/420/10-L]
1920×1080
16:9 59.94p 100 HEVC
[FHD/48p/422/10-L]
1920×1080
16:9 47.95p 100 AVC
[FHD/48p/420/10-L]
1920×1080
16:9 47.95p 100 HEVC
[FHD/30p/422/10-L]
1920×1080
16:9 29.97p 100 AVC
[FHD/30p/420/10-L]
1920×1080
16:9 29.97p 100 HEVC
[FHD/24p/422/10-L]
1920×1080
16:9 23.98p 100 AVC
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]
1920×1080
16:9 23.98p 100 HEVC
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
129
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
[Image Area of
Video]
Resolution
Aspect
ratio
(A) (B) (C)
FULL
APS-C
[6K/25p/420/10-L]
5952×3968
3:2 25.00p 200 HEVC
[6K/25p/420/10-L]
5952×3136
17:9 25.00p 200 HEVC
[5.9K/25p/420/10-L]
5888×3312
16:9 25.00p 200 HEVC
[3.3K/50p/422/10-L]
3328×2496
4:3 50.00p 200 AVC
[3.3K/50p/420/10-L]
3328×2496
4:3 50.00p 200 HEVC
[3.3K/25p/422/10-L]
3328×2496
4:3 25.00p 150 AVC
[3.3K/25p/420/10-L]
3328×2496
4:3 25.00p 150 HEVC
[C4K/50p/422/10-L]
4096×2160
17:9 50.00p 200 AVC
[C4K/50p/420/10-L]
4096×2160
17:9 50.00p 200 HEVC
[C4K/25p/422/10-L]
4096×2160
17:9 25.00p 150 AVC
[C4K/25p/420/10-L]
4096×2160
17:9 25.00p 150 HEVC
[4K/50p/422/10-L]
3840×2160
16:9 50.00p 200 AVC
[4K/50p/420/10-L]
3840×2160
16:9 50.00p 200 HEVC
[4K/25p/422/10-L]
3840×2160
16:9 25.00p 150 AVC
[4K/25p/420/10-L]
3840×2160
16:9 25.00p 150 HEVC
[FHD/100p/422/10-L]
1920×1080
16:9
100.00p
150 AVC
[FHD/100p/420/10-L]
1920×1080
16:9
100.00p
150 HEVC
[FHD/50p/422/10-L]
1920×1080
16:9 50.00p 100 AVC
[FHD/50p/420/10-L]
1920×1080
16:9 50.00p 100 HEVC
[FHD/25p/422/10-L]
1920×1080
16:9 25.00p 100 AVC
[FHD/25p/420/10-L]
1920×1080
16:9 25.00p 100 HEVC
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
130
[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
[Rec Quality]
[Image Area of
Video]
Resolution
Aspect
ratio
(A) (B) (C)
FULL
APS-C
[6K/24p/420/10-L]
5952×3968
3:2 24.00p 200 HEVC
[6K/24p/420/10-L]
5952×3136
17:9 24.00p 200 HEVC
[5.9K/24p/420/10-L]
5888×3312
16:9 24.00p 200 HEVC
[3.3K/48p/422/10-L]
3328×2496
4:3 48.00p 200 AVC
[3.3K/48p/420/10-L]
3328×2496
4:3 48.00p 200 HEVC
[3.3K/24p/422/10-L]
3328×2496
4:3 24.00p 150 AVC
[3.3K/24p/420/10-L]
3328×2496
4:3 24.00p 150 HEVC
[C4K/48p/422/10-L]
4096×2160
17:9 48.00p 200 AVC
[C4K/48p/420/10-L]
4096×2160
17:9 48.00p 200 HEVC
[C4K/24p/422/10-L]
4096×2160
17:9 24.00p 150 AVC
[C4K/24p/420/10-L]
4096×2160
17:9 24.00p 150 HEVC
[4K/48p/422/10-L]
3840×2160
16:9 48.00p 200 AVC
[4K/48p/420/10-L]
3840×2160
16:9 48.00p 200 HEVC
[4K/24p/422/10-L]
3840×2160
16:9 24.00p 150 AVC
[4K/24p/420/10-L]
3840×2160
16:9 24.00p 150 HEVC
[FHD/48p/422/10-L]
1920×1080
16:9 48.00p 100 AVC
[FHD/48p/420/10-L]
1920×1080
16:9 48.00p 100 HEVC
[FHD/24p/422/10-L]
1920×1080
16:9 24.00p 100 AVC
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]
1920×1080
16:9 24.00p 100 HEVC
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
131
•
In this document, videos are indicated as follows according to their resolution:
– 6K (5952×3968) video: 6K video
– 5.9K (5888×3312) video: 5.9K video
– 3.8K (3840×2560) video: 3.8K video
– 3.3K (3328×2496) video: 3.3K video
– C4K (4096×2160) video: C4K video
– 4K (3840×2160) video: 4K video
– Full High Definition (1920×1080) video: FHD video
•
Since the camera employs the VBR recording format, the bit rate is changed
automatically depending on the subject to record. As a result, video recording
time is shortened when a fast-moving subject is recorded.
•
4:2:2, 10-bit videos are intended for editing on a video production PC.
•
[MP4(Lite)] videos recorded using this camera cannot be played back on
Panasonic digital cameras released before April 2024.
•
You can register a combination of [System Frequency], [Rec. File Format],
[Image Area of Video], and [Rec Quality] to My List. ([add to list]: 134)
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
132
Continuous Recording Time for Video
The amount of time you can record in one recording depends on the [Rec
Quality].
When the recording time in one recording exceeds the following, recording
will stop:
During video recording, recording may be stopped to protect the camera if the internal
temperature gets too high, even if it has not reached to continuous recording time.
•
Conditions that cause overheating
– Use in places with high ambient temperatures
– Repeatedly make video recordings
– Leave the camera in the ON state for extended periods and then trying to make
video recordings, etc.
Restarting Video Recording After Stopping Due to
Temperature Increase in the Camera
If video recording stops due to temperature increase in the camera, the
temperature in the camera needs to be lowered before video recording can
be started again.
•
We recommend turning the camera off to lower the temperature in the camera.
•
The continuous recording time for video after restarting depends on the standby time
(the amount of time the camera was off for).
[Rec Quality] Continuous recording time
6K video, 5.9K video 10 minutes
3.8K video, 3.3K video,
C4K video, 4K video
15 minutes
FHD video 20 minutes
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
133
[Filtering]
When [Rec. File Format] is set to [MOV], you can specify items such as
frame rate, number of pixels (resolution), and compression format (YUV,
bit value, image compression), and just display recording qualities that
meet those conditions.
1 In the [Rec Quality] setting screen, press [DISP.].
2 Press 34 to select a setting item and then press .
•
Settings: [Frame Rate]/[Resolution]/[Codec]
3 Press 34 to select the filtering conditions and then press .
4 Press [DISP.] to confirm the setting.
•
You are returned to the [Rec Quality] setting screen.
Clearing the filtering conditions
Select [ANY] in Step 3.
•
The filtering conditions are also cleared when you do the following:
– Change the [Rec. File Format]
– Change the [System Frequency]
– Select a recording quality from [Rec Quality (My List)]
•
When you change recording quality using a filter, the current filtering conditions
are stored.
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
134
[add to list]
Select a recording quality and register it in My List. The recording quality
you register can be set in [Rec Quality (My List)].
In the [Rec Quality] setting screen, press [Q].
•
The following settings are also registered at the same time:
– [System Frequency]
– [Rec. File Format]
– [Image Area of Video]
Setting or deleting in My List
1 Select [Rec Quality (My List)].
•
[] [] [Rec Quality (My List)]
2 Press 34 to select a setting item and then press .
•
You cannot select setting items that have different system frequencies.
•
To delete from My List, select the item and press [Q].
Recording Videos – [Rec Quality]
135
Setting from the control panel
It is possible to display the My List of recording qualities from the control panel in
[ ]/[S&Q] mode or when [Video-Priority Display] is set.
Touch the recording quality item.
•
When already registered in My List, the [Rec Quality (My List)] setting screen is
displayed.
When not yet registered, the [Rec Quality] setting screen is displayed.
•
[Rec Quality (My List)] and [Rec Quality] switch each time you press the [DISP.]
button.
•
The next time the setting screen is displayed, the screen last used is displayed.
•
Up to 12 types of recording quality can be registered.
0
FPS
30
F3.5
1/60
100
AWB
IRISSHUTTER
ISO WBPHOTO STYLE
FULL
4K 29.97
p
420/10-L
MOV
AUTO
-2
-36 -12 -6-24 0
-6
CH2
CH1
TC
DF
00:00:00.00
48kHz/24bit
24m59s
OFF
Recording Videos – [Image Area of Video]
136
[Image Area of Video]
Set the image area during video recording. The angle of view differs
depending on the image area. Narrowing the image area allows you to
achieve a telescopic effect without image deterioration.
[] [] Select [Image Area of Video]
[FULL]
Records using a range corresponding to the full-frame lens image circle.
[APS-C]
Records using a range corresponding to the APS-C lens image circle.
[PIXEL/PIXEL]
Records with one pixel on the sensor, which is equal to one pixel of the video.
Records a range corresponding to the resolution range in [Rec Quality]. ([Rec
Quality]: 123)
Recording Videos – [Image Area of Video]
137
•
The [Image Area of Video] settings you can select differ depending on the [Rec
Quality] setting. ([Rec Quality]: 123)
•
It is not possible to set to [FULL] in the following case.
– When using APS-C lenses
Image area (Ex.: FHD video)
(A) Angle of view: Wide/Telescopic effect: Not possible
(B) Angle of view: Narrow/Telescopic effect: Possible
FULL
APS-C
PIXEL/PIXEL
FULL APS-C PIXEL/PIXEL
(A) (B)
138
Focus / Zoom
Smoother focusing is possible by selecting the focus mode and AF mode
most suited to the recording conditions and the subject.
• This camera supports phase detection AF and contrast AF.
≥ Selecting the Focus Mode: 139
≥ Using AF: 141
≥ Selecting the AF Mode: 159
≥ AF Area Operations: 177
≥ Record Using MF: 183
≥ Recording with Zoom: 190
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the Focus Mode
139
Selecting the Focus Mode
Select the focusing method (focus mode) to match subject movement.
It is also possible to customize the AF tracking features with [AFC]. ([AF
Custom Setting(Photo)]: 148)
Set the focus mode.
≥ [ ]/[ ] [] [Focus Mode]
[AFS]
This is suitable for recording still subjects.
When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the camera focuses once.
The focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
[AFC]
This is suitable for recording moving subjects.
While the shutter button is pressed halfway, the focus is constantly adjusted according
to the movement of the subject.
•
This predicts the movement of the subject, maintaining focusing. (Movement
prediction)
[MF]
Manual focusing. Use this when you want to fix the focus or avoid activating AF.
(Record Using MF: 183)
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the Focus Mode
140
•
In the following cases, [AFC] works the same as [AFS] when the shutter button is
pressed halfway:
– [ ] mode
– [S&Q] mode
– During video recording
– In low light situations
•
When the following functions are being used, [AFC] switches to [AFS]:
– High Resolution mode
– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
141
Using AF
≥ [AF-Point Scope]: 146
≥ [AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 148
≥ [Focus Limiter]: 151
≥ [AF Assist Light]: 153
≥ [Focus Frame Moving Speed]: 154
≥ [AF Micro Adjustment]: 155
AF (Auto Focus) refers to automatic focusing.
Select the focus mode and the AF mode appropriate for the subject and
scene.
1
Set the focus mode to [AFS] or [AFC].
≥ [ ]/[ ] [] [Focus Mode] [AFS]/[AFC]
2
Select the AF mode.
≥Press [ ] (2) to display the AF mode selection screen, and set
using . (Selecting the AF Mode: 159)
•
In [iA] mode, each press of [ ] switches between [ ] and [ ]. (AF
Mode: 95)
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
142
3
Press the shutter button halfway.
≥The AF operates.
Focus
In focus Not in focus
Focus icon (A) Lights Blinking
AF area (B) Green Red
AF beep Two beeps —
(A) (B)
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
143
Low illumination AF
•
In dark environments, low illumination AF automatically operates, and the focus icon
is indicated as [ ].
•
Achieving focus may take more time than usual.
Starlight AF
•
If the camera detects stars in the night sky after determining low illumination AF, then
Starlight AF will be activated.
When focus is achieved, the focus icon will display [ ], and the AF area will be
displayed on the area in focus.
•
Edges of the screen cannot detect Starlight AF.
[AF ON] button
You can also activate AF by pressing [AF ON].
LOW
STAR
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
144
•
Subjects and recording conditions that make focusing difficult with AF
mode
– Fast-moving subjects
– Extremely bright subjects
– Subjects without contrast
– Subjects recorded through windows
– Subjects near shiny objects
– Subjects in very dark locations
– When recording subjects both distant and near
•
When the following operations are performed while recording with [AFC], it may
take some time for the camera to focus:
– When zooming from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end
– When the subject is suddenly changed from one far away to one close by
•
If using the zoom after achieving focus, the focus may be erroneous. In that
case, re-adjust the focus.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
145
•
You can restrict the range for AF to work:
([Focus Limiter]: 151)
•
When camera shake reduces, it is possible to focus automatically:
([Quick AF]: 528)
•
You can change the settings so that AF does not function when the shutter button
is pressed halfway:
([Shutter AF]: 527)
•
The AF beep volume and sound can be changed:
([Beep]: 561)
•
You can assign the function that makes AF work so that it prioritizes subjects
close by to an Fn button.
This function is useful when the camera mistakenly focuses on the background:
([AF-ON : Near Shift]: 494)
•
You can assign the function that makes AF work so that it prioritizes subjects far
away to an Fn button.
This function is useful when taking pictures through fences or nets:
([AF-ON : Far Shift]: 494)
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
146
[AF-Point Scope]
This magnifies the focus point when the AF mode is [ ], [ ], or [ ]. (In
other AF modes, the center of the screen is magnified.)
You can check focus and observe an enlarged subject as with a telephoto
lens.
1
Register [AF-Point Scope] to the Fn button. (Fn
Buttons: 488)
2
Enlarge display.
≥Press the Fn button set in Step
1
.
≥While pressing the button, the focus point is enlarged.
•
When the screen is enlarged, pressing the shutter button halfway re-acquires
focus in a small central AF area.
•
When the screen is enlarged, turn or to adjust the magnification.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
148
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]
You can select features of AF operation when taking pictures with [AFC]
that are appropriate for the subject and scene.
Each of these features can be further customized.
1
Set the focus mode to [AFC].
≥ [ ]/[ ] [] [Focus Mode] [AFC]
2
Set [AF Custom Setting(Photo)].
≥ [] [] [AF Custom Setting(Photo)]
[Set 1]
Basic general-purpose setting.
[Set 2]
Suggested for situations where the subject moves at a constant speed in one
direction.
[Set 3]
Suggested when the subject moves randomly, and other objects may be in the
scene.
[Set 4]
Suggested for situations where the speed of the subject changes significantly.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
149
Adjusting AF Custom Settings
1 Press 21 to select the AF Custom setting type.
2 Press 34 to select items and press 21 to adjust.
•
A description of the item is displayed on the screen when you press [DISP.].
•
To reset settings to the default, press [Q].
3 Press .
[AF Sensitivity]
Sets the tracking sensitivity for the movement of subjects.
[+]
When the distance to the subject changes drastically,
the camera re-adjusts the focus immediately. You can
bring different subjects into focus one after another.
[−]
When the distance to the subject changes drastically,
the camera waits for a short period of time before
re-adjusting the focus. This allows you to prevent the
focus from being accidentally re-adjusted when, for
example, an object moves across the image.
[AF Area
Switching
Sensitivity]
Sets the sensitivity for switching the AF area to match subject
movement.
(When AF mode is set to Full Area AF)
[+]
When the subject moves out of the AF area, the camera
immediately switches the AF area to keep the subject in
focus.
[−]
The camera switches the AF area at a gradual pace.
Effects caused by a slight movement of the subject or by
obstacles in front of the camera will be minimized.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
150
[Moving Subject
Prediction]
Sets the tracking method for changes in the speed of subject
movement.
•
At larger setting values, the camera tries to maintain focus by
responding even to sudden movements of the subject.
However, the camera becomes more sensitive to slight
movements of the subject, so focusing may become unstable.
[0]
This is suited to a subject with minimal changes in
speed.
[+1]
These are suited to a subject that changes its speed.
[+2]
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
151
[Focus Limiter]
You can restrict the range for AF to work.
The focusing speed of AF increases when you limit the range where AF
works.
1
Set the focus mode to [AFS] or [AFC].
≥ [ ]/[ ] [] [Focus Mode] [AFS]/[AFC]
2
Set [Focus Limiter].
≥ [ ]/[ ] [] [Focus Limiter]
[ON]
Enables the following settings.
[OFF]
Disables the following settings.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
152
[SET]
1 Use the same procedure as MF (Record Using MF: 183) to check the
focus, then touch [Limit1] or [Limit2] to set the range of operation for AF.
•
[Limit1]/[Limit2] can be set from either.
2 Press to confirm the setting.
•
Press [DISP.] to return the operation range to the default setting.
•
This can be set when using an L-Mount lens with a focus ring.
•
It cannot be set if the focusing distance range selector switch of the lens has
been used to limit the operation range.
•
The setting values are reset when the lens is replaced.
•
When [Focus Limiter] is working, [ ]/[ ] is displayed on the screen.
•
When the following function is being used, [Focus Limiter] is not available:
–[AF+MF]
∞
10(m) 5 3 2 1.5 1 0.5 0.1
1 2
Limit1
Limit2
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
153
[AF Assist Light]
When recording in low light conditions, the AF assist light turns on when
you press the shutter button halfway, making it easier for the camera to
focus.
[ ]/[ ] [] Select [AF Assist Light]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
The effective range of the AF assist light is different depending on the lens used.
– When the interchangeable lens (S-R2060) is attached and at wide-angle end.
Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)
– When the interchangeable lens (S-R28200) is attached and at wide-angle end.
Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)
– When the interchangeable lens (S-R1840) is attached and at wide-angle end.
Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)
•
Remove the lens hood.
•
The AF assist light may be greatly blocked, and it may become harder to focus
when a lens with large diameter is used.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
154
[Focus Frame Moving Speed]
Sets the speed when moving the AF area/MF Assist.
[ ]/[ ] [] Select [Focus Frame Moving
Speed]
Settings: [FAST]/[NORMAL]
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
155
[AF Micro Adjustment]
You can make fine adjustments to the focus point when focusing with
phase detection AF.
•
There is normally no need to adjust the focus point. Adjust only when necessary.
If you adjust on a lens that has a correct focus point, there is a risk that the
camera will not be able to record with the appropriate focus point.
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
156
[] [] Select [AF Micro Adjustment]
[ALL]
Adjust uniformly for all lenses.
Used in cases such as when you have attached lenses that are not registered in
[ADJUST BY LENS].
[ADJUST BY LENS]
Adjust each lens separately and register the adjustment values on the camera.
When a registered lens is attached, the adjusted value is recalled when it is set in
[ADJUST BY LENS].
•
When using a zoom lens, you can adjust the focus point individually at the
wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
•
If the lens has already been registered, the adjustment value is overwritten.
[OFF]
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
157
Registering the Adjusted Value
1 Select [ALL] or [ADJUST BY LENS] and then press [DISP.].
2 (When [ADJUST BY LENS] is selected) Register the lens.
•
Press [DISP.] and select [Yes] to register.
•
If the lens is already registered, the screen moves to the one in Step 3.
3 (When [ADJUST BY LENS] is selected) Select [Wide Adjustment] or [Tele
Adjustment].
•
Press 34 to select, and then press .
•
When using a prime lens, [Adjustment] is displayed.
4 Adjust the focus point.
•
Press 21 to adjust the focus point and then press .
•
You can also adjust by rotating or .
•
The focus point is moved backward when adjusted with the [+] side. The focus
point is moved forward when adjusted with the [−] side.
5 Record and repeat Step 4 until the suitable focus point is reached.
•
Check the set focus point in an image recorded with [AFC] of the [Focus/
Shutter Priority] set to [FOCUS] and with the focus mode set to [AFC].
([Focus/Shutter Priority]: 524)
Focus / Zoom – Using AF
158
Initializing
Registered lens information and adjusted values are initialized.
1 Select [ALL] or [ADJUST BY LENS] and then press [Q].
2 Select [Yes] to initialize.
•
We recommend making the adjustments in the same environment that will be
used for recording.
•
We recommend using a tripod when adjusting.
•
You can register a maximum of 40 lenses in [ADJUST BY LENS]. When the
upper limit is exceeded, already registered lens information is overwritten.
•
When a teleconverter is used when adjusted with [ADJUST BY LENS], the
combination of the lens and teleconverter is registered.
•
The focus point for the wide-angle end and the telephoto end cannot be
individually adjusted in [ALL].
•
The registration numbers and lens names registered in [ADJUST BY LENS] are
entered automatically and cannot be changed.
•
Irrespective of the [ALL]/[ADJUST BY LENS] selection, all of the registered lens
information and adjusted values in [AF Micro Adjustment] are initialized.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
159
Selecting the AF Mode
≥ Automatic Detection: 162
≥ [Tracking]: 167
≥ [Full Area AF]: 168
≥ [Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]/[Zone]: 171
≥ [1-Area+]/[1-Area]: 173
≥ [Pinpoint]: 175
Select the focusing method to match the position and number of subjects.
In an AF mode other than Pinpoint, you can automatically focus by
detecting subjects.
1
Press [ ] (2).
≥The AF mode selection screen appears.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
160
2
Select the AF mode.
≥Press 21 to select an item and then press .
≥You can also select by rotating or .
[Tracking]
([Tracking]: 167)
[Full Area AF]
([Full Area AF]: 168)
[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]
([Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]: 171)
[Zone]
([Zone]: 172)
[1-Area+]
([1-Area+]: 173)
[1-Area]
([1-Area]: 173)
[Pinpoint]
([Pinpoint]: 175)
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
161
•
In [Time Lapse Shot], [ ] cannot be used.
•
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], [ ] is not available.
•
When the following function is being used, the AF mode is fixed to [ ]:
– [Live Cropping]
•
When the following function is being used, the AF mode is fixed to [ ]:
– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])
•
You can set the AF mode items to be displayed on the AF mode selection
screen:
([Show/Hide AF Mode]: 526)
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
162
Automatic Detection
When automatic detection is enabled, subjects for recording are
automatically detected and the camera focuses.
1
Set [AF Detection Setting] to [ON].
≥ [ ]/[ ] [] [AF Detection Setting] [ON]
•
You can also press 3 in the AF mode selection screen to switch automatic
detection [ON]/[OFF].
•
Not all subjects can be detected according to the settings.
•
When [Detecting Subject] ([Type of Subject]) is [ANIMAL], some subjects that are
not animals may be detected as animals.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
163
2
Select [Detecting Subject].
≥ [ ]/[ ] [] [Detecting Subject]
•
Select [Type of Subject] and [Target Parts].
•
It is also possible to select by pressing [DISP.] in the AF mode selection
screen.
[Type of
Subject]
[HUMAN]
Detects humans.
Select either [Eye/Face/Body] or [Eye/Face] for the
[Target Parts].
•
[ ] or [ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
[ANIMAL]
Detects animals.
Select either [Body] or [Eye/Body] for the [Target
Parts].
•
Animals that can be detected are birds, canines
(including wolves, etc.), and felines (including
lions, etc.).
•
[ ] or [ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
[CAR]
Detects cars (mainly for motor sports).
[Target Parts] cannot be selected.
•
[ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
[MOTORCYCLE]
Detects motorcycles (mainly for motor sports).
[Target Parts] cannot be selected.
•
[ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
[Target
Parts]
Select the part to be brought into focus.
This can be set when the [Type of Subject] is either [HUMAN] or
[ANIMAL].
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
164
When [ ]
When a subject to be recorded is detected, an AF area is displayed.
If multiple subjects are detected, multiple AF areas are also displayed, and
you can select the subject you want to focus on from amongst these.
Yellow
AF area to be brought into focus.
The camera selects this automatically.
•
A cross appears in the AF area when a human eye is detected. (A)
White
Displayed when multiple subjects are detected.
(A)
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
165
When [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ]
If even part of a subject to be recorded enters the AF area, it is
automatically detected and focused.
•
If eyes are detected inside the AF area, eye detection (B) works.
It is not possible to change the eye to focus on.
(B)
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
166
•
[AF Detection Setting] is applied to all AF modes excluding [ ].
•
When a person’s eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be brought
into focus.
The exposure will be adjusted to the face. (When [Metering Mode] is set to [ ])
•
Depending on [Detecting Subject], the number of subjects that can be detected
at once with [ ] of the AF mode will be different.
[HUMAN] ([Eye/Face/Body], [Eye/Face]): Maximum 15 (maximum 3 bodies
detected)
[ANIMAL] ([Body]), [CAR], [MOTORCYCLE]: Maximum 3
[ANIMAL] ([Eye/Body]): Maximum 1
•
Automatic detection may not be available due to the camera settings.
•
When the following function is being used, [Detecting Subject] is fixed to [Eye/
Face]:
– [Live Cropping]
•
You can make it so the metering range for automatic exposure is not prioritized
on the eyes and face when automatic detection works:
([Face Priority In Multi Metering]: 520)
•
The cross that appears on human eyes when focused can be made to disappear:
([Human Eye Detection Display]: 528)
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
167
[Tracking]
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], the AF area follows the movement of
the subject, maintaining focusing.
Start tracking.
≥ Aim the AF area over the subject, and press the shutter button halfway.
The camera will track the subject while the shutter button is pressed
halfway or pressed fully.
•
If tracking fails, the AF area blinks red.
•
When set to [AFS], the focus will be on the AF area position. Tracking will not work.
•
How to manipulate the AF area (AF Area Operations: 177)
•
In [ ]/[S&Q] mode and while recording video, tracking will continue even if
the shutter button is released.
To cancel tracking, press , or touch [ ].
Tracking is also available with [AFS].
•
When automatic detection is working, the detected subject is tracked.
•
Set [Metering Mode] to [ ] to continue to adjust the exposure as well.
•
[ ] may not be available due to the camera settings.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
168
[Full Area AF]
The camera selects the most optimal AF area to focus.
When multiple AF areas are selected, all selected AF areas will be brought
into focus.
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], you can ensure that the focus stays
on the subject by recording while keeping the subject within the Full Area
AF area.
Specify the Subject to Bring into Focus
When automatic detection is [ON], multiple subjects are detected.
When the subject to be brought into focus is shown using the white AF
area, you can change this to a yellow AF area.
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
169
≥ Touch operations
Touch the subject indicated with the white AF area.
•
The AF area will change to yellow.
•
To cancel the setting, touch [ ].
≥ Button operations
1 Press 4 in the AF mode selection screen.
2 Press 3421 to move the position of the AF area.
3 When the white AF area changes to yellow, press .
•
To cancel the setting, press .
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
170
Setting the AF Area in Any Position
The [ ] AF area can be set in any position.
≥ Touch operations
Touch any position on the recording screen and then touch [Set].
•
Touch [ ] to return to [ ].
≥ Button operations
1 Press 4 in the AF mode selection screen.
2 Press 3421 to move the AF area, and then press to confirm.
•
Press again to return to [ ].
•
You can move and change the size of the set AF area:
(AF Area Operations: 177)
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
171
[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]/ [Zone]
[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)]
Within the full area, vertical and horizontal zones can be focused.
Horizontal pattern
Vertical pattern
•
To switch between the horizontal pattern and vertical pattern, press 3421 in the
AF area setting screen.
•
How to manipulate the AF area (AF Area Operations: 177)
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
173
[1-Area+]/ [1-Area]
[1-Area+]
Emphasis within a single AF area can be focused.
Even when the subject moves out of the single AF area, the subject
remains focused in a supplementary AF area (C).
•
Effective when recording moving subjects that are difficult to track with [ ].
[1-Area]
Specify the point to be brought into focus.
(C)
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
174
A dot (D) is displayed on the recording screen when a single AF area is
reduced to the minimum size. The AF area can be set on the location
where the dot is displayed.
•
How to manipulate the AF area (AF Area Operations: 177)
•
It is not possible to reduce a single AF area to the minimum when using the
following function:
– During video recording
– [ ] mode
– [S&Q] mode
– [Hybrid Zoom(Photo)]
– [Crop Zoom(Photo)]
•
Change the movement speed of a single AF area:
([Focus Frame Moving Speed]: 154)
(D)
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
175
[Pinpoint]
You can achieve a more precise focus on a small point.
If you press the shutter button halfway, the screen that lets you check the
focus will be enlarged.
•
The enlarged screen is displayed when you set an AF area.
•
How to manipulate the AF area (AF Area Operations: 177)
•
When the focus mode is set to [AFC], [ ] is not available.
•
Automatic detection does not work in [ ].
•
When the following functions are being used, [ ] switches to [ ]:
– During video recording
– [ ] mode
– [S&Q] mode
Focus / Zoom – Selecting the AF Mode
176
Operations on the Magnification Window
•
You can enlarge by approx. 3× to 6×.
•
You can also take a picture by touching [ ].
Button
operations
Touch
operations
Description of operation
3421 Touch Moves [+].
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
— Enlarges/reduces the screen.
—
Switches magnification window (windowed
mode/full screen mode).
[DISP.] [Reset] Quits the enlarged display.
•
You can change the display method of the magnified screen:
([Pinpoint AF Setting]: 527)
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Operations
177
AF Area Operations
≥ Move the Position of the AF Area: 177
≥ Changing the Size of the AF Area: 179
≥ Resetting the AF Area: 180
≥ Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position ([AF+AE]): 181
≥ [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]: 182
Move the Position of the AF Area
Touch operations
With the default settings, focus is on the point touched when you touch the
screen. ([Touch Settings]: 530)
Touch the recording screen.
•
The AF area setting screen is displayed.
The AF area is set when you either touch [Set] or press the shutter button halfway.
•
You can optimize the focus and brightness on the touched position. (Focus on
and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position ([AF+AE]): 181)
•
You can focus on the touched position and release the shutter. (Touch AF/
Touch Shutter: 97)
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Operations
178
Button operations
1 Press 4 in the AF mode selection screen.
•
The AF area setting screen is displayed.
2 Press 3421 to move the position of the AF area.
•
The AF area is set when you either press or press the shutter button
halfway.
•
When [Metering Mode] is [ ], the metering target also moves together with the
AF area.
•
You can set the AF area to loop when moved:
([Looped Focus Frame]: 529)
•
You can assign the function that displays the AF area/MF Assist movement
screens to an Fn button:
([Focus Area Set]: 494)
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Operations
179
Changing the Size of the AF Area
Touch operations
Pinch out/pinch in the AF area in the AF area setting screen.
•
Either touch [Set] or press the shutter button halfway to confirm.
Dial Operations
Rotate or .
•
Either press or press the shutter button halfway to confirm.
•
In [ ], [ ], and [ ], the size of the AF area cannot be changed.
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Operations
180
Resetting the AF Area
Touch operations
Touch [Reset] in the AF area setting screen.
•
The first touch returns the AF area position to the center. The second touch returns
the AF area size to the default.
Button operations
Press [DISP.] in the AF area setting screen.
•
The first press returns the AF area position to the center. The second press returns
the AF area size to the default.
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Operations
181
Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched
Position ([AF+AE])
1
Set [Touch AF].
≥ [] [] [Touch Settings] [Touch AF] [AF+AE]
2
Touch the subject to which you wish to adjust the
brightness.
≥At the touched position, an AF area that works in the same way as
[ ] is displayed.
This places a point to adjust brightness at the center of the AF
area.
•
How to manipulate the AF area (AF Area Operations: 177)
3
Touch [Set].
≥The [AF+AE] setting is canceled if you touch [ ] (when [ ] or
[ ] is set: [ ]) on the recording screen.
6HW
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
Focus / Zoom – AF Area Operations
182
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]
Memorizes separate positions for AF areas for when the camera is
vertically aligned and for when it is horizontally aligned.
Two vertical orientations, left and right, are available.
[] [] Select [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]
[ON]
Memorizes separate positions for vertical and horizontal orientations.
[OFF]
Sets the same position for vertical and horizontal orientations.
•
In MF, this memorizes the MF Assist position.
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF
183
Record Using MF
≥ [Focus Peaking]: 188
MF (Manual Focus) refers to manual focusing.
Use this function when you want to fix the focus or when the distance
between the lens and the subject is determined and you do not want to
activate AF.
1
Set the focus mode to [MF].
≥ [ ]/[ ] [] [Focus Mode] [MF]
2
Press [ ] (2).
≥This switches to the MF Assist screen, and shows an enlarged
display.
3
Select the focus point.
≥Press 3421 to select the focus point.
•
To return the point to be brought into focus to the center, press [DISP.].
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF
184
4
Adjust the focus.
≥Rotate the focus ring.
•
This will display the in-focus portion highlighted with color. (Focus Peaking)
•
A recording distance guideline is displayed. (MF Guide)
(A) MF Assist (enlarged screen)
(B) Focus Peaking
(C) Indicator for ¶ (infinity)
(D) MF Guide
AF
∞
10(m) 5 3 2 1.5 1 0.5 0.1
(D)
(C)
(B)
(A)
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF
185
5
Close the MF Assist screen.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥This operation can also be performed by pressing .
6
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
Operations on the MF Assist Screen
*1 You can enlarge by approx. 3× to 6×.
*2 You can enlarge by approx. 3× to 20×. (Maximum 6× during video recording, when
[Enlarged Live Display] in [HDMI Rec Output] is set to [OFF] during HDMI output,
and when in [ ]/[S&Q] mode)
Button
operations
Touch
operations
Description of operation
3421 Drag Moves the enlarged display position.
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
— Enlarges/reduces the screen.
—
Switches magnification window (windowed
mode
*1
/full screen mode
*2
).
[DISP.] [Reset]
First time: Returns the MF Assist position to the
center.
Second time: Returns the MF Assist
magnification to the default setting.
[AF ON] The AF operates.
AF
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF
186
•
On the recording screen, you can rotate the focus ring to display the MF Assist
screen. If the focus ring has been rotated to enlarge the display, the assist screen
will be exited a short time after you cease the operation.
•
During MF, pressing [AF ON] will activate AF.
•
The MF Assist screen can also be displayed during video recording.
•
The recording distance reference mark indicates the position of the imaging
surface. This becomes the reference when measuring the recording distance.
•
When [Hybrid Zoom(Photo)], [Crop Zoom(Photo)], [Hybrid Zoom(Video)], or
[Crop Zoom(Video)] is [ON], the MF Assist magnification rate is between about
3x to 6x. (However, during video recording or in [ ]/[S&Q] mode, this is fixed
to 3x.)
•
During video recording using the following functions, the MF Assist screen
cannot be displayed:
– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate of
60.00p
– [Live Cropping]
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF
187
•
You can change the Focus Peaking sensitivity and the display method:
([Focus Peaking]: 188)
•
You can memorize the MF Assist position separately for vertical and horizontal
orientations:
([Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]: 182)
•
You can change the display method of the magnified screen:
([MF Assist]: 525)
•
You can change the MF Guide display units:
([MF Guide]: 526)
•
You can disable focus ring operation:
([Focus Ring Lock]: 526)
•
You can set the movement of the MF Assist position to loop:
([Looped Focus Frame]: 529)
•
The camera memorizes the focus point when you turn it off:
([Lens Focus Resume]: 551)
•
The amount of focus movement can be set:
([Focus Ring Control]: 552)
•
You can assign the function that displays the AF area/MF Assist movement
screens to an Fn button:
([Focus Area Set]: 494)
Focus / Zoom – Record Using MF
188
[Focus Peaking]
During MF operation, in-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear
outlines) are highlighted with color.
[ ]/[ ] [] Select [Focus Peaking]
[ON] Focus Peaking display is performed.
[OFF] —
[SET]
[Focus Peaking
Sensitivity]
If adjusted to the negative direction, portions
to be highlighted are reduced, allowing you
to achieve a more precise focus.
[Display Color]
You can set the display color of the in-focus
portion.
[Display During
AFS]
When set to [ON], the Focus Peaking
display is also possible when the shutter
button is pressed halfway in the [AFS] focus
mode.
[Display During
MF]
[While In Live View]: Focus Peaking is
displayed in the recording screen.
[While Live View Is Enlarged]: Focus
Peaking is displayed in the MF Assist screen
and the video enlarged display of live view
screen.
[When Shutter Is Pressed]: When set to
[OFF], Focus Peaking is hidden when the
shutter is pressed.
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom
190
Recording with Zoom
≥ [Crop Zoom(Photo)]: 191
≥ [Hybrid Zoom(Photo)]: 194
≥ [Crop Zoom(Video)]: 197
≥ [Hybrid Zoom(Video)]: 201
Use the optical zoom of the lens to zoom to telephoto or wide-angle.
Rotate the zoom ring.
(T): Telephoto
(W): Wide-angle
≥ The focal length is displayed on the recording screen.
•
The focal length display can be hidden:
([Focal Length]: 541)
(W)
(T)
35mm
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom
191
[Crop Zoom(Photo)]
Cut out the central section of the image to get an enhanced telescopic
effect without image quality deterioration.
It can even be used with a prime lens.
[] [] Select [Crop Zoom(Photo)]
[ON] Enables crop zoom.
[OFF] —
[SET]
[Focal Length
Display
Setting]
Sets how focal length is displayed.
[Composite Focal Length]: Result of the
calculation “focal length of the optical zoom ×
crop zoom rate” (eg.: 180 mm)
[+ Crop Magnification]: The focal length of the
optical zoom and the crop zoom rate (eg.: 60
mm × 3.0)
[Minimum
Image Size]
A higher rate of zoom is possible the smaller the
[Picture Size] is.
[M]: maximum 1.4x
[S]: maximum 2.0x
[XS]: maximum approx. 3x
[Set
Recording
Image Size]
[ON]: Always records with the [Picture Size] set
in [Minimum Image Size].
[OFF]: [Picture Size] changes according to the
zoom position.
[Zoom
Speed(Photo)]
Sets the zoom speed during zoom operations.
Settings:
[H], [M], [L], [SL]
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom
192
Using [Crop Zoom(Photo)]
1 Set [Crop Zoom(Photo)] to [ON].
•
[] [] [Crop Zoom(Photo)] [ON]
•
Zoom operations are also enabled when you press the Fn button assigned with
[Zoom Control].
•
The [Touch Tab] setting changes to [ON] and you can use Touch Zoom to
enlarge/reduce.
2 Perform the zoom operations.
Enlarge/Reduce
•
Press 34 or rotate .
•
You can also enlarge/reduce by pressing the Fn button assigned with [Zoom
In(Tele)] or [Zoom Out(Wide)].
•
If the zoom operation has been enabled using the Fn button assigned with
[Zoom Control], you cannot enlarge/reduce using .
Step zoom
You can switch the crop zoom rate ([Minimum Image Size]).
1.0x[L]/1.4x[M]/2.0x[S]/approx. 3.0x[XS]
•
Press 21.
•
You can also switch by pressing the Fn button assigned with [Crop Zoom
Increment(Step)].
3 Confirm your selection.
•
Press .
•
Touch Zoom and the Fn buttons [Zoom In(Tele)], [Zoom Out(Wide)], and [Crop
Zoom Increment(Step)] can also be used in the recording screen.
28mm28mm28mm
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom
193
•
RAW images are recorded without being cropped.
•
The [Focal Length Display Setting] settings work together across the following
menus:
– [Crop Zoom(Photo)]
– [Crop Zoom(Video)]
•
The [Minimum Image Size] and [Set Recording Image Size] settings work
together across the following menus:
– [Hybrid Zoom(Photo)]
– [Crop Zoom(Photo)]
•
When the following functions are being used, [Crop Zoom(Photo)] is not
available:
– The [RAW] [Picture Quality]
– High Resolution mode
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom
194
[Hybrid Zoom(Photo)]
Even higher zoom rates can be achieved just with zoom ring operations by
combining the optical zoom and [Crop Zoom].
Zooming at a higher rate is possible the smaller the [Minimum Image Size]
is.
[] [] Select [Hybrid Zoom(Photo)]
[ON] Enables hybrid zoom.
[OFF] —
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom
195
[SET]
[Focal Length
Display
Setting]
Sets how focal length is displayed.
[Composite Focal Length]: Result of the
calculation “focal length of the optical zoom ×
crop zoom rate” (eg.: 180 mm)
[+ Crop Magnification]: The focal length of the
optical zoom and the crop zoom rate (eg.: 60
mm × 3.0)
[Effect at Wide
Angle(Photo)]
[ON]: Crop zoom works at a constant zoom
magnification across the entire optical zoom
area.
[OFF]: Only optical zoom is used in the area of
the edges of the wide-angle, and [Picture Size]
[L] pictures can be recorded.
[Minimum
Image Size]
A higher rate of zoom is possible the smaller the
[Picture Size] is.
[M]: maximum 1.4x
[S]: maximum 2.0x
[XS]: maximum approx. 3x
[Set
Recording
Image Size]
[ON]: Always records with the [Picture Size] set
in [Minimum Image Size].
[OFF]: [Picture Size] changes according to the
zoom position.
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom
196
•
RAW images are recorded without being cropped.
•
The [Focal Length Display Setting] settings work together across the following
menus:
– [Hybrid Zoom(Photo)]
– [Hybrid Zoom(Video)]
•
The [Minimum Image Size] and [Set Recording Image Size] settings work
together across the following menus:
– [Hybrid Zoom(Photo)]
– [Crop Zoom(Photo)]
•
[Hybrid Zoom(Photo)] cannot be used with a prime lens.
•
When the following functions are being used, [Hybrid Zoom(Photo)] is not
available:
– The [RAW] [Picture Quality]
– High Resolution mode
– [Crop Zoom(Photo)]
•
The zoom operation may not be smooth if you use a zoom lens other than a
Panasonic interchangeable lens (S series).
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom
197
[Crop Zoom(Video)]
Cut out the central section of the image to get an enhanced telescopic
effect without image quality deterioration.
It can even be used with a prime lens.
[] [] Select [Crop Zoom(Video)]
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom
198
[ON] Enables crop zoom.
[OFF] —
[SET]
[Focal Length
Display
Setting]
Sets how focal length is displayed.
[Composite Focal Length]: Result of the
calculation “focal length of the optical zoom ×
crop zoom rate” (eg.: 180 mm)
[+ Crop Magnification]: The focal length of the
optical zoom and the crop zoom rate (eg.: 60
mm × 3.0)
[Zoom
Speed(Video)]
[During Recording Standby]: Sets the zoom
speed during recording standby.
[During Recording]: Sets the zoom speed
during recording.
Settings:
[H], [M], [L], [SL]
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom
199
Using [Crop Zoom(Video)]
1 Set [Crop Zoom(Video)] to [ON].
•
[] [] [Crop Zoom(Video)] [ON]
•
Zoom operations are also enabled when you press the Fn button assigned with
[Zoom Control].
•
The [Touch Tab] setting changes to [ON] and you can use Touch Zoom to
enlarge/reduce.
2 Perform the zoom operations.
Enlarge/Reduce
•
Press 34 or rotate .
•
You can also enlarge/reduce by pressing the Fn button assigned with [Zoom
In(Tele)] or [Zoom Out(Wide)].
•
If the zoom operation has been enabled using the Fn button assigned with
[Zoom Control], you cannot enlarge/reduce using .
Step zoom
You can switch the crop zoom rate ([Image Area of Video]).
FULL, APS-C, PIXEL/PIXEL
•
Press 21.
•
You can also switch by pressing the Fn button assigned with [Crop Zoom
Increment(Step)].
3 Confirm your selection.
•
Press .
•
Touch Zoom and the Fn buttons [Zoom In(Tele)], [Zoom Out(Wide)], and [Crop
Zoom Increment(Step)] can also be used in the recording screen.
28mm
28mm
28mm
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom
200
[Rec Quality] and Crop Zoom Rate
[Rec Quality]
Maximum crop zoom rate
When using
full-frame lenses
When using APS-C
lenses
6K video, 5.9K video, 3.3K video ——
3.8K video Approx. 1.5x —
C4K video/4K video (60p/50p/48p) ——
C4K video/4K video (30p/25p/24p) Approx. 1.5x —
FHD video (120p/100p/60p/50p/48p) ——
FHD video (30p/25p/24p) Approx. 3x Approx. 2x
•
The [Focal Length Display Setting] settings work together across the following
menus:
– [Crop Zoom(Photo)]
– [Crop Zoom(Video)]
•
When the following functions are being used, [Crop Zoom(Video)] is not
available:
– [S&Q] video with C4K/4K resolution
– [S&Q] video with FHD resolution where the [Slow & Quick Setting] frame rate
exceeds 60 fps
– [Live Cropping]
•
When [Crop Zoom(Video)] is set to [ON], power consumption increases and the
battery is consumed faster. The temperature increase in the camera is also
faster.
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom
201
[Hybrid Zoom(Video)]
Even higher zoom rates can be achieved just with zoom ring operations by
combining the optical zoom and [Crop Zoom].
Optical zoom only
Hybrid zoom (optical zoom and crop zoom)
[] [] Select [Hybrid Zoom(Video)]
FULL
WT
PIXEL/PIXEL
FULL
PIXEL/PIXEL
PIXEL/PIXEL
WT
FULL
PIXEL/PIXEL
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom
202
[ON] Enables hybrid zoom.
[OFF] —
[SET]
[Focal Length
Display
Setting]
Sets how focal length is displayed.
[Composite Focal Length]: Result of the
calculation “focal length of the optical zoom ×
crop zoom rate” (eg.: 180 mm)
[+ Crop Magnification]: The focal length of the
optical zoom and the crop zoom rate (eg.: 60
mm × 3.0)
[Effect at Wide
Angle(Video)]
[ON]: Crop zoom works at a constant zoom
magnification across the entire optical zoom
area.
[OFF]: Only optical zoom is used in the area of
the edges of the wide-angle, and the lag during
zoom is reduced.
Focus / Zoom – Recording with Zoom
203
[Rec Quality] and Crop Zoom Rate
[Rec Quality]
Maximum crop zoom rate
When using
full-frame lenses
When using APS-C
lenses
6K video, 5.9K video, 3.3K video ——
3.8K video Approx. 1.5x —
C4K video/4K video (60p/50p/48p) ——
C4K video/4K video (30p/25p/24p) Approx. 1.5x —
FHD video (120p/100p/60p/50p/48p) ——
FHD video (30p/25p/24p) Approx. 3x Approx. 2x
•
The [Focal Length Display Setting] settings work together across the following
menus:
– [Hybrid Zoom(Photo)]
– [Hybrid Zoom(Video)]
•
[Hybrid Zoom(Video)] cannot be used with a prime lens.
•
When the following functions are being used, [Hybrid Zoom(Video)] is not
available:
– [S&Q] video with C4K/4K resolution
– [S&Q] video with FHD resolution where the [Slow & Quick Setting] frame rate
exceeds 60 fps
– [Live Cropping]
– [Crop Zoom(Video)]
•
The zoom operation may not be smooth if you use a zoom lens other than a
Panasonic interchangeable lens (S series).
•
When [Hybrid Zoom(Video)] is set to [ON], power consumption increases and the
battery is consumed faster. The temperature increase in the camera is also
faster.
204
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer
This chapter describes functions for recording in drive mode and the image
stabilizer function.
≥ Selecting the Drive Mode: 205
≥ Taking Burst Pictures: 207
≥ High Resolution mode: 215
≥ Recording with Time Lapse Shot: 221
≥ Recording with Stop Motion Animation: 229
≥ Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos: 234
≥ Recording Using the Self-timer: 236
≥ Bracket Recording: 241
≥ [Silent Mode]: 249
≥ [Synchro Scan(Photo)]: 251
≥ [Min. Shutter Speed]: 253
≥ [Shutter Delay]: 254
≥ Image Stabilizer: 255
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Selecting the Drive Mode
205
Selecting the Drive Mode
You can switch the drive mode to Single, Burst, etc. to match the recording
conditions.
1
Press [ ] (4).
2
Select a drive mode.
≥Press 21 to select an item and then press .
≥You can also select by rotating .
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Selecting the Drive Mode
206
[ ] (Single)
Takes one picture each time the shutter button is pressed.
[ ] (Burst) (Taking Burst Pictures: 207)
Takes pictures continuously while the shutter button is pressed and held.
[ ] (High Resolution mode) (High Resolution mode: 215)
This merges pictures with a high resolution from multiple recorded images.
[ ] (Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation) (Recording with Time
Lapse Shot: 221, Recording with Stop Motion Animation: 229)
Takes pictures with Time Lapse Shot or Stop Motion Animation.
[ ] (Self-timer) (Recording Using the Self-timer: 236)
Takes pictures when the set time elapses after the shutter button is pressed.
•
The detailed setting screens for each drive mode can be called up with an Fn
button:
[] [] [Fn Button Set] [Setting in REC mode] [Drive Mode
Setting]
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
207
Taking Burst Pictures
Takes pictures continuously while the shutter button is pressed and held.
You can select burst recording settings to suit the recording conditions,
including [H], [M], and [L] which enable burst recording with high image
quality, and SH burst recording which takes burst pictures at ultra high
speeds using an electronic shutter.
1
Press [ ] (4).
2
Press 21 to select [Burst] and press 3.
≥You can also select by rotating .
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
208
3
Select the burst rate.
≥Press 21 to select an item and then press .
≥You can also select by rotating or .
≥This can also be set in [Burst Shot Setting] in the [Photo] menu.
[SH]
Takes burst pictures at ultra high speed, 30 frames/second.
[SH PRE]
Takes pre-burst pictures at ultra high speed, 30 frames/second.
[H]
Takes high-speed burst pictures.
[M]
Takes medium-speed burst pictures.
[L]
Takes low-speed burst pictures.
4
Start recording.
•
Takes burst pictures while the shutter button is pressed fully.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
209
SH Pre-burst Recording
The camera records pictures (15 frames worth) while the shutter button is
pressed halfway before recording starts and for the 0.5 seconds just prior
to the shutter button being pressed fully.
(A) 0.5 seconds
(B) Recorded range
•
[PRE] is displayed on the recording screen during SH pre-burst recording.
•
If the shutter button is pressed and held at halfway for approx. 1 minute, the frames
before pressing fully cannot be saved. Press the shutter button halfway again.
(A)
(B)
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
210
Burst Rate
•
The burst rate may be lower depending on the settings for recording such as [Picture
Size] and focus mode.
Electronic shutter
Live View when taking burst
pictures
[SH]/[SH PRE]
30 frames/second
([AFS]/[AFC]/[MF])
None
[H]
(High speed)
9 frames/second ([AFS]/[MF])
8 frames/second ([AFC])
None ([AFS]/[MF])
Available ([AFC])
[M]
(Medium speed)
5 frames/second
([AFS]/[AFC]/[MF])
Available
[L]
(Low speed)
2 frames/second
([AFS]/[AFC]/[MF])
Available
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
211
Maximum Number of Frames Recordable
•
Using a Nextorage SDXC memory card compliant with UHS-II UHS Speed Class 3
•
When recording under the test conditions specified by Panasonic.
Recording conditions may reduce the maximum number of frames recordable.
*1 Recording stops when the maximum number of frames recordable is reached.
For SH pre-burst recording, this includes the number of pictures taken with
pre-burst recording.
*2 The burst rate will become lower during recording but pictures can continue to be
taken until the card becomes full.
[Picture Quality]
[FINE]/[STD.]
[RAW+FINE]/
[RAW+STD.]
[RAW]
[SH]/[SH PRE] 36 frames
*1
[H]
(High speed)
120 frames or
more
*2
35 frames or more
*2
55 frames or more
*2
[M]
(Medium speed)
200 frames or
more
*2
50 frames or more
*2
200 frames or
more
*2
[L]
(Low speed)
200 frames or
more
*2
200 frames or
more
*2
200 frames or
more
*2
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
212
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken Continuously
When you press the shutter button halfway, the number of pictures that can
be taken continuously will appear on the recording screen.
Example) When 20 frames: [r20]
•
Once recording starts, the number of pictures that can be taken continuously will
decrease.
– During [H]/[M]/[L] burst recording: When [r0] appears, the burst rate decreases.
– During SH burst recording: When [r0] appears, the burst recording stops.
•
When [r99+] is displayed on the recording screen, you can take 100 or more burst
pictures.
r20
ISO
100
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
213
Focus when Taking Burst Pictures
•
When the subject is dark with [AFC], the focus is fixed to that of the first frame.
•
With estimated focus, the burst rate takes priority and the focus is estimated to the
extent possible.
•
With normal focus, the burst rate may become slow.
Exposure when Taking Burst Pictures
Focus mode
[Focus/
Shutter
Priority]
([Focus/
Shutter
Priority]: 524)
[SH]/[SH
PRE]
[H] [M]/[L]
[AFS]
[FOCUS]
Fixed to the focus of the first frame
[BALANCE]
[RELEASE]
[AFC]
[FOCUS] Estimated focus Normal focus
[BALANCE]
Estimated focus
[RELEASE]
[MF] — Focus set with manual focus
Focus mode [SH]/[SH PRE] [H] [M]/[L]
[AFS] Fixed to the exposure of the first frame
The exposure is
adjusted for each
frame
[AFC] The exposure is adjusted for each frame
[MF] Fixed to the exposure of the first frame
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Taking Burst Pictures
214
•
It may take a while to save burst pictures.
If you continue to take burst pictures while saving is in progress, the maximum
number of frames recordable will be reduced.
When taking burst pictures, we recommend using a high-speed card.
Notes on SH burst recording
•
There are limits on the shutter speed you can set during SH burst recording.
– [SH]/[SH PRE]: To a minimum of 1/30
•
The aperture will be fixed during burst recording.
•
The images recorded will be saved as a set of burst group pictures. (Group
Images: 461)
Notes on SH pre-burst recording
•
Pictures taken before the shutter button is pressed fully are not saved in the
following cases:
– When recording with the Touch Shutter
– When [Half-Press Shutter] in the [Custom] ([Focus/Shutter]) menu is set to
[ON]
•
When the ambient temperature is high or Pre-Burst recording is performed
continuously, even if you press the shutter button halfway, Pre-Burst may not
operate to protect the camera from overheating. Wait until the camera cools
down.
•
Even if you press the shutter button halfway, Pre-Burst may not operate when
there is insufficient free space on the card.
•
The refresh rate on the live view screen becomes 30 fps when you have selected
[SH PRE] and you press the shutter button halfway.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode
215
High Resolution mode
This merges pictures with a high resolution from multiple recorded images.
This function is suitable for recording subjects that do not move.
When [Handheld High-Res] is set to on, you can record pictures with a
higher resolution without using a tripod.
The picture after merging can be saved in RAW or JPEG format.
1
Press [ ] (4).
•
When recording with [Handheld High-Res] set to [OFF], use a tripod to
minimize camera shake.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode
216
2
Press 21 to select [High Resolution Mode] and press
3.
≥You can also select by rotating .
3
Set the recording settings.
≥This can also be set in [High Resolution Mode Setting] in the
[Photo] menu.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode
217
[Handheld High-Res]
You can record without using a tripod. Turn on the image stabilizer function.
•
When [OFF], the image stabilizer function is not available.
[Picture Quality]
Set the compression rate at which the pictures are to be stored.
[COMBINED]/[FINE]/[RAW+FINE]/[RAW]
•
When set to [COMBINED], recording is with the same settings as [Picture
Quality] in the [Photo] ([Image Quality]) menu. (However, [STD.] changes to
[FINE].)
[Picture Size]
Sets the image size after merging.
When the [Aspect Ratio] is [4:3].
[XL] (85 M): 10656×8000
[LL] (42.5 M): 7552×5664
When the [Aspect Ratio] is [3:2].
[XL] (96 M): 12000×8000
[LL] (48 M): 8496×5664
When the [Aspect Ratio] is [16:9].
[XL] (81 M): 12000×6736
[LL] (40.5 M): 8496×4784
When the [Aspect Ratio] is [1:1].
[XL] (64 M): 8000×8000
[LL] (32 M): 5664×5664
•
RAW images are always recorded in the [3:2] (12000×8000) aspect ratio.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode
218
[Simul Record Normal Shot]
Simultaneously takes pictures that are not merged when [ON] is set. The first
picture will be saved with [Picture Size] set to [L].
[Shutter Delay]
Sets the delay time from when the shutter button is pressed until the shutter is
released.
[30 SEC]/[15 SEC]/[8 SEC]/[4 SEC]/[2 SEC]/[1 SEC]/[1/2 SEC]/[1/4 SEC]/[1/8
SEC]/[Off]
[Motion Blur Processing]
Sets the correction method to use when the subject moved.
[MODE1]: This gives priority to High Resolution mode, therefore subject blur
appears as an afterimage in the picture.
[MODE2]: This reduces afterimage from subject blur, but cannot obtain the
same High Resolution mode effect in the corrected range.
•
When [Handheld High-Res] is [ON], [Motion Blur Processing] is fixed to
[MODE2].
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode
219
4
Decide on the composition and then fix the camera in
place.
•
If blurring is detected, the High Resolution mode icon (A) blinks.
•
When [Handheld High-Res] is set to [ON], the icon changes to [ ].
5
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
•
With the default settings, [Shutter Delay] is activated, so there will be a gap in
time from when the shutter button is pressed until the shutter is released.
•
The screen goes dark during recording.
•
The recording state indication (red) (B) blinks.
Do not move the camera while it is blinking.
•
You can continue recording when the merging process ends.
(A)
(B)
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – High Resolution mode
220
•
In High Resolution mode, recording will be performed using the following
settings:
– Minimum aperture value: F16
– Shutter speed: 1 second to 1/8000 of a second
– ISO sensitivity: Upper limit to [3200]
– Focus mode: [AFS]/[MF]
•
Hold the camera firmly during handheld recording so that the camera does not
shake. Recording may fail if there is a lot of shaking.
•
Image merging can take a long time with handheld recording.
•
When you record in an extremely bright location or under lighting such as
fluorescent or LED lighting, the coloring or brightness of the image may change
or horizontal stripes may appear on the screen.
Lowering the shutter speed may reduce the effect of horizontal stripes.
•
Devices other than this camera may not be able to play back images recorded
using High Resolution mode.
•
When using APS-C lenses, recording in High Resolution Mode is not possible.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot
221
Recording with Time Lapse Shot
Pictures are taken automatically at a set recording interval.
This feature is ideal for keeping track of changes over time in subjects such
as animals and plants.
The pictures taken will be saved as a set of group images that can also be
combined into a video. (Group Images: 461)
1
Press [ ] (4).
•
Check that the clock is set correctly. (Setting the Clock (When Turning On for
the First Time): 63)
•
For long recording intervals, we recommend setting [Lens Focus Resume] to
[ON] in the [Custom] ([Lens / Others]) menu.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot
222
2
Press 21 to select [Time Lapse/Animation] and press
3.
≥You can also select by rotating .
3
Set [Mode] to [Time Lapse Shot].
≥This can also be set in [Time Lapse/Animation] in the [Photo]
menu.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot
223
4
Set the recording settings.
[Mode]
Switches between Time Lapse Shot and Stop Motion Animation.
[Shooting Interval Setting]
[ON]: Sets the interval before the next recording takes place.
[OFF]: Takes pictures without leaving recording intervals.
[Start Time]
[Now]: Starts recording when the shutter button is pressed fully.
[After 2 Seconds]: Starts recording 2 seconds after the shutter button is
pressed fully.
[Start Time Set]: Starts recording at the set time.
[Image Count]/[Shooting Interval]
Sets the number of pictures and the recording interval to be taken.
The number of pictures and the recording interval to be taken can be
automatically calculated and set. (Setting Assistant for Time Lapse Shot
Recording: 225)
•
[Shooting Interval] is not available when [Shooting Interval Setting] is set to
[OFF].
[Exposure Leveling]
Adjusts the exposure automatically to prevent large changes in brightness
between adjacent frames.
[Create New Folder At Rec]
[Create a New Folder]: When set to [ON], a new folder is created each time
that Time Lapse Shot recording is started.
[File Number Reset]: When set to [ON], the file number is reset each time a
new folder is created.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot
224
5
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
6
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
•
When [Start Time Set] is set, the camera will enter into sleep status until the
start time is reached.
•
During recording standby, the camera enters into sleep status when no
operation is performed for a certain period of time.
•
The recording will stop automatically.
7
Create a video. (Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion
Animation Videos: 234)
•
After the recording has stopped, select [Yes] on the confirmation screen to
proceed to create a video.
Even if you select [No], you can still create a video with [Time Lapse Video] in
the [Playback] ([Process Image]) menu. ([Time Lapse Video]: 482)
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot
225
Setting Assistant for Time Lapse Shot Recording
When [DISP.] is pressed in the [Image Count]/[Shooting Interval] setting
screen, [Image Count] and [Shooting Interval] can be set by automatically
calculating them from the frame rate, time, and recording duration of the
video to be created.
1 Press 34 to select the item and then press .
[Production Frame Rate]
Sets the frame rate of videos to be created.
It can be set in the range between 1 fps and 99 fps.
[Video Length]
Sets the playback time of videos to be created.
It can be set in the range between 00m01s and 99m59s.
[Time Lapse Shooting Duration]
Sets the Time Lapse Shot duration.
It can be set in the range between 00h00m01s and 99h59m59s.
2 Press [DISP.] to confirm.
•
The settings are reflected when you select [Yes].
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot
226
•
[Image Count] can be set in the range between 1 and 9999.
•
[Shooting Interval] is set in the range between 00m01s and 99m59s.
Decimal places are rounded down if the number is not evenly divisible.
•
When the setting is one where recording is not possible, [Image Count] or
[Shooting Interval] is displayed in red letters.
•
When [Shooting Interval Setting] is [OFF], the Time Lapse Shot settings cannot
be automatically calculated.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot
227
Operations during Time Lapse Shot Recording
Pressing the shutter button halfway during sleep status will turn on the
camera.
•
You can perform the following operations by pressing [Q] during Time Lapse Shot
recording.
[Continue]
Returns to the recording. (Only during recording)
[Pause]
Pauses the recording. (Only during recording)
[Resume]
Resumes the recording. (Only while paused)
•
You can also press the shutter button to resume.
[End]
Stops the Time Lapse Shot recording.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Time Lapse Shot
228
•
Pictures recorded to more than one card cannot be combined into a single video.
•
The camera gives priority to achieving the standard exposure, so it may not take
pictures at the set interval or take the set number of pictures.
Furthermore, it may not end at the end time displayed on the screen.
•
Time Lapse Shot is paused in the following cases.
– When the charge on the battery runs out
– When you set the camera on/off switch to [OFF]
You can set the camera on/off switch to [OFF] and replace the battery or card.
Set the camera on/off switch to [ON] and then press the shutter button fully to
resume recording.
(Note that the images recorded after replacing the card will be saved as a
separate set of group images.)
•
[Exposure Leveling] is not available if ISO sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO]
in [M] mode.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation
229
Recording with Stop Motion Animation
Take pictures while moving the subject little by little.
The pictures taken will be saved as a set of group images that can be
combined into a stop motion video. (Group Images: 461)
1
Press [ ] (4).
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation
230
2
Press 21 to select [Time Lapse/Animation] and press
3.
≥You can also select by rotating .
3
Set [Mode] to [Stop Motion Animation].
≥This can also be set in [Time Lapse/Animation] in the [Photo]
menu.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation
231
4
Set the recording settings.
[Mode]
Switches between Time Lapse Shot and Stop Motion Animation.
[Add to Picture Group]
Allows you to continue recording for a set of stop motion images that have
already been recorded.
•
Select an image and proceed to Step
6
.
[Auto Shooting]
[ON]: Takes pictures automatically at a set recording interval.
[OFF]: This is for taking pictures manually, frame by frame.
[Shooting Interval]
Sets the recording interval for [Auto Shooting].
5
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation
232
6
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
≥Take pictures repeatedly while moving the subject little by little.
•
The recording screen displays up to two pictures taken previously. Use them
as reference for the amount of movement.
•
You can play back the recorded stop motion images by pressing [ ] during
recording.
Press [ ] to delete unnecessary images.
To return to the recording screen, press [ ] again.
7
Stop recording.
≥Press and then select [Time Lapse/Animation] from the
[Photo] menu to stop recording.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording with Stop Motion Animation
233
8
Create a video. (Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion
Animation Videos: 234)
•
After the recording has stopped, select [Yes] on the confirmation screen to
proceed to create a video.
Even if you select [No], you can still create a video with [Stop Motion Video] in
the [Playback] ([Process Image]) menu. ([Stop Motion Video]: 482)
•
Up to 9999 frames can be recorded.
•
If the camera is turned off while recording, a message for resuming the recording
is displayed when it is turned on. Selecting [Yes] allows you to continue the
recording from the interruption point.
•
A picture cannot be selected from [Add to Picture Group] when it is the only one
that was taken.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos
234
Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation
Videos
After performing Time Lapse Shot or stop motion recording, you can
proceed to create a video.
•
Refer to the sections below about these recording functions.
– Recording with Time Lapse Shot: 221
– Recording with Stop Motion Animation: 229
•
You can also create videos with [Time Lapse Video] ([Time Lapse Video]: 482) or
[Stop Motion Video] ([Stop Motion Video]: 482) in the [Playback] menu.
1
Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen that appears
after recording.
2
Set the options for creating a video.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos
235
3
Select [OK].
≥A video will be created in the [MP4] recording file format.
[OK]
Creates a video.
[Rec Quality]
Sets the video image quality.
[Frame Rate]
Sets the number of frames per second.
The larger the number is, the smoother the video will be.
[Sequence]
[NORMAL]: Splices pictures together in recording order.
[REVERSE]: Splices pictures together in reverse recording order.
•
Videos cannot be created when the [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz
(CINEMA)].
•
Videos cannot be created if the recording time exceeds 30 minutes.
•
In the following cases, videos cannot be created if the file size exceeds 4 GB:
– When an SDHC memory card is being used and a 4K [Rec Quality] is set
– When an FHD [Rec Quality] is set
•
[Time Lapse Video] and [Stop Motion Video] are not available when using the
following function:
– [Auto Transfer] (when there is an image queued to be transferred)
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer
236
Recording Using the Self-timer
1
Press [ ] (4).
2
Press 21 to select [Self Timer] and press 3.
≥You can also select by rotating .
• When recording videos, set [Self Timer For Video] in [Self Timer
Setting] of the [Video] ([Others (Video)]) menu to [ON].
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer
237
3
Select the self-timer time.
≥Press 21 to select an item and then press .
≥You can also select by rotating or .
≥This can also be set in the [Photo]/[Video] menu. (Setting the
Self-timer Time: 239)
4
Decide on the composition and then adjust the focus.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
•
The focus and exposure are fixed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer
238
5
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button or video rec. button.
≥After the self-timer light blinks, shooting or video recording starts.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer
239
Setting the Self-timer Time
Picture: [] [] Select [Self Timer]
Video: [] [] [Self Timer Setting] Select [Self Timer]
*
* This can be set by setting [Self Timer For Video] to [ON] in [Self Timer Setting] in
the [Video] ([Others (Video)]) menu.
[] Takes a picture after 10 seconds.
[]
Takes 3 pictures at approx. 2 second intervals after 10 seconds.
(When recording video, it will be the same operation with
[ ].)
[]
Takes a picture after 2 seconds.
•
This setting is a convenient way to avoid camera shake
caused by pressing the shutter button.
[] to [ ]
(Custom)
Takes a picture after the time selected with [Custom Time].
[SET]
[Custom Time]
Sets the time until recording starts.
[10SEC]/[9SEC]/[8SEC]/[7SEC]/[6SEC]/
[5SEC]/[4SEC]/[3SEC]/[2SEC]
[Display
Countdown]
A countdown is displayed on the recording
screen when the self-timer is Custom.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Recording Using the Self-timer
240
•
We recommend using a tripod when recording with the self-timer.
•
[Self Timer] in the [Photo] ([Others (Photo)]) menu and [Self Timer] in the [Self
Timer Setting] ([Video] ([Others (Video)]) menu) work together.
•
When the following functions are being used, [ ] is not available:
– [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] ([Filter Settings])
– [Bracketing]
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
241
Bracket Recording
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera can record multiple
images while automatically changing the setting value for exposure,
aperture, focus or white balance (adjustment value or color temperature).
1
Set [Bracketing Type].
≥ [] [] [Bracketing] [Bracketing Type]
•
Aperture Bracket can be selected in the following modes:
– [A] mode
– [M] mode (when ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO])
•
White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) can be selected when the white
balance is set to [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ].
1 2 3 4
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
242
2
Set [More Settings].
≥For information about [More Settings], refer to page for each
bracketing method.
3
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
4
Focus on the subject and then take pictures.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
243
Setting Items ([Bracketing Type])
[ ] (Exposure Bracket)
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera records while changing the exposure.
([More Settings] (Exposure Bracket): 245)
[ ] (Aperture Bracket)
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera records while changing the aperture
value. ([More Settings] (Aperture Bracket): 246)
[ ] (Focus Bracket)
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera records while changing the focus
point. ([More Settings] (Focus Bracket): 247)
[ ] (White Balance Bracket)
When the shutter button is pressed once, the camera automatically records three
images with the different white balance adjustment values. ([More Settings] (White
Balance Bracket): 248)
[ ] (White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature))
When the shutter button is pressed once, the camera automatically records three
images with the different white balance color temperatures. ([More Settings] (White
Balance Bracket (Color Temperature)): 248)
[OFF]
How to Cancel Bracketing
Select [OFF] in Step
1
.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
244
•
When [Aspect Ratio] is set to [65:24]/[2:1], only the Exposure Bracket can be
used.
•
White Balance Bracket and White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) are not
available when using the following functions:
– [iA] mode
– Taking burst pictures
– [RAW+FINE]/[RAW+STD.]/[RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– [Filter Settings]
•
Bracket recording is not available while you are using the following functions:
– SH burst recording
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)
– High Resolution mode
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
245
[More Settings] (Exposure Bracket)
[Step]
Sets the image count and exposure compensation step.
[3•1/3] (record 3 images in 1/3 EV steps) to [7•1] (record 7 images in 1 EV steps)
[Sequence]
Sets the order in which images are recorded.
[Single Shot Setting]
[]: Takes only one image each time the shutter button is pressed.
[]: Takes all of the set number of images when the shutter button is pressed once.
•
The [BKT] icon blinks until all of the set number of pictures is taken.
•
When you record images with Exposure Bracket after setting the exposure
compensation value, the images recorded are based on the selected exposure
compensation value.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
246
[More Settings] (Aperture Bracket)
[Image Count]
[3]/[5]: Records the set number of images while alternately setting the aperture value
in the sequence of one before and then one after using the initial aperture value as the
reference.
[ALL]: Records images using all aperture values.
Example when the initial position is set to F8.0 (S-R2060)
(1) 1st image, (2) 2nd image, (3) 3rd image ... (7) 7th image
4.02.8 5.6 8.0 11 16 22
(1)(6) (4) (2) (3) (5) (7)
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
247
[More Settings] (Focus Bracket)
[Step]
Sets the focus adjustment step.
•
The distance that the focus point is moved becomes shorter if the initial focus point is
close, and longer if it is far away.
[Image Count]
Sets the image count.
•
This cannot be set when taking burst pictures.
Burst pictures are taken while the shutter button is pressed.
[Sequence]
[0/−/+]: Records while alternately moving the focus point in the sequence of forward
and then backward using the initial focus point as the reference.
[0/+]: Records while moving the focus point toward the far side using the initial focus
point as the reference.
Example when [Sequence]: [0/−/+] is set
Example when [Sequence]: [0/+] is set
(A) Focus: closer
(B) Focus: more distant
(1) 1st image, (2) 2nd image ... (5) 5th image ...
•
When [Focus Limiter] is set, recording is within the set range where AF works.
•
Pictures recorded with Focus Bracket are displayed as images of one group.
(Group Images: 461)
・・・ ・・・
(A) (B)
(1) (3) (5)(2)(4)
・・・
(A) (B)
(3) (4) (5)(2)(1)
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Bracket Recording
248
[More Settings] (White Balance Bracket)
Rotate or to set the correction step and then press .
Rotate to the right:
Horizontal direction ([A] - [B])
Rotate to the left:
Vertical direction ([G] - [M])
•
The correction step can also be set by touching [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ].
[More Settings] (White Balance Bracket (Color
Temperature))
Rotate or to set the correction step and then press .
•
The correction step can also be set by touching [ ]/[ ].
GGGGGGG
AAAAAABBBBBBB
MMMMMM
±300K
5500K5500K5500K
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Silent Mode]
249
[Silent Mode]
This disables all operation sounds and light output at once.
The audio from the speaker will be muted and the AF assist light will be set
to forced off mode.
•
The following settings are fixed:
– [AF Assist Light]: [OFF]
– [Beep Volume]: [ ] (OFF)
– [AF Beep Volume]: [ ] (OFF)
– [Shutter Vol.]: [ ] (OFF)
Picture: [] [] Select [Silent Mode]
Video: [] [] Select [Silent Mode]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Silent Mode]
250
•
Even when [ON] is set, the following functions light/blink:
– Charging light/Network connection light
– Card access lights
– Self-timer light
•
Use this function at your own responsibility sufficiently considering the privacy,
portrait, and other rights of subjects.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Synchro Scan(Photo)]
251
[Synchro Scan(Photo)]
The flicker or horizontal stripes of the light source can be mitigated by
making fine adjustments to the shutter speed.
The shutter speed set in Synchro Scan is saved separately from the
shutter speed used for normal recording. In the Synchro Scan setting
screen, you can call up the current shutter speed for normal recording and
adjust it.
1
Set the recording mode to [S] or [M].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
2
Set [Synchro Scan(Photo)].
≥ [] [] [Synchro Scan(Photo)] [ON]
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Synchro Scan(Photo)]
252
3
Set the shutter speed.
≥Press 3421 to select the numeric value and then press .
•
The shutter speed can be set in the range between 1/48.0 and 1/8192.0 of a
second.
•
Press 34 to change the shutter speed in 1/4 TV intervals. Press 21 to
make fine adjustments.
•
You can call up the current shutter speed for normal recording by pressing
[DISP.].
•
Make adjustments to the shutter speed while looking at the screen until there
is no noticeable flickering or horizontal stripes.
•
There may be a difference between what you see on the recording screen and
the actual results of recording. We recommend shooting some tests beforehand.
ュリヴヱハ
Current shutter speed
60.160.1
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Min. Shutter Speed]
253
[Min. Shutter Speed]
Sets the minimum shutter speed when the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO].
[] [] Select [Min. Shutter Speed]
[AUTO]
The camera automatically sets the minimum shutter speed.
[1/8000] to [1/1]
•
The shutter speed may become slower than the set value in recording situations
where correct exposure cannot be achieved.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – [Shutter Delay]
254
[Shutter Delay]
To reduce camera shake and shutter-induced blur, the shutter is released
after the specified time has passed since the shutter button was pressed.
[] [] Select [Shutter Delay]
Settings: [8SEC]/[4SEC]/[2SEC]/[1SEC]/[OFF]
•
When the following functions are being used, [Shutter Delay] is not available:
– Video recording/SH burst recording
– High Resolution mode
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
255
Image Stabilizer
≥ Image Stabilizer Settings: 258
This camera can use both the in-body image stabilizer and the in-lens
image stabilizer.
It is compatible with the Dual I.S.2 system that is an effective combination
of the 2 image stabilizers.
Furthermore, during video recording, you can use the 5-Axis Hybrid Image
Stabilizer that incorporates electronic stabilization.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
256
Combinations of lenses and image stabilizers (As of May 2024)
Image stabilizers that can be used will differ depending on the attached
lens.
•
The 5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer ([E-Stabilization (Video)]: 261) can be used
with any lenses.
Attached lens
Available image
stabilizer
Example of icon
Panasonic lenses with image
stabilization function
Body+Lens
(Dual I.S.2)
Other manufacturers’ lenses
with image stabilization
function
Body or Lens
/
Lenses without image
stabilizer function
Body
Lenses without function to
communicate with this
camera
Body
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
257
Using the Image Stabilizer
•
When using a lens with an O.I.S. switch, set the switch on the lens to [ON].
•
When using a lens that does not have a communication function with this camera,
after turning on the camera, a message asking for confirmation of the lens
information is displayed.
Correctly operating the image stabilization function requires that the focal length be
set to match the attached lens.
Set the focal length in accordance as prompted by the message.
This can also be set using the menu. ([Lens Information]: 264)
•
When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the camera shake alert icon [ ]
may be displayed on the recording screen.
If this is displayed, we recommend using a tripod, the self timer.
•
We recommend turning off the image stabilizer function when using a tripod.
•
The image stabilizer may cause vibration or produce operational sound during
operation, but these are not malfunctions.
•
When using a lens that does not have a communication function with this
camera, you can hide the message asking for confirmation of the lens
information that is displayed after turning on the camera:
([Lens Info. Confirmation]: 553)
•
You can display the reference point and check the camera shake status:
([I.S. Status Scope]: 543)
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
258
Image Stabilizer Settings
Set the image stabilizer operation to match the recording situation.
Picture: [] [] Select [Image Stabilizer]
Video: [] [] Select [Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode]
Sets the stabilization movement (blur) to match the recording method (normal,
panning). ([Operation Mode]: 260)
[Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)]
[ ] ([Body]): The in-body image stabilizer corrects for vertical, horizontal, and
rotational shake.
[ ] ([Lens + Body (Roll)]): The in-lens image stabilizer corrects for vertical and
horizontal shake, while the in-body image stabilizer corrects for rotational shake.
•
This can be set when using other manufacturers’ lenses with an image stabilization
function.
[When to Activate]
[ALWAYS]: The image stabilizer is always operating.
[HALF-SHUTTER]: The image stabilizer operates when the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
[E-Stabilization (Video)]
Through the combined use of the in-lens, in-body, and electronic image stabilizers,
corrections are made to camera shake on 5 axes during video recording along the
vertical, horizontal, roll, pitch, and yaw axes, and to the peripheral distortion that
readily occurs when you are using a wide-angle lens. (5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer)
([E-Stabilization (Video)]: 261)
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
259
[Boost I.S. (Video)]
Increases the effectiveness of the image stabilizer during video recording.
This effect can help provide a stable composition when you want to perform recording
from a fixed perspective. ([Boost I.S. (Video)]: 262)
[Anamorphic (Video)]
You can switch to an image stabilizer that suits anamorphic recording. ([Anamorphic
(Video)]: 263)
[Lens Information]
When using a lens that does not have a communication function with the camera,
register the lens information in the camera. ([Lens Information]: 264)
•
When the following functions are being used, [When to Activate] is fixed to
[ALWAYS]:
– [ ] ([Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)])
– [ ] mode
– [S&Q] mode
– Video recording
•
When the following functions are being used, [E-Stabilization (Video)] is not
available:
– [S&Q] mode
– [Live Cropping]
•
While you are using the following functions, [HIGH] in [E-Stabilization (Video)] is
not available:
– Other than [OFF] in [Anamorphic (Video)]
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
260
[Operation Mode]
Set the stabilization movement (blur) to match the recording method
(normal, panning).
[Normal]
Corrects vertical, horizontal, and rotational camera shake.
This function is suitable for normal recording.
[Panning (Auto)]
Automatically detects the panning direction, and corrects vertical and horizontal
camera shake.
This function is suitable for panning.
[Panning (Left/Right)]
Corrects vertical camera shake.
This is suitable for horizontal panning.
[Panning (Up/Down)]
Corrects horizontal camera shake.
This is suitable for vertical panning.
[OFF]
Turns the image stabilization function OFF.
•
Operation modes that can be used will differ depending on the used lenses and on
[Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)] settings.
•
[Panning (Auto)] is not displayed when using other manufacturers’ lenses with an
image stabilization function with [Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)] set to [ ]. Set to
either [Panning (Left/Right)] or [Panning (Up/Down)] to suit the panning direction.
•
When using lenses with an O.I.S. switch, the camera’s operation mode cannot be
set to [OFF]. Set the switch on the lens to [OFF].
•
When the following functions are being used, [Operation Mode] switches to [ ]
([Normal]):
– [ ] mode
– [S&Q] mode
– Video recording
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
261
[E-Stabilization (Video)]
Through the combined use of the in-lens, in-body, and electronic image
stabilizers, corrections are made to camera shake on 5 axes during video
recording along the vertical, horizontal, roll, pitch, and yaw axes, and to the
peripheral distortion that readily occurs when you are using a wide-angle
lens. (5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer)
[HIGH]
Large shakes and peripheral distortion are corrected electronically.
The angle of view is narrower than [STANDARD].
•
[ ] is displayed on the screen during video recording.
[STANDARD]
Shakes and peripheral distortion are corrected electronically.
The angle of view is narrower.
•
[ ] is displayed on the screen during video recording.
[OFF]
Turns the electronic image stabilizer (video) OFF.
•
There will be variation in the effectiveness of the correction depending on the
video mode used for recording and the recording conditions.
•
Using [E-Stabilization (Video)] may cause a drop in resolution.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
262
[Boost I.S. (Video)]
Increase the effectiveness of the image stabilizer during video recording.
This effect can help provide a stable composition when you want to
perform recording from a fixed perspective.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
When [Boost I.S. (Video)] is operating, [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
•
To change composition while recording, first set this to [OFF] before moving the
camera.
To set this to [OFF] during recording, use the Fn button. (Fn Buttons: 488)
•
Longer focal lengths will result in weaker stabilization.
•
When [Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)] is set to [ ], [Boost I.S. (Video)] is not
available.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
263
[Anamorphic (Video)]
You can switch to an image stabilizer that suits anamorphic recording.
Settings:
[ ]([2.0×])/[ ]([1.8×])/[ ]([1.5×])/[ ]([1.33×])/[ ]([1.30×])/
[OFF]
•
Make settings to suit the magnification of the anamorphic lens you are using.
•
While [Anamorphic (Video)] is functioning, the set magnification appears on the
image stabilizer icons on the recording screen, as shown by [ ] and [ ].
•
When [Boost I.S. (Video)] is set, [Boost I.S. (Video)] is prioritized.
•
When the following function is being used, [Anamorphic (Video)] is fixed to [OFF]:
– [ ] ([Body(B.I.S.) / Lens(O.I.S.)])
•
Image stabilizer functions on your lens may not work correctly. Turn off the image
stabilizer function on your lens if this is the case.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
264
[Lens Information]
Register the information for lenses that cannot communicate with the
camera.
Match the in-body image stabilizer with the information of the lens you
register.
Press 34 to select the lens information to use and then press .
•
In the default setting, the lens information for 6 lenses with a focal length of between
24 mm and 135 mm is registered.
The lens information for up to 12 lenses can be registered.
Registering, modifying, and deleting lens information
1 Press 34 to select the lens information and then press [DISP.].
•
If lens information that has not been registered is selected, press to
proceed to Step 3.
2 Press 34 to select [Edit], [Sorting], or [Delete] and then press .
•
You can change the display order of lens information by selecting [Sorting].
•
The lens information is deleted when you select [Delete].
•
You cannot delete the lens information for a lens that is being used.
3 Enter the lens Information.
•
The lens information changes if the lens information has already been
registered.
4 (If lens information that has not been registered is selected) Press [DISP.] to
register the lens information.
Drive / Shutter / Image Stabilizer – Image Stabilizer
265
[Focal Length]
Enter the focal length.
•
The live view images can be enlarged for display when you rotate .
[I.S. Area]
You can set the range of stabilisation for the image stabiliser so that vignetting does
not occur due to the image stabiliser.
[70%]/[80%]/[90%]/[100%]
•
Rotate to select the range of stabilisation, then press to confirm.
•
When the four edges are selected by pressing 3421, the in-body image stabiliser
works and you can see if there is any vignetting. If vignetting has occurred, set again
to a smaller range.
[Lens Name]
Register the lens.
•
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 90)
•
Up to a maximum of 30 characters can be entered.
266
Metering / Exposure / ISO
Sensitivity
This chapter describes recording modes for determining exposure and ISO
sensitivity.
≥ [Metering Mode]: 267
≥ Program AE Mode: 269
≥ Aperture-Priority AE Mode: 273
≥ Shutter-Priority AE Mode: 276
≥ Manual Exposure Mode: 279
≥ Preview Mode: 284
≥ Exposure Compensation: 286
≥ Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 290
≥ ISO Sensitivity: 292
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – [Metering Mode]
267
[Metering Mode]
Type of optical measurement to measure brightness can be changed.
[ ]/[ ] [] Select [Metering Mode]
[ ] (Multi-metering)
Method in which the most suitable exposure is measured by judging the allocation of
brightness on the whole screen.
[ ] (Center-weighted)
Method used to perform measuring which focuses on the center of the screen.
[ ] (Spot)
Method used to measure the extremely small part around the spot-metering target (A).
•
When you move the AF area, the spot metering target also moves to match.
(A)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – [Metering Mode]
268
[ ] (Highlight-weighted)
Method used to perform measuring which focuses on the highlighted parts of the
screen to prevent overexposure.
This is suitable for theatre photography, etc.
•
The standard value for standard exposure can be adjusted:
([Exposure Offset Adjust.]: 520)
•
You can assign the function that records with the metering mode set to [ ]
(Spot) once only to an Fn button:
([1 Shot Spot Metering]: 493)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Program AE Mode
269
Program AE Mode
≥ Program Shift: 271
In [P] mode (Program AE mode), the camera automatically sets the shutter
speed and aperture value for the brightness of the subject.
You can also use Program Shift to change combinations of shutter speed
and aperture values while keeping the same exposure.
1
Set the recording mode to [P].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
2
Press the shutter button halfway.
≥This displays the aperture value and shutter speed value on the
recording screen.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Program AE Mode
270
•
If the correct exposure is not achieved, the aperture value (A) and shutter
speed (B) blink red.
3
Start recording.
F3.560
(A)(B)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Program AE Mode
271
Program Shift
You can change the shutter speed and aperture value combination set
automatically by the camera while maintaining the same exposure.
With this, you can, for example, make the background more defocused by
decreasing the aperture value or capture a moving subject more
dynamically by slowing the shutter speed.
1
Press the shutter button halfway.
•
This displays the aperture value and shutter speed value on the recording
screen. (Approx. 10 seconds)
2
Rotate or while the values are displayed.
•
This displays the Program Shift icon (C) on the recording screen.
3
Start recording.
Canceling Program Shift
•
Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
•
Rotate or until the Program Shift icon disappears.
F5.630
(C)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Aperture-Priority AE Mode
273
Aperture-Priority AE Mode
In [A] mode (Aperture-Priority AE mode), you can set the aperture value
before recording.
The shutter speed will be automatically set by the camera.
Smaller aperture values
It becomes easier to defocus the background.
Larger aperture values
It becomes easier to bring everything into focus including the background.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Aperture-Priority AE Mode
274
1
Set the recording mode to [A].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
2
Set the aperture value.
≥Rotate or .
3
Start recording.
•
If the correct exposure is not achieved when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, the aperture value and the shutter speed blink red.
F8.0
F8.0
F8.0
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Aperture-Priority AE Mode
275
Depth of Field Characteristics
Aperture value Small Large
Focal length of lens Telephoto Wide-angle
Distance to subject Near More distant
Depth of field
(area in sharp focus)
Shallow (narrow)
Example: When you want
to take a image with a
defocused background.
Deep (wide)
Example: When you want
to take a image with focus
as far as the background.
•
The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on the
recording screen.
To check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (Preview Mode:
284)
You can set the preview of the aperture effect to constantly operate in [A] mode
to check the depth of field while recording:
([Constant Preview]: 535)
•
The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may differ.
Check the images on the playback screen.
•
When using a lens with an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring to
other than [A] to use the aperture value of the lens.
•
You can customize dial operations:
([Dial Set.]: 533)
•
The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the relationship
between aperture value and shutter speed:
([Expo.Meter]: 541)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Shutter-Priority AE Mode
276
Shutter-Priority AE Mode
In [S] mode (Shutter-Priority AE mode), you can set the shutter speed
before recording.
The aperture value will be automatically set by the camera.
Slower shutter speeds
It becomes easier to capture motion
Faster shutter speeds
It becomes easier to freeze motion
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Shutter-Priority AE Mode
277
1
Set the recording mode to [S].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
2
Set the shutter speed.
≥Rotate or .
3
Start recording.
•
If the correct exposure is not achieved when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, the aperture value and the shutter speed blink red.
250
250
250
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Shutter-Priority AE Mode
278
•
There may be noticeable noise when recording with long exposure.
•
The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on the
recording screen.
To check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (Preview Mode:
284)
•
The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may differ.
Check the images on the playback screen.
•
You can customize dial operations:
([Dial Set.]: 533)
•
The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the relationship
between aperture value and shutter speed:
([Expo.Meter]: 541)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode
279
Manual Exposure Mode
≥ Available Shutter Speeds (Sec.): 282
≥ [T] (Time): 283
In [M] mode (Manual Exposure mode), you can record by manually setting
the aperture value and shutter speed.
In default settings, the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO].
As a result, the ISO sensitivity will be adjusted according to the aperture
value and shutter speed.
Exposure compensation can also be used when ISO sensitivity is set to
[AUTO].
1
Set the recording mode to [M].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode
280
2
Set the aperture value and shutter speed.
≥Rotate to set the aperture value (A), and to set the shutter
speed (B).
3
Start recording.
•
If the correct exposure is not achieved when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, the aperture value and the shutter speed blink red.
F5.630
30
30
(A)(B)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode
281
Manual Exposure Assist
When ISO sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO], Manual Exposure Assist
(example: ) will be displayed on the recording screen.
You can check the difference between the current exposure value and the
standard exposure (±0) measured by the camera.
•
Use Manual Exposure Assist as a guide.
We recommend checking the images on the playback screen when recording.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode
282
Available Shutter Speeds (Sec.)
•
[ELEC.]
[T] (Time, max. approx. 60 seconds
*
), 60
*
to 1/8000
* When the ISO sensitivity is higher than 1600, the shutter speed will be faster than
60 seconds.
•
There may be noticeable noise when recording with long exposure.
•
The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on the
recording screen.
To check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (Preview Mode:
284)
You can set the preview of the aperture effect and the shutter speed effect to
constantly operate in [M] mode to check the depth of field and movement of the
subject while recording:
([Constant Preview]: 535)
•
The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may differ.
Check the images on the playback screen.
•
When using a lens with an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring to
other than [A] to use the aperture value of the lens.
•
You can customize dial operations:
([Dial Set.]: 533)
•
The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the relationship
between aperture value and shutter speed:
([Expo.Meter]: 541)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Manual Exposure Mode
283
[T] (Time)
If you set the shutter speed to [T] (Time) and press the shutter button fully,
the shutter stays open. (max. approx. 60 seconds
*
)
The shutter closes when you press the shutter button again.
Use this when you want to keep the shutter open for a long time to record
images of fireworks, night scenery or a starry sky.
* When the ISO sensitivity is higher than 1600, the shutter speed will be faster than
60 seconds.
•
We recommend using a tripod during Time recording.
•
Time recording may create noticeable noise.
•
When the following functions are being used, Time is not available:
– SH burst recording
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation] (when set to [Auto Shooting])
– High Resolution mode
– [Bracketing]
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Preview Mode
284
Preview Mode
You can check the effects of aperture on the recording screen by physically
closing the aperture blades of the lens to the aperture value set for actual
recording.
In addition to the effects of aperture, you can check the effects of shutter
speed at the same time.
1
Register [Preview] to the Fn button. (Fn Buttons: 488)
2
Check the aperture effect.
≥Press the Fn button set in Step
1
.
•
Each press of the button switches between the effect preview screens.
Aperture effect: OFF
Shutter speed effect: OFF
Aperture effect: ON
Shutter speed effect: OFF
Aperture effect: ON
Shutter speed effect: ON
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Preview Mode
285
•
It is possible to record in preview mode.
•
Range for shutter speed effect check is 8 seconds to 1/8000 of a second.
•
Depending on the [Constant Preview] setting, there are preview screens that
cannot be displayed.
•
You can always confirm the effects of aperture on the recording screen when in
[A]/[M] mode:
([Constant Preview]: 535)
•
You can assign the function that enables you to view the aperture effect just while
the button is being pressed to an Fn button:
([Preview Aperture Effect]: 497)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Exposure Compensation
286
Exposure Compensation
≥ [i.Dynamic Range]: 289
You can compensate the exposure when the standard exposure
determined by the camera is too bright or too dark.
You can adjust the exposure in 1/3 EV steps in a range of ±5 EV.
When recording videos, the range changes to ±3 EV.
1
Press [ ].
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Exposure Compensation
287
2
Compensate the exposure.
≥Rotate or .
3
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
+3+3+1+1 +2+2 +3+3
-
5
-
5
-
4
-
4
-
3
-
3
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
100
+5+5+4+4
+
+
1
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Exposure Compensation
288
•
In [M] mode, you can compensate the exposure by setting the ISO sensitivity to
[AUTO].
•
When the exposure compensation value falls below or exceeds ±3 EV, the
brightness of the recording screen will no longer change.
Press the shutter button halfway or use AE Lock to reflect the value on the
recording screen.
•
The set exposure compensation value is stored even if you turn off the camera.
•
The standard value for standard exposure can be adjusted:
([Exposure Offset Adjust.]: 520)
•
You can set the exposure compensation value to be reset when the camera is
turned off:
([Exposure Comp. Reset]: 522)
•
Exposure Bracket can be set on the exposure compensation screen:
([Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting]: 532)
•
You can assign the function that matches the aperture value and shutter speed to
the standard exposure to an Fn button:
([One Push AE]: 493)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Exposure Compensation
289
[i.Dynamic Range]
Contrast and exposure are compensated when the brightness difference
between the background and subject is great.
[ ]/[ ] [] Select [i.Dynamic Range]
Settings: [AUTO]/[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]
•
Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording
conditions.
•
When the following functions are being used, [i.Dynamic Range] is not available:
– [Like709]/[V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT]/[Like2100(HLG)]/[Like2100(HLG) Full
Range] ([Photo Style])
– [Filter Settings]
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock)
290
Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock)
Lock the focus and exposure in advance to take pictures with the same
focus and exposure settings while changing the composition.
This is useful when you want to bring an edge of the screen into focus or
there is a backlight, for example.
1
Register [AE LOCK], [AF LOCK], or [AF/AE LOCK] to the
Fn button. (Fn Buttons: 488)
•
These cannot be registered to [Fn3] to [Fn7].
[AE LOCK]
The exposure is locked.
[AF LOCK]
The focus is locked.
[AF/AE LOCK]
Both focus and exposure are locked.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock)
291
2
Lock focus and exposure.
≥Press and hold the Fn button.
≥If focus is locked, then the AF lock icon (A) will be displayed.
≥If exposure is locked, then the AE lock icon (B) will be displayed.
3
Hold the Fn button to decide on the composition and
then perform recording.
≥Press the shutter button fully.
•
Program Shift can be set even when AE is locked.
•
You can maintain lock even without pressing and holding the Fn button:
([AF/AE Lock Hold]: 524)
•
You can make fine manual adjustments to the focus during AF Lock:
([AF+MF]: 525)
AFLAFL
AELAEL
(A)
(B)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity
292
ISO Sensitivity
≥ [Dual Native ISO Setting]: 296
≥ [ISO Sensitivity (photo)]: 297
You can set light sensitivity (ISO sensitivity).
With the default settings, you can set 100 to 51200 in 1/3 EV increments.
This camera supports Dual Native ISO which enables recording at high
sensitivity with reduced noise by switching the base sensitivity.
The base sensitivity can also be fixed as necessary.
1
Press [ISO] (3).
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity
293
2
Select ISO sensitivity.
≥Rotate or .
3
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
Characteristics of the ISO Sensitivity
By increasing the ISO sensitivity, the shutter speed can be increased in dark places
to prevent camera shake and subject blur. However, higher ISO sensitivities also
increase the amount of noise in the recorded images.
1
00
1
00
2
00
2
00
4
0
4
0
AUTO
AUTO
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity
294
Setting Items (ISO Sensitivity)
[AUTO]
The ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted according to the brightness.
•
Taking picture: Maximum [6400]
*1
•
Video recording: Maximum [6400]
*2
[100] to [51200]
The ISO sensitivity is fixed at the selected value.
•
The available ISO sensitivity range changes according to the setting of [Dual Native
ISO Setting] in the [Photo]/[Video] ([Image Quality]) menu. ([Dual Native ISO
Setting]: 296)
•
You can extend the ISO sensitivity range in between a lower limit of [50] and an
upper limit of [204800] by setting [Extended ISO] ([Extended ISO]: 519) to [ON] in
the [Custom] ([Image Quality]) menu.
*1 Default setting. The upper limit can be changed with [ISO Sensitivity (photo)].
*2 Default setting. The upper limit can be changed with [ISO Sensitivity (video)].
•
When the following functions are being used, the ISO sensitivity that can be set is
restricted.
– High Resolution mode: Up to an upper limit of [3200]
– [Filter Settings]: Up to an upper limit of [6400]
– [Cinelike D2]/[Cinelike V2] ([Photo Style]): Down to a lower limit of [200]
(The lower limit changes to [100] when [Extended ISO] is set.)
– [Like709] ([Photo Style]): Down to a lower limit of [100]
– [V-Log] ([Photo Style]): Down to a lower limit of [640], up to an upper limit of
[51200]
(The lower limit changes to [320] when [Extended ISO] is set.)
– [Like2100(HLG)]/[Like2100(HLG) Full Range] ([Photo Style]): Down to a lower limit
of [400]
•
When [Photo Style] is set to [REAL TIME LUT], the range of ISO sensitivity levels
you can use depends on the base Photo Style of the applied LUT file.
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity
295
•
You can set upper and lower limits for ISO Auto:
([ISO Sensitivity (photo)]: 297, [ISO Sensitivity (video)]: 359)
•
You can change the intervals between ISO sensitivity settings values:
([ISO Increments]: 519)
•
The setting range of ISO sensitivity can be extended:
([Extended ISO]: 519)
•
You can set the lower limit for shutter speed for ISO Auto:
([Min. Shutter Speed]: 253)
•
You can set the upper limit for ISO Auto on the ISO sensitivity settings screen:
([ISO Displayed Setting]: 532)
•
You can change the units for sensitivity to dB when recording video:
([SS/Gain Operation]: 378)
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity
296
[Dual Native ISO Setting]
You can set whether to switch the base sensitivity automatically or to fix it.
[ ]/[ ] [] Select [Dual Native ISO Setting]
[AUTO]
The base sensitivity is automatically switched according to the brightness.
•
ISO sensitivity can be set within the following ranges:
– [AUTO] / [100] to [51200]
– When [Extended ISO] is set: [AUTO] / [50] to [204800]
[LOW]
Sets the base sensitivity for low sensitivity.
•
ISO sensitivity can be set within the following ranges:
– [AUTO] / [100] to [800]
– When [Extended ISO] is set: [AUTO] / [50] to [800]
[HIGH]
The base sensitivity is automatically switched according to the brightness.
•
ISO sensitivity can be set within the following ranges:
– [AUTO] / [640] to [51200]
– When [Extended ISO] is set: [AUTO] / [320] to [204800]
•
[Dual Native ISO Setting] is fixed to [AUTO] in the following cases:
– [iA] mode
– High Resolution Mode (When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log] or [REAL TIME
LUT] (base Photo Style is [V-Log]))
Metering / Exposure / ISO Sensitivity – ISO Sensitivity
297
[ISO Sensitivity (photo)]
Sets the lower and upper limits for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is
set to [AUTO].
[] [] Select [ISO Sensitivity (photo)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting]
Sets the lower limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is [AUTO].
•
Set in the range between [100] and [25600].
[ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting]
Sets the upper limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is [AUTO].
•
Set to [AUTO] or in the range between [200] and [51200].
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
299
White Balance (WB)
≥ Adjusting the White Balance: 305
White balance (WB) is a function that corrects the color cast produced by
the light illuminating the subject.
It corrects the colors so that white objects appear in white to make the
overall color closer to what is seen by the eye.
Normally, you can use auto ([AWB], [AWBc] or [AWBw]) to obtain the
optimal white balance.
Set this function when the coloring of the image is different from what you
expected, or you want to change the coloring to capture the ambience.
1
Press [WB] (1).
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
300
2
Select the white balance.
≥Rotate or .
3
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
AWBc
AWBc
AWBw
AWBw
WB
WBWBWB
WBWBWBWBWBWBWB
AWB
AWB
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
301
Setting Items (White Balance)
[AWB]
Auto
[AWBc]
Auto (Reduces the reddish hue under an incandescent light source)
[AWBw]
Auto (Leaves the reddish hue under an incandescent light source)
[]
Clear sky
[]
Cloudy sky
[]
Shade under a clear sky
[]
Incandescent light
[] to []
Set mode 1 to 4 (Registering the White Set: 304)
[] to []
Color temperatures 1 to 4 (Color Temperature Setting: 304)
1
4
1
4
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
302
(1) [AWB] will work within this range.
(2) Blue sky
(3) Cloudy sky (Rain)
(4) Shade
(5) Sunlight
(6) White fluorescent light
(7) Incandescent light bulb
(8) Sunrise and sunset
(9) Candlelight
K=Kelvin Color Temperature
(1)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(4)
(3)
(2)
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
303
•
Under lighting such as fluorescent or LED lighting, the appropriate white balance
will vary depending on the lighting type.
Use [AWB], [AWBc], [AWBw] or [ ] to [ ].
•
The white balance is fixed to [AWB] while [Filter Settings] is being used.
•
It is possible to temporarily lock auto white balance:
([AWB Lock Setting]: 521)
1
4
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
304
Registering the White Set
Take pictures of a white object under the light source of the recording
location to adjust the white balance until it appears white.
1 Press [WB] (1) and then select any value from [ ] to [ ].
2 Press 3.
3 Aim the camera at a white object so that it appears inside the frame at the center
of the screen and then press .
•
This will set the white balance and return you to the recording screen.
Color Temperature Setting
Set the numeric value for the white balance color temperature.
1 Press [WB] (1) and then select any value from [ ] to [ ].
2 Press 3.
•
The color temperature setting screen is displayed.
3 Press 34 to select the color temperature and then press .
•
You can set the White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) by rotating or
. ([More Settings] (White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature)): 248)
•
You can set a color temperature from [2500K] to [10000K].
•
In [ ]/[S&Q] mode or when [Video-Priority Display] in the [Custom] ([Monitor /
Display (Video)]) menu is set to [ON], the kelvin values are displayed on the
recording screen.
1 4
1 4
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
305
Adjusting the White Balance
You can adjust the coloring even when the coloring you want to apply is not
produced by the selected white balance.
1
Press [WB] (1).
2
Select the white balance and then press 4.
≥The adjustment screen is displayed.
3
Adjust the coloring.
2: [A] (AMBER: ORANGE)
3: [G] (GREEN: GREENISH)
1: [B] (BLUE: BLUISH)
4: [M] (MAGENTA: REDDISH)
•
You can also touch the graph to make adjustments.
•
Press [DISP.] to return to the unadjusted state.
•
You can set the White Balance Bracket by rotating or . ([More
Settings] (White Balance Bracket): 248)
GGG
GGG
MMM
MMM
AAA
AAAB
BBB
BBB
White Balance / Image Quality – White Balance (WB)
306
4
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
•
When the white balance is adjusted, the color of its recording screen icon
changes to the adjusted color.
Adjusting toward the [G] side will display [+], while adjusting toward the [M] side
will display [−].
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
307
[Photo Style]
You can select the finishing settings of images to suit your subjects and
expression styles.
The image quality can be adjusted for each Photo Style.
You can also apply the LUT file you have loaded in the camera and record
pictures and videos.
[ ]/[ ] [] Select [Photo Style]
[Standard]
The standard setting.
[Vivid]
A setting that produces a more vivid quality with higher saturation and contrast.
[Natural]
A setting that produces a softer quality with lower contrast.
[L.ClassicNeo]
A setting for a film-like effect that has a nostalgic, soft coloring.
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
308
[Flat]
A setting that produces a flatter image quality with lower saturation and contrast.
[Landscape]
A setting suited for sceneries with vivid blue skies and greens.
[Portrait]
A setting suited for portraits with a healthy and beautiful skin tone.
[Monochrome]
A monochrome setting with no color shades.
[L.Monochrome]
A monochrome setting with rich gradation and crisp black accents.
[L.Monochrome D]
A monochrome setting that creates a dynamic impression with enhanced highlights
and shadows.
[L.Monochrome S]
A setting for a monochrome effect with a gentle touch suited to portraits.
[LEICA Monochrome]
A setting mode that realizes Leica monochrome mode, featuring deep contrasts
between black and white.
[Cinelike D2]
A setting that creates a film-like finishing touch using a gamma curve and gives priority
to the dynamic range.
•
This function is suitable for video editing processes.
[Cinelike V2]
A setting that creates a film-like finishing touch using a gamma curve that gives priority
to the contrast.
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
309
[Like709]
A setting that minimizes overexposure by applying a gamma curve correction
equivalent to Rec.709 to perform compression (knee adjustment) of high-luminance
areas. (Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee): 357)
•
Rec.709 is an abbreviation of “ITU-R Recommendation BT.709”, a standard for
high-definition broadcasting.
[V-Log]
A gamma curve setting intended for post-production processing. (Log Recording:
412)
•
It allows you to add rich gradation to images during post-production editing.
[REAL TIME LUT]
You can apply the LUT file that was registered in [LUT Library]. ([LUT Library]: 328)
•
[Sample LUT1] is applied in the default setting.
•
The Photo Style acting as the base is set automatically, depending on the applied
LUT file. ([V-Log] is set if there is no base Photo Style information in the LUT file.)
•
Use My Photo Style when you want to change the Photo Style that will act as the
base.
•
The Photo Style can also be changed to [REAL TIME LUT] in the recording screen
by pressing [LUT]. ([REAL TIME LUT]: 326)
Selecting the LUT file to apply
1 Press 34 to select [LUT] and then press [LUT].
2 Rotate or to select the LUT file to apply, then press .
3 Press the shutter button or video rec. button to start recording.
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
310
[Like2100(HLG)]
*1
A setting used to record HLG format video. (HLG Videos: 417)
•
[Luminance Level] is fixed to [64-940].
[Like2100(HLG) Full Range]
*1, 2
A setting used to record HLG format video. (HLG Videos: 417)
•
[Luminance Level] is fixed to [0-1023].
[MY PHOTO STYLE 1]
*2
to [MY PHOTO STYLE 10]
*2
Adjusts the image quality of Photo Style items to your preferred settings and registers
these as My Photo Style items. (Registering Settings in My Photo Style: 319)
•
Effects up to [MY PHOTO STYLE 4] are displayed with the default settings.
Applying a LUT file
With image quality adjustments, you can apply up to 2 LUT files registered in the [LUT
Library]. ([LUT Library]: 328)
•
When applying 2 LUT files, the images with [LUT1] applied have [LUT2] applied.
•
The Photo Style will be the base Photo Style of the applied LUT file ([LUT1] if 2 LUT
files are applied).
When applying a LUT file created with image editing software, select the [Photo
Style] that is the same as the Photo Style used as the base when creating it.
When you select a different [Photo Style], the images may not be displayed or
recorded correctly.
•
[ ] switches to [ ] when [LUT1] or [LUT2] is applied in image quality
adjustments.
*1 Can only be selected when in the [ ] mode and set to a 10-bit [Rec Quality].
([Rec Quality]: 123)
*2 You can set the items to display in the menu with [Show/Hide Photo Style] in
[Photo Style Settings]. ([Photo Style Settings]: 518)
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
311
•
In [iA] mode, operation differs from that in other recording modes.
– [Standard] or [Monochrome] can be set.
– The setting will be reset to [Standard] when the camera is switched to another
recording mode or it is turned off.
– Image quality cannot be adjusted.
•
The range of available ISO sensitivities is different when [Photo Style] is set to
the following (Setting Items (ISO Sensitivity): 294):
– [Cinelike D2]/[Cinelike V2]/[Like709]/[V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT](base Photo
Style is [V-Log])/[Like2100(HLG)]/[Like2100(HLG) Full Range]
The range of available ISO sensitivities is also different for [LOW] and [HIGH] in
[Dual Native ISO Setting].
Reset the exposure if necessary when ISO sensitivity changes.
•
You can set the knee mode with [Like709]. (Recording While Controlling
Overexposure (Knee): 357)
•
When [LUT] is set to [OFF] in the image quality adjustments of [REAL TIME
LUT], [Photo Style] will operate the same as the Photo Style that acts as the
base.
•
When [Filter Settings] is being used, [Photo Style] is not available.
•
You can make detailed Photo Style settings:
([My Photo Style Settings]: 518)
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
312
Adjusting Image Quality
1 Press 21 to select the type of Photo Style.
2 Press 34 to select an item and then press 21 to adjust.
•
Adjusted items are indicated with [¢].
3 Press .
•
When the image quality is adjusted, the Photo Style icon on the recording
screen is indicated with [¢].
Settings Items (Image Quality Adjustment)
[Contrast]
Adjusts the contrast in the image.
[Highlight]
Adjusts the brightness of bright areas.
[Shadow]
Adjusts the brightness of dark areas.
[Saturation]
Adjusts the vividness of colors.
[Color Tone]
Adjusts blue and yellow tints.
-
5
-
500
+5+5
±0
±0
±0
±0
±0
6WDQGDUG
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
313
[Hue]
Assuming that the reference point is red, this rotates the hue toward violet/magenta or
yellow/green to adjust the coloring of the entire image.
[Filter Effect]
[Yellow]: Enhances the contrast. (Effect: weak) Records the sky with a clear blue.
[Orange]: Enhances the contrast. (Effect: medium) Records the sky with a darker
blue.
[Red]: Enhances the contrast. (Effect: strong) Records the sky with a much darker
blue.
[Green]: Skin and lips of people appear in natural tones. Green leaves appear brighter
and more enhanced.
[Off]
[Grain Effect]
[Low]/[Standard]/[High]: Sets the grain effect level.
[Off]
[Color Noise]
[On]: Adds color to the grain effect.
[Off]
[Sharpness]
Adjusts the outlines in the image.
[Noise Reduction]
Adjusts the noise reduction effect.
•
Increasing the effect may cause a slight drop in picture resolution.
S
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
314
[Dual Native ISO Setting]
*3
Sets the Dual Native ISO. ([Dual Native ISO Setting]: 296)
[Sensitivity]
*3
Sets the ISO sensitivity. (ISO Sensitivity: 292)
[White Balance]
*3
Sets the white balance. (White Balance (WB): 299)
•
While [WB] is selected, press [ ] to display the white balance setting screen.
Press [ ] again to return to the original screen.
[LUT]
Applies the preset or the LUT file that was registered in [LUT Library]. ([LUT Library]:
328)
1 Select either [REAL TIME LUT] or one of [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO
STYLE 10] in [Photo Style].
2 Press 34 to select [LUT] and then press [LUT].
3 Rotate to select the LUT file to apply, then press .
[LUT Opacity]
Adjusts the LUT file effect.
*3 Available when the following is set while [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO
STYLE 10] are selected:
[] [] [Photo Style Settings] [My Photo Style Settings] [Add
Effects] [Sensitivity]/[White Balance] [ON]
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
315
•
The items that you can adjust the image quality for depend on the Photo Style type.
*4
*4
*4
([Saturation])
([Color Tone])
*7
*7
*7
*5,7
*5
*5,7
*5,7
*4,5
/
/
/
*6
*6
*6
*6
*6
S
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
316
*4 Adjustment may not be possible depending on the base Photo Style.
*5 Can be set when [Grain Effect] is one of [Low], [Standard], or [High].
*6 You can set up to 2 LUT files when the [Photo Style] is My Photo Style.
*7 Can be set when a LUT file is applied with My Photo Style.
•
The effects of [Grain Effect] and [Color Noise] cannot be checked on the
recording screen.
•
[LUT] cannot be applied to RAW images. When [Picture Quality] is set to [RAW]
for recording, a LUT file can be applied only to the live view and thumbnail
displays in the playback screen.
•
[Grain Effect] and [Color Noise] are not available when using the following
function:
– Video recording
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
317
Range Properties When Recording with a LUT File
Applied
The following table shows the range properties for videos recorded with
LUT files applied in Photo Style:
[Photo Style]
LUT file
applied
[Luminance Level] Range property
[REAL TIME
LUT](base Photo
Style is [V-Log])/
when [V-Log] is
selected in My
Photo Style
[Vlog_709]
Fixed to [16-255]
([64-1023])
Video range
Other than
[Vlog_709]
Fixed to [0-255]
([0-1023])
Full range
[REAL TIME
LUT](base Photo
Style is
[Like2100(HLG)])/
when
[Like2100(HLG)] is
selected in My
Photo Style
[Vlog_709]
Fixed to [64-940] Video range
Other than
[Vlog_709]
[REAL TIME
LUT](base Photo
Style is
[Like2100(HLG) Full
Range])/when
[Like2100(HLG) Full
Range] is selected
in My Photo Style
[Vlog_709]
Fixed to [0-1023] Full range
Other than
[Vlog_709]
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
318
[REAL TIME LUT]
(base Photo Style is
other than the
above)/
When other than the
above is selected in
My Photo Style
[Vlog_709]
[0-255] ([0-1023]) Full range
[16-235] ([64-940])/
[16-255] ([64-1023])
Video range
Other than
[Vlog_709]
[0-255] ([0-1023]) Full range
[16-235] ([64-940])/
[16-255] ([64-1023])
Video range
•
When editing video with image editing software, we recommend using LUT files
for full range.
•
When generating LUT files from recorded video files using image editing
software, we recommend using video files recorded with [Luminance Level] set
to [0-255] ([0-1023]) or [16-235] ([64-940]).
•
Use LUT files for full range when recording pictures.
If you record with a LUT file for video range applied, it may not be possible to
properly display or record the images.
•
If there is a difference between the range property of the applied LUT file and the
range property of the video file, it may not be possible to generate the images
properly in the image editing software.
When loading the video files into the image editing software, select the correct
range setting for each video file.
•
The results of recording images with LUT files applied with this camera and the
results of applying LUT files with image editing software will not match
completely.
White Balance / Image Quality – [Photo Style]
319
Registering Settings in My Photo Style
1 Press 21 to select the type of Photo Style.
2 Adjust the image quality.
•
My Photo Style displays the types of Photo Style at the top of image quality
adjustment.
Select the base Photo Style.
3 Press [DISP.].
4 (When [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO STYLE 10] is selected)
Press 34 to select [Save Current Setting] and then press .
5 Press 34 to select the registration destination number and then press .
•
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
On the confirmation screen, press [DISP.] to change the My Photo Style name.
Up to 22 characters may be entered. Double-byte characters are treated as 2
characters.
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 90)
Changing the Registered Contents of My Photo Style
1 Select any value from [MY PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO STYLE 10].
2 Press [DISP.] and then set the item.
[Load Preset Setting]
[Save Current Setting]
[Edit Title]
[Restore to Default]
White Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
320
[Filter Settings]
≥ [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]: 325
This mode records with additional image effects (filters).
You can adjust the effect for each filter.
In addition, you can simultaneously take pictures without effects.
1
Set the [Filter Effect].
≥ [ ]/[ ] [] [Filter Settings] [Filter Effect]
[SET]
White Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
321
2
Select the filter.
≥Press 34 to select, and then press .
≥You can also select the image effect (filter) by touching the sample
picture.
•
Press [DISP.] to switch the screen in the order of normal display and guide
display.
The guide display shows the description of each filter.
1/3
White Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
322
Adjusting the Filter Effect
You can adjust the filter effect.
1 Select the filter.
2 On the recording screen, press [WB] (1).
3 Rotate or to set.
•
To return to the recording screen, press [WB] (1) again.
•
When the filter effect is adjusted, the filter icon on the recording screen is
indicated with [¢].
Filter Items that can be adjusted
[Expressive] Vividness
[Retro] Coloring
[Old Days] Contrast
[High Key] Coloring
[Low Key] Coloring
[Sepia] Contrast
[Cross Process] Coloring
[Bleach Bypass] Contrast
White Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
323
Setting a Filter with Touch Operation
1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch the item to set.
[ ]: Filter on/off
[ ]: Filter
[ ]: Filter effect adjustment
•
The default settings are for the Touch Tab to not be displayed.
Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
([Touch Settings]: 530)
EXPSEXPSEXPS
EXPSEXPSEXPS
White Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
324
•
White balance will be fixed to [AWB].
•
The upper limit to ISO sensitivity is [6400].
•
Depending on the filter, the recording screen may seem as if frames are missed.
•
[Filter Effect] is not available when using the following function:
– High Resolution mode
– [Live Cropping]
•
When displaying the [Filter Effect] setting screen using the Fn button, pressing
[DISP.] displays the filter selection screen.
White Balance / Image Quality – [Filter Settings]
325
[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]
You can simultaneously take pictures with no added filter effects.
[ ]/[ ] [] [Filter Settings] Select
[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] is not available when using the following
functions:
– Burst recording
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
– [RAW+FINE]/[RAW+STD.]/[RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– [Bracketing]
White Balance / Image Quality – [REAL TIME LUT]
326
[REAL TIME LUT]
Set the Photo Style to [REAL TIME LUT] and apply a LUT file.
1
Press [LUT].
•
When you first press [LUT], etc., after purchase, the QR code that takes you
to the site for downloading “LUMIX Lab” may be displayed.
White Balance / Image Quality – [REAL TIME LUT]
327
2
Select the LUT.
≥Press 21 to select, and then press .
≥You can also select by rotating or .
≥The LUT file list is displayed when you press [DISP.].
•
You can apply the LUT file that was registered in the [LUT Library]. ([LUT
Library]: 328)
•
[Sample LUT1] is applied in the default setting.
•
[ ] is displayed on the recording screen when a LUT file has not been
applied.
•
To cancel Real Time LUT, press [Q].
Sample LUT1
Switch
Cancel Real Time LUT
ュリヴヱハ
Set
Q
White Balance / Image Quality – [LUT Library]
328
[LUT Library]
≥ Base Photo Style of LUT files: 332
Register LUT files to the camera to use with Photo Style and LUT View
Assist.
Using the “Panasonic LUMIX Lab” smartphone app, you can register LUT
files on the smartphone in the [LUT Library] on the camera. (LUT Library
Operations: 596)
•
The following LUT file can be used:
– The “.vlt” format, which meets the requirements specified in the “VARICAM
3DLUT REFERENCE MANUAL Rev.1.0”
– The “.cube” format
•
The “.cube” format LUT files are compatible with 2-point to 33-point 3D LUT.
•
We recommend loading LUT files for full range onto the camera. If the range
property is different, the images may not be displayed or recorded correctly.
•
The number of characters that can be used in a file name differs depending on
the file system of the card.
(Use alphanumeric characters for the file name)
FAT32 (SD memory card/SDHC memory card): Up to 8 characters (excluding
extension).
exFAT (SDXC memory card): Up to 255 characters (including extension).
•
Save the LUT file with a file extension of “.vlt” or “.cube” in the root directory of
the card (the folder opened when the card is opened on a PC).
White Balance / Image Quality – [LUT Library]
329
1
Insert a card on which a LUT file is saved into the
camera.
2
Select [LUT Library].
≥ [] [] [LUT Library]
3
Select the registration destination.
≥Press 34 to select, and then press .
≥If you select a registered item, the LUT file will be registered by
overwriting.
White Balance / Image Quality – [LUT Library]
330
4
Select [Load].
≥Press .
≥You can change the display order of LUT files by selecting
[Sorting].
≥You can change the registered name of LUT files by selecting [Edit
Title].
≥The registered LUT file is deleted when you select [Delete].
5
Select the LUT file to load.
≥Press 34 to select, and then press .
White Balance / Image Quality – [LUT Library]
331
•
The default setting is for [Vlog_709] and 3 sample LUTs to be registered.
•
Up to 39 LUT files can be registered.
•
[Sorting], [Delete] and [Edit Title] are not possible with [Vlog_709].
•
[Sorting] and [Delete] are possible with the sample LUTs, but the default settings
are restored when [Reset] is performed.
•
With LUT files that have the Photo Style information (base Photo Style) set at the
time of creation (".cube" format only), the base Photo Style icon is displayed.
White Balance / Image Quality – [LUT Library]
332
Base Photo Style of LUT files
With Real Time LUT, the Photo Style information (base Photo Style) set in
the LUT file is recognized to determine the Photo Style.
You can add the base Photo Style information to the LUT files (“.cube”
format only) you create yourself. Open the LUT file with a text editor and
insert the Photo Style information under the title line.
• If there is a feature for selecting the character code in the text editor,
select UTF-8.
For example: LUT file (“.cube” format)
(A) Photo Style information
(B) Identifier tag
(C) Photo Style tag
•
A half-width space is required between the identifier tag and the Photo Style tag.
•
If the Photo Style information is absent or if it is not set correctly, [V-Log] is used as
the base Photo Style.
TITLE "Generated by Resolve"
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE STD
LUT_3D_SIZE 33
0.0170596 0.0150607 0.014023
0.0183261 0.0162356 0.0151827
・・・
(A)
(B)
(C)
White Balance / Image Quality – [LUT Library]
333
List of Photo Style Information
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE STD: [Standard]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE VIVD: [Vivid]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE NAT: [Natural]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE LCLASN: [L.ClassicNeo]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE FLAT: [Flat]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE LAND: [Landscape]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE PORT: [Portrait]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE MONO: [Monochrome]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE LMONO: [L.Monochrome]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE LMONOD: [L.Monochrome D]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE LMONOS: [L.Monochrome S]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE LEICAMONO: [LEICA Monochrome]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE CNED2: [Cinelike D2]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE CNEV2: [Cinelike V2]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE 709L: [Like709]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE 2100HLG: [Like2100(HLG)]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE 2100HLGF: [Like2100(HLG) Full Range]
#LUMIXPHOTOSTYLE VLOG: [V-Log]
White Balance / Image Quality – Lens Compensation
334
Lens Compensation
≥ [Vignetting Comp.]: 334
≥ [Color Shading Compensation]: 335
≥ [Diffraction Compensation]: 339
[Vignetting Comp.]
When the screen periphery darkens as a result of the lens characteristics,
you can record pictures with the brightness of the screen periphery
corrected.
[ ]/[ ] [] Select [Vignetting Comp.]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording
conditions.
•
Noise in the periphery of the picture may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.
White Balance / Image Quality – Lens Compensation
335
[Color Shading Compensation]
Compensate for the coloring that occurs around the screen (color shading)
due to the characteristics of the lens.
When using an L-Mount lens
The color shading is automatically compensated, but it is also possible to
make manual fine adjustments.
1 Select [Color Shading Compensation].
•
[ ]/[ ] [] [Color Shading Compensation]
2 Adjust the red tint and blue tint.
•
Press 34 to select [Red Tint]/[Blue Tint], then press 21 to adjust.
•
You can also adjust by rotating or .
3 Press to confirm the setting.
•
The adjusted value is not recorded.
±0±0
White Balance / Image Quality – Lens Compensation
336
When Using Other Than an L-Mount Lens
You can compensate for the color shading for other than L-Mount lenses
and register the compensation details.
Select [Color Shading Compensation].
•
[ ]/[ ] [] [Color Shading Compensation]
[MANUAL]
Compensate for the color shading of the attached lens.
1 Press 34 to select [MANUAL] and then press .
2 Press [DISP.] to execute color shading compensation.
•
Execute while the screen is filled with a subject that has no color variation,
such as a white or gray one.
•
If further adjustment is required, press 4 and make fine adjustments manually.
3 Press to confirm the setting.
•
The compensation value and adjusted value are not recorded. To record them,
press [DISP.] in the adjustment screen and make a preset registration.
[PRESET]
Compensate for the color shading of the attached lens and make a preset registration.
(Registering presets: 337)
You can also call up presets that have already been registered.
[OFF]
The color shading compensation is not applied.
[ADJUST]
Fine-adjust the red tint and blue tint.
•
The adjusted value is not recorded.
•
If a compensation value already registered in [PRESET] is adjusted, [¢] is displayed
next to [PRESET].
White Balance / Image Quality – Lens Compensation
337
Registering presets
You can register up to 12 sets of compensation settings.
1 Select [PRESET] in [Color Shading Compensation].
•
[ ]/[ ] [] [Color Shading Compensation] [PRESET]
2 Select any of [SET1] to [SET12] and press .
3 Select [Compensate/Adjust] and then press .
4 Press [DISP.] while the screen is filled with a subject that has no color variation,
such as a white or gray one.
•
Color shading compensation is executed. Press .
•
If further adjustment is required, press 4 and make fine adjustments manually.
5 Select [Focal Length]/[Aperture] and then press .
•
Press 21 to select the item and then press 34 to enter the value.
6 Select [Note] and then press .
•
You can enter any information, such as a lens name, etc.
Up to 26 characters may be entered. Double-byte characters are treated as 2
characters.
•
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 90)
7 Press [DISP.] to register the compensation settings.
•
When [Color Shading Compensation] is operating, [ ] is displayed on the
recording screen.
•
If you adjust a compensation value already registered in [PRESET], [¢] is
displayed next to [ ].
•
Compensation values and adjusted values that have not been registered as
presets are cleared when you do the following:
– Operating the camera on/off switch
– Replacing the lens
White Balance / Image Quality – Lens Compensation
338
Changing and deleting presets
1 Select [PRESET] in [Color Shading Compensation].
•
[ ]/[ ] [] [Color Shading Compensation] [PRESET]
2 Press 34 to select a registered preset, then press [DISP.].
3 Press 34 to select [Edit], [Sorting], or [Delete], and then press .
•
You can change the details in the registered preset when you select [Edit].
(Registering presets: 337)
•
You can change the display order of the presets by selecting [Sorting].
•
The preset is deleted when you select [Delete]. You cannot delete the preset
that is being used.
•
If you execute [Compensate/Adjust] from [Edit], the compensation value and
adjusted value are reset and you can redo color shading compensation again.
•
The information registered in [PRESET] is returned to the default settings when
setup and custom settings are reset.
White Balance / Image Quality – Lens Compensation
339
[Diffraction Compensation]
The camera raises the image resolution by correcting the blurriness
caused by diffraction when the aperture is closed.
[ ]/[ ] [] Select [Diffraction Compensation]
Settings: [AUTO]/[OFF]
•
Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording
conditions.
•
Noise may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.
340
Video Settings
This chapter describes recording modes especially for videos, such as the
Creative Video mode and the Slow & Quick mode, and settings available
when recording videos.
≥ Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q): 341
≥ Using AF (Video): 349
≥ Video Brightness and Coloring: 354
≥ Audio Settings: 360
≥ External Microphones (Optional): 368
≥ Time Code: 373
≥ Main Assist Functions: 376
Video Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)
341
Recording Modes Specifically for Video
(Creative Video/S&Q)
≥ Displays Suited to Video Recording: 342
≥ Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos: 343
≥ Separating Settings for Recording Video and Pictures: 347
[ ] mode (Creative Video mode) and [S&Q] mode (Slow & Quick mode)
are recording modes specifically for video.
In the [S&Q] mode, you can record smooth slow motion video and quick
motion video by changing the frame rate.
In the recording modes specifically for video, you can start and stop video
recording with the shutter button.
Change the exposure and audio settings with touch operation to prevent
operation sounds from being recorded.
Settings such as exposure and white balance can be changed
independent of picture taking settings.
Video Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)
342
Displays Suited to Video Recording
In the recording screen, the following parts switch to displays suited to
video recording.
(1) Recording file format ([Rec. File Format]: 122)
(2) Recording quality ([Rec Quality]: 123)/Slow & Quick setting (Slow & Quick
Video: 393)
(3) Image area of video ([Image Area of Video]: 136)
(4) Video recording time (Video Recording Time: 729)
•
Examples of displays at the time of purchase.
For information about the icons other than those described here (Monitor
Displays: 676)
•
Even in the [iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes, as with the [ ]/[S&Q] mode, you can
switch to the display suited to video recording:
([Video-Priority Display]: 549)
24m59s
100
F
3.560
±
0
AFSAFS
FULLFULLMP4MP4 4K4K 420/8-L420/8-L
29.97
p
29.97
p
(4)
(1) (3)
(2)
Video Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)
343
Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos
1
Set the recording mode to [ ] or [S&Q].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
2
Set the exposure mode.
≥ [] [] [Exposure Mode] [P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
•
You can perform the same exposure operations as the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.
3
Close the menu.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
4
Start recording.
≥Press the shutter button (A) or video rec. button (B).
5
Stop recording.
≥Press the shutter button or video rec. button again.
(A)
(B)
Video Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)
344
•
For information about recording slow motion video and quick motion video
(Slow & Quick Video: 393)
•
You can disable the recording start/stop operations using the shutter button:
([Assign REC to Shutter Button]: 528)
•
You can assign the function that starts/ends video recording only in the [ ]
mode to an Fn button:
([Video Record(Creative Video)]: 496)
Video Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)
345
Operations During Video Recording
Change the exposure and audio settings with touch operation to prevent
operation sounds from being recorded.
1 Touch [ ] or [ ].
2 Touch an icon.
Aperture value
Shutter speed
Exposure compensation
ISO sensitivity/Gain (dB)
Sound recording level adjustment
([Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 364)
•
This setting is available only in [ ] mode.
Slow & Quick setting
(Slow & Quick Video: 393)
•
This setting is available only in [S&Q] mode. (The setting cannot be changed
during recording)
•
With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed.
Set [Touch Tab] to [ON] in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
([Touch Settings]: 530)
F
SS
ISO
GAIN
Video Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)
346
3 Drag the slide bar to set the item.
[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting slowly.
[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting quickly.
•
If you touch icon (C), the screen of Step 2 is redisplayed.
(C)
Video Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)
347
Separating Settings for Recording Video and
Pictures
In default settings, settings such as exposure and white balance changed
in [ ]/[S&Q] mode are also reflected in picture recording in [P]/[A]/[S]/
[M] modes.
From the [CreativeVideo Combined Set.] menu, you can separate settings
for video recording and for picture recording.
[] [] Select [CreativeVideo Combined Set.]
[F/SS/ISO/Exposure Comp.]/[White Balance]/[Photo Style]/[Metering Mode]/[AF
Mode]
[ ]: The recording settings are linked across recording modes.
[ ]: Recording settings can be separated by the [ ]/[S&Q] mode and the [P]/[A]/
[S]/[M] mode.
Video Settings – Recording Modes Specifically for Video (Creative Video/S&Q)
348
•
The [iA] mode uses the optimum recording settings for the camera automatically,
so the recording settings will be independent, irrespective of the settings made
with this function.
Video Settings – Using AF (Video)
349
Using AF (Video)
≥ [Continuous AF]: 349
≥ [AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 351
≥ [Enlarged Live Display(Video)]: 352
[Continuous AF]
You can select how to set the focus in AF when recording videos.
[] [] Select [Continuous AF]
[MODE1]
The camera continues to automatically focus only during recording.
[MODE2]
The camera automatically keeps focusing on subjects during recording standby and
during recording.
•
This is available in [ ]/[S&Q] mode.
[OFF]
The camera maintains the focus point at the start of recording.
Video Settings – Using AF (Video)
350
•
In the [iA] mode, the camera automatically keeps focusing during recording
standby, irrespective of the [Continuous AF] setting.
•
Depending on the recording conditions or lens used, the AF operation sound
may be recorded during video recording.
If the operation sound bothers you, we recommend recording with [Continuous
AF] set to [OFF].
•
If the zoom is operated while recording videos, the subject may take a while to
come into focus.
•
[MODE1] switches to [MODE2] when outputting via HDMI in the [ ]/[S&Q]
mode.
•
When set to [MODE2], the battery drains faster.
Video Settings – Using AF (Video)
351
[AF Custom Setting(Video)]
You can fine-adjust the focusing method for video recording using
[Continuous AF].
[] [] Select [AF Custom Setting(Video)]
•
A description of the item is displayed on the screen when you press [DISP.].
[ON] Enables the following settings.
[OFF] Disables the following settings.
[SET]
[AF Speed]
[+] side: Focus moves at a faster speed.
[−] side: Focus moves at a slower speed.
[AF Sensitivity]
[+] side: When the distance to the subject
changes significantly, the camera
immediately readjusts the focus.
[−] side: When the distance to the subject
changes significantly, the camera waits for a
little before readjusting the focus.
Video Settings – Using AF (Video)
352
[Enlarged Live Display(Video)]
When the AF mode is [ ], [ ], or [ ], or when recording with MF, the
focus point can be enlarged for display.
(When the AF mode is [ ] or [ ], the center of the screen is enlarged
for display.)
The focus point can also be enlarged for checking when recording videos.
1
Register [Enlarged Live Display(Video)] to the Fn button.
(Fn Buttons: 488)
2
Enlarge display of the focus point.
≥Press the Fn button set in Step
1
.
•
The operations on the enlarged display screen are the same as the MF Assist
screen operations. (Operations on the MF Assist Screen: 185)
Video Settings – Using AF (Video)
353
•
If you use the following functions, enlarged display magnifications is fixed at 3x:
– [Hybrid Zoom(Video)]
– [Crop Zoom(Video)]
•
Depending on the lens used, the video enlarged display of live view screen may
not be displayed.
•
During video recording using the following functions, the video enlarged display
of live view screen cannot be displayed:
– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate of
60.00p
– [Live Cropping]
•
You can change the display method of the enlarged display screen:
([Enlarged Live Display(Video)]: 529)
•
You can set whether to output the enlarged display to an external device
connected via HDMI:
(Outputting the Enlarged Live Display (Video) via HDMI: 442)
Video Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring
354
Video Brightness and Coloring
≥ [Luminance Level]: 354
≥ [Master Pedestal Level]: 356
≥ Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee): 357
≥ [ISO Sensitivity (video)]: 359
[Luminance Level]
You can set the luminance range to suit the purpose of video recording.
You can set to [16-235] or [16-255], the standard for video, or to [0-255],
which covers the entire range of luminance, the same as pictures.
[] [] Select [Luminance Level]
[0-255]([0-1023])
Setting for video recording at full range.
[16-235]([64-940])
Setting for video recording at video range.
[16-255]([64-1023])
Setting for video recording at video range.
•
The display may not show the correct gradation depending on the monitor, the video
playback software, and the video editing software that you are using.
Video Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring
355
•
When set to a 10-bit [Rec Quality], the setting items change to [0-1023], [64-940],
and [64-1023].
•
When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT] (base Photo Style is
[V-Log]), this is fixed to [0-255] ([0-1023]).
However, even if [Photo Style] is set to [REAL TIME LUT](base Photo Style is
[V-Log]) or Photo Style is set to [V-Log] in My Photo Style, if the [Vlog_709] LUT
file has been applied, this is fixed to [16-255] ([64-1023]).
•
When [Photo Style] is set to [Like2100(HLG)], this is fixed to [64-940].
•
When [Photo Style] is set to [Like2100(HLG) Full Range], this is fixed to [0-1023].
Video Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring
356
[Master Pedestal Level]
You can adjust the black level, which serves as the reference for images.
1
Set the recording mode to [ ] or [S&Q].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
2
Select [Master Pedestal Level].
≥ [] [] [Master Pedestal Level]
3
Adjust master pedestal.
≥Rotate or .
•
Set in the range between −15 and +15.
•
[Master Pedestal Level] is not available when using the following function:
– [V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT](base Photo Style is [V-Log]) ([Photo Style])
101055
-
15
-
15
-
5
-
5
-
10
-
10 00
1515
MP
MPMPMP
MPMPMPMPMPMPMP
+4
+4
Video Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring
357
Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee)
When [Photo Style] is set to [Like709], you can adjust the knee so that
recording can be performed with minimal overexposure.
1
Set [Photo Style] to [Like709].
≥ [] [] [Photo Style] [Like709]
2
Press [Q].
3
Select a knee setting.
≥Press 21 to select a setting item.
$872
Video Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring
358
[AUTO]
Adjusts the compression levels of high-luminance areas automatically.
[MANUAL]
You can set the luminance where compression starts (knee master point) and
the intensity of compression (knee master slope).
Press 34 to select an item and then press 21 to adjust.
[POINT]: Master knee point
[SLOPE]: Master knee slope
•
Rotate to adjust the knee master point, and to adjust the knee
master slope.
•
Values within the following ranges can be set:
– Master knee point: 80.0 to 107.0
– Master knee slope: 0 to 99
[Off]
4
Confirm your selection.
≥Press .
Video Settings – Video Brightness and Coloring
359
[ISO Sensitivity (video)]
Sets the lower and upper limits for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is
set to [AUTO].
1
Set the recording mode to [ ] or [S&Q].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
2
Set [ISO Sensitivity (video)].
≥ [] [] [ISO Sensitivity (video)]
Setting Items ([ISO Sensitivity (video)])
[ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting]
Sets the lower limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is [AUTO].
•
Set in the range between [100] and [25600].
[ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting]
Sets the upper limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is [AUTO].
•
Set to [AUTO] or in the range between [200] and [51200].
•
The range of ISO sensitivities you can set depends on the Photo Style used.
Video Settings – Audio Settings
361
[Sound Rec Level Disp.]
The sound recording level is displayed on the recording screen.
[] [] Select [Sound Rec Level Disp.]
[ON] Sound recording level displayed on the recording screen.
[OFF] —
[SET]
Sets the display size of sound recording level.
[Displaying
Size]
[LARGE]/[SMALL]
•
When [Sound Rec Level Limiter] is set to [OFF], [Sound Rec Level Disp.] is fixed
to [ON].
Video Settings – Audio Settings
362
[Mute Sound Input]
This mutes audio input.
[] [] Select [Mute Sound Input]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
[ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
Video Settings – Audio Settings
363
[Sound Rec Gain Level]
This switches the gain of audio input.
[] [] Select [Sound Rec Gain Level]
[STANDARD]
This is the standard input gain setting. (0 dB)
[LOW]
Audio input is reduced for recording in environments with loud noises. (−12 dB)
•
[Sound Rec Gain Level] is not available when [Mic Socket] is set to [ ] and
an external audio device is connected.
Video Settings – Audio Settings
364
[Sound Rec Level Adj.]
Manually adjust the sound recording level.
[] [] Select [Sound Rec Level Adj.]
•
Press 21 to adjust the sound recording level and then press .
Settings: [MUTE]/[−18dB] to [+12dB]
•
You can adjust by 1 dB increments.
•
This can also be set during video recording.
•
Displayed dB values are approximate.
•
When set to [MUTE], [ ] is displayed in the recording screen.
Video Settings – Audio Settings
365
[Sound Rec Quality]
Sound quality for video can be set when the [Rec. File Format] is [MOV].
[] [] Select [Sound Rec Quality]
[96kHz/24bit]
Audio is recorded using 96kHz/24bit high resolution audio.
•
This can be set when a Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional), or Stereo
Microphone (VW-VMS10: optional) is connected. (External Microphones
(Optional): 368)
[48kHz/24bit]
Audio is recorded using 48kHz/24bit high quality audio.
•
The setting is fixed to [48kHz/16bit] in the following case:
– When [Rec. File Format] is set to [MP4(Lite)] or [MP4]
Video Settings – Audio Settings
366
[Sound Rec Level Limiter]
The sound recording level is adjusted automatically to minimize sound
distortion (crackling noise).
[] [] Select [Sound Rec Level Limiter]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Video Settings – Audio Settings
367
[Wind Noise Canceller]
This reduces the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while
maintaining sound quality.
[] [] Select [Wind Noise Canceller]
[HIGH]
This effectively reduces the wind noise by reducing the low-pitched sound when a
strong wind is detected.
[STANDARD]
This reduces wind noise without loss of sound quality by filtering out only wind noise.
[OFF]
Turns the function off.
•
You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.
•
This function works only with the built-in microphone.
When an external microphone is connected, [Wind Cut] is displayed.
(Reduction of Wind Noise: 372)
Video Settings – External Microphones (Optional)
368
External Microphones (Optional)
≥ Setting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2: Optional): 371
≥ Reduction of Wind Noise: 372
With a Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) or Stereo
Microphone (VW-VMS10: optional), you can record higher-quality high
resolution audio compared to the built-in microphone.
•
Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.
1
Set the [Mic Socket] that suits the device to be
connected.
≥ [] [] [Mic Socket]
Video Settings – External Microphones (Optional)
369
([Mic Input (Plug-in Power)])
When connecting an external microphone that requires a power supply from the
camera [MIC] socket.
([Mic Input])
When connecting an external microphone that does not require a power supply
from the camera [MIC] socket.
([Line Input])
When connecting an external audio device for line output.
•
The setting will be fixed to [ ] when a Stereo Shotgun Microphone
(DMW-MS2: optional) is connected.
•
When using [ ], if you connect an external microphone that does not
require power supply, the connected external microphone may malfunction.
Check the device before connecting.
2
Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
Video Settings – External Microphones (Optional)
370
3
Connect the external microphone to the camera and
then turn on the camera.
•
If mounting the external microphone on the camera accessory shoe (A),
remove the accessory shoe cover.
4
Make settings for the sound quality of the audio to be
recorded in [Sound Rec Quality] (
[Sound Rec Quality]:
365).
•
Do not use the stereo microphone cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or
more.
•
While the external microphone is connected, [ ] is displayed on the screen.
•
When an external microphone is connected, [Sound Rec Level Disp.]
automatically turns [ON], and the recording level is displayed on the screen.
•
When the external microphone is attached, do not carry the camera by holding
the external microphone. It may become detached.
•
If noises are recorded when using the AC adaptor, use the battery.
•
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the external microphone.
(A)
Video Settings – External Microphones (Optional)
371
Setting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2:
Optional)
When using the Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional), you
can set the microphone sound pickup range.
[] [] Select [Special Mic.]
[STEREO]
Picks up sound over a wide area.
[SHOTGUN]
Helps prevent picking up background noise, and records sound from a specific
direction.
Video Settings – External Microphones (Optional)
372
Reduction of Wind Noise
This reduces wind noise when an external microphone is connected.
[] [] Select [Wind Cut]
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]
•
Setting [Wind Cut] may alter the usual sound quality.
Video Settings – Time Code
374
Setting the Time Code
Sets the recording, display, and output of the time code.
1
Set [Rec. File Format] to [MOV].
≥ [] [] [Rec. File Format] [MOV]
2
Select [Time Code].
≥ [] [] [Time Code]
[Time Code Display]
Displays the time code on the recording screen/playback screen.
[Count Up]
[REC RUN]: Counts the time code only when recording videos.
[FREE RUN]: Counts the time code also when video recording is stopped and
when the camera is turned off.
•
When the following function is being used, [Count Up] is fixed to [REC RUN]:
– [S&Q] mode
Video Settings – Time Code
375
[Time Code Value]
[Reset]: Sets to 00:00:00:00 (hour: minute: second: frame)
[Manual Input]: Manually input hour, minute, second and frame.
[Current Time]: Sets hour, minute and second to current time and sets frame to
00.
[Time Code Mode]
[DF]: Drop Frame. The camera modifies the difference between recorded time
and time code.
•
Seconds and frames are separated by “.”. (Example: 00:00:00.00)
[NDF]: Non-Drop Frame. Records the time code without drop frame.
•
Seconds and frames are separated by “:”. (Example: 00:00:00:00)
•
When the following functions are being used, [Time Code Mode] is fixed to
[NDF]:
– [50.00Hz (PAL)]/[24.00Hz (CINEMA)] ([System Frequency])
– 47.95p or 23.98p [Rec Quality]
[HDMI Time Code Output]
Time code information is added to images output via HDMI when recording with
the [ ]/[S&Q] mode.
•
The time code can also be output via HDMI by setting the mode dial to
[ ]/[S&Q] during playback. In the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, set [Output
Resolution(Playback)] in [HDMI Connection] to [AUTO]. ([Output
Resolution(Playback)]: 564)
•
The device screen may go dark depending on the connected device.
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
376
Main Assist Functions
≥ [Flicker Decrease (Video)]: 377
≥ [SS/Gain Operation]: 378
≥ [WFM/Vector Scope]: 380
≥ [Luminance Spot Meter]: 384
≥ [Zebra Pattern]: 386
≥ [Frame Marker]: 388
≥ Color Bars/Test Tone: 390
•
The [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu has display assist functions
such as the center marker and safety zone marker:
([Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)]): 546)
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
377
[Flicker Decrease (Video)]
The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in the video.
[] [] Select [Flicker Decrease (Video)]
[1/50]/[1/60]/[1/100]/[1/120]
[OFF]
•
This can be set when [Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] is [ON]. ([Auto Exposure in
P/A/S/M]: 522)
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
378
[SS/Gain Operation]
You can switch the units of shutter speed values and gain (sensitivity)
values.
[] [] Select [SS/Gain Operation]
[SEC/ISO]
Displays the shutter speed in seconds and the gain in ISO.
[ANGLE/ISO]
Displays the shutter speed in degrees and the gain in ISO.
•
The angle can be set in a range between 11° and 358°.
(when [Synchro Scan(Video)] is set to [OFF])
[SEC/dB]
Displays the shutter speed in seconds and the gain in dB.
•
0 dB corresponds to either of the following ISO sensitivity values.
– When [Dual Native Gain Setting] is set to [AUTO] or [LOW]: [100]
– When [Dual Native Gain Setting] is set to [HIGH]: [640]
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
379
Setting Range for Gain (Sensitivity)
When [SS/Gain Operation] is set to [SEC/dB], gain (sensitivity) can be set
in the following ranges.
•
The range of gains you can set depends on the Photo Style used.
•
When [SS/Gain Operation] is set to [SEC/dB], menu names change as shown
below:
– [Dual Native ISO Setting] [Dual Native Gain Setting]
– [ISO Sensitivity (video)] [Gain Setting]
– [ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting] [Auto Gain Lower Limit Setting]
– [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] [Auto Gain Upper Limit Setting]
– [Extended ISO] [Extended Gain Setting]
– [ISO Displayed Setting] [Gain Displayed Setting]
[Dual Native Gain
Setting]
[Extended Gain
Setting]
Setting Range for Gain
(Sensitivity)
[AUTO]
[OFF] [AUTO], [0dB] to [+54dB]
[ON] [AUTO], [−6dB] to [+66dB]
[LOW]
[OFF] [AUTO], [0dB] to [+18dB]
[ON] [AUTO], [−6dB] to [+18dB]
[HIGH]
[OFF] [AUTO], [0dB] to [+38dB]
[ON] [AUTO], [−6dB] to [+50dB]
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
380
[WFM/Vector Scope]
This displays the waveform monitor or the vector scope on the recording
screen. You can change the size of the waveform display.
1
Set the recording mode to [ ] or [S&Q].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
2
Set [WFM/Vector Scope].
≥ [] [] [WFM/Vector Scope]
[WAVE]
Displays a waveform.
[VECTOR]
Displays the vector scope.
[OFF]
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
381
3
Select the position to display.
≥Press 3421 to select and then press .
•
You can also move using touch operations.
•
You can rotate to change the size of the waveform.
•
To return the waveform or vector scope position back to the center, press
[DISP.]. With waveform, pressing [DISP.] once again returns the size to the
default setting.
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
382
Screen Displays
Waveform
•
The waveform displayed on the camera indicates the luminance as values based on
the conversions below:
0% (IRE
*
): Luminance value 16 (8 bit)/64 (10 bit)
100 % (IRE
*
): Luminance value 235 (8 bit)/940 (10 bit)
* IRE: Institute of Radio Engineers
(A) 109 % (IRE) (Dotted line)
(B) 100 % (IRE)
(C) 50 % (IRE)
(D) 0 % (IRE)
(E) −4 % (IRE) (Dotted line)
(F) The range between 0 % and 100 % shows dotted lines at intervals of 10 %.
Display example)
(A)
(F)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
383
Vector scope
(G) R (Red)
(H) YL (Yellow)
(I) G (Green)
(J) MG (Magenta)
(K) B (Blue)
(L) CY (Cyan)
Display example)
•
When you assign the function to an Fn button, you can switch between
displaying and hiding these during recording of video. (Fn Buttons: 488)
•
You can also change the position by dragging on the recording screen.
•
The waveform and vector scope are not output through HDMI.
(J)
(K)
(L)
(G)
(H)
(I)
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
384
[Luminance Spot Meter]
Specify any spot on the subject to measure the luminance over a small
area.
1
Set [Luminance Spot Meter].
≥ [] [] [Luminance Spot Meter] [ON]
2
Select the position where you want to measure the
luminance.
≥Press 3421 to select and then press .
•
You can also change the position by dragging the frame on the recording
screen.
•
To return the position back to the center, press [DISP.].
(M) Luminance value
65%
65%
65%
(M)
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
385
Measurement Range
Measuring is possible in the range −7 % to 109 % (IRE).
•
When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log], or when a LUT file has not been applied in
[REAL TIME LUT] (base Photo Style is [V-Log]), this is measured with “Stop” units.
(18 % gray output level is calculated as 0 Stop)
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
386
[Zebra Pattern]
Parts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with stripes.
You can also set the base value and the breadth of the range so that the
stripes are displayed on parts that are within the range of brightness you
specify.
[ZEBRA1]
[ZEBRA2]
[ZEBRA1+2]
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
387
[] [] Select [Zebra Pattern]
When [BASE/RANGE] Was Selected with [SET]
Centered on the brightness set with [Base Level], parts with the brightness
in the range set in [Range] are displayed with the stripes.
≥ [Base Level] can be set in the range between 0 % and 109 % (IRE).
≥ [Range] can be set in the range between ±1 % and ±10 % (IRE).
•
When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log], or when a LUT file has not been applied in
[REAL TIME LUT] (base Photo Style is [V-Log]), this is measured with “Stop” units.
(18 % gray output level is calculated as 0 Stop)
[ZEBRA1]
Parts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with
[ZEBRA1] stripes.
[ZEBRA2]
Parts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with
[ZEBRA2] stripes.
[ZEBRA1+2] Both [ZEBRA1] and [ZEBRA2] are displayed.
[OFF] —
[SET]
Sets the base brightness.
[Zebra 1] [50%] to [105%]/[BASE/RANGE]
[Zebra 2] [50%] to [105%]/[BASE/RANGE]
•
[ZEBRA1+2] cannot be selected while you are setting [BASE/RANGE].
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
388
[Frame Marker]
A frame with the set aspect ratio is displayed on the recording screen. This
allows you to see during recording the angle of view that will be achieved
with trimming (cropping) in post-processing.
[] [] Select [Frame Marker]
[ON] Displays the frame on the recording screen.
[OFF] —
[SET]
[Frame Aspect]
Sets the aspect ratio of the frame.
[2.39:1]/[2.35:1]/[2.00:1]/[1.85:1]/[16:9]/
[4:3]/[5:4]/[1:1]/[4:5]/[9:16]/[CUSTOM]
[Frame Color] Sets the color of the frame.
[Frame Mask]
Sets the opacity of the outside of the frame.
[100%]/[75%]/[50%]/[25%]/[OFF]
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
389
When [CUSTOM] Is Selected with [Frame Aspect] in [SET]
You can freely set the aspect ratio of the frame.
≥ Press
3421
to move the center position.
•
You can also change the position by dragging the frame on the recording screen.
≥ Set the height of the frame with [ ], and the width with [ ].
•
You can also pinch out/pinch in the frame to change the size.
(N) Center coordinates (0 being the center of the screen)
(O) Height and width of the frame
•
The aspect ratio can be set in the range between 1 % to 100 %.
•
The first press of [DISP.] returns the frame position to the center.
The second press returns the frame size to the default.
X,Y=(±0,±0)
13%
13%
(N) (O)
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
390
Color Bars/Test Tone
The color bars are displayed on the recording screen.
A test tone is output while the color bars are being displayed.
[] [] Select [Color Bars]
Settings: [SMPTE]/[EBU]/[ARIB]
•
To end the display, press .
[SMPTE]
[EBU]
[ARIB]
Video Settings – Main Assist Functions
391
Adjusting the Test Tone
There are 4 levels ([−12dB], [−18dB], [−20dB], and [MUTE]) of test tone to
select.
Rotate or to select the test tone level.
•
The color bars and test tone will be recorded on the video if video recording is
started while the color bars are being displayed.
•
The brightness and coloring that appear on the camera’s monitor may differ from
those that appear on another device such as an external monitor.
392
Special Video Recording
This chapter describes advanced video recording applications such as
slow motion/quick motion video and Log recording.
≥ Slow & Quick Video: 393
≥ High Frame Rate Video: 400
≥ [Focus Transition]: 402
≥ [Live Cropping]: 407
≥ Log Recording: 412
≥ HLG Videos: 417
≥ Anamorphic Recording: 421
≥ [Synchro Scan(Video)]: 425
≥ [Segmented File Recording]: 427
≥ List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded:
428
Special Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video
393
Slow & Quick Video
In the [S&Q] mode, the camera records at a different frame rate to the
recording frame rate, enabling the creation of slow motion video and quick
motion video in the MOV format.
Slow Motion Video (Overcrank Recording)
Set a number of frames that is higher than the recording frame rate of the [Rec
Quality].
For example: When recording at 60 fps when set to a 29.97p [Rec Quality], the speed
is halved.
Quick Motion Video (Undercrank Recording)
Set a number of frames that is lower than the recording frame rate of the [Rec Quality].
For example: When recording at 15 fps when set to a 29.97p [Rec Quality], the speed
is doubled.
•
The volume of data recorded increases when you use the slow motion video
mode in Slow & Quick video, so if the card writing speed is insufficient, recording
may stop.
Special Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video
394
1
Set the recording mode to [S&Q].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
•
[Rec. File Format] changes to [MOV].
2
Select a recording quality with which you can record
Slow & Quick video.
≥ [] [] [Rec Quality]
•
Items available for recording with Slow & Quick video are indicated as [S&Q
available].
•
Recording qualities with which you can record Slow & Quick video ( List of
Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded: 428)
Special Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video
395
3
Set the frame rate.
≥ [] [] [Slow & Quick Setting]
≥Rotate or to select a numeric value, then press .
•
You can set a frame rate in the following ranges:
– C4K/4K video: 1 fps to 60 fps
– FHD video: 1 fps to 180 fps
Special Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video
396
Frame Rate Combinations and Playback Speeds
Frame
rate
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
C4K/29.97p
4K/29.97p
C4K/23.98p
4K/23.98p
FHD/59.94p FHD/29.97p FHD/23.98p
1fps 30× Quick 24× Quick 60× Quick 30× Quick 24× Quick
2fps 15× Quick 12× Quick 30× Quick 15× Quick 12× Quick
5fps 6× Quick 4.8× Quick 12× Quick 6× Quick 4.8× Quick
10 fps 3× Quick 2.4× Quick 6× Quick 3× Quick 2.4× Quick
15 fps 2× Quick 1.6× Quick 4× Quick 2× Quick 1.6× Quick
30 fps 1× Normal 1.25× Slow 2× Quick 1× Normal 1.25× Slow
60 fps 2× Slow 2.5× Slow 1× Normal 2× Slow 2.5× Slow
100 fps 1.67× Slow 3.33× Slow 4.17× Slow
120 fps 2× Slow 4× Slow 5× Slow
150 fps 2.5× Slow 5× Slow 6.25× Slow
180 fps 3× Slow 6× Slow 7.5× Slow
Special Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video
397
Frame
rate
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
C4K/25.00p
4K/25.00p
FHD/50.00p FHD/25.00p
1fps 25× Quick 50× Quick 25× Quick
2fps 12.5× Quick 25× Quick 12.5× Quick
5fps 5× Quick 10× Quick 5× Quick
10 fps 2.5× Quick 5× Quick 2.5× Quick
15 fps 1.67× Quick 3.33× Quick 1.67× Quick
30 fps 1.2× Slow 1.67× Quick 1.2× Slow
60 fps 2.4× Slow 1.2× Slow 2.4× Slow
100 fps 2× Slow 4× Slow
120 fps 2.4× Slow 4.8× Slow
150 fps 3× Slow 6× Slow
180 fps 3.6× Slow 7.2× Slow
Special Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video
398
Frame
rate
[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
C4K/24.00p
4K/24.00p
FHD/24.00p
1fps 24× Quick 24× Quick
2fps 12× Quick 12× Quick
5fps 4.8× Quick 4.8× Quick
10 fps 2.4× Quick 2.4× Quick
15 fps 1.6× Quick 1.6× Quick
30 fps 1.25× Slow 1.25× Slow
60 fps 2.5× Slow 2.5× Slow
100 fps 4.17× Slow
120 fps 5× Slow
150 fps 6.25× Slow
180 fps 7.5× Slow
Special Video Recording – Slow & Quick Video
399
Shutter Speeds When Recording Slow & Quick Video
When recording Slow & Quick video, the minimum shutter speed changes
depending on the frame rate of [Slow & Quick Setting].
Frame rate
Minimum shutter speed
[AFS]/[AFC] [MF]
1fps
1/30 of a second
1 second
2fps 1/2 of a second
5fps 1/5 of a second
10 fps 1/10 of a second
15 fps 1/15 of a second
30 fps 1/30 of a second
60 fps 1/60 of a second 1/60 of a second
100 fps 1/100 of a second 1/100 of a second
120 fps 1/125 of a second 1/125 of a second
150 fps 1/160 of a second
180 fps 1/200 of a second
•
Audio will not be recorded during Slow & Quick recording.
•
When the resolution is set to C4K/4K [Rec Quality], [Image Area of Video] is fixed
to [APS-C].
•
When the resolution is set to FHD [Rec Quality], [PIXEL/PIXEL] in [Image Area of
Video] cannot be selected.
•
The mode switches to MF when you set to a frame rate of 150 fps or more.
(The camera automatically focuses when [AF ON] is pressed, but only before
starting recording.)
•
The angle of view is reduced when you set the frame rate to 180 fps.
Special Video Recording – High Frame Rate Video
400
High Frame Rate Video
[MOV] video with high frame rates can be recorded to cards. By converting
it with the compatible software, it is possible to produce slow motion video.
Audio recording, not possible in the Slow & Quick mode, also becomes
possible.
1
Set [Rec. File Format] to [MOV].
≥ [] [] [Rec. File Format] [MOV]
2
Select a recording quality for high frame rate video.
≥ [] [] [Rec Quality]
•
The following recording qualities are available in [ ] mode:
– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate
of 60.00p
•
By filtering the [Rec Quality] by the frame rate, you can display just those
recording qualities that match the frame rate conditions. ([Filtering]: 133)
•
Recording Qualities for High Frame Rate Video (List of Recording Qualities
That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded: 428)
Special Video Recording – High Frame Rate Video
401
Shutter Speeds When Recording High Frame Rate Video
When recording high frame rate video, the minimum shutter speed
changes depending on the recording frame rate of the video.
* Can be set in [M] mode ([Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] is set to [OFF]) or [ ] mode
([Exposure Mode] is set to [M])
Recording frame rate of the video
Minimum shutter speed
[AFS]/[AFC] [MF]
47.95p 1/30 of a second
1/2 of a second
*
48.00p 1/25 of a second
100.00p 1/100 of a second
119.88p 1/125 of a second
•
When outputting via HDMI, the resolution and frame rate may be
down-converted for output.
Special Video Recording – [Focus Transition]
402
[Focus Transition]
Smoothly transitions the focus position from the current position to a
position registered in advance.
1
Set the recording mode to [ ].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
2
Select [Focus Transition].
≥ [] [] [Focus Transition]
•
If the [Please set the focus position.] message is displayed, press either .
Special Video Recording – [Focus Transition]
403
3
Set focus positions.
≥Check the focus using the same procedure as MF (Record
Using MF: 183), and then touch [POS1], [POS2], and [POS3] to set
focus positions.
4
Register the focus positions.
≥Press to register the focus positions.
5
Start recording.
≥Press the video rec. button.
•
The advanced setting screen is displayed when you press [DISP.] before
recording. (Setting Items ([Focus Transition]): 405)
•
If you have enabled [Focus Transition Rec], Focus Transition will start when
you start recording a video.
∞
10(m) 5 3 2 1.5 1 0.5 0.1
1 2
3
POS1
POS2
POS3
Special Video Recording – [Focus Transition]
404
6
Start Focus Transition.
≥Press 21 to select [1], [2], or [3], and then press .
•
When [Focus Transition Wait] is set, Focus Transition starts after the set time
has elapsed.
(A) Current focus position
(B) Registered focus position
7
End Focus Transition.
≥Press [Q].
8
Stop recording.
≥Press the video rec. button once again.
∞
10(m) 5 3 2 1.5 1 0.5 0.1
1 23
1
(A) (B)
Special Video Recording – [Focus Transition]
405
Setting Items ([Focus Transition])
[Focus Position Setting]
Registers focus positions.
[Focus Transition Speed]
Sets the moving speed of focus.
•
Moving speed: [SH] (fast) to [SL] (slow)
[Focus Transition Rec]
Starts Focus Transition when recording starts.
•
Select the position registered with [Focus Position Setting].
[Focus Transition Wait]
Sets the wait time before the start of Focus Transition.
•
The recording screen is displayed when you press [ ].
Special Video Recording – [Focus Transition]
406
•
Maintain the same distance to the subject after setting focus positions.
•
The moving speed of focus varies depending on the lens being used.
•
The moving speed of focus slows as it approaches the closest focusing distance
of the lens or infinity.
•
While using [Focus Transition], it is not possible to focus on anything other than
one of the registered focus positions.
•
Any of the operations below will clear the focus position settings.
– Operating the camera on/off switch
– Zoom operation
– Switching the focus mode
– Switching the recording mode
– Replacing the lens
•
When the following function is being used, [Focus Transition] is not available:
– [Live Cropping]
•
[Focus Transition] cannot be used when using an interchangeable lens that does
not support the focus mode [AFC].
Special Video Recording – [Live Cropping]
407
[Live Cropping]
By cropping a part of the image from the image displayed in the live view, it
is possible to record 4K/FHD video that incorporates panning and zooming
with the camera staying in a fixed position.
Pan
Zoom in
•
Use a tripod to minimize camera shake.
Special Video Recording – [Live Cropping]
408
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
2
Select a recording quality with which you can record
[Live Cropping] video.
≥ [] [] [Rec Quality]
•
A recording quality with which you can record [Live Cropping] video ( List of
Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded: 428)
3
Set the pan and zoom effect.
≥ [] [] [Live Cropping] [SET]
[Cropping Duration]
You can set between 2 and 40 seconds.
[Easing Settings]
Select an effect.
[LINEAR]: Moves at a constant speed.
[EASE IN]: Gradually accelerates.
[EASE OUT]: Gradually decelerates.
[EASE IN OUT]: Decelerates after accelerating.
Special Video Recording – [Live Cropping]
409
4
Set the cropping frame.
≥ [] [] [Live Cropping] [Cropping Start/End
Frame]
≥Select the range to start cropping and press .
(A) Cropping start frame
≥Select the range to end cropping and press .
(B) Cropping end frame
•
To redo the settings for the position and size of the start frame and the end
frame, press 4.
•
Press [ ] to check the effect you have set.
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
6HW
(A)
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
6HW
(B)
Special Video Recording – [Live Cropping]
410
5
Enable Live Cropping recording.
≥ [] [] [Live Cropping] [ON]
•
If you have selected a recording quality where Live Cropping recording is not
available, the camera switches to a recording quality where recording is
possible.
6
Start Live Cropping recording.
≥Press the video rec. button.
•
When the set operating time has elapsed, recording automatically ends.
To end recording midway, press the video rec. button again.
(C) Elapsed recording time
(D) Set operating time
7
s
7
s
7
s
20
s
20
s
20
s
(C)
(D)
Special Video Recording – [Live Cropping]
411
Operations for Setting the Cropping Frame
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3421 Touch Moves the frame.
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the frame in small steps.
Enlarges/reduces the frame.
[DISP.] [Reset]
Start frame: Returns the frame position and size
to the default settings.
End frame: Cancels the settings for the position
and size of the frame.
[Set] Confirms the frame position and size.
•
The AF mode switches to [ ].
•
Brightness measurements and focusing are performed within the cropping frame.
To lock the focus point, set [Continuous AF] to [OFF], or set the focus mode to
[MF].
•
[Metering Mode] will be [ ] (multi-metering).
•
[Image Area of Video] is fixed to [FULL]. However, the setting is fixed to [APS-C]
in the following case:
– When a 59.94p or 50.00p [Rec Quality] is set
•
A 4K [Rec Quality] cannot be set when using an APS-C lens.
Special Video Recording – Log Recording
412
Log Recording
≥ [Log View Assist]: 416
Setting [Photo Style] to [V-Log] enables Log recording.
Images finished with rich gradation can be created through post-production
processing.
[] [] [Photo Style] Select [V-Log]
•
Post-production processing is enabled by utilizing LUT (Look-Up Table).
You can download LUT file from the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/download/index3.html
(English only)
9/RJ
Special Video Recording – Log Recording
413
ISO Sensitivity When [V-Log] Is Set
The lower limit of available ISO sensitivity is [640] (when [Extended ISO] is
set: [320]), and the upper limit is [51200].
•
The range of available ISO sensitivities is also different for [LOW] and [HIGH] in
[Dual Native ISO Setting].
•
Reset the exposure if necessary when ISO sensitivity changes.
Special Video Recording – Log Recording
414
Exposure When [V-Log] Is Set
The [V-Log] curve characteristics comply with “V-Log/V-Gamut
REFERENCE MANUAL Rev.1.0”. When set to [V-Log], the standard
exposure when gray with a reflectance ratio of 18 % is imaged is IRE 42 %.
•
When luminance is to be displayed by “Stop” units, this camera calculates IRE 42 %
to “0 Stop”.
When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log]
Reflectance ratio
(%)
IRE (%) Stop
10 bit code
value
12 bit code
value
0 7.3 — 128 512
(1) 18 42 0.0 433 1732
(2) 90 61 2.3 602 2408
-
8
-
8
-
7
-
7
-
6
-
6
-
5
-
5
-
4
-
4
-
3
-
3
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
1001122334455667788
（Stop）（Stop）
（10bitcodevalue）（10bitcodevalue）
00
6464
128128
192192
256256
320320
384384
448448
512512
576576
640640
704704
768768
832832
896896
960960
10241024
(1)
(2)
Special Video Recording – Log Recording
416
[Log View Assist]
When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log], the recording screen and images
output via HDMI will darken. Using [Log View Assist] means you can show
images with LUT file applied on the monitor and output them via HDMI.
[] [] Select [Log View Assist]
[LUT Select(V-Log)]
Selects the LUT file to apply from a preset or LUT files registered in [LUT Library].
([LUT Library]: 328)
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)]
Displays the images with LUT file applied on the monitor of the camera.
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)]
Applies LUT file to images output over HDMI.
•
When applying the LUT file, [LUT] is displayed on the recording screen.
•
You cannot apply LUT files which are a base Photo Style other than [V-Log].
•
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)]/[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] are not available when
[LUT] is applied in the [Photo Style] image quality adjustments.
Special Video Recording – HLG Videos
417
HLG Videos
≥ [HLG View Assist]: 420
Record videos with the wide dynamic range of the HLG format. You can
record in very bright light where overexposure can occur or in dark areas
where underexposure can occur, maintaining the rich yet subtle colors you
can see with your naked eye.
You can view the video that you record by outputting via HDMI to devices
(TVs, etc.) that support the HLG format, or playing back directly on
supporting devices.
•
“HLG (Hybrid Log Gamma)” is an international standard (ITU-R BT.2100) HDR
format.
Special Video Recording – HLG Videos
418
1
Set the recording mode to [ ] or [S&Q].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
2
Select a recording quality with which you can record
HLG video.
≥ [] [] [Rec Quality]
•
Items available for recording with HLG video are indicated as [HLG available].
•
Recording qualities with which you can record HLG video (List of
Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded: 428)
3
Set [Photo Style] to [Like2100(HLG)] or [Like2100(HLG)
Full Range].
≥ [] [] [Photo Style] [Like2100(HLG)]/
[Like2100(HLG) Full Range]
±0
±0
/LNH+/*
Special Video Recording – HLG Videos
419
ISO Sensitivity When [Like2100(HLG)]/[Like2100(HLG)
Full Range] Is Set
The lower limit of available ISO sensitivities will become [400].
•
The range of available ISO sensitivities is also different for [LOW] and [HIGH] in
[Dual Native ISO Setting].
•
Reset the exposure if necessary when ISO sensitivity changes.
•
The monitor on this camera do not support display of HLG format images.
With [Monitor] in [HLG View Assist] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)])
menu, you can display the images converted for monitoring on the monitor of this
camera. ([HLG View Assist]: 420)
•
HLG images are shown dark on devices that do not support the HLG format.
With [HDMI] in [HLG View Assist] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)])
menu, you can set the conversion method for images displayed for monitoring.
([HLG View Assist]: 420)
Special Video Recording – HLG Videos
420
[HLG View Assist]
At recording or playback of HLG video, this displays images with converted
color gamut and brightness on the camera monitor, or outputs these over
HDMI.
[] [] [HLG View Assist] [Monitor] or
[HDMI]
[AUTO]
*
Converts images before outputting them via HDMI while applying the effect of
[MODE2]. This conversion setting works only when the camera is connected to a
device that does not support HDR (HLG format).
[MODE1]
Converts with an emphasis on bright areas such as sky.
•
[MODE1] is displayed on the recording screen.
[MODE2]
Converts with an emphasis on the brightness of a main subject.
•
[MODE2] is displayed on the recording screen.
[OFF]
Displays without converting color gamut and brightness.
•
HLG images appear darker on devices that do not support the HLG format.
* Can only be set while [HDMI] is selected.
Special Video Recording – Anamorphic Recording
421
Anamorphic Recording
≥ [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 423
From a variety of different video formats (recording qualities), you can
select and record with a recording quality that suits anamorphic recording.
During anamorphic recording, it is also possible to display desqueezed
images and the angle of view when cropping after desqueeze editing. It is
also possible to switch to an image stabilizer that suits anamorphic
recording.
•
For information about image stabilizers suited to anamorphic recording
([Anamorphic (Video)]: 263)
Special Video Recording – Anamorphic Recording
422
1
Set [Rec. File Format].
≥ [] [] [Rec. File Format]
2
Select a recording quality suited to anamorphic
recording.
≥ [] [] [Rec Quality]
•
The following recording qualities are available in [ ] mode:
– [Rec Quality] exceeding a resolution of C4K
– [Rec Quality] with a high frame rate video exceeding a recording frame rate
of 60.00p
•
When [Rec. File Format] is set to [MOV], by filtering [Rec Quality] by the
number of pixels, you can display just those recording qualities with
resolutions and aspect ratios that meet the conditions. ([Filtering]: 133)
•
This camera is not compatible with desqueeze editing of video recorded with
anamorphic recording. Use compatible software.
Special Video Recording – Anamorphic Recording
423
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]
Display the desqueezed images suited to the magnification of the
anamorphic lens on this camera.
Using the [Frame Marker], it is also possible to superimpose on display the
frame of the angle of view when cropping after desqueeze editing.
1
Set the recording mode to [ ] or [S&Q].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
2
Set [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display].
≥ [] [] [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]
[ ] ([2.0×])
[ ] ([1.8×])
[ ] ([1.5×])
[ ] ([1.33×])
[ ] ([1.30×])
[OFF]
•
Make settings to suit the magnification of the anamorphic lens you are using.
Special Video Recording – [Synchro Scan(Video)]
425
[Synchro Scan(Video)]
The flicker or horizontal stripes of the light source can be mitigated by
making fine adjustments to the shutter speed.
The shutter speed set in Synchro Scan is saved separately from the
shutter speed used for normal recording.
In the Synchro Scan setting screen you can call up the current shutter
speed for normal recording and adjust it.
1
Set the recording mode to [ ] or [S&Q].
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
2
Set the exposure mode to [S] or [M].
≥ [] [] [Exposure Mode] [S]/[M]
3
Set [Synchro Scan(Video)].
≥ [] [] [Synchro Scan(Video)] [ON]
Special Video Recording – [Synchro Scan(Video)]
426
4
Set the shutter speed.
≥Press 3421 to select the numeric value and then press .
•
The shutter speed can be set in the range between 1 second and 1/8192.0 of
a second.
(The minimum shutter speed depends on the frame rate of the video being
recorded.)
•
Press 34 to change the shutter speed in 1/4 TV intervals. Press 21 to
make fine adjustments.
•
You can call up the current shutter speed for normal recording by pressing
[DISP.].
•
Adjust the shutter speed while looking at the screen so that flickering and
horizontal stripes will be minimized.
•
There may be a difference between what you see on the recording screen and
the actual results of recording. We recommend shooting some tests beforehand.
ュリヴヱハ
Current shutter speed
60.160.1
Special Video Recording – [Segmented File Recording]
427
[Segmented File Recording]
To avoid video loss due to unforeseen interruptions to the power supply,
recorded video is segmented at set intervals while being recorded.
•
The segmented videos are saved as one group image. (Group Images: 461)
1
Set [Rec. File Format] to [MOV].
≥ [] [] [Rec. File Format] [MOV]
2
Set [Segmented File Recording].
≥ [] [] [Segmented File Recording] [10MIN.]/
[5MIN.]/[3MIN.]/[1MIN.]
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded
428
List of Recording Qualities That Enable
Special Videos to be Recorded
: Recording qualities with which you can record Slow & Quick video
: Recording qualities for High Frame Rate video
: Recording qualities that enable use of [Live Cropping]
: Recording qualities with which you can record HLG video
[Rec. File Format]: [MP4(Lite)]
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
[3.8K/10bit/50M/30p]
[Rec Quality]
[3.8K/10bit/50M/25p]
S&Q
HFR
Live Crop
HLG
S&Q
HFR
Live Crop
HLG
S&Q
HFR
Live Crop
HLG
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded
429
[Rec. File Format]: [MP4]
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
[4K/10bit/100M/60p]
[4K/10bit/72M/30p]
[4K/8bit/100M/30p]
[4K/10bit/72M/24p]
[4K/8bit/100M/24p]
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p]
[FHD/8bit/20M/30p]
[FHD/8bit/24M/24p]
[Rec Quality]
[4K/10bit/100M/50p]
[4K/10bit/72M/25p]
[4K/8bit/100M/25p]
[FHD/8bit/28M/50p]
[FHD/8bit/20M/25p]
S&Q
HFR
Live Crop
HLG
S&Q
HFR
Live Crop
HLG
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded
430
[Rec. File Format]: [MOV]
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[Rec Quality]
[6K/30p/420/10-L] (3:2)
[6K/24p/420/10-L] (3:2)
[6K/30p/420/10-L] (17:9)
[6K/24p/420/10-L] (17:9)
[5.9K/30p/420/10-L]
[5.9K/24p/420/10-L]
[3.3K/48p/422/10-L]
[3.3K/48p/420/10-L]
[3.3K/30p/422/10-L]
[3.3K/30p/420/10-L]
[3.3K/24p/422/10-L]
[3.3K/24p/420/10-L]
[C4K/60p/422/10-L]
[C4K/60p/420/10-L]
[C4K/48p/422/10-L]
[C4K/48p/420/10-L]
[C4K/30p/422/10-L]
[C4K/30p/420/10-L]
S&Q
HFR
Live Crop
HLG
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded
431
[C4K/24p/422/10-L]
[C4K/24p/420/10-L]
[4K/60p/422/10-L]
[4K/60p/420/10-L]
[4K/48p/422/10-L]
[4K/48p/420/10-L]
[4K/30p/422/10-L]
[4K/30p/420/10-L]
[4K/24p/422/10-L]
[4K/24p/420/10-L]
[FHD/120p/422/10-L]
[FHD/120p/420/10-L]
[FHD/60p/422/10-L]
[FHD/60p/420/10-L]
[FHD/48p/422/10-L]
[FHD/48p/420/10-L]
[FHD/30p/422/10-L]
[FHD/30p/420/10-L]
[FHD/24p/422/10-L]
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded
432
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
[6K/25p/420/10-L] (3:2)
[6K/25p/420/10-L] (17:9)
[5.9K/25p/420/10-L]
[3.3K/50p/422/10-L]
[3.3K/50p/420/10-L]
[3.3K/25p/422/10-L]
[3.3K/25p/420/10-L]
[C4K/50p/422/10-L]
[C4K/50p/420/10-L]
[C4K/25p/422/10-L]
[C4K/25p/420/10-L]
[4K/50p/422/10-L]
[4K/50p/420/10-L]
[4K/25p/422/10-L]
[4K/25p/420/10-L]
[FHD/100p/422/10-L]
[FHD/100p/420/10-L]
[FHD/50p/422/10-L]
[FHD/50p/420/10-L]
[FHD/25p/422/10-L]
[FHD/25p/420/10-L]
S&Q
HFR
Live Crop
HLG
Special Video Recording – List of Recording Qualities That Enable Special Videos to be Recorded
433
[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
[Rec Quality]
[6K/24p/420/10-L] (3:2)
[6K/24p/420/10-L] (17:9)
[5.9K/24p/420/10-L]
[3.3K/48p/422/10-L]
[3.3K/48p/420/10-L]
[3.3K/24p/422/10-L]
[3.3K/24p/420/10-L]
[C4K/48p/422/10-L]
[C4K/48p/420/10-L]
[C4K/24p/422/10-L]
[C4K/24p/420/10-L]
[4K/48p/422/10-L]
[4K/48p/420/10-L]
[4K/24p/422/10-L]
[4K/24p/420/10-L]
[FHD/48p/422/10-L]
[FHD/48p/420/10-L]
[FHD/24p/422/10-L]
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]
S&Q
HFR
Live Crop
HLG
434
HDMI Output (Video)
You can record while outputting the camera images to an external monitor
or external recorder connected with an HDMI micro cable.
•
HDMI output control differs between during recording and during playback.
For HDMI output settings during playback ([HDMI Connection]: 564)
≥ Connecting HDMI Devices: 435
≥ HDMI Output Image Quality: 436
≥ HDMI Output Settings: 439
HDMI Output (Video) – Connecting HDMI Devices
435
Connecting HDMI Devices
Getting started:
•
Turn off the camera and the external monitor/external recorder.
Connect the camera and an external monitor or external
recorder with a commercially available HDMI micro cable.
(A) HDMI socket (Type D)
(B) External monitor
(C) External recorder
•
Use a Premium High Speed HDMI micro cable (Type D –Type A plug) with the length
less than 3 m (9.8 feet).
•
Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(Inserting at an angle can deform the terminal and cause malfunction.)
•
Do not connect the cable to the wrong terminals. This may cause a malfunction.
(B)
(C)
(A)
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality
436
HDMI Output Image Quality
≥ Images Output via HDMI: 436
Images Output via HDMI
The images output via HDMI during recording differ depending on the
recording mode.
[ ]/[S&Q] Mode
Aspect ratio, resolution, and frame rate output is according to the [Rec
Quality] settings in the [Video] ([Image Format]) menu.
The YUV and bit value are output with YUV changed to 4:2:2 as shown
below.
If the connected device is not compatible with the output system, output
changes to match the connected device.
•
Video with a resolution exceeding 4K is output as C4K/4K resolution.
•
When set to a [Rec Quality] for high frame rate video, the resolution and frame rate
may be down-converted for output.
Recording to card HDMI output
4:2:2 10 bit 4:2:2 10 bit
4:2:0 10 bit 4:2:2 10 bit
4:2:0 8 bit 4:2:2 8 bit
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality
437
[iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M] Mode
Output is the same as [ ]/[S&Q] mode during video recording.
Output is with a 16:9 aspect ratio during recording standby. Resolution,
frame rate, YUV, and bit value output matches the connected device.
•
When set to a [Rec Quality] other than 16:9 or 17:9, bands are added to the
images and they are output with a 16:9 aspect ratio.
•
When set to any [Aspect Ratio] other than 16:9, bands are added to the images
and they are output with a 16:9 aspect ratio.
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Image Quality
438
Notice Regarding HDMI Output
•
It may take some time for the output method to change.
•
When you use the HDMI output during recording, the image may be displayed with a
time lag.
•
Beep sounds, AF beep, and electronic shutter sounds are muted during HDMI
output.
•
When you check the image and audio from the TV connected to the camera, the
microphone of the camera may pick up the sound from the speakers of the TV,
producing an abnormal sound (audio feedback).
If this occurs, move the camera away from the TV or lower the volume on the TV.
•
Certain setting screens are not output via HDMI.
•
For information about the high temperature display (For information about
the high temperature display: 118)
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Settings
440
Outputting the Camera Information Display via HDMI
Output the camera information display to an external device connected by
HDMI.
[] [] [HDMI Rec Output] Select [Info
Display]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
There are the following restrictions when connected via HDMI and [Info Display]
is set to [ON]:
– [Touch Tab] is not available.
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Settings
441
Outputting Control Information to an External
Recorder
Recording start and stop control information is output to an external
recorder connected by HDMI.
[] [] [HDMI Rec Output] Select [HDMI
Recording Control]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
•
[HDMI Recording Control] can be set when [HDMI Time Code Output] is set to [ON]
in [ ]/[S&Q] mode. ([HDMI Time Code Output]: 375)
•
Control information is output when pressing the video rec. button or shutter button,
even if the video cannot be recorded (such as when there is no card inserted into the
camera).
•
Only compatible external devices can be controlled.
HDMI Output (Video) – HDMI Output Settings
442
Outputting Audio via HDMI
Output audio to an external device connected by HDMI.
[] [] [HDMI Rec Output] Select [Sound
Output (HDMI)]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Outputting the Enlarged Live Display (Video) via
HDMI
Output the enlarged screens from [MF Assist] or [Enlarged Live
Display(Video)] to an external device connected by HDMI.
[] [] [HDMI Rec Output] Select [Enlarged
Live Display]
[MODE1]
Enlarged display of live view is output during standby for video recording.
[MODE2]
Enlarged display of live view is output during standby for video recording and during
video recording.
•
The resolution and frame rate of the video output via HDMI will be FHD/60p or less.
[OFF]
Enlarged display of live view is not output.
•
When the monitor of the camera is displaying the enlarged display, the camera
information display is not output via HDMI.
443
Playing Back and Editing of Images
This chapter explains how to play back and delete pictures and videos.
•
Images recorded on devices other than this one may not be played back or edited
correctly on this camera.
≥ Playing Back Pictures: 444
≥ Playing Back Videos: 446
≥ Switching the Display Mode: 455
≥ Group Images: 461
≥ Deleting Images: 463
≥ [RAW Processing]: 465
≥ [Video Repair]: 474
≥ [Playback] Menu: 477
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Pictures
444
Playing Back Pictures
1
Display the playback screen.
≥Press [ ].
2
Select a picture.
≥Select the pictures by pressing 21.
≥You can move continuously through images by pressing and
holding 21.
≥You can also select by rotating .
≥You can also move through images by dragging the screen
horizontally.
1/999
1/999
1/999
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Pictures
445
3
Stop playback.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
≥You can also stop playback by pressing [ ].
•
This camera complies with the “Design rule for Camera File system” (DCF) and
“Exchangeable Image File Format” (Exif) standards established by “Japan
Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association” (JEITA).
The camera cannot play back files that do not comply with the DCF standard.
Exif is a file format for pictures which allows recording information, etc. to be
added.
•
You can assign switching of the recording screen/playback screen to an Fn
button:
([Rec / Playback Switch]: 496, [Rec / Playback Switch]: 499)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
446
Playing Back Videos
≥ Video Repeat Playback: 450
≥ Extracting a Picture: 452
≥ [Video Divide]: 453
1
Display the playback screen.
≥Press [ ].
2
Select a video.
•
For information about how to select images (Playing Back Pictures: 444)
•
The [ ] video icon is displayed for a video.
•
The video recording time is displayed on the screen.
Example) When 8 minutes 30 seconds: 8m30s
•
h: hour, m: minute, s: second
(A) Video recording time
8m30s
8m30s
8m30s
(A)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
447
3
Play back the video.
≥Press 3.
≥You can also start playback by touching [ ] at the center of the
screen.
(B) Elapsed playback time
(C) Playback bar
4
Stop playback.
≥Press 4.
00:05:50
00:05:50
00:05:50
00:08:30
00:08:30
00:08:30
(B) (C)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
448
Operations During Video Playback
Button
operations
Touch
operations
Description of operation
3
/
Plays/pauses.
4 — Stops.
2 —
Performs fast-rewind playback.
•
If you press 2 again, the fast-rewind speed
increases.
Performs frame-by-frame rewinding (while
paused).
1 —
Performs fast-forward playback.
•
If you press 1 again, the fast-forward speed
increases.
Performs frame-by-frame forwarding (while
paused).
— Selects the frame to display.
Extracts a picture (while paused). (Extracting a
Picture: 452)
—
Reduces the volume.
Increases the volume.
6DYH
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
449
•
The camera can play back videos in MP4 and MOV formats.
•
Video recorded with a [System Frequency] setting that is different to the current
one cannot be played back.
•
If the reading speed of the card is slow, playback may pause or it may not be
possible to play back smoothly.
•
You may be able to repair video files that cannot be played back.
([Video Repair]: 474)
•
You can set the operation for when playback of video finishes:
([Behavior After Video Playback]: 481)
•
You can assign switching of the recording screen/playback screen to an Fn
button:
([Rec / Playback Switch]: 496, [Rec / Playback Switch]: 499)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
450
Video Repeat Playback
You can play back a part of a video repeatedly.
1
Display the screen for setting the part to repeat.
≥Press [Q] while paused.
≥The screen for setting the part to repeat is also displayed when you
touch [Repeat Playback] while paused.
2
Set the position to start the repeat.
≥Press 21 to select the start position and then press .
≥Selection is also possible by rotating or .
≥You can also select the start position by touching the playback bar.
3
Set the position to end the repeat.
≥Set using the same procedure as
2
.
•
The position cannot be set if the position to start the repeat and the position to
end the repeat are too close.
00:05:50
00:05:50
00:05:50
00:08:30
00:08:30
00:08:30
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
451
4
Start playback.
•
The operations during repeat playback are the same as “Operations During
Video Playback”. (Operations During Video Playback: 448)
•
End repeat playback by pressing 4 to stop playback or by pressing [Q] while
paused.
•
Repeat playback is not possible if the recording time is short.
•
The positions set for the repeated part may shift from the position where the
video is paused.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
452
Extracting a Picture
Extract one frame of a video and save it as a JPEG image.
1
Pause playback at the position you wish to extract a
picture.
≥Press 3.
•
To fine-adjust the position, press 21 (rewind frame-by-frame or forward
frame-by-frame).
2
Save the picture.
≥Press .
≥You can also save the picture by touching [Save].
•
The picture created from the video is saved with a [FINE] picture quality.
The picture is saved with a size according to the resolution of the [Rec Quality].
•
The image quality of a picture created from a video may be coarser than normal.
•
[ ] is displayed on the detailed information display screen for a picture
created from a video.
•
Pictures cannot be extracted when the following function is being used:
– [Auto Transfer] (when there is an image queued to be transferred)
00:06:10
00:06:10
00:06:10 00:08:30
00:08:30
00:08:30
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
453
[Video Divide]
Divide a recorded video into two.
1
Select [Video Divide].
≥ [] [] [Video Divide]
2
Select and play the image.
≥Press 21 to select an image and then press .
3
Pause playback at the position you wish to divide.
≥Press 3.
•
To fine-adjust the position, press 21 (frame-by-frame rewind or
frame-by-frame forward).
•
Images cannot be returned to their original state once they have been divided.
Carefully confirm the images before performing the divide operation.
•
Do not remove the card or battery from the camera during the divide process.
The images may be lost.
00:06:1000:06:1000:06:10 00:08:3000:08:3000:08:30
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Playing Back Videos
454
4
Divide the video.
≥Press .
≥You can also divide the video by touching [Divide].
•
Dividing the video at a point close to the start or end may not be possible.
•
Videos with a short recording time cannot be divided.
•
[Video Divide] cannot be used on images recorded using [Segmented File
Recording].
•
[Video Divide] is not available when using the following function:
– [Auto Transfer] (when there is an image queued to be transferred)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode
455
Switching the Display Mode
≥ Enlarged Display: 456
≥ Thumbnail Screen: 458
≥ Calendar Playback: 460
You can use features to do things like enlarge recorded images for display
and switch to thumbnail display to display multiple images at once
(multi-playback).
You can also switch to calendar display to show images of a selected
recording date.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode
456
Enlarged Display
Playback images can be displayed enlarged (Playback Zoom).
Enlarging the playback screen.
≥ Rotate to the right.
≥ The playback screen is enlarged in the order of 2× 4× 8×
16×.
•
Rotating to the left returns to the previous display size.
•
Enlarged display to 16× may not be possible with images that have a small picture
size.
2.0X2.0X2.0X
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode
457
Operations During Enlarged Display
Button
operations
Touch
operations
Description of operation
— Enlarges/reduces the screen.
—
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
3421 Drag Moves the enlarged display position.
—
Forwards or rewinds images while maintaining
the same zoom magnification and zoom position.
•
You can display the point focused with AF. You can enlarge the display from that
point:
([Magnify from AF Point]: 480)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode
458
Thumbnail Screen
1
Switch to thumbnail display.
≥Rotate to the left.
≥The display is switched in the order of 12-image screen
30-image screen.
•
Rotating to the left during 30-image screen display switches to calendar
display. (Calendar Playback: 460)
•
Rotating to the right returns to the previous display.
•
You can also switch the display by touching an icon.
[ ]: 1-image screen
[ ]: 12-image screen
[ ]: 30-image screen
[ ]: Calendar (Calendar Playback: 460)
2
Select an image.
≥Press 3421 to select an image and then press .
CAL
1/999
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode
459
•
You can scroll the screen by dragging the thumbnail display up or down.
•
Images indicated with [ ] cannot be played back.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Switching the Display Mode
460
Calendar Playback
1
Switch to calendar playback.
≥Rotate to the left.
≥The display is switched in the order of thumbnail screen
(12 images) Thumbnail screen (30 images) Calendar
playback.
•
Rotating to the right returns to the previous display.
2
Select the recording date.
≥Press 3421 to select a date and then press .
3
Select an image.
≥Press 3421 to select an image and then press .
•
Rotating to the left returns to calendar playback.
•
The range that the calendar can be displayed is January 2000 to December
2099.
21
1
9876543
16151413121110
2322212019
26
1817
SUN SATFRITHUWEDTUEMON
2524
31
2024
12
292827 30
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Group Images
461
Group Images
Images recorded with Time Lapse Shot or Stop Motion Shooting are
handled as group images in the camera, and can be deleted and edited on
a group basis.
(For example, if you delete a group image, all images in the group are
deleted.)
You can also delete and edit each image in a group individually.
Images Handled as Group Images by the Camera
Group images recorded with SH burst recording.
Group images recorded with Focus Bracket.
Group images recorded with Time Lapse Shot.
Group images recorded with Stop Motion Shooting.
Group images recorded with [Segmented File Recording].
1/9991/9991/999
^\GU^\GU^\GU
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Group Images
462
Playing and Editing the Images in a Group One by One
Operations such as displaying thumbnails and deleting images are
available with images in groups just as with normal playback.
1 Select the group image in the playback state. (Playing Back Pictures: 444)
2 Press 4 to display the images in the group.
•
You can also perform the same operation by touching the group image icon.
3 Press 21 to select an image.
•
To return to the normal playback screen, press 4 or touch [ ] again.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Deleting Images
463
Deleting Images
1
Press [ ] in playback state.
•
Images cannot be restored once they have been deleted. Carefully confirm the
images before deletion.
•
If you delete a group image, all images in the group are deleted.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – Deleting Images
464
2
Press 34 to select the deletion method and then press
.
[Delete Single]
Deletes the selected image.
[Delete Multi]
Selecting and deleting multiple images.
1 Press 3421 to select the image to delete and then press .
•
[ ] is displayed for the selected image.
•
If you press again, the selection is canceled.
•
Up to 100 images can be selected.
2 Press [DISP.] to delete the selected image.
•
Depending on the number of images to be deleted, it may take some time to
delete them.
•
Images cannot be deleted when the following function is being used:
– [Auto Transfer] (when there is an image queued to be transferred)
•
You can set which of [Yes] and [No] is selected initially in the confirmation screen
when deleting:
([Delete Confirmation]: 486)
•
All images on the card can be deleted:
([Delete All Images]: 486)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
465
[RAW Processing]
This processes pictures taken in RAW format on the camera and saves
them in JPEG format.
1
Select [RAW Processing].
≥ [] [] [RAW Processing]
2
Select the RAW image.
≥Press 21 to select an image and then press .
•
When group images are selected, press 4 and then select an image in the
group.
Press 4 again to return to the normal selection screen.
•
The settings from the time of recording are reflected in displayed images.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
466
3
Select a setting item.
≥Press 34 to select an item and then press .
4
Change the setting.
≥Rotate or .
•
The image can be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/pinching in the screen.
5
Confirm the setting.
≥Press .
≥The screen of Step
3
reappears.
To set another item, repeat Steps
3
to
5
.
+1+1 +2+2
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
100
DISP.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
467
6
Save the image.
≥Press 34 to select [Begin Processing] and then press .
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
468
Setting Items ([RAW Processing])
[Begin Processing]
Saves the image.
[White Balance]
Selects and adjusts the white balance.
Selecting the item with [ ] enables processing with the same setting as at the time
of recording.
•
If you press 4 in the [White Balance] selection screen, the white balance adjustment
screen appears. (Adjusting the White Balance: 305)
•
If you press 3 while [ ] to [ ] is selected, the color temperature setting
screen appears. (Color Temperature Setting: 304)
[Brightness correction]
Corrects the brightness.
•
The [Brightness correction] effect differs from the effect of exposure compensation
during recording.
[Photo Style] ([Photo Style]: 307)
Selects a Photo Style.
•
If you press [Q] while [Like709] is selected, the knee setting screen appears.
(Recording While Controlling Overexposure (Knee): 357)
•
You cannot select a Photo Style for images recorded with [V-Log]. You cannot select
[V-Log] for images not recorded with [V-Log].
•
You cannot select a Photo Style other than [Cinelike D2] or [Cinelike V2] for images
recorded with [Cinelike D2] or [Cinelike V2]. You cannot select [Cinelike D2] or
[Cinelike V2] for images not recorded with Photo Style [Cinelike D2] or [Cinelike V2].
•
[REAL TIME LUT] cannot be selected. The Photo Styles that can be selected for
images recoded with [REAL TIME LUT] depend on the base Photo Style.
1
4
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
469
[i.Dynamic Range]
Selects the setting of [i.Dynamic Range].
[Contrast]
Adjusts the contrast.
[Highlight]
Adjusts the brightness of bright portions.
[Shadow]
Adjusts the brightness of dark portions.
[Saturation]/[Color Tone]
Adjusts the saturation or color tone.
[Hue]
Adjusts the hue.
[Filter Effect]
Selects filter effects.
[Grain Effect]
Selects a grain effect setting.
[Color Noise]
Adds color to the grain effect.
[Noise Reduction]
Sets noise reduction.
[Sharpness]
Adjusts the sharpness.
S
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
470
[LUT]
Selects the LUT file registered in [LUT Library]. ([LUT Library]: 328)
[LUT Opacity]
Adjusts the LUT file effect.
[More Settings]
[Revert To Original]: Returns the settings to the ones from the time of recording.
[Color Space]: Selects a Color Space setting from [sRGB] or [AdobeRGB]. ([Color
Space]: 522)
[Picture Size]: Selects the size for storing images.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
471
•
The items that can be adjusted depend on the selected [Photo Style].
([Saturation])
*1
([Color Tone])
*1
*1
*1
*1,2
*2
*1,2
*1,2
LUT1/
LUT2/
S
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
472
*1 Can be set when a LUT file is applied with [LUT1] or [LUT2].
*2 Can be set when [Grain Effect] is one of [Low], [Standard], or [High].
Displaying a Comparison Screen
You can change a setting while checking the effect by displaying images
with the applied setting value side by side.
1 Press [DISP.] in the screen of Step
4
.
•
The image with the current setting (A) is displayed at the center.
•
Touching the image with the current setting enlarges it.
Touching [ ] returns to the original display.
•
A comparison screen cannot be displayed while [Noise Reduction] or
[Sharpness] is selected.
2 Rotate or to change the setting.
3 Press to confirm the setting.
DISP.
0
(A)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [RAW Processing]
473
•
It may take a while for the comparison screen to be displayed.
•
RAW images recorded with the camera are always recorded in the [L] size of
[3:2].
(However, RAW images recorded in High Resolution mode are recorded in the
[XL] size of [3:2])
•
With this function, images are processed with the aspect ratio and the angle of
view of [Hybrid Zoom(Photo)]/[Crop Zoom(Photo)] from the time of recording.
•
With RAW images recorded using [Hybrid Zoom(Photo)]/[Crop Zoom(Photo)],
the [Picture Size] that can be selected during processing may be different.
•
[Picture Quality] is processed as [FINE] with this function.
•
The results of RAW processing with this function and with the “SILKYPIX
Developer Studio” software do not completely match.
•
RAW processing is not possible while you are using the following functions:
– HDMI output
– [Auto Transfer]
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Video Repair]
474
[Video Repair]
When the recording of a video could not be completed normally, a video file
that cannot be played back may be generated (extension “.mdt”).
You can repair the “.mdt” file with this function to make it playable.
•
Possible causes for the generation of “.mdt” files are:
– Power turns off during video recording (battery is removed, AC cable is unplugged,
power outage while using the AC adaptor, etc.)
– Card removed during video recording
– Card removed while writing to card after video recording
– When an unexpected freeze occurs during video recording/while writing to the
card
1
Select [Video Repair].
≥ [] [] [Video Repair]
•
Video files that can be repaired are filtered.
•
Videos that can be repaired are those videos recorded with the [Rec. File
Format] being [MOV].
Video recorded in [MP4(Lite)] or [MP4] cannot be repaired.
•
As repairs can take some time, supply with power during the operation. (Using
the Camera While Supplying It with Power (Supplying Power): 45)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Video Repair]
475
2
Select the video file to repair.
≥Press 21 to select a file and then press .
•
Refer to the recording date and time (A), folder/file number (B), and video
recording time (C) to help with selecting the video file.
3
Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen.
•
Video repair starts. Repair takes some time.
•
The video file after repair is saved in the same folder as the file before repair.
Canceling Video Repair
Even if you cancel video repair, the file is not deleted, so the procedure can
be done over again later if required.
1 Press either in the video repair progress screen.
2 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen.
(B)(A) (C)
2024.12.1 10:00 100-0001 1/2
8m30s
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Video Repair]
476
•
It may not be possible to repair videos with a short recording time.
•
It may not be possible to repair videos in some cases due to the state of the data.
•
Video repair cannot be started if there is very limited free space on the card.
•
Do not turn off the power or remove the card during repair.
Otherwise, the card and recorded data may be damaged.
•
Do not perform other operations during the repair.
•
You cannot repair videos recorded with devices other than this camera.
•
When the following function is being used, [Video Repair] is not available:
– [Auto Transfer] (when there is an image queued to be transferred)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
477
[Playback] Menu
≥ How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu: 477
≥ [Playback] ([Playback Mode]): 479
≥ [Playback] ([Process Image]): 482
≥ [Playback] ([Add/Delete Info.]): 483
≥ [Playback] ([Edit Image]): 484
≥ [Playback] ([Others]): 486
How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu
Follow the steps below when the image selection screen is displayed.
When [Single] Has Been Selected
1 Press 21 to select the image.
2 Press .
•
If [Set/Cancel] is displayed at the right bottom of the screen, the setting is
canceled when is pressed again.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
478
When [Multi] Has Been Selected
1 Press 3421 to select the image and then press (repeat).
•
The setting is canceled when is pressed again.
2 Press [DISP.] to execute.
When [Protect] is selected
Press 3421 to select the image, and then press to set (repeat).
•
The setting is canceled when is pressed again.
321
654
vr
ュリヴヱハ
321
654
zVj
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
479
[Playback] ([Playback Mode])
[Playback Mode]
[Slide Show]
: Default settings
[Normal Play] / [Picture Only] / [Video Only] / [Rating]
Filters the type of images to play back.
•
When you have set [Rating], put a check mark in the rating level you want to
display, then press [DISP.].
[All] / [Picture Only] / [Video Only] / [Rating]
Selects image types and plays them back at regular intervals in order.
•
When you have set [Rating], put a check mark in the rating level you want to
display, then press [DISP.].
[Start]: Starts slide show playback.
[Duration]: Sets repeat playback.
[Repeat]: Sets repeat playback.
Operations during slide show
3: Plays/pauses (You can also perform the same operation by touching [ ] or
[])
2: Move to the previous image
1: Move to the next image
4: Ends the slide show
: Adjusts the volume
•
When [Video Only] is set, [Duration] is not available.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
480
[Rotate Disp.]
[Picture Sort]
[Magnify from AF Point]
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)]
[ON] / [OFF]
Automatically displays pictures vertically if they were recorded when holding the
camera vertically.
[FILE NAME] / [DATE/TIME]
This sets the order in which the camera displays images during playback.
[FILE NAME]: Displays images by folder name/file name.
[DATE/TIME]: Displays images by recording date.
•
If you insert another card, it may take some time to read all data, therefore pictures
may not be displayed in the set order.
[ON] / [OFF]
Displays the point focused with AF.
Enlarges the AF focus location when enlarging the image.
•
The center of the image is enlarged for RAW images recorded in the High
Resolution mode or when the image is not focused.
[ON] / [OFF]
When playing back images recorded with [Photo Style] set to [V-Log], this displays
the images with LUT file applied on the monitor.
•
This functions in tandem with [LUT View Assist (Monitor)] in [Log View Assist] in
the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu. ([Log View Assist]: 416)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
481
[HLG View Assist (Monitor)]
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]
[Behavior After Video Playback]
[MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF]
At recording or playback of HLG video, this converts their color gamut and
brightness for display.
•
This functions in tandem with [Monitor] in [HLG View Assist] in the [Custom]
([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu. ([HLG View Assist]: 420)
[ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [OFF]
This displays the desqueezed images suited to the magnification of the anamorphic
lens on this camera.
•
This is linked with [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] under the [Custom] ([Monitor /
Display (Video)]) menu. ([Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 423)
[End Playback] / [Pause At Last Frame]
Sets the operation for when playback of video finishes.
[End Playback]: Ends video playback and returns to the image selection screen.
[Pause At Last Frame]: Does not end video playback, but pauses on the final
frame. To end video playback, press 4.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
482
[Playback] ([Process Image])
[RAW Processing]
[Time Lapse Video]
[Stop Motion Video]
Processes pictures taken in RAW format on the camera and saves them in JPEG
format.
([RAW Processing]: 465)
This creates videos from group images recorded with [Time Lapse Shot].
1 Press 21 to select a [Time Lapse Shot] group and then press .
2 Select the options for creating a video to combine the pictures into a video.
(Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos: 234)
•
When [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz (CINEMA)], [Time Lapse Video] is
not available.
This creates videos from group images recorded with [Stop Motion Animation].
1 Press 21 to select the Stop Motion Animation group and then press .
2 Select the options for creating a video to combine the pictures into a video.
(Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos: 234)
•
When [System Frequency] is set to [24.00Hz (CINEMA)], [Stop Motion Video] is
not available.
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
483
[Playback] ([Add/Delete Info.])
[Protect]
[Rating]
[Single] / [Multi] / [Cancel]
You can set protection for images so that they will not be deleted by mistake.
However, if you format the card, the protected images will also be deleted.
•
For information about how to select images (How to Select an Image(s) in the
[Playback] Menu: 477)
•
Be careful because the [Protect] setting may be disabled on a device other than
this camera.
[Single] / [Multi] / [Cancel]
If you set any of the five different rating levels for images, you can do the following:
•
Deleting all images except for those with ratings.
•
Use the file details view on a PC, etc., to check the rating level. (JPEG images
only)
1 Select an image. (How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] Menu: 477)
2 Press 21 to select a rating level (1 to 5) and then press .
•
When [Multi] is selected, repeat Steps 1 and 2.
•
To cancel the setting, set the rating level to [OFF].
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
484
[Playback] ([Edit Image])
[Resize]
: Default settings
[Single] / [Multi]
Reduce the picture size of JPEG images and save them as different images to
enable them to be easily used for web pages or sent as email attachments.
•
For information about how to select images (How to Select an Image(s) in the
[Playback] Menu: 477)
– When [Single] is selected, after choosing the image, press 34 to select the
size, then press .
– When [Multi] is selected, before choosing the images, press 34 to select the
size, then press .
•
You can set up to 100 images at once with [Multi].
•
The image quality of the resized image becomes lower.
•
[Resize] is not available for images recorded using the following functions:
– Video recording
– Group images
– [65:24]/[2:1] ([Aspect Ratio])
– [RAW] ([Picture Quality])
– Pictures created from [C4K] video
– [XS] ([Picture Size])
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
485
[Rotate]
[Video Divide]
[Video Repair]
Rotate images manually in 90o steps.
[]: Rotates 90o clockwise.
[]: Rotates 90o counter-clockwise.
•
For information about how to select images (How to Select an Image(s) in the
[Playback] Menu: 477)
•
When [Rotate Disp.] is [OFF], [Rotate] is not available.
Divide a recorded video into two.
([Video Divide]: 453)
When recording does not finish normally for some reason, it is possible to repair the
video file. ([Video Repair]: 474)
Playing Back and Editing of Images – [Playback] Menu
486
[Playback] ([Others])
[Delete Confirmation]
[Delete All Images]
: Default settings
["Yes" first] / ["No" first]
This sets which option, [Yes] or [No], will be highlighted first when the confirmation
screen for deleting an image is displayed.
["Yes" first]: [Yes] is highlighted first.
["No" first]: [No] is highlighted first.
Deleting all images in a card.
•
Images cannot be restored once they have been deleted. Carefully confirm the
images before deletion.
•
If you select [Delete All Non-rating], all images except those with a rating set are
deleted.
•
[Delete All Images] can be used when [Playback Mode] is set to [Normal Play].
487
Camera Customization
This chapter describes the customization function with which you can
configure the camera to your preferred settings.
It also describes the [Custom] menu where you can make advanced
settings for the camera operations and screen displays, and the [Setup]
menu where you can make basic settings for the camera.
≥ Fn Buttons: 488
≥ [Dial Operation Switch]: 502
≥ Quick Menu Customization: 505
≥ Custom Mode: 512
≥ [Custom] Menu: 517
≥ [Setup] Menu: 554
≥ My Menu: 572
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
488
Fn Buttons
≥ Register Functions to the Fn Buttons: 490
≥ Use the Fn Buttons: 501
You can register functions to the Fn (Function) buttons.
Different functions can be set for both during recording and playback.
Fn Button Default Settings
Fn buttons [Setting in REC mode] [Setting in PLAY mode]
(1) [] [Exposure Comp.] [No Setting]
(2)
Video rec.
button
[Video Record] [Video Record]
(3) [LUT] [REAL TIME LUT] [No Setting]
(4) [AF ON] [AF-ON] [Rating¿3]
(5) [Q] [Q.MENU] [Send Image (Smartphone)]
(6)
[Fn1]/[ ]/
[]
[Level Gauge]
•
Cannot be used as Fn
buttons during playback.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(6)
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
489
Fn buttons [Setting in REC mode] [Setting in PLAY mode]
(7)
[Fn2] [Preview]
•
Cannot be used as Fn
buttons during playback.
[Fn3] [Wi-Fi]
[Fn4] [Histogram]
[Fn5] [Boost I.S. (Video)]
[Fn6]
[Off (Disable Press and
Hold)]
(8)
[Sensitivity]
[White Balance]
[Drive Mode]
[AF Mode]
[No Setting]
Fn3Fn3Fn3
Fn6Fn6Fn6
OFFOFFOFF
Fn4Fn4Fn4
Fn5Fn5Fn5
Fn2Fn2Fn2
(7) (8)
Fn8
Fn7
Fn9
Fn10
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
490
Register Functions to the Fn Buttons
1
Select [Fn Button Set].
≥ [] [] [Fn Button Set] [Setting in REC mode]/
[Setting in PLAY mode]
2
Select the button.
≥Press 34 to select the button and then press .
≥Selection is also possible by rotating .
•
Press [DISP.] to change the page.
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
491
3
Find the function to register.
≥Rotate to select the sub tab where the function to register is
categorized (Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in REC
mode]): 493, Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in PLAY
mode]): 499) and then press .
≥You can also select by pressing 2 to select the sub tab, pressing
34 or rotating , and then pressing 1.
≥Switch the [1] to [3] tabs by pressing [Q].
4
Register the function.
≥Press 34 to select a function and then press .
≥Selection is also possible by rotating .
•
Select items with [>] by selecting the item again.
•
Depending on the button, some functions cannot be registered.
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
492
•
You can also touch [ ] on the control panel (Control Panel: 684) to display
the screen in Step
2
.
•
You can also press and hold the Fn button (2 sec.) to display the screen in
Step
4
.
(This may not be displayed depending on the registered function and on the
button type.)
•
You can assign a function to the focus button of an interchangeable lens:
([Lens Fn Button Setting]: 551)
Fn
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
493
Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in REC mode])
[1] tab
[Image Quality]
•
[Exposure Comp.] (Exposure Compensation: 286)
•
[Dual Native ISO Setting] ([Dual Native ISO Setting]: 296)
•
[Sensitivity] (ISO Sensitivity: 292)
•
[White Balance] (White Balance (WB): 299)
•
[Photo Style] ([Photo Style]: 307)
•
[Apply LUT]
– Applies the LUT file that was set in [LUT] with either [REAL TIME LUT] or [MY
PHOTO STYLE]. (Adjusting Image Quality: 312)
•
[REAL TIME LUT] ([REAL TIME LUT]: 326)
•
[Metering Mode] ([Metering Mode]: 267)
•
[Aspect Ratio] ([Aspect Ratio]: 106)
•
[Picture Quality] ([Picture Quality]: 110)
•
[Picture Size] ([Picture Size]: 108)
•
[1 Shot Spot Metering]
– Records with the metering mode set to [ ] (Spot metering) once only.
([Metering Mode]: 267)
•
[Min. Shutter Speed] ([Min. Shutter Speed]: 253)
•
[1 Shot RAW+JPG]
– Records a RAW image and a JPEG image simultaneously once only. ([Picture
Quality]: 110)
•
[i.Dynamic Range] ([i.Dynamic Range]: 289)
•
[Color Shading Compensation] ([Color Shading Compensation]: 335)
•
[Filter Effect] ([Filter Settings]: 320)
•
[One Push AE]
– Adjusts the aperture value and shutter speed to the settings suited for the standard
exposure determined by the camera. (Exposure Compensation: 286)
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
494
•
[Touch AE] (Touch AE: 100)
•
[AWB Lock] ([AWB Lock Setting]: 521)
•
[Exposure Mode] (Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos: 343)
•
[Synchro Scan(Photo)] ([Synchro Scan(Photo)]: 251)
•
[Synchro Scan(Video)] ([Synchro Scan(Video)]: 425)
[Focus/Shutter]
•
[Focus Mode] (Selecting the Focus Mode: 139)
•
[AF Mode] (Selecting the AF Mode: 159)
•
[AF Detection Setting] (Automatic Detection: 162)
•
[Detecting Subject] (Automatic Detection: 162)
•
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] ([AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 148)
•
[AF Custom Setting(Video)] ([AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 351)
•
[Focus Limiter] ([Focus Limiter]: 151)
•
[Focus Limiter Range Set] ([Focus Limiter]: 151)
•
[Focus Peaking] ([Focus Peaking]: 188)
•
[Focus Peaking Sensitivity] ([Focus Peaking]: 188)
•
[Focus Frame Moving Speed] ([Focus Frame Moving Speed]: 154)
•
[Focus Ring Lock] ([Focus Ring Lock]: 526)
•
[AE LOCK] (Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 290)
•
[AF LOCK] (Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 290)
•
[AF/AE LOCK] (Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 290)
•
[AF-ON] ([AF ON] button: 143)
•
[AF-ON : Near Shift]
– AF operates giving priority to close-up subjects. (Using AF: 141)
•
[AF-ON : Far Shift]
– AF operates giving priority to distant subjects. (Using AF: 141)
•
[AF-Point Scope] ([AF-Point Scope]: 146)
•
[Focus Area Set]
– Displays the AF area/MF Assist movement screens. (AF Area Operations: 177,
Operations on the MF Assist Screen: 185)
•
[Enlarged Live Display(Video)] ([Enlarged Live Display(Video)]: 352)
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
495
[Others (Photo)]
•
[Drive Mode] (Selecting the Drive Mode: 205)
•
[Drive Mode Setting] (Selecting the Drive Mode: 205)
•
[Bracketing] (Bracket Recording: 241)
•
[Silent Mode] ([Silent Mode]: 249)
•
[Image Stabilizer] ([Operation Mode]: 260)
•
[Hybrid Zoom(Photo)] ([Hybrid Zoom(Photo)]: 194)
•
[Crop Zoom]
– Can be set for [Crop Zoom(Photo)], [Zoom Control], [Zoom In(Tele)], [Zoom
Out(Wide)], [Crop Zoom Increment(Step)], and [Zoom Speed(Photo)]. ([Crop
Zoom(Photo)]: 191)
[Image Format]
•
[Rec. File Format] ([Rec. File Format]: 122)
•
[Rec Quality] ([Rec Quality]: 123)
•
[Rec Quality (My List)] (Setting or deleting in My List: 134)
•
[Slow & Quick Setting] (Slow & Quick Video: 393)
•
[Time Code Display] (Time Code: 373)
[2] tab
[Audio]
•
[Sound Rec Level Disp.] ([Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 361)
•
[Mute Sound Input] ([Mute Sound Input]: 362)
•
[Sound Rec Level Adj.] ([Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 364)
•
[Sound Rec Quality] ([Sound Rec Quality]: 365)
•
[Sound Rec Level Limiter] ([Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 366)
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
496
[Others (Video)]
•
[Image Stabilizer] ([Operation Mode]: 260)
•
[E-Stabilization (Video)] ([E-Stabilization (Video)]: 261)
•
[Boost I.S. (Video)] ([Boost I.S. (Video)]: 262)
•
[Image Area of Video] ([Image Area of Video]: 136)
•
[Hybrid Zoom(Video)] ([Hybrid Zoom(Video)]: 201)
•
[Crop Zoom]
– Can be set for [Crop Zoom(Video)], [Zoom Control], [Zoom In(Tele)], [Zoom
Out(Wide)], [Crop Zoom Increment(Step)], and [Zoom Speed(Video)]. ([Crop
Zoom(Video)]: 197)
•
[Focus Transition] ([Focus Transition]: 402)
•
[Live Cropping] ([Live Cropping]: 407)
•
[Live Cropping Settings] ([Live Cropping]: 407)
[Operation]
•
[Q.MENU] (Quick Menu: 80)
•
[Rec / Playback Switch]
– Switches to the playback screen. (Playing Back Pictures: 444, Playing Back
Videos: 446)
•
[Video Record] (Basic Video Operations: 113)
•
[Video Record(Creative Video)]
– Video recording is started or stopped only in the [ ] mode. (Setting the
Exposure for Recording Videos: 343)
•
[Operation Lock]
– A certain type of operation is disabled. Set the type of operation to be disabled in
[Operation Lock Setup]. ([Operation Lock Setup]: 531)
•
[Dial Operation Switch] (Temporarily Change Dial Operation: 504)
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
497
[Monitor / Display]
•
[Preview] (Preview Mode: 284)
•
[Preview Aperture Effect]
– The aperture effect can be previewed while the Fn button is being pressed.
(Preview Mode: 284)
•
[Constant Preview] ([Constant Preview]: 535)
•
[Level Gauge] ([Level Gauge]: 544)
•
[Histogram] ([Histogram]: 536)
•
[Luminance Spot Meter] ([Luminance Spot Meter]: 384)
•
[Frame Marker] ([Frame Marker]: 388)
•
[Photo Grid Line] ([Photo Grid Line]: 537)
•
[Live View Boost] ([Live View Boost]: 537)
•
[Monochrome Live View] ([Monochrome Live View]: 547)
•
[Night Mode] ([Night Mode]: 538)
•
[Monitor Display Settings]
– Switches the displayed monitor display style. ([Monitor Display Settings]: 539)
•
[Video-Priority Display] ([Video-Priority Display]: 549)
•
[Zebra Pattern] ([Zebra Pattern]: 386)
•
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] ([LUT View Assist (Monitor)]: 416)
•
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] ([LUT View Assist (HDMI)]: 416)
•
[LUT Select(LUT View Assist)] ([LUT Select(V-Log)]: 416)
•
[HLG View Assist (Monitor)] ([HLG View Assist]: 420)
•
[HLG View Assist (HDMI)] ([HLG View Assist]: 420)
•
[Sheer Overlay] ([Sheer Overlay]: 542)
•
[I.S. Status Scope] ([I.S. Status Scope]: 543)
•
[WFM/Vector Scope] ([WFM/Vector Scope]: 380)
•
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] ([Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 423)
•
[Color Bars] (Color Bars/Test Tone: 390)
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
498
[3] tab
[Lens / Others]
•
[Focus Ring Control] ([Focus Ring Control]: 552)
•
[AF Micro Adjustment] ([AF Micro Adjustment]: 155)
•
[Lens Information] ([Lens Information]: 264)
[IN/OUT]
•
[Wi-Fi] (Wi-Fi / Bluetooth: 588)
[Setting]
•
[Save to Custom Mode] (Registering Instant Customization: 513)
[Others]
•
[No Setting]
– Set when not using as an Fn button.
•
[Off (Disable Press and Hold)]
– The button does not work as an Fn button. The function registering screen is not
displayed when you press and hold (2 seconds) the Fn button.
•
[Restore to Default]
– Restore the default settings for the Fn button. (Fn Button Default Settings: 488)
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
499
Setting Items ([Fn Button Set]/[Setting in PLAY mode])
[1] tab
[Playback Mode]
•
[Magnify from AF Point] ([Magnify from AF Point]: 480)
•
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] ([LUT View Assist (Monitor)]: 480)
•
[HLG View Assist (Monitor)] ([HLG View Assist (Monitor)]: 481)
•
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] ([Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 423)
[Process Image]
•
[RAW Processing] ([RAW Processing]: 465)
[Add/Delete Info.]
•
[Delete Single] (Deleting Images: 463)
•
[Protect] ([Protect]: 483)
•
[Rating¿1] ([Rating]: 483)
•
[Rating¿2] ([Rating]: 483)
•
[Rating¿3] ([Rating]: 483)
•
[Rating¿4] ([Rating]: 483)
•
[Rating¿5] ([Rating]: 483)
[Operation]
•
[Rec / Playback Switch]
– Switches to the recording screen. (Basic Picture Operations: 103, Basic Video
Operations: 113)
•
[Video Record] (Basic Video Operations: 113)
•
[Video Record(Creative Video)]
– Video recording is started or stopped only in the [ ] mode. (Setting the
Exposure for Recording Videos: 343)
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
500
[Monitor / Display]
•
[Night Mode] ([Night Mode]: 538)
[IN/OUT]
•
[Wi-Fi] (Wi-Fi / Bluetooth: 588)
•
[Send Image (Smartphone)] (Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone
with Simple Operations: 618)
•
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] ([Log View Assist]: 416)
•
[HLG View Assist (HDMI)] ([HLG View Assist]: 420)
[Others]
•
[No Setting]
– Set when not using as an Fn button.
•
[Off (Disable Press and Hold)]
– The button does not work as an Fn button. The function registering screen is not
displayed when you press and hold (2 seconds) the Fn button.
•
[Restore to Default]
– Restore the default settings for the Fn button. (Fn Button Default Settings: 488)
Camera Customization – Fn Buttons
501
Use the Fn Buttons
During recording, pressing the Fn buttons enables usage of the functions
registered in [Setting in REC mode], and during playback, usage of the
functions registered in [Setting in PLAY mode].
1
Press the Fn button.
2
Select a setting item.
≥Press 21 to select a setting item and then press .
≥Selection is also possible by rotating or .
•
Display and selection methods of a setting item differ depending on the menu
item.
Use [Fn2] to [Fn6] (Touch Icons)
During recording, you can use the Fn buttons within the Touch Tab.
1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch one of [Fn2] to [Fn6].
•
With the default settings, the Touch Tab is not displayed. Set [Touch Tab] to [ON]
in [Touch Settings] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu. ([Touch Settings]: 530)
Fn3Fn3Fn3
Fn6Fn6Fn6
OFFOFFOFF
Fn4Fn4Fn4
Fn5Fn5Fn5
Fn2Fn2Fn2
Camera Customization – [Dial Operation Switch]
502
[Dial Operation Switch]
≥ Register Functions to the Dials: 502
≥ Temporarily Change Dial Operation: 504
This temporarily changes the functions operated with (front dial) and
(control dial).
Register Functions to the Dials
1
Select [Dial Operation Switch Setup].
≥ [] [] [Dial Set.] [Dial Operation Switch Setup]
[ ]/[ ]
2
Register the function.
≥Press 34 to select a function and then press .
Camera Customization – [Dial Operation Switch]
503
Functions That Can Be Registered
•
[Exposure Comp.] (Exposure Compensation: 286)
•
[Sensitivity]
*1
(ISO Sensitivity: 292)
•
[White Balance]
*2
(White Balance (WB): 299)
•
[Photo Style] ([Photo Style]: 307)
•
[Aspect Ratio] ([Aspect Ratio]: 106)
•
[i.Dynamic Range] ([i.Dynamic Range]: 289)
•
[Filter Effect] ([Filter Settings]: 320)
•
[Focus Mode] (Selecting the Focus Mode: 139)
•
[AF Mode] (Selecting the AF Mode: 159)
•
[Drive Mode] (Selecting the Drive Mode: 205)
*1 default setting
*2 default setting
Camera Customization – [Dial Operation Switch]
504
Temporarily Change Dial Operation
1
Set [Dial Operation Switch] to the Fn button. (Fn
Buttons: 488)
2
Switch dial operation.
≥Press the Fn button set in Step
1
.
≥A guide will display the functions registered to and .
•
If no operations are performed, then several seconds later, the guide
disappears.
3
Set the registered function.
≥Rotate or while the guide is displayed.
4
Confirm your selection.
≥Press the shutter button halfway.
ISOISOISOISO
WBWBWBWB
AWBc
AWBc
AWBw
AWBw
WBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWB
AWBAWB
ISOISOISOISO
Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
505
Quick Menu Customization
≥ Register to the Quick Menu: 505
You can change Quick menu items depending on the recording mode.
Additionally, you can change the items to display on the Quick menu and
their order to suit your preferences.
For information about Quick menu operation methods (Quick Menu: 80)
Register to the Quick Menu
Change the menus to be displayed in the Quick menu.
These can be set separately for [ ]/[S&Q] mode (Video) and for other
recording modes (Photo).
1
Select [Q.MENU Settings].
≥ [] [] [Q.MENU Settings] [Item Customize
(Photo)]/[Item Customize (Video)]
2
Select the item position (1 to 12).
≥Press 3421 to select the position and then press .
≥Selection is also possible by rotating .
Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
506
3
Find the function to register.
≥Rotate to select the sub tab where the function to register is
categorized (Menu Items That Can Be Registered: 507) and
then press .
≥You can also select by pressing 2 to select the sub tab, pressing
34 or rotating , and then pressing 1.
≥Each press of [Q] switches between tabs [1] and [2].
4
Register menu items.
≥Press 34 to select an item and then press .
≥Selection is also possible by rotating .
•
Select items with [>] by selecting the item again.
Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
507
Menu Items That Can Be Registered
[1] tab
[Image Quality]
•
[Exposure Comp.] (Exposure Compensation: 286)
•
[Dual Native ISO Setting] ([Dual Native ISO Setting]: 296)
•
[Sensitivity] (ISO Sensitivity: 292)
•
[White Balance] (White Balance (WB): 299)
•
[Photo Style] ([Photo Style]: 307)
•
[Metering Mode] ([Metering Mode]: 267)
•
[Aspect Ratio] ([Aspect Ratio]: 106)
•
[Picture Quality] ([Picture Quality]: 110)
•
[Picture Size] ([Picture Size]: 108)
•
[Min. Shutter Speed] ([Min. Shutter Speed]: 253)
•
[i.Dynamic Range] ([i.Dynamic Range]: 289)
•
[Color Shading Compensation] ([Color Shading Compensation]: 335)
•
[Filter Effect] ([Filter Settings]: 320)
•
[Exposure Mode] (Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos: 343)
•
[Synchro Scan(Photo)] ([Synchro Scan(Photo)]: 251)
•
[Synchro Scan(Video)] ([Synchro Scan(Video)]: 425)
[Focus/Shutter]
•
[Focus Mode] (Selecting the Focus Mode: 139)
•
[AF Mode] (Selecting the AF Mode: 159)
•
[AF Detection Setting] (Automatic Detection: 162)
•
[Detecting Subject] (Automatic Detection: 162)
•
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] ([AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 148)
•
[AF Custom Setting(Video)] ([AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 351)
•
[Focus Peaking] ([Focus Peaking]: 188)
•
[Focus Peaking Sensitivity] ([Focus Peaking]: 188)
•
[Focus Frame Moving Speed] ([Focus Frame Moving Speed]: 154)
Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
508
[Others (Photo)]
•
[Drive Mode] (Selecting the Drive Mode: 205)
•
[Drive Mode Setting] (Selecting the Drive Mode: 205)
•
[Bracketing] (Bracket Recording: 241)
•
[Silent Mode] ([Silent Mode]: 249)
•
[Image Stabilizer] ([Operation Mode]: 260)
•
[Hybrid Zoom(Photo)] ([Hybrid Zoom(Photo)]: 194)
•
[Crop Zoom(Photo)] ([Crop Zoom(Photo)]: 191)
•
[Zoom Speed(Photo)] ([Zoom Speed(Photo)]: 191)
[Image Format]
•
[Rec. File Format] ([Rec. File Format]: 122)
•
[Rec Quality] ([Rec Quality]: 123)
•
[Rec Quality (My List)] ([add to list]: 134)
•
[Slow & Quick Setting] (Slow & Quick Video: 393)
•
[Time Code Display] (Time Code: 373)
[Audio]
•
[Sound Rec Level Disp.] ([Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 361)
•
[Sound Rec Level Adj.] ([Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 364)
•
[Sound Rec Quality] ([Sound Rec Quality]: 365)
•
[Sound Rec Level Limiter] ([Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 366)
[Others (Video)]
•
[Image Stabilizer] ([Operation Mode]: 260)
•
[E-Stabilization (Video)] ([E-Stabilization (Video)]: 261)
•
[Boost I.S. (Video)] ([Boost I.S. (Video)]: 262)
•
[Image Area of Video] ([Image Area of Video]: 136)
•
[Hybrid Zoom(Video)] ([Hybrid Zoom(Video)]: 201)
•
[Crop Zoom(Video)] ([Crop Zoom(Video)]: 197)
•
[Zoom Speed(Video)] ([Zoom Speed(Video)]: 198)
•
[Focus Transition] ([Focus Transition]: 402)
Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
509
[2] tab
[Others (Video)]
•
[Live Cropping] ([Live Cropping]: 407)
•
[Live Cropping Settings] ([Live Cropping]: 407)
[Monitor / Display]
•
[Constant Preview] ([Constant Preview]: 535)
•
[Level Gauge] ([Level Gauge]: 544)
•
[Histogram] ([Histogram]: 536)
•
[Luminance Spot Meter] ([Luminance Spot Meter]: 384)
•
[Frame Marker] ([Frame Marker]: 388)
•
[Photo Grid Line] ([Photo Grid Line]: 537)
•
[Live View Boost] ([Live View Boost]: 537)
•
[Monochrome Live View] ([Monochrome Live View]: 547)
•
[Night Mode] ([Night Mode]: 538)
•
[Monitor Display Settings] ([Monitor Display Settings]: 539)
•
[Video-Priority Display] ([Video-Priority Display]: 549)
•
[Zebra Pattern] ([Zebra Pattern]: 386)
•
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] ([LUT View Assist (Monitor)]: 416)
•
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] ([LUT View Assist (HDMI)]: 416)
•
[HLG View Assist (Monitor)] ([HLG View Assist]: 420)
•
[HLG View Assist (HDMI)] ([HLG View Assist]: 420)
•
[Sheer Overlay] ([Sheer Overlay]: 542)
•
[I.S. Status Scope] ([I.S. Status Scope]: 543)
•
[WFM/Vector Scope] ([WFM/Vector Scope]: 380)
•
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] ([Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 423)
•
[Color Bars] (Color Bars/Test Tone: 390)
Camera Customization – Quick Menu Customization
511
Quick Menu Detailed Settings
Change the appearance of the Quick menu and the operation of
during menu display.
[] [] Select [Q.MENU Settings]
[Layout Style]
Changes the appearance of the Quick menu.
[MODE1]: Displays the live view and the menu simultaneously.
[MODE2]: Displays the menu in full screen.
[Item Customize (Photo)]
Customizes the Quick menu to display when the mode dial is set to [iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M].
[Item Customize (Video)]
Customizes the Quick menu to display when the mode dial is set to [ ]/[S&Q].
Camera Customization – Custom Mode
512
Custom Mode
≥ Register in Custom Mode: 513
≥ Using Custom Mode: 515
≥ Calling Up Settings: 516
Recording modes and menu settings that match your preferences can be
registered in Custom mode. You can use registered settings by switching
the mode dial to [C1] to [C3] modes.
Camera Customization – Custom Mode
513
Register in Custom Mode
You can register the currently set information of the camera.
At the time of purchase, the default settings of the [P] mode menus are
registered with all Custom modes.
1
Set to recording mode and menu settings of the state
you wish to save.
2
Select [Save to Custom Mode].
≥ [] [] [Save to Custom Mode]
3
Register.
≥Select the save-to number and then press .
•
A confirmation screen will be displayed. Press [DISP.] to change the Custom
mode name.
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 90)
Registering Instant Customization
When you press the Fn button registered with [Save to Custom Mode] in
the recording standby screen, you can quickly register the current
recording settings in the Custom mode. (Fn Buttons: 488)
•
You cannot register [iA] mode in Custom mode.
•
List of settings that can be registered in Custom mode (List of Default Settings/
Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 736)
Camera Customization – Custom Mode
514
Custom Mode Detailed Settings
You can create additional Custom mode sets, and how long to retain
temporarily changed settings details.
[] [] Select [Custom Mode Settings]
[Limit No. of Custom Mode]
Sets the number of Custom modes that can be registered in [C3].
A maximum of 10 sets can be registered; 3 sets are available as default settings.
[Edit Title]
Changes the Custom mode name.
A maximum of 22 characters can be entered. A two-byte character is treated as two
characters.
•
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 90)
[How to Reload Custom Mode]
Sets the timing at which to return the settings that were changed temporarily while the
Custom mode was being used to their registered settings.
[Change Recording Mode]/[Return from Sleep Mode]/[Turn the Power ON]
[Select Loading Details]
Sets the types of settings to call up with [Load Custom Mode].
[F / SS / ISO Sensitivity]: Enables calling up of aperture value, shutter speed, and
ISO sensitivity settings.
[White Balance]: Enables calling up of white balance settings.
Camera Customization – Custom Mode
515
Using Custom Mode
Set the recording mode to [C1] to [C3].
≥ Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
≥ If [C3], the last-used Custom mode will be called up.
[C3] Custom Mode Selection
1 Set the recording mode to [C3].
2 Press .
•
The Custom mode selection menu appears.
3 Press 34 to select the Custom mode and then press .
•
The selected Custom mode icon will be displayed on the recording screen.
Changing Registered Details
Registered settings do not change even if you change the camera settings
temporarily with the mode dial set to [C1] to [C3].
To change the registered details, overwrite them by using [Save to Custom
Mode] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu.
Camera Customization – Custom Mode
516
Calling Up Settings
Call up registered Custom mode settings to the selected recording mode
and overwrite the current settings with these.
1
Set to the recording mode to be used.
≥Set the mode dial. (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
2
Select [Load Custom Mode].
≥ [] [] [Load Custom Mode]
3
Select the Custom mode to call up.
≥Select the Custom mode and then press .
•
Calling up of Custom modes is not possible between those created from [P]/[A]/
[S]/[M] modes and those created from [ ]/[S&Q] mode.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
517
[Custom] Menu
≥ [Custom] menu ([Image Quality]): 518
≥ [Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter]): 524
≥ [Custom] menu ([Operation]): 530
≥ [Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Photo)]): 535
≥ [Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)]): 546
≥ [Custom] menu ([IN/OUT]): 550
≥ [Custom] menu ([Lens / Others]): 551
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
518
[Custom] menu ([Image Quality])
[Photo Style Settings]
: Default settings
[Show/Hide Photo Style]
[Vivid] / [Natural] / [L.ClassicNeo] /
[Flat] / [Landscape] / [Portrait] /
[L.Monochrome] / [L.Monochrome D] /
[L.Monochrome S] / [LEICA
Monochrome] / [Cinelike D2] / [Cinelike
V2] / [Like709] / [V-Log] / [REAL TIME
LUT] / [Like2100(HLG)] /
[Like2100(HLG) Full Range] / [MY
PHOTO STYLE 1] to [MY PHOTO
STYLE 10]
Sets Photo Style items to be displayed on the menu.
[My Photo Style Settings]
[Add Effects]
[Load Preset Setting]
Enables detailed image quality adjustment settings for My Photo Style.
[Add Effects]: Enables [Dual Native ISO Setting], [Sensitivity], and [White Balance]
settings in image quality adjustment.
[Load Preset Setting]: Sets the timing at which image quality adjustment values
changed in My Photo Style are returned to their registered state.
[Reset Photo Style]
Returns details changed in [Photo Style] and [Photo Style Settings] to their default
settings.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
519
[LUT Library]
[ISO Increments]
[Extended ISO]
[Vlog_709] / [Sample LUT1] / [Sample LUT2] / [Sample LUT3] / [Set4] to [Set39]
Registers LUT files to the camera.
([LUT Library]: 328)
[1/3 EV] / [1 EV]
Changes the intervals between ISO sensitivity adjustment values.
[ON] / [OFF]
Extends the setting range of ISO sensitivity.
•
The extendible range depends on the [Dual Native ISO Setting] ([Dual Native
ISO Setting]: 296).
– When set to [AUTO]: Lower limit can be extended to [50] and the upper limit can
be extended to [204800]
– When set to [LOW]: Lower limit can be extended to [50]
– When set to [HIGH]: Lower limit can be extended to [320] and the upper limit can
be extended to [204800]
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
520
[Exposure Offset Adjust.]
[Face Priority In Multi Metering]
[Multi Metering] [−1EV] to [+1EV] ([±0EV])
[Center Weighted] [−1EV] to [+1EV] ([±0EV])
[Spot] [−1EV] to [+1EV] ([±0EV])
[Highlight Weighted] [−1EV] to [+1EV] ([±0EV])
Adjusts the exposure level that is the standard exposure for each setting item of
[Metering Mode].
Adds the adjustment value from this function to the exposure compensation value
(Exposure Compensation: 286) when recording.
•
For video recording, it is not possible to add an adjustment value of a range that
exceeds ±3 EV.
[ON] / [OFF]
When [Metering Mode] is set to [ ] (Multi-metering), the metering range for
automatic exposure is prioritized on the face and eyes.
When set to [OFF], the change to exposure caused by the [FACE/EYE] automatic
detection function can be avoided.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
521
[AWB Lock Setting]
[Operation Syncs With Shutter]
[WHILE PRESSING] / [DURING BURST
SHOOTING] / [OFF]
[Lock Hold With Fn Button] [ON] / [OFF]
Fixes the white balance while you are pressing the shutter button or the Fn button
when white balance is auto ([AWB]/[AWBc]/[AWBw]).
This prevents the white balance from changing unintentionally while pressing the
shutter button halfway, during burst recording, or while recording videos.
[Operation Syncs With Shutter]
[WHILE PRESSING]: Fixes white balance while pressing the shutter button
(including while pressing halfway or during burst recording).
[DURING BURST SHOOTING]: Fixes white balance during burst recording.
[OFF]: White balance is not fixed.
[Lock Hold With Fn Button]
[ON]: When you press the Fn button registered with [AWB Lock], the white balance
is fixed. Press again to cancel the lock.
[OFF]: While you are pressing the Fn button registered with [AWB Lock], the white
balance is fixed.
•
[AWBL] is displayed on the screen while white balance is locked.
•
[Operation Syncs With Shutter] does not work in [ ]/[S&Q] mode.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
522
[Color Space]
[Exposure Comp. Reset]
[Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]
[sRGB] / [AdobeRGB]
This sets the method for correcting the color reproduction of the recorded images on
the screens of a PC or on a device such as a printer.
[sRGB]: This is widely used in PCs and similar devices.
[AdobeRGB]: AdobeRGB is mainly used for business purposes such as
professional printing because it has a greater range of reproducible colors than
sRGB.
•
Set to [sRGB] if you are not very familiar with AdobeRGB.
•
When the following functions are being used, the setting is fixed to [sRGB]:
– Video recording
– [Like709]/[V-Log]/[REAL TIME LUT](base Photo Style is [V-Log])([Photo Style])
– [Filter Settings]
[ON] / [OFF]
This resets the exposure value when you change the recording mode or turn off the
camera.
[ON] / [OFF]
Selects the setting method for aperture value, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity
when recording video in the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.
[ON]: Records with values set automatically by the camera.
[OFF]: Records with the values set in the [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
523
[CreativeVideo Combined Set.]
[F/SS/ISO/Exposure Comp.] []/ []
[White Balance] []/ []
[Photo Style] []/ []
[Metering Mode] []/ []
[AF Mode] []/ []
Content set in [ ] mode can be separated from when taking pictures.
(Separating Settings for Recording Video and Pictures: 347)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
524
[Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter])
[Focus/Shutter Priority]
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]
[AF/AE Lock Hold]
: Default settings
[AFS] [FOCUS] / [BALANCE] / [RELEASE]
[AFC] [FOCUS] / [BALANCE] / [RELEASE]
This sets whether to give priority to focus or shutter release during AF.
[FOCUS]: Disables recording when focus is not achieved.
[BALANCE]: Performs recording while controlling the balance between focusing
and shutter release timing.
[RELEASE]: Enables recording even when focus is not achieved.
[ON] / [OFF]
This stores separate AF area positions (MF positions for MF Assist) for when the
camera is held vertically and when it is held horizontally.
([Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]: 182)
[ON] / [OFF]
This sets button operations for AF/AE Lock.
Turning this [ON] maintains the lock after releasing the button until it is pressed
again.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
525
[AF+MF]
[MF Assist]
[ON] / [OFF]
When the focus mode is set to [AFS]/[AFC], you can fine-adjust the focus manually
during AF Lock.
•
When the shutter button is pressed halfway
•
When [AF ON] is pressed
•
When locked using the Fn button [AF LOCK] or [AF/AE LOCK]
During video recording, the MF mode is engaged when you rotate the focus ring,
and the AF mode is engaged when you stop rotating the focus ring.
•
When [Continuous AF] is set to [MODE2], the focus can be adjusted manually
even during recording standby.
[Focus Ring]
(When an interchangeable lens with a
focus ring is attached)
[ON] / [OFF]
[AF Mode] [ON] / [OFF]
[MF Assist Display] [FULL] / [PIP]
[Max. Magnification in "FULL"] [6x] / [20x]
This sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen).
[Focus Ring]: The screen is enlarged by focusing with the lens.
[AF Mode]: The screen is enlarged by pressing [ ] (2).
[MF Assist Display]: Sets the display method (full screen mode/windowed mode) of
MF Assist (enlarged screen).
[Max. Magnification in "FULL"]: Sets the maximum magnification for the enlarged
display ([FULL]). When set to [6x], the area that can be enlarged is broader.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
526
[MF Guide]
[Focus Ring Lock]
[Show/Hide AF Mode]
[ ] / [ ] / [OFF]
* Default setting specifications vary depending on the country or area where the
camera was purchased.
During MF, MF Guide, which acts as a guide to recording distance, is displayed on
the screen. You can select from meters or feet for the display unit.
[ON] / [OFF]
This disables the focus ring operation during MF to lock the focus.
•
[MFL] is displayed on the recording screen while the focus ring is locked.
[Tracking] [ON] / [OFF]
[Full Area AF] [ON] / [OFF]
[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)] [ON] / [OFF]
[Zone] [ON] / [OFF]
[1-Area+] [ON] / [OFF]
[Pinpoint] [ON] / [OFF]
Sets the AF mode items to be displayed on the AF mode selection screen.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
527
[Pinpoint AF Setting]
[AF-Point Scope Setting]
[Shutter AF]
[Pinpoint AF Time] [LONG] / [MID] / [SHORT]
[Pinpoint AF Display] [FULL] / [PIP]
Changes enlarged screen settings displayed when AF mode is [ ].
[Pinpoint AF Time]: Sets the time for which the screen is enlarged when the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
[Pinpoint AF Display]: Sets the display method (full screen mode/windowed mode)
of the enlarged screen.
[Keep Enlarged Display] [ON] / [OFF]
[PIP Display] [FULL] / [PIP]
Changes the enlarged screen settings of AF-Point Scope ([AF-Point Scope]: 146).
[Keep Enlarged Display]: Setting this to [ON] maintains the enlarged screen after
pressing the Fn button until it is pressed again.
[PIP Display]: Sets the display method (full screen mode
*1
/windowed mode
*2
) of the
enlarged screen.
*1 You can enlarge by approx. 3× to 10×.
*2 You can enlarge by approx. 3× to 6×.
•
When [Hybrid Zoom(Photo)] or [Crop Zoom(Photo)] is [ON], the AF-Point Scope
magnification rate is between about 3x to 6x.
[ON] / [OFF]
This adjusts focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
528
[Human Eye Detection Display]
[Half-Press Shutter]
[Assign REC to Shutter Button]
[Quick AF]
[ON] / [OFF]
When set to [OFF], you can make the cross that appears on human eyes when
focused disappear by pressing the shutter button halfway, etc.
[ON] / [OFF]
You can release the shutter quickly by pressing the shutter button halfway.
[ON] / [OFF]
Use the shutter button for the start/stop operation of video recording in the [ ]
mode.
The start/stop operation of video recording using the shutter button can be disabled
when set to [OFF].
[ON] / [OFF]
When the amount of camera shake becomes small, the camera will automatically
adjust the focus and focus adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter button is
pressed.
•
The battery will drain faster than usual.
•
This function is not available in the following cases:
– In preview mode
– In low light situations
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
529
[Looped Focus Frame]
[Enlarged Live Display(Video)]
[ON] / [OFF]
When moving the AF area, MF Assist, or video enlarged display of live view, this
enables looping from one edge to the opposite edge of the screen.
[Keep Enlarged Display] [ON] / [OFF]
[PIP Display] [FULL] / [PIP]
Sets the operation of the function for enlarging the video live view ([Enlarged Live
Display(Video)]: 352).
[Keep Enlarged Display]
[ON]: Enlarges display after releasing the Fn button until the button is pressed
again.
[OFF]: Enlarges display just while the Fn button is being pressed.
[PIP Display]
Sets the way the enlarged screen is displayed (full screen mode/windowed mode).
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
530
[Custom] menu ([Operation])
[Q.MENU Settings]
[Touch Settings]
: Default settings
[Layout Style] [MODE1] / [MODE2]
[Item Customize (Photo)]
[Item Customize (Video)]
Customizes the Quick menu.
(Quick Menu Customization: 505)
[Touch Screen] [ON] / [PARTIAL] / [OFF]
[Touch Tab] [ON] / [OFF]
[Touch AF] [AF] / [AF+AE]
Enables touch operation on the monitor display.
[Touch Screen]: All touch operations. [PARTIAL] sets part of the touch screen as a
restricted area. (Touch Restricted Area: 76)
[Touch Tab]: Operations of tabs, such as [ ] on the right side of the screen.
[Touch AF]: Operation to optimize the focus ([AF]) for a touched subject.
Alternatively, operation to optimize both the focus and brightness ([AF+AE]).
(Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position ([AF+AE]): 181)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
531
[Operation Lock Setup]
[Fn Button Set]
[Cursor] []/ []
[Touch Screen] []/ []
[Dial] []/ []
[DISP. Button] []/ []
This sets the control functions to be disabled with the Fn button [Operation Lock].
(Only for recording screen)
[Cursor]: Cursor buttons, [MENU/SET] button, and
[Touch Screen]: Touch screen
[Dial]: and
[DISP. Button]: [DISP.] button
[Setting in REC mode]
[Setting in PLAY mode]
Registers a function to the Fn button.
(Register Functions to the Fn Buttons: 490)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
532
[ISO Displayed Setting]
[Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting]
[Front Dial] [ ] / [ ] / [OFF]
This sets the operations of the dial in the setting screen for ISO sensitivity.
Assigning [ ] lets you change [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting].
[Cursor Buttons (Up/Down)] []/ [OFF]
This sets the operations of the 34 buttons in the exposure compensation screen.
Assigning [ ] lets you set exposure bracketing.
[Front Dial] []/ [OFF]
This sets the operations of the dial in the exposure compensation screen.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
533
[Dial Set.]
[Assign Dial (F/SS)] [SET1] / [SET2] / [SET3] / [SET4] / [SET5]
Sets the operations to be assigned to the dials in [P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes.
: Program Shift, F: Aperture value, SS: Shutter speed
[P] [A] [S] [M]
[SET1]
FSSF
FSSSS
[SET2]
—F — F
—SSSS
[SET3]
—— SS SS
F—F
[SET4]
—— — F
FSSSS
[SET5]
FSSF
—— — SS
[Rotation (F/SS)] []/ []
Changes the rotational directions of the dials for aperture value and shutter speed
adjustment.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
534
[Exposure Comp.] [ ] / [ ] / [OFF]
Assigns exposure compensation to or . (Except in [M] mode)
•
The [Assign Dial (F/SS)] setting takes priority.
[Dial Operation Switch Setup]
[]
[]
In the Fn button [Dial Operation Switch], this sets the functions to be registerd
temporarily to or . (Register Functions to the Dials: 502)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
535
[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Photo)])
[Auto Review]
[Constant Preview]
: Default settings
[Duration Time (photo)] [HOLD] / [5SEC] to [0.5SEC] / [OFF]
[Playback Operation Priority] [ON] / [OFF]
This displays an image immediately after it is recorded.
[Duration Time (photo)]: Sets the Auto Review when taking pictures.
[Playback Operation Priority]: When this is set to [ON], you can toggle the
playback screen during Auto Review, or delete pictures.
•
If you set [Duration Time (photo)] to [HOLD], the image recorded stays displayed
until the shutter button is pressed halfway.
[Playback Operation Priority] will be fixed to [ON].
[ON] / [OFF]
[SET]
[Effect]
[Preview While MF Assist]
You can always confirm the effects of aperture on the recording screen when in [A]/
[M] mode.
You can also confirm the shutter speed at the same time when in [M] mode.
•
You can set the combination of the aperture effect and the shutter speed effect in
[Effect].
•
Preview also operates in the MF Assist screen when [Preview While MF Assist] is
set to [ON].
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
536
[Histogram]
[ON] / [OFF]
This displays the histogram.
Turning this [ON] displays the histogram transition screen.
Press 3421 to set the position.
•
You can also move the position by dragging the histogram on the recording
screen.
•
A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis, and the
number of pixels at each brightness level on the vertical axis.
By looking at the distribution of the graph, you can determine the current
exposure.
(A) Dark
(B) Bright
•
When the recorded image and the histogram do not match each other under the
following conditions, the histogram is displayed in orange:
– During exposure compensation
– When the standard exposure is not achieved, such as in low light situations.
•
When the following function is being used, the [Histogram] is not available:
– [WFM/Vector Scope]
•
The histogram is an approximation in the recording mode.
(A) (B)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
537
[Photo Grid Line]
[Live View Boost]
[ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [OFF]
Sets the grid line pattern to be displayed on the recording screen.
When using [ ], you can press 3421 to set the position.
•
When using [ ], you can also drag [ ] on the grid lines on the recording
screen to move the position.
[MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF]
[SET] [P/A/S/M] / [M]
Displays the screen brighter to make it easier to check subjects and compositions
even in low-light environment.
[MODE1]: Setting for low brightness, with priority given to a soft display.
[MODE2]: Setting for high brightness, with priority given to image visibility.
•
You can change the recording mode in which [Live View Boost] works by using
[SET].
•
This mode does not affect recorded images.
•
Noise may be more noticeable in the screen than in the recorded image.
•
This function does not work in the following cases:
– When adjusting the exposure (when the shutter button is pressed halfway, for
example)
– When recording a video
– When using [Filter Settings]
– When displaying the shutter speed effect of [Constant Preview]
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
538
[Night Mode]
[ON] / [OFF]
Displays the monitor in red.
In dark environments, this reduces brightness of the screen that can make the
surroundings difficult to see.
You can also set the luminance of the red display.
1 Press 21 to select [ON].
2 Press [DISP.] to display the brightness adjustment screen.
3 Press 21 to adjust luminance and then press .
•
This effect is not applied to images output via HDMI.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
539
[Monitor Display Settings]
[Monitor Disp. Set] []/ []
Selects whether to show the live view without covering the information display, or to
display over the entire screen.
[]: Scales down images slightly so you can better review the composition of the
images.
[]: Scales images to fill the entire screen so you can see their details.
999
±
0
AFSAFS
L
FINE
999
±
0
L
AFSAFS
FINE
ISO
AUTO
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
540
[Horizontal Image Flip(Monitor)] [AUTO] / [ON] / [OFF]
[Vertical Image Flip(Monitor)] [AUTO] / [ON] / [OFF]
You can set whether the screen flips or not depending on the facing or angle of the
monitor during recording.
[Horizontal Image Flip(Monitor)]
[AUTO]: The screen automatically flips horizontally according to the angle to which
the monitor is opened or closed.
[ON]: The screen is flipped horizontally all the time.
[OFF]: Screen is not flipped.
[Vertical Image Flip(Monitor)]
[AUTO]: The screen automatically flips vertically according to the angle to which the
monitor is rotated.
[ON]: The screen is flipped vertically all the time.
[OFF]: Screen is not flipped.
•
The settings for this function are not reflected in the playback screen.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
541
[Expo.Meter]
[Focal Length]
[Blinking Highlights]
[ON] / [OFF]
This displays the exposure meter.
•
Set to [ON] to display the exposure meter when performing Program Shift, setting
aperture, and setting shutter speed.
•
If no operations are performed for a certain period of time, the exposure meter
disappears.
[ON] / [OFF]
Displays the focal length on the recording screen during zoom control.
[ON] / [OFF]
Overexposed areas appear blinking in black and white during Auto Review or
playback.
•
The display without the highlights is added to the display shown when [DISP.] is
pressed in the playback screen.
Use this to delete the highlight display. (Playback Screen: 79)
F5.630
SSSS
FF
125 60 30 15 8
5.64.0 8.0 11
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
542
[Sheer Overlay]
[ON] / [OFF]
[SET]
[Transparency]
[Image Select]
[Reset at Power Off]
[Disp. Image (shutter-press)]
A picture that has been recorded or an image extracted from a video is overlayed on
the recording screen.
1 Use [Image Select] and select a picture or video to display.
•
Press 21 to select a picture or video and then press to confirm.
2 (When a video is selected) Pause playback at the position you wish to extract a
picture.
•
Press 3 to pause playback.
•
To fine-adjust the position, press 21 (rewind frame-by-frame or forward
frame-by-frame).
3 (When a video is selected) Set a picture.
•
Press .
•
If you set [Disp. Image (shutter-press)] to [OFF], [Sheer Overlay] is canceled while
the shutter button is being pressed halfway or pressed fully.
•
The picture extracted from video is saved.
•
When the following functions are being used, [Sheer Overlay] is not available:
– Video recording
– [Stop Motion Animation]
– [Auto Transfer]
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
543
[I.S. Status Scope]
[ON] / [OFF]
Displays a reference point (C) on the recording screen in order to let you check for
camera shake.
•
[I.S. Status Scope] does not work in the following cases:
– When [Operation Mode] in [Image Stabilizer] is set to [OFF]
– When the O.I.S. switch on the lens is [OFF]
•
When the following function is being used, [I.S. Status Scope] is not available:
– Video recording
– High Resolution mode (when [Handheld High-Res] is set to [OFF])
(C)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
544
[Level Gauge]
[ON] / [OFF]
Displays the level gauge which is useful in correcting camera tilt.
(D) Horizontal
(E) Vertical
(F) Green (no tilt)
•
Even after correcting the tilt, there may still be an error of approx. ±1o.
•
When the camera is tilted significantly upwards or downwards, the level gauge
may not be displayed correctly.
•
You can adjust the level gauge and reset the adjusted values in [Level Gauge
Adjust.] in the [Setup] ([Monitor / Display]) menu. ([Level Gauge Adjust.]: 560)
(D)
(E)
(F)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
545
[Luminance Spot Meter]
[Framing Outline]
[Show/Hide Monitor Layout]
[ON] / [OFF]
Specify any spot on the subject to measure the luminance over a small area.
([Luminance Spot Meter]: 384)
[ON] / [OFF]
Displays the outline for the live view.
[Control Panel] [ON] / [OFF]
[Black Screen] [ON] / [OFF]
Displays the control panel and black screen when switching between displays using
[DISP.] button. (Recording Screen: 77)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
546
[Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display (Video)])
[Log View Assist]
[HLG View Assist]
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]
: Default settings
[LUT Select(V-Log)]
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] [ON] / [OFF]
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] [ON] / [OFF]
You can show images with LUT file applied on the monitor, or output them via HDMI.
([Log View Assist]: 416)
[Monitor] [MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF]
[HDMI] [AUTO] / [MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF]
At recording or playback of HLG video, this displays images with converted color
gamut and brightness on the camera monitor, or outputs these over HDMI.
([HLG View Assist]: 420)
[ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [OFF]
This displays the desqueezed images suited to the magnification of the anamorphic
lens on this camera.
([Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]: 423)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
547
[Monochrome Live View]
[Center Marker]
[Safety Zone Marker]
[ON] / [OFF]
You can display the recording screen in black and white.
•
If you use the HDMI output during recording, the output image will not be
displayed in black and white.
•
[Monochrome Live View] is not available when [Night Mode] is used.
[ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [ ] / [OFF]
The center of the recording screen will be displayed as [+].
The shape of the marker can be changed.
[ ] / [ ] / [OFF]
[SET] [Size]
[95%]
[90%]
[80%]
This displays the safety zone, which shows a guide to the area that would be shown
on a household TV, on the recording screen.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
548
[Frame Marker]
[Zebra Pattern]
[WFM/Vector Scope]
[ON] / [OFF]
[SET]
[Frame Aspect]
[Frame Color]
[Frame Mask]
A frame with the set aspect ratio is displayed on the recording screen.
[Frame Aspect] can also be customized.
([Frame Marker]: 388)
[ZEBRA1] / [ZEBRA2] / [ZEBRA1+2] / [OFF]
[SET]
[Zebra 1]
[Zebra 2]
Parts that are brighter than the base value are displayed with stripes.
([Zebra Pattern]: 386)
[WAVE] / [VECTOR] / [OFF]
This displays the waveform monitor or the vector scope on the recording screen.
([WFM/Vector Scope]: 380)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
549
[Color Bars]
[Video-Priority Display]
[Red REC Frame Indicator]
[SMPTE] / [EBU] / [ARIB]
The color bars are displayed on the recording screen.
(Color Bars/Test Tone: 390)
[ON] / [OFF]
When in [iA]/[P]/[A]/[S]/[M] modes, switch the recording screen display and the
control panel to suit video recording, as with the [ ]/[S&Q] mode.
The playback screen also switches to a display that prioritizes video.
•
When set to a setting where video recording is not available, [Video-Priority
Display] is fixed to [OFF].
•
[Video-Priority Display] works only during video recording when using the following
functions:
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
[ON] / [OFF]
A red frame is displayed on the recording screen that indicates that video is being
recorded.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
550
[Custom] menu ([IN/OUT])
[HDMI Rec Output]
: Default settings
[Info Display] (Outputting the Camera
Information Display via HDMI: 440)
[ON] / [OFF]
[HDMI Recording Control] (Outputting
Control Information to an External
Recorder: 441)
[ON] / [OFF]
[Sound Output (HDMI)] (Outputting
Audio via HDMI: 442)
[ON] / [OFF]
[Enlarged Live Display] (Outputting the
Enlarged Live Display (Video) via HDMI:
442)
[MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF]
Sets HDMI output during recording.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
551
[Custom] menu ([Lens / Others])
[Lens Focus Resume]
[Lens Fn Button Setting]
: Default settings
[ON] / [OFF]
The camera saves the focus position when you turn it off.
[Focus Stop] / [AF Mode] / [Focus Mode] / [AF Detection Setting] / [Detecting
Subject] / [Focus Ring Lock] / [AE LOCK] / [AF LOCK] / [AF/AE LOCK] / [AF-ON] /
[AF-ON : Near Shift] / [AF-ON : Far Shift] / [AF-Point Scope] / [Focus Area Set] /
[Enlarged Live Display(Video)] / [Image Stabilizer] / [Preview] / [Preview Aperture
Effect] / [No Setting] / [Off (Disable Press and Hold)] / [Restore to Default]
Register a function to the focus button of an interchangeable lens.
•
When [Focus Stop] is set, focus is fixed while the focus button is being pressed.
•
When using an interchangeable lens that has a switch for the image stabilizer
(normal/panning), [Image Stabilizer] in [Lens Fn Button Setting] is not available.
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
552
[Focus Ring Control]
[AF Micro Adjustment]
[NON-LINEAR] / [LINEAR]
[SET] [90°] to [1080°] ([300°]) / [Maximum]
Sets the amount of movement for focusing using the focus ring. (When using
supported lenses)
[NON-LINEAR]: Focus responds by accelerating according to rotation speed of the
focus ring.
[LINEAR]: Focus responds at a constant amount according to the rotational angle of
the focus ring.
•
When using lenses equipped with focus clutch mechanisms, set the lens to AF
and the camera to MF.
[SET]: Sets the rotational angle of the focus ring for when [LINEAR] is selected.
•
Angles that cannot be set with the attached lens are not displayed.
[ALL] / [ADJUST BY LENS] / [OFF]
You can make fine adjustments to the focus point when focusing with phase
detection AF.
([AF Micro Adjustment]: 155)
Camera Customization – [Custom] Menu
553
[Lens Information]
[Lens Info. Confirmation]
[Vertical Position Info (Video)]
[Lens1] to [Lens12] ([Lens1])
When using a lens that does not have a communication function with the camera,
register the lens information in the camera.
•
This is linked with [Lens Information] in [Image Stabilizer] under the [Photo]
([Others (Photo)]) menu. ([Lens Information]: 264)
[ON] / [OFF]
When you have attached a lens that does not have a communication function with
this camera, a message asking for confirmation of the lens information is displayed
when you turn on the camera.
[ON] / [OFF]
You can set whether or not to record the camera’s vertical orientation information
during video recording.
[ON]: Records vertical orientation information. Videos recorded with the camera held
vertically will be automatically played back vertically on the PC, smartphone, etc.
during playback.
[OFF]: Does not record vertical orientation information.
•
On the playback screen of the camera, only the thumbnail display is played in
vertical orientation.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
555
[Setup] menu ([Card/File])
[Card Format]
: Default settings
Formats the card (initialization).
Format the cards with the camera before use.
•
When a card is formatted, all of the data stored in the card is erased and
cannot be restored.
Save a backup of necessary data before formatting the card.
•
Do not turn off the camera or perform another operation during formatting.
•
Take care not to turn off the camera while formatting is in progress.
•
If the card has been formatted with a PC or other device, format it again with the
camera.
•
You can format the card while keeping the camera settings information stored on
the card. ([Save/Restore Camera Setting]: 567)
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
556
[Folder / File Settings]
[Select Folder] / [Create a New Folder] / [File Name Setting]
Set the folder and file name where to save the images.
Folder name
(1) Folder number (3 numeric characters, 100 to 999)
(2) 5-character user-defined segment
File name
(3) Color space ([P]: sRGB, [ _ ]: AdobeRGB)
(4) 3-character user-defined segment
(5) File number (4 numeric characters, 0001 to 9999)
(6) Extension
[Select Folder]: Selects a folder for storing images.
[Create a New Folder]: Creates a new folder with an incremented folder number.
•
If there are no recordable folders in the card, a screen for resetting the folder
number is displayed.
[OK]:
Increments the folder number without changing the 5-character user-defined
segment ((2) above).
[Change]:
Changes the 5-character user-defined segment ((2) above). This will also increment
the folder number.
100ABCDE
(1) (2)
PABC0001.JPG
(3) (5) (6)(4)
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
557
[File Name Setting]
[Folder Number Link]:
Uses the 3-character user-defined segment ((4) above) to set the folder number
((1) above).
[User Setting]:
Changes the 3-character user-defined segment ((4) above).
•
Follow the steps on “Entering Characters” when the character entry screen is
displayed. (Entering Characters: 90)
Available characters: alphabetic characters (upper-case), numerals, [ _ ]
•
Each folder can store up to 1000 files.
•
File numbers are assigned sequentially from 0001 to 9999 in the order of
recording.
If you change the storage folder, a number continuing on from the last file number
will be assigned.
•
In the following cases, a new folder with an incremented folder number will be
created automatically when the next file is saved:
– The number of files in the current folder reaches 1000.
– The file number reaches 9999.
•
New folders cannot be created when there are folders numbered from 100 all the
way up to 999.
We recommend backing up your data and formatting the card.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
558
[File Number Reset]
[Copyright Information]
Refresh the folder number within the DCIM folder and reset the file number to 0001.
•
When the folder number reaches 999, the file number cannot be reset.
We recommend backing up your data and formatting the card.
•
To reset the folder number to 100:
1 Perform [Card Format] to format the card. ([Card Format]: 555)
2 Perform [File Number Reset] to reset the file number.
3 Select [Yes] on the folder number reset screen.
[Artist] [ON] / [OFF] / [SET]
[Copyright Holder] [ON] / [OFF] / [SET]
[Display Copyright Info.]
Records the names of the artist and the copyright holder in the image Exif data.
•
You can register names from [SET] in [Artist] and [Copyright Holder].
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 90)
•
Up to 63 characters may be entered.
•
You can confirm registered copyright information in [Display Copyright Info.].
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
559
[Setup] menu ([Monitor / Display])
[Power Save Mode]
[Monitor Frame Rate]
: Default settings
[Sleep Mode]
[10MIN.] / [5MIN.] / [2MIN.] / [1MIN.] /
[OFF]
[Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] [ON] / [OFF]
[Auto Monitor Off] [5MIN.] / [2MIN.] / [1MIN.] / [OFF]
This is a function to automatically turn the camera to sleep (power save) status or
turn off the monitor if no operation is performed for a set time.
([Power Save Mode]: 48)
[30fps] / [60fps]
Sets the display speed for live view on the monitor.
[30fps]: Reduces the power consumption for a longer operating time.
[60fps]: Enables smooth display of movements.
•
When the following function is being used, [Monitor Frame Rate] is not available:
– HDMI output
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
560
[Monitor Settings]
[Monitor Backlight]
[Level Gauge Adjust.]
[Brightness] / [Contrast] / [Saturation] / [Red Tint] / [Blue Tint]
This adjusts the brightness, coloring, and red or blue tints of the monitor.
1 Press 34 to select the setting item, and press 21 to adjust.
2 Press to confirm the setting.
[AUTO] / [−3] to [+3]
Adjusts monitor luminance.
[AUTO]: The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is
around the camera.
•
When either [AUTO] is set, or the adjusted value is set to positive side, the usage
period will shorten.
•
When [Night Mode] is being used, [Monitor Backlight] is not available.
•
If the temperature of the camera rises, the camera may automatically lower the
brightness of the monitor temporarily. The brightness is restored again when the
camera temperature goes down.
[Adjust.]
Hold the camera in a horizontal position, and press . The level gauge will be
adjusted.
[Level Gauge Value Reset]
Restores the default level gauge setting.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
561
[Setup] menu ([IN/OUT])
[Beep]
[Wi-Fi
®
]
: Default settings
[Beep Volume] [ ] (High) / [ ] (Low) / [ ] (Off)
[AF Beep Volume] [ ] (High) / [ ] (Low) / [ ] (Off)
[AF Beep Tone]
[ ] (Pattern 1) / [ ] (Pattern 2) /
[ ] (Pattern 3)
[Shutter Vol.] [ ] (High) / [ ] (Low) / [ ] (Off)
[Shutter Tone]
[ ] (Pattern 1) / [ ] (Pattern 2) /
[ ] (Pattern 3)
Sets the beep sounds, AF beep, and electronic shutter sounds.
[Wi-Fi Function] (Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 612, Wi-Fi
Connections: 641)
[Wi-Fi Setup] ([Wi-Fi Setup] Menu: 653)
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
562
[Bluetooth
®
]
[Bluetooth Function] (Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 606)
[Pairing]
[Add New Device]
[Delete]
[Auto Transfer] ([Auto Transfer]: 629)
[Location Logging] ([Location Logging]: 631)
[LUMIX Sync Settings]
[Send Image (Smartphone)] (Using the menu
to transfer easily: 619)
[Remote Wakeup] ([Remote Wakeup]: 633)
[Returning from Sleep Mode] (Shortening the
Return Time from [Sleep Mode]: 626)
[Auto Clock Set] ([Auto Clock Set]: 635)
[Wi-Fi network settings]
[Wi-Fi network settings]: Registers the Wi-Fi access point. Wireless access points
used to connect the camera to Wi-Fi networks will be registered automatically.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
563
[USB]
[USB Mode]
[ ] [Select on connection] / [ ]
[PC(Storage)] / [ ] [PC(Tether)]
This sets the communication method to be used when the USB connection cable is
connected.
[ ] [Select on connection]: Select this setting to select the USB communication
system when connecting to another device. (USB port: 657)
[ ] [PC(Storage)]: Select this setting to export images to a connected PC.
(Importing Images to a PC: 662)
[ ] [PC(Tether)]: Select this setting to control the camera from a PC installed with
“LUMIX Tether”. (Tethered Recording: 668)
[USB Power Supply] [ON] / [OFF]
Provides power from the USB connection cable.
•
Even if this item is set to [OFF], power will be supplied when the AC adaptor is
connected.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
564
[HDMI Connection]
[Output Resolution(Playback)]
[AUTO] / [C4K/60p] / [C4K/50p] / [C4K/
30p] / [C4K/25p] / [C4K/24p] / [4K/60p] /
[4K/50p] / [4K/30p] / [4K/25p] / [4K/24p] /
[1080/120p] / [1080/100p] / [1080p] /
[1080i] / [720p] / [576p] / [480p]
Sets the HDMI output resolution for playback.
[AUTO]: Outputs with a resolution suited to the connected external device. When
playing back pictures, output is at a maximum resolution of 8K.
•
The items you can select depend on the [System Frequency] setting.
•
If no image appears on the external device with [AUTO], switch to a setting other
than [AUTO] to set a format supported by your external device.
(Please also refer to the operating instructions for the external device.)
•
It may not be possible to play back video, depending on the external device
connected.
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] [ON] / [OFF]
Images with LUT (Look-Up Table) file applied are output when you play back videos
recorded with [Photo Style] set to [V-Log].
•
This is linked with [LUT View Assist (HDMI)] in [Log View Assist] under the
[Custom] ([Monitor / Display (Video)]) menu. ([Log View Assist]: 416)
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
565
[Network Connection Light]
[HLG View Assist (HDMI)] [AUTO] / [MODE1] / [MODE2] / [OFF]
At recording or playback of HLG video, this converts their color gamut and
brightness for display.
•
This is linked with [HDMI] in [HLG View Assist] under the [Custom] ([Monitor /
Display (Video)]) menu. ([HLG View Assist]: 420)
[VIERA Link (CEC)] [ON] / [OFF]
You can use the device remote control to operate the camera when it is connected to
a VIERA Link compatible device using an HDMI micro cable.
(Using VIERA Link: 660)
[Background Color(Playback)] []/ []
Sets the color of the bands displayed on the top and bottom or the left and right of
images output on an external device.
•
We recommend setting to [ ] to prevent burn-in on the screen of the output
destination.
[Photo Luminance Level] [0-255] / [16-255]
Sets the level of luminance when outputting pictures to external devices.
[ON] / [OFF]
This will turn on the network connection light.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
566
[Setup] menu ([Setting])
[Save to Custom Mode]
[Load Custom Mode]
[Custom Mode Settings]
[C1] / [C2] / [C3-1] to [C3-10]
You can register the currently set information of the camera.
(Register in Custom Mode: 513)
[C1] / [C2] / [C3-1] to [C3-10]
Calls up registered Custom mode settings to the selected recording mode and
overwrites the current settings with these.
(Calling Up Settings: 516)
[Limit No. of Custom Mode]
[Edit Title]
[How to Reload Custom Mode]
[Select Loading Details]
Sets the ease of use of Custom mode.
(Custom Mode Detailed Settings: 514)
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
567
[Save/Restore Camera Setting]
[Reset]
[Save] / [Load] / [Delete] / [Keep Settings While Format]
Saves the camera’s settings information to the card.
Saved settings information can be loaded to the camera, letting you set the same
settings on multiple cameras.
[Save]: Saves the camera’s settings information to the card.
•
If saving new data, then select [New File], and if overwriting an existing file, select
that existing file.
•
When [New File] is selected, a screen to select the file name to save as is
displayed.
[OK]:
Saves using the file name on the screen.
[Change the file name]:
Changes the file name and saves the file.
•
Available characters: alphabetic characters (upper-case), numerals, up to
8 characters
•
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 90)
[Load]: Loads the settings information on the card and copies it to the camera.
[Delete]: Deletes settings information on the card.
[Keep Settings While Format]: When formatting the card, formats the card while
keeping camera settings information stored on the card.
•
Only settings information from the same model can be loaded.
•
Up to 10 instances of settings information can be saved on one card.
•
List of functions for which saving of settings information is possible (List of
Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 736)
Returns the camera to its default settings.
([Reset]: 89)
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
568
[Setup] menu ([Others])
[Clock Set]
[Time Zone]
Sets the date and time.
(Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time): 63)
Sets the time zone.
Press 21 to select the time zone and then press to confirm.
(A) Current time
(B) Time difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)
•
If you are using Daylight Savings [ ], press 3. (The time will move forward
by 1 hour.)
To return to the normal time, press 3 again.
(A)
(B)
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
569
[System Frequency]
[Pixel Refresh]
[59.94Hz (NTSC)] / [50.00Hz (PAL)] / [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
* Default setting specifications vary depending on the country or area where the
camera was purchased.
This changes the system frequency of videos that are recorded and played back
with the camera.
([System Frequency]: 120)
This optimizes the image sensor and image processing.
•
The image sensor and image processing are optimized when the camera is
purchased. Use this function when bright spots that do not exist in the subject get
recorded.
•
Use the body cap, etc., to shade the lens when executing Pixel Refresh.
•
Turn the camera off and on after the pixels are corrected.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
570
[Sensor Cleaning]
[Language]
Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the front of the
image sensor is performed.
•
You can use this function when the dust is particularly noticeable.
•
Turn the camera off and on when finished.
This set the language displayed on the screen.
•
If you set a different language by mistake, select [ ] from the menu icons to set
the desired language.
Camera Customization – [Setup] Menu
571
[Firmware Version]
[Approved Regulations]
[Firmware Update] / [Software info]
You can check the firmware versions of the camera and lens.
In addition, you can update the firmware, and display information about the camera
software.
[Firmware Update]: Updates firmware.
1 Download the firmware. (Firmware of Your Camera/Lens: 18)
2 Save the firmware to the root directory of the card (the first folder that appears
when you access the card on your PC), and then insert the card into the
camera.
3 Select [Firmware Update], press , and then select [Yes] to update the
firmware.
[Software info]: Displays information about the camera software.
Displays the certification number for radio regulations.
* Depending on the country or area where the camera was purchased, this is not
displayed due to differences in specifications.
Camera Customization – My Menu
572
My Menu
≥ Registration in My Menu: 572
≥ Edit My Menu: 573
Register frequently-used menus in My Menu.
A maximum of 23 items can be registered.
Registered menus can be called up from [ ] to [ ].
Registration in My Menu
1
Select [Add].
≥ [] [] [Add]
2
Register.
≥Select the menu to register and then press .
Calling up My Menu
Call up the menus registered in My Menu.
[] [ ]/[ ]/[ ] Registered menus
Camera Customization – My Menu
573
Edit My Menu
You can reorder the display order of My Menu, and delete unnecessary
menus.
[] Select [ ]
[Add]
Selects and registers the menus to be displayed in My Menu.
[Sorting]
Changes the order of My Menu.
Select the menu to change, then set the destination.
[Delete]
Deletes menus that are registered to My Menu.
[Delete Item]: Selects the menu, then deletes.
[Delete All]: Deletes all menus registered in My Menu.
[Display from My Menu]
Displays My Menu first when displaying a menu.
[ON]: Displays My Menu.
[OFF]: Displays the last-used menu.
574
List of Menu
Camera customization and many function settings are performed with
menus on this camera.
This chapter introduces all of the menu items in a list format.
≥ [Photo] menu: 575
≥ [Video] menu: 577
≥ [Custom] menu: 580
≥ [Setup] menu: 584
≥ [My Menu]: 586
≥ [Playback] menu: 587
•
For information about menu operation methods (Menu Operation Methods: 84)
•
Refer to the “Materials” chapter for the following lists:
– List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 736
– List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode: 758
List of Menu – [Photo] menu
575
[Photo] menu
[Image Quality]
≥ [Photo Style] ([Photo Style]: 307)
≥ [Metering Mode] ([Metering Mode]: 267)
≥ [Aspect Ratio] ([Aspect Ratio]: 106)
≥ [Picture Quality] ([Picture Quality]: 110)
≥ [Picture Size] ([Picture Size]: 108)
≥ [High Resolution Mode Setting] (High Resolution mode: 215)
≥ [Dual Native ISO Setting] ([Dual Native ISO Setting]: 296)
≥ [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] ([ISO Sensitivity (photo)]: 297)
≥ [Synchro Scan(Photo)] ([Synchro Scan(Photo)]: 251)
≥ [Min. Shutter Speed] ([Min. Shutter Speed]: 253)
≥ [i.Dynamic Range] ([i.Dynamic Range]: 289)
≥ [Vignetting Comp.] ([Vignetting Comp.]: 334)
≥ [Color Shading Compensation] ([Color Shading Compensation]: 335)
≥ [Diffraction Compensation] ([Diffraction Compensation]: 339)
≥ [Filter Settings] ([Filter Settings]: 320)
: Menu items common to the [Photo] menu and [Video] menu. Their settings
are synchronized.
List of Menu – [Photo] menu
576
[Focus]
≥ [Focus Mode] (Selecting the Focus Mode: 139)
≥ [AF Detection Setting] (Automatic Detection: 162)
≥ [Detecting Subject] (Automatic Detection: 162)
≥ [AF Custom Setting(Photo)] ([AF Custom Setting(Photo)]: 148)
≥ [Focus Limiter] ([Focus Limiter]: 151)
≥ [AF Assist Light] ([AF Assist Light]: 153)
≥ [Focus Peaking] ([Focus Peaking]: 188)
≥ [Focus Frame Moving Speed] ([Focus Frame Moving Speed]: 154)
[Others (Photo)]
≥ [Bracketing] (Bracket Recording: 241)
≥ [Silent Mode] ([Silent Mode]: 249)
≥ [Hybrid Zoom(Photo)] ([Hybrid Zoom(Photo)]: 194)
≥ [Crop Zoom(Photo)] ([Crop Zoom(Photo)]: 191)
≥ [Image Stabilizer] (Image Stabilizer: 255)
≥ [Burst Shot Setting] (Taking Burst Pictures: 207)
≥ [Shutter Delay] ([Shutter Delay]: 254)
≥ [Time Lapse/Animation] (Recording with Time Lapse Shot: 221,
Recording with Stop Motion Animation: 229)
≥ [Self Timer] (Recording Using the Self-timer: 236)
List of Menu – [Video] menu
577
[Video] menu
[Image Quality]
≥ [Exposure Mode] (Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos: 343)
≥ [Photo Style] ([Photo Style]: 307)
≥ [Metering Mode] ([Metering Mode]: 267)
≥ [Dual Native ISO Setting] ([Dual Native ISO Setting]: 296)
≥ [ISO Sensitivity (video)] ([ISO Sensitivity (video)]: 359)
≥ [Synchro Scan(Video)] ([Synchro Scan(Video)]: 425)
≥ [Flicker Decrease (Video)] ([Flicker Decrease (Video)]: 377)
≥ [Master Pedestal Level] ([Master Pedestal Level]: 356)
≥ [SS/Gain Operation] ([SS/Gain Operation]: 378)
≥ [i.Dynamic Range] ([i.Dynamic Range]: 289)
≥ [Vignetting Comp.] ([Vignetting Comp.]: 334)
≥ [Color Shading Compensation] ([Color Shading Compensation]: 335)
≥ [Diffraction Compensation] ([Diffraction Compensation]: 339)
≥ [Filter Settings] ([Filter Settings]: 320)
[Image Format]
≥ [Rec. File Format] ([Rec. File Format]: 122)
≥ [Image Area of Video] ([Image Area of Video]: 136)
≥ [Rec Quality] ([Rec Quality]: 123)
≥ [Rec Quality (My List)] ([add to list]: 134)
≥ [Slow & Quick Setting] (Slow & Quick Video: 393)
≥ [Time Code] (Setting the Time Code: 374)
≥ [
Luminance Level] ([Luminance Level]: 354)
: Menu items common to the [Photo] menu and [Video] menu. Their settings
are synchronized.
List of Menu – [Video] menu
578
[Focus]
≥ [Focus Mode] (Selecting the Focus Mode: 139)
≥ [AF Detection Setting] (Automatic Detection: 162)
≥ [Detecting Subject] (Automatic Detection: 162)
≥ [AF Custom Setting(Video)] ([AF Custom Setting(Video)]: 351)
≥ [Focus Limiter] ([Focus Limiter]: 151)
≥ [Continuous AF] ([Continuous AF]: 349)
≥ [AF Assist Light] ([AF Assist Light]: 153)
≥ [Focus Peaking] ([Focus Peaking]: 188)
≥ [Focus Frame Moving Speed] ([Focus Frame Moving Speed]: 154)
[Audio]
≥ [Sound Rec Level Disp.] ([Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 361)
≥ [Mute Sound Input] ([Mute Sound Input]: 362)
≥ [Sound Rec Gain Level] ([Sound Rec Gain Level]: 363)
≥ [Sound Rec Level Adj.] ([Sound Rec Level Adj.]: 364)
≥ [Sound Rec Quality] ([Sound Rec Quality]: 365)
≥ [Sound Rec Level Limiter] ([Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 366)
≥ [Wind Noise Canceller] ([Wind Noise Canceller]: 367)
≥ [Wind Cut] (Reduction of Wind Noise: 372)
≥ [Mic Socket] (External Microphones (Optional): 368)
≥ [Special Mic.] (Setting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2:
Optional): 371)
List of Menu – [Video] menu
579
[Others (Video)]
≥ [Silent Mode] ([Silent Mode]: 249)
≥ [Hybrid Zoom(Video)] ([Hybrid Zoom(Video)]: 201)
≥ [Crop Zoom(Video)] ([Crop Zoom(Video)]: 197)
≥ [Image Stabilizer] (Image Stabilizer: 255)
≥ [Self Timer Setting] (Recording Using the Self-timer: 236)
≥ [Focus Transition] ([Focus Transition]: 402)
≥ [Segmented File Recording] ([Segmented File Recording]: 427)
≥ [Live Cropping] ([Live Cropping]: 407)
List of Menu – [Custom] menu
580
[Custom] menu
[Image Quality] ([Custom] menu ([Image Quality]): 518)
≥ [Photo Style Settings] ([Photo Style Settings]: 518)
≥ [LUT Library] ([LUT Library]: 328)
≥ [ISO Increments] ([ISO Increments]: 519)
≥ [Extended ISO] ([Extended ISO]: 519)
≥ [Exposure Offset Adjust.] ([Exposure Offset Adjust.]: 520)
≥ [Face Priority In Multi Metering] ([Face Priority In Multi Metering]: 520)
≥ [AWB Lock Setting] ([AWB Lock Setting]: 521)
≥ [Color Space] ([Color Space]: 522)
≥ [Exposure Comp. Reset] ([Exposure Comp. Reset]: 522)
≥ [Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] ([Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M]: 522)
≥ [CreativeVideo Combined Set.] ([CreativeVideo Combined Set.]: 523)
List of Menu – [Custom] menu
581
[Focus/Shutter] ([Custom] menu ([Focus/Shutter]): 524)
≥ [Focus/Shutter Priority] ([Focus/Shutter Priority]: 524)
≥ [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] ([Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]: 524)
≥ [AF/AE Lock Hold] ([AF/AE Lock Hold]: 524)
≥ [AF+MF] ([AF+MF]: 525)
≥ [MF Assist] ([MF Assist]: 525)
≥ [MF Guide] ([MF Guide]: 526)
≥ [Focus Ring Lock] ([Focus Ring Lock]: 526)
≥ [Show/Hide AF Mode] ([Show/Hide AF Mode]: 526)
≥ [Pinpoint AF Setting] ([Pinpoint AF Setting]: 527)
≥ [AF-Point Scope Setting] ([AF-Point Scope Setting]: 527)
≥ [Shutter AF] ([Shutter AF]: 527)
≥ [Human Eye Detection Display] ([Human Eye Detection Display]: 528)
≥ [Half-Press Shutter] ([Half-Press Shutter]: 528)
≥ [Assign REC to Shutter Button] ([Assign REC to Shutter Button]: 528)
≥ [Quick AF] ([Quick AF]: 528)
≥ [Looped Focus Frame] ([Looped Focus Frame]: 529)
≥ [Enlarged Live Display(Video)] ([Enlarged Live Display(Video)]: 529)
List of Menu – [Custom] menu
582
[Operation] ([Custom] menu ([Operation]): 530)
≥ [Q.MENU Settings] ([Q.MENU Settings]: 530)
≥ [Touch Settings] ([Touch Settings]: 530)
≥ [Operation Lock Setup] ([Operation Lock Setup]: 531)
≥ [Fn Button Set] ([Fn Button Set]: 531)
≥ [ISO Displayed Setting] ([ISO Displayed Setting]: 532)
≥ [Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting] ([Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting]: 532)
≥ [Dial Set.] ([Dial Set.]: 533)
[Monitor / Display (Photo)] ([Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display
(Photo)]): 535)
≥ [Auto Review] ([Auto Review]: 535)
≥ [Constant Preview] ([Constant Preview]: 535)
≥ [Histogram] ([Histogram]: 536)
≥ [Photo Grid Line] ([Photo Grid Line]: 537)
≥ [Live View Boost] ([Live View Boost]: 537)
≥ [Night Mode] ([Night Mode]: 538)
≥ [Monitor Display Settings] ([Monitor Display Settings]: 539)
≥ [Expo.Meter] ([Expo.Meter]: 541)
≥ [Focal Length] ([Focal Length]: 541)
≥ [Blinking Highlights] ([Blinking Highlights]: 541)
≥ [Sheer Overlay] ([Sheer Overlay]: 542)
≥ [I.S. Status Scope] ([I
.S. Status Scope]: 543)
≥ [Level Gauge] ([Level Gauge]: 544)
≥ [Luminance Spot Meter] ([Luminance Spot Meter]: 545)
≥ [Framing Outline] ([Framing Outline]: 545)
≥ [Show/Hide Monitor Layout] ([Show/Hide Monitor Layout]: 545)
List of Menu – [Custom] menu
583
[Monitor / Display (Video)] ([Custom] menu ([Monitor / Display
(Video)]): 546)
≥ [Log View Assist] ([Log View Assist]: 546)
≥ [HLG View Assist] ([HLG View Assist]: 546)
≥ [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] ([Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]:
546)
≥ [Monochrome Live View] ([Monochrome Live View]: 547)
≥ [Center Marker] ([Center Marker]: 547)
≥ [Safety Zone Marker] ([Safety Zone Marker]: 547)
≥ [Frame Marker] ([Frame Marker]: 548)
≥ [Zebra Pattern] ([Zebra Pattern]: 548)
≥ [WFM/Vector Scope] ([WFM/Vector Scope]: 548)
≥ [Color Bars] ([Color Bars]: 549)
≥ [Video-Priority Display] ([Video-Priority Display]: 549)
≥ [Red REC Frame Indicator] ([Red REC Frame Indicator]: 549)
[IN/OUT] ([Custom] menu ([IN/OUT]): 550)
≥ [HDMI Rec Output] ([HDMI Rec Output]: 550)
[Lens / Others] ([Custom] menu ([Lens / Others]): 551)
≥ [Lens Focus Resume] ([Lens Focus Resume]: 551)
≥ [Lens Fn Button Setting] ([Lens Fn Button Setting]: 551)
≥ [Focus Ring Control] ([Focus Ring Control]: 552)
≥ [AF Micro Adjustment] ([AF Micro Adjustment]: 155)
≥ [Lens Information] ([L
ens Information]: 553)
≥ [Lens Info. Confirmation] ([Lens Info. Confirmation]: 553)
≥ [Vertical Position Info (Video)] ([Vertical Position Info (Video)]: 553)
List of Menu – [Setup] menu
584
[Setup] menu
[Card/File] ([Setup] menu ([Card/File]): 555)
≥ [Card Format] ([Card Format]: 555)
≥ [Folder / File Settings] ([Folder / File Settings]: 556)
≥ [File Number Reset] ([File Number Reset]: 558)
≥ [Copyright Information] ([Copyright Information]: 558)
[Monitor / Display] ([Setup] menu ([Monitor / Display]): 559)
≥ [Power Save Mode] ([Power Save Mode]: 559)
≥ [Monitor Frame Rate] ([Monitor Frame Rate]: 559)
≥ [Monitor Settings] ([Monitor Settings]: 560)
≥ [Monitor Backlight] ([Monitor Backlight]: 560)
≥ [Level Gauge Adjust.] ([Level Gauge Adjust.]: 560)
[IN/OUT] ([Setup] menu ([IN/OUT]): 561)
≥ [Beep] ([Beep]: 561)
≥ [Wi-Fi
®
] ([Wi-Fi
®
]: 561)
≥ [Bluetooth
®
] ([Bluetooth
®
]: 562)
≥ [USB] ([USB]: 563)
≥ [HDMI Connection] ([HDMI Connection]: 564)
≥ [Network Connection Light] ([Network Connection Light]: 565)
List of Menu – [Setup] menu
585
[Setting] ([Setup] menu ([Setting]): 566)
≥ [Save to Custom Mode] ([Save to Custom Mode]: 566)
≥ [Load Custom Mode] ([Load Custom Mode]: 566)
≥ [Custom Mode Settings] ([Custom Mode Settings]: 566)
≥ [Save/Restore Camera Setting] ([Save/Restore Camera Setting]: 567)
≥ [Reset] ([Reset]: 567)
[Others] ([Setup] menu ([Others]): 568)
≥ [Clock Set] ([Clock Set]: 568)
≥ [Time Zone] ([Time Zone]: 568)
≥ [System Frequency] ([System Frequency]: 569)
≥ [Pixel Refresh] ([Pixel Refresh]: 569)
≥ [Sensor Cleaning] ([Sensor Cleaning]: 570)
≥ [Language] ([Language]: 570)
≥ [Firmware Version] ([Firmware Version]: 571)
≥ [Approved Regulations] ([Approved Regulations]: 571)
*
* Depending on the country or area where the camera was purchased, this is not
displayed due to differences in specifications.
List of Menu – [Playback] menu
587
[Playback] menu
[Playback Mode] ([Playback] ([Playback Mode]): 479)
≥ [Playback Mode] ([Playback Mode]: 479)
≥ [Slide Show] ([Slide Show]: 479)
≥ [Rotate Disp.] ([Rotate Disp.]: 480)
≥ [Picture Sort] ([Picture Sort]: 480)
≥ [Magnify from AF Point] ([Magnify from AF Point]: 480)
≥ [LUT View Assist (Monitor)] ([LUT View Assist (Monitor)]: 480)
≥ [HLG View Assist (Monitor)] ([HLG View Assist (Monitor)]: 481)
≥ [Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] ([Anamorphic Desqueeze Display]:
481)
≥ [Behavior After Video Playback] ([Behavior After Video Playback]: 481)
[Process Image] ([Playback] ([Process Image]): 482)
≥ [RAW Processing] ([RAW Processing]: 482)
≥ [Time Lapse Video] ([Time Lapse Video]: 482)
≥ [Stop Motion Video] ([Stop Motion Video]: 482)
[Add/Delete Info.] ([Playback] ([Add/Delete Info.]): 483)
≥ [Protect] ([Protect]: 483)
≥ [Rating] ([Rating]: 483)
[Edit Image] ([Playback] ([Edit Image]): 484)
≥ [Resize] ([Resize]: 484)
≥ [Rotate] ([Rotate]: 485)
≥ [Video Divide] ([Video Divide]: 485)
≥ [
Video Repair] ([Video Repair]: 485)
[Others] ([Playback] ([Others]): 486)
≥ [Delete Confirmation] ([Delete Confirmation]: 486)
≥ [Delete All Images] ([Delete All Images]: 486)
588
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth
This chapter explains the Wi-Fi
®
and Bluetooth
®
functions of the camera.
•
This document refers to both smartphones and tablets as smartphones.
≥ Connecting to “LUMIX Lab”: 590
≥ Using “LUMIX Lab”: 596
≥ Connecting to “LUMIX Sync”: 604
≥ Using “LUMIX Sync”: 620
≥ Sending Images from the Camera to a PC: 637
≥ Wi-Fi Connections: 641
≥ Send Settings and Selecting Images: 651
≥ [Wi-Fi Setup] Menu: 653
Checking operation of the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions
(A) Network connection light
Light (blue) Monitor Operation
Lit
The Wi-Fi function is set to on, or there is a
connection.
The Bluetooth function is set to on, or there
is a connection.
Blinking
When image data is sent using a camera
operation.
(A)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth
589
•
Do not remove the card or battery or move to an area without any reception while
sending images.
•
The camera cannot be used to connect to a public wireless LAN connection.
•
We strongly recommend that you set an encryption to maintain information
security.
•
We recommend that you use a sufficiently charged battery when sending
images.
•
When the remaining battery level is low, it may not be possible to connect to or
maintain communication with other devices.
(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)
•
Images may not be completely sent depending on radio wave conditions.
If the connection is terminated while sending images, images with missing parts
may be sent.
•
You can set so that the network connection light does not turn on:
([Network Connection Light]: 565)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Lab”
590
Connecting to “LUMIX Lab”
≥ Installing “LUMIX Lab”: 591
≥ Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 592
Connect with a smartphone which has the “Panasonic LUMIX Lab” (below:
“LUMIX Lab”) smartphone app installed.
Use “LUMIX Lab” for [LUT Library] operations and image transfers.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Lab”
591
Installing “LUMIX Lab”
“LUMIX Lab” is an application for smartphones provided by Panasonic.
1
Connect the smartphone to a network.
2
(Android) Select “Google Play™ Store”.
(iOS) Select “App Store”.
3
Enter “LUMIX” or “panasonic lumix lab” into the search
box.
4
Select and install the “Panasonic LUMIX Lab” .
Supported OS
Android™: Android 10 or higher
iOS: iOS 15 or higher
•
This can also be downloaded via the QR code displayed with [REAL TIME LUT].
•
Use the latest version.
•
Supported OSs are current as of May 2024 and are subject to change.
•
Read the [Help] in the “LUMIX Lab” menu for further details on how to operate.
•
The app may not operate correctly depending on your smartphone.
For information on the “LUMIX Lab”, refer to the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(English only)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Lab”
592
Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth
Connection)
Follow a simple connection setup procedure (pairing) to connect to a
smartphone that supports Bluetooth Low Energy.
•
For the first-time connection, pairing settings are required.
When connecting the second and subsequent times, the connection is automatic
when you turn on the camera’s Bluetooth function.
Supported smartphones
Android™: Android 10 or higher with Bluetooth 4.0 or higher (excluding those that
do not support Bluetooth Low Energy)
iOS: iOS 15 or higher
•
Turn on the Bluetooth function on the smartphone beforehand.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Lab”
593
1
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Lab”.
2
View the content in the displayed guidance and start
using the app.
3
Switch to the [Camera] screen and select [Pair The
Camera].
(A) [Pair The Camera]
4
Set the camera to Bluetooth pairing standby state.
≥ [] [] [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth Function] [ON]
•
The camera enters the pairing standby state.
•
When the camera is detected, it is displayed in “LUMIX Lab”.
5
Select the camera to be connected in “LUMIX Lab”.
•
Pairing is executed when you select [Pairing] in the confirmation screen.
(A)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Lab”
594
End Bluetooth Connection
To terminate the Bluetooth connection, turn off the Bluetooth function of the
camera.
[] [] [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth Function] Select [OFF]
•
The paired smartphone is registered as a paired device.
•
Even if you set up pairing with more than one smartphone, you can only connect
to one smartphone at a time.
•
When pairing takes some time, canceling the pairing settings on both the
smartphone and camera and re-establishing the connection may result in the
camera being detected correctly.
•
During Bluetooth connection, [ ] is displayed in the recording screen.
When the Bluetooth function is enabled, but a connection is not established with
the smartphone, [ ] appears translucent.
•
Up to 16 smartphones can be registered.
If you try to register more than 16 smartphones, the registration information will
be deleted from the oldest first.
•
It is not possible to connect “LUMIX Lab” and “LUMIX Sync” to the camera at the
same time.
•
Even if you terminate the connection, the pairing information for it will not be
deleted.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Lab”
595
Canceling Pairing
1 Cancel the pairing setting of the camera.
•
[] [] [Bluetooth] [Pairing] [Delete]
2 Select the smartphone for which to cancel the pairing.
•
Also cancel the pairing setting on the smartphone.
•
When [Reset] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu is used to reset the network
settings, the information for registered devices is deleted.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Lab”
596
Using “LUMIX Lab”
≥ LUT Library Operations: 596
≥ Import images: 598
≥ [Auto Transfer]: 600
≥ [Location Logging]: 602
This explains the functions for operating the camera from “LUMIX Lab”.
LUT Library Operations
Operate “LUMIX Lab” to update the [LUT Library] in the camera.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 592)
•
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Lab”.
1
Select [LUT Transfer] in the [Camera] screen.
•
Connect to the camera with Wi-Fi. Select [Join] to start the connection.
(A) [LUT Transfer]
(A)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Lab”
597
2
Select the LUT file in the [LUT Library] screen to edit.
•
You can transfer, rename, delete or reorder your LUT files.
•
A list of LUT files saved to “LUMIX Lab” is shown in [Device].
•
A list of LUT files saved to the camera is shown in [Camera].
3
Select from [Device] the LUT file to transfer.
4
Select [Transfer to Camera] and update the [LUT
Library] on the camera.
Vlog_709
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Lab”
598
Import images
Operate “LUMIX Lab” to transfer images from the camera to your
smartphone.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone. (Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth
Connection): 592)
•
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Lab”.
1
Select [Transfer Photo / Video] in the [Camera] screen.
•
Connect to the camera with Wi-Fi. Select [Join] to start the connection.
2
Select the image to transfer.
≥Touch the checkbox to select.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Lab”
599
3
Transfer the image.
≥Select [ ].
•
It is not possible to transfer images with file sizes exceeding 4 GB.
•
Images recorded using the following function cannot be transferred:
– [MOV] videos
•
The transfer speed slows when the camera temperature rises.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Lab”
600
[Auto Transfer]
You can automatically transfer images from the camera to your
smartphone as they are taken.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 592)
1
Enable [Auto Transfer] on the camera.
≥ [] [] [Bluetooth] [Auto Transfer] [ON]
≥The function can also be enabled in “LUMIX Lab”.
•
Connect to the smartphone with Wi-Fi.
2
Check the send settings on the camera and then press
.
•
To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (Image Send Settings: 651)
•
Automatic image transfer is possible when [ ] is displayed on the camera
recording screen.
3
Record with the camera.
•
[ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Lab”
601
To Stop the Automatic Transfer of Images
[] [] [Bluetooth] [Auto Transfer] Select [OFF]
≥ A confirmation screen is displayed, asking you to terminate the Wi-Fi
connection.
•
If the [Bluetooth Function] and [Auto Transfer] settings of the camera are [ON],
the camera automatically connects to the smartphone via Wi-Fi and Bluetooth
when you turn on the camera.
Start up the “LUMIX Lab” on the smartphone to connect to the camera. Note that
if “LUMIX Sync ” is running on the smartphone, automatic image transfer may not
work properly.
•
When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] cannot be used.
•
Automatic image transfer is interrupted while recording or playing back videos.
The transfer starts at the start of the file where it was interrupted when the
transmission restarts.
•
If the camera is turned off during image transfer, and the file sending is
interrupted, then turn on the camera to restart the sending.
– If the storage status of unsent files changes, then sending of files may no
longer be possible.
– If there are many unsent files, then sending of all files may not be possible.
•
If automatic image transfer is performed in places where the ambient
temperature is high, communications may be interrupted.
The camera automatically reconnects when its temperature goes down and
automatic image transfer restarts.
If automatic image transfer does not restart, turn the camera off then on again to
reconnect.
•
Images recorded with the following function cannot be transferred automatically:
– [MP4]/[MOV] ([Rec. File Format])
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Lab”
602
[Location Logging]
The smartphone sends its location information to the camera via Bluetooth,
and the camera performs recording while writing the acquired location
information.
Getting started:
•
Enable the GPS function on the smartphone.
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 592)
1
Enable [Location Logging] on the camera.
≥ [] [] [Bluetooth] [Location Logging] [ON]
≥The function can also be enabled in “LUMIX Lab”.
•
The camera will enter a mode where location information can be recorded
and [ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera.
2
Record images with the camera.
•
Location information will be written to the recorded images.
GPS
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Lab”
603
•
When [ ] on the recording screen appears translucent, location information
cannot be acquired, therefore data cannot be written.
Smartphone GPS positioning may not be possible if the smartphone is within a
building, a bag, or similar. Move the smartphone to a position affording a wide
view of the sky to improve positioning performance.
In addition, refer to the operating instructions of your smartphone.
•
Images with location information are indicated with [ ].
•
Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the
subject when you use this function. Use at your own risk.
•
The smartphone drains its battery faster while acquiring location information.
GPS
GPS
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Sync”
604
Connecting to “LUMIX Sync”
≥ Installing “LUMIX Sync”: 605
≥ Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection): 606
≥ Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 612
≥ Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone with Simple
Operations: 618
Connect with a smartphone which has the “Panasonic LUMIX Sync”
(below: “LUMIX Sync”) smartphone app installed.
Use “LUMIX Sync” for remote recording and image transfers.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Sync”
605
Installing “LUMIX Sync”
“LUMIX Sync” is an application for smartphones provided by Panasonic.
1
Connect the smartphone to a network.
2
(Android) Select “Google Play™ Store”.
(iOS) Select “App Store”.
3
Enter “LUMIX” or “panasonic lumix sync” into the
search box.
4
Select and install the “Panasonic LUMIX Sync” .
Supported OS
Android™: Android 10 or higher
iOS: iOS 15 or higher
•
Use the latest version.
•
Supported OSs are current as of May 2024 and are subject to change.
•
Read the [Help] in the “LUMIX Sync” menu for further details on how to operate.
•
The app may not operate correctly depending on your smartphone.
For information on the “LUMIX Sync”, refer to the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(English only)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Sync”
606
Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth
Connection)
Follow a simple connection setup procedure (pairing) to connect to a
smartphone that supports Bluetooth Low Energy.
When pairing is set up, the camera also automatically connects to the
smartphone via Wi-Fi.
•
For the first-time connection, pairing settings are required.
For information about connecting for the second and subsequent times
(Connecting to a Paired Smartphone: 610)
Supported smartphones
Android™: Android 10 or higher with Bluetooth 4.0 or higher (excluding those that
do not support Bluetooth Low Energy)
iOS: iOS 15 or higher
•
Turn on the Bluetooth function on the smartphone beforehand.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Sync”
607
1
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
≥A message regarding device (camera) registration is displayed.
Select [Next].
•
If you have closed the message, select [ ], then register the camera using
[Camera registration (pairing)].
2
Check the content in the displayed guide and select
[Next] until the screen to register the camera is
displayed.
LUMIX Sync
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Sync”
608
Operating the camera in accordance with the smartphone guide.
3
Set the camera to Bluetooth pairing standby state.
≥ [] [] [Bluetooth] [Pairing] [Add New
Device]
≥The camera enters pairing standby state and the device name (A)
is displayed.
4
On the smartphone, select the camera’s device name.
•
(iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
(A)
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Sync”
609
5
When a message indicating that device registration is
complete, select [OK].
≥A Bluetooth connection between the camera and the smartphone
will be made.
End Bluetooth Connection
To terminate the Bluetooth connection, turn off the Bluetooth function of the
camera.
[] [] [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth Function] Select [OFF]
•
The paired smartphone is registered as a paired device.
•
During Bluetooth connection, [ ] is displayed in the recording screen.
When the Bluetooth function is enabled, but a connection is not established with
the smartphone, [ ] appears translucent.
•
Up to 16 smartphones can be registered.
If you try to register more than 16 smartphones, the registration information will
be deleted from the oldest first.
•
Even if you terminate the connection, the pairing information for it will not be
deleted.
OK
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Sync”
610
Connecting to a Paired Smartphone
Connect paired smartphones using the following procedure.
1 Enable the Bluetooth function of the camera.
•
[] [] [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth Function] [ON]
2 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
•
If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for
cameras, close the message.
3 Select [ ].
4 Select [Bluetooth Setup].
5 Turn Bluetooth ON.
6 From [Registered camera(s)] items, select the camera’s device name.
•
Even if you set up pairing with more than one smartphone, you can only connect
to one smartphone at a time.
•
When pairing takes some time, canceling the pairing settings on both the
smartphone and camera and re-establishing the connection may result in the
camera being detected correctly.
LUMIX Sync
Bluetooth
XXXXXXXX
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Sync”
611
Canceling Pairing
1 Cancel the pairing setting of the camera.
•
[] [] [Bluetooth] [Pairing] [Delete]
2 Select the smartphone for which to cancel the pairing.
•
Also cancel the pairing setting on the smartphone.
•
When [Reset] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu is used to reset the network
settings, the information for registered devices is deleted.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Sync”
612
Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection])
Connect to the smartphone using Wi-Fi. The default setting is to connect
with enhanced security using password authentication. It is also possible to
easily connect to a smartphone without using a password.
1
Display the QR code (B).
≥ [] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [New
Connection] [Control With Smartphone]
• You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button
assigned with [Wi-Fi]. (Fn Buttons: 488)
• Press to enlarge the QR code.
2
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
• If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is
searching for cameras, close the message.
3
Select [ ].
4
Select [Wi-Fi connection].
(B)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Sync”
613
5
Select [QR code].
6
Scan the QR code displayed on the screen of the
camera using “LUMIX Sync”.
• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of
destination is displayed, select [Join].
Manually entering a password to connect
1 Display the screen in Step 1 (Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi
connection]): 612).
2 In the setting menu of the smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi function ON.
3 On the Wi-Fi setup screen, select the SSID (C) displayed on the camera.
4 (At the first connection) Enter the password (C) displayed on the camera.
5 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi
XXXXXXXX
i
i
(C)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Sync”
614
Connecting Without Using Password Authentication
1 Set [Wi-Fi Password] on the camera to [OFF].
•
[] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup] [Wi-Fi Password] [OFF]
2 Set the camera to Wi-Fi connection standby status.
•
[] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [New Connection]
[Control With Smartphone]
•
The SSID (D) of the camera is displayed on the screen.
•
You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned
with [Wi-Fi]. (Fn Buttons: 488)
3 In the setting menu of the smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi function ON.
4 Select the SSID displayed on the camera.
(D)
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi
XXXXXXXX
i
i
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Sync”
615
5 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
6 (At the first connection) Confirm the device name displayed on the camera and
then select [Yes].
•
When a device different than the one you want to connect to is displayed, the
camera will automatically connect to that device if you select [Yes].
If there are other Wi-Fi connection devices nearby, we recommend using either
QR code or manual password input to connect with password authentication.
(Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 612)
•
When the following function is being used, [Wi-Fi Function] is not available:
– [Auto Transfer]
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Sync”
616
Connection Methods Other Than the Default Settings
When connecting with [Via Network], or [WPS Connection] in [Direct],
follow the steps below:
1 Display the connection method setting screen for the camera.
•
[] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [New Connection]
[Control With Smartphone]
2 Press [DISP.].
Connecting via network
1 Select [Via Network] and then press .
•
Connect the camera to a wireless access point. ([Via Network]: 642)
2 In the setting menu of the smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi function ON.
3 Connect the smartphone to the wireless access point that the camera is
connected to.
4 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
Connecting directly
1 Select [Direct] and then press .
•
Select [WPS Connection] to connect the camera to a smartphone. ([Direct]:
646)
2 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Sync”
617
Terminating the Wi-Fi Connection
To end the Wi-Fi connection between the camera and smartphone, follow
the steps below.
1 Press the shutter button halfway to put the camera in recording mode.
2 Terminate the Wi-Fi connection.
•
[] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Yes]
•
You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button assigned
with [Wi-Fi]. (Fn Buttons: 488)
3 On the smartphone, close the “LUMIX Sync”.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Sync”
618
Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone
with Simple Operations
You can transfer pictures to a smartphone connected by Bluetooth just by
pressing [Q] during playback.
You can also use the menu to connect easily.
•
You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button registered with
[Send Image (Smartphone)]. (Fn Buttons: 488)
Getting started:
•
Install “LUMIX Sync” on your smartphone. (Installing “LUMIX Sync”: 605)
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 606)
•
Press [ ] on the camera to display the playback screen.
Send a single image
1 Press 21 to select the image.
2 Press [Q].
3 Select [Single Select].
•
To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (Image Send Settings:
651)
4 On the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or [Join] (for iOS devices).
•
This connects automatically using Wi-Fi.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Connecting to “LUMIX Sync”
619
Send multiple images
1 Press [Q].
2 Select [Multi Select].
•
To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (Image Send Settings:
651)
3 Select the images and then transfer.
21: Select images
: Set/Cancel
[DISP.]: Transfer
4 On the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or [Join] (for iOS devices).
•
This connects automatically using Wi-Fi.
Using the menu to transfer easily
[] [] [Bluetooth] [LUMIX Sync Settings] [Send
Image (Smartphone)]
Settings: [Single Select]/[Multi Select]
•
If [Single Select], press 21 to select the image and then press to execute.
•
If [Multi Select], use the same operation as with “Send multiple images”. (Send
multiple images: 619)
•
It is not possible to transfer images with file sizes exceeding 4 GB.
•
Images recorded using the following function cannot be transferred:
– [MOV] videos
•
When recording, recording is prioritized so it will take time for sending to
complete.
•
If the camera is turned off, or the Wi-Fi is disconnected before sending is
completed, then sending will not restart.
•
You may not be able to delete files or use the [Playback] menu while sending.
•
When the following function is being used, [Wi-Fi Function] is not available:
– [Auto Transfer]
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Sync”
620
Using “LUMIX Sync”
≥ [Remote shooting]: 622
≥ [Shutter Remote Control]: 624
≥ [Import images]: 627
≥ [Auto Transfer]: 629
≥ [Location Logging]: 631
≥ [Remote Wakeup]: 633
≥ [Auto Clock Set]: 635
≥ [Camera settings copy]: 636
This explains the functions for operating the camera from “LUMIX Sync”.
Functions described in this document with the ( ) symbol require
a smartphone that supports Bluetooth Low Energy.
Bluetooth
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Sync”
621
Home Screen
When you start up “LUMIX Sync”, the home screen is displayed.
(A) : App settings (Connecting to a Paired Smartphone: 610, Connecting to a
Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 612, [Remote Wakeup]: 633)
This allows connection settings, camera power operations, and displays Help.
(B) : [Import images] ([Import images]: 627)
(C) : [Remote shooting] ([Remote shooting]: 622)
(D) : [Shutter Remote Control] ([Shutter Remote Control]: 624)
(E) : [Others] ([Camera settings copy]) ([Camera settings copy]: 636)
LUMIX Sync
(A)
(C)
(E)
(B)
(D)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Sync”
622
[Remote shooting]
You can use the smartphone to record from a remote location while
viewing the live view images from the camera.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone. (Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth
Connection): 606, Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 612)
•
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
1
Select [ ] ([Remote shooting]) in the home screen.
•
(iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
2
Start recording.
•
The recorded image is saved on the camera.
(F) Takes a picture
(G) Starts/ends the video recording
•
When used in combination with [Auto Transfer], it is possible to automatically
transfer the remotely recorded images to a smartphone. ([Auto Transfer]: 629)
•
Certain features, including some settings, may not be available.
(F) (G)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Sync”
623
Operation Method During Remote Recording
Set either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be
used during remote recording.
[] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup] Select [Priority of
Remote Device]
[Camera]
Operation is possible on both the camera and the smartphone.
•
The camera’s dial settings, etc. cannot be changed with the smartphone.
[Smartphone]
Operation is possible only on the smartphone.
•
The camera’s dial settings, etc. can be changed with the smartphone.
•
To end remote recording, press any of the buttons on the camera to turn on the
screen, and select [End].
•
The default setting is [Camera].
•
The setting of this function cannot be changed while the connection is active.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Sync”
624
[Shutter Remote Control]
You can use the smartphone as a remote control for the shutter.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 606)
•
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
1
Select [ ] ([Shutter Remote Control]) in the home
screen.
2
Start recording.
Starts/ends the video recording
Takes a picture
•
Bulb Recording: 625
Bluetooth
LOCK
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Sync”
625
Bulb Recording
The shutter can be kept open from the start to end of recording, which is
useful for recording of starry skies or night scenery.
Getting started:
•
Set the camera to [M] mode. (Manual Exposure Mode: 279)
•
Set the camera shutter speed to [T] (Time). ([T] (Time): 283)
1 Touch [ ] to start recording (keep touching, without removing your finger).
2 Remove your finger from [ ] to end recording.
•
Slide [ ] in the direction of [LOCK] to record with the shutter button locked
in a fully-pressed state.
(Slide [ ] back to its original position or press the camera shutter button to
end recording)
•
During [B] (Bulb) recording, if the Bluetooth connection is broken, then carry
out Bluetooth connection again, then end recording from the smartphone.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Sync”
626
Shortening the Return Time from [Sleep Mode]
You can shorten the time it takes for the camera to return from [Sleep
Mode] when the [Shutter Remote Control] is used.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 606)
•
Set [Remote Wakeup] in [LUMIX Sync Settings] to [ON]. ([Remote Wakeup]: 633)
[] [] [Bluetooth] [LUMIX Sync Settings] Select
[Returning from Sleep Mode]
[Import / Remote Priority]
Shortens the time to return when using [Import images] or [Remote shooting].
[Remote Shutter Priority]
Shortens the time to return when using [Shutter Remote Control].
•
To use the [Shutter Remote Control] to cancel [Sleep Mode] on the camera, set
[Bluetooth] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu as follows, then connect via Bluetooth:
– [Remote Wakeup] ([LUMIX Sync Settings]): [ON] ([Remote Wakeup]: 633)
– [Auto Transfer]: [OFF] ([Auto Transfer]: 629)
•
The camera cannot be turned on by using [Shutter Remote Control].
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Sync”
627
[Import images]
Transfer an image stored on the card to the smartphone connected via
Wi-Fi.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone. (Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth
Connection): 606, Connecting to a Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 612)
•
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
1
Select [ ] ([Import images]) in the home screen.
•
(iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
2
Select the image to transfer.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Sync”
628
3
Transfer the image.
≥Select [ ].
•
If the image is a video, you can play it back by touching [ ] at the center of
the screen.
•
When a video is played back, this has a small data size and is transmitted using
“LUMIX Sync”, therefore its image quality will differ from that of the actual video
recording.
Depending on the smartphone and on the usage conditions, the image quality
may deteriorate or the sound may skip during video or picture playback.
•
It is not possible to transfer images with file sizes exceeding 4 GB.
•
Images recorded using the following function cannot be transferred:
– [MOV] videos
•
The transfer speed slows when the camera temperature rises.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Sync”
629
[Auto Transfer]
You can automatically transfer recorded pictures to a smartphone as they
are taken.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 606)
1
Enable [Auto Transfer] on the camera.
≥ [] [] [Bluetooth] [Auto Transfer] [ON]
•
If a confirmation screen is displayed on the camera asking you to terminate
the Wi-Fi connection, select [Yes] to terminate it.
2
On the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or
[Join] (for iOS devices).
•
The camera automatically makes a Wi-Fi connection.
3
Check the send settings on the camera and then press
.
•
To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (Image Send Settings: 651)
•
Automatic image transfer is possible when [ ] is displayed on the camera
recording screen.
Bluetooth
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Sync”
630
4
Record with the camera.
•
[ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
To Stop the Automatic Transfer of Images
[] [] [Bluetooth] [Auto Transfer] Select [OFF]
≥ A confirmation screen is displayed, asking you to terminate the Wi-Fi
connection.
•
If the [Bluetooth Function] and [Auto Transfer] settings of the camera are [ON],
the camera automatically connects to the smartphone via Wi-Fi and Bluetooth
when you turn on the camera.
Start up the “LUMIX Sync” on the smartphone to connect to the camera. Note
that if “LUMIX Lab” is running on the smartphone, automatic image transfer may
not work properly.
•
Images are not transferred while the recording screen of the camera is displayed
on the smartphone in [Remote shooting].
•
When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] cannot be used.
•
Automatic image transfer is interrupted while recording or playing back videos.
The transfer starts at the start of the file where it was interrupted when the
transmission restarts.
•
If the camera is turned off during image transfer, and the file sending is
interrupted, then turn on the camera to restart the sending.
– If the storage status of unsent files changes, then sending of files may no
longer be possible.
– If there are many unsent files, then sending of all files may not be possible.
•
Images recorded with the following function cannot be transferred automatically:
– Video recording
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Sync”
631
[Location Logging]
The smartphone sends its location information to the camera via Bluetooth,
and the camera performs recording while writing the acquired location
information.
Getting started:
•
Enable the GPS function on the smartphone.
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 606)
1
Enable [Location Logging] on the camera.
≥ [] [] [Bluetooth] [Location Logging] [ON]
•
The camera will enter a mode where location information can be recorded
and [ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera.
2
Record images with the camera.
•
Location information will be written to the recorded images.
Bluetooth
GPS
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Sync”
632
•
When [ ] on the recording screen appears translucent, location information
cannot be acquired, therefore data cannot be written.
Smartphone GPS positioning may not be possible if the smartphone is within a
building, a bag, or similar. Move the smartphone to a position affording a wide
view of the sky to improve positioning performance.
In addition, refer to the operating instructions of your smartphone.
•
Images with location information are indicated with [ ].
•
Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the
subject when you use this function. Use at your own risk.
•
The smartphone drains its battery faster while acquiring location information.
GPS
GPS
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Sync”
633
[Remote Wakeup]
Even when the camera is turned off, the smartphone can be used to start
the camera and record images, or check the recorded images.
Getting started:
1 Connect to a smartphone using Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 606)
2 Enable [Remote Wakeup] on the camera.
•
[] [] [Bluetooth] [LUMIX Sync Settings] [Remote
Wakeup] [ON]
3 Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
4 On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
Turning On the Camera
Select [Remote shooting] in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.
•
(iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is displayed,
select [Join].
•
The camera turns on, and automatically connects using Wi-Fi.
Turning Off the Camera
1 Select [ ] in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.
2 Select [Turn off the camera].
3 Select [Power OFF].
Bluetooth
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Sync”
634
•
When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], images recorded while remote operation is
running are automatically transferred to a smartphone.
If [Power OFF] is selected while there are still unsent images, sending is
resumed when the camera is next turned on.
•
When [Remote Wakeup] has been set, the Bluetooth function continues to work
even if the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF], so the battery will drain.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Sync”
635
[Auto Clock Set]
Synchronize the clock and the time zone setting of the camera with those
of a smartphone.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 606)
Enable [Auto Clock Set] on the camera.
≥ [] [] [Bluetooth] [LUMIX Sync Settings] [Auto
Clock Set] [ON]
Bluetooth
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Using “LUMIX Sync”
636
[Camera settings copy]
This saves the camera’s settings information to the smartphone.
Saved settings information can be loaded to the camera, letting you set the
same settings on multiple cameras.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 606)
1
Select [ ] ([Others]) [ ] ([Camera settings copy])
in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.
2
Save or load settings information.
•
Read the [Help] in the “LUMIX Sync” menu for further details on how to
operate the “LUMIX Sync ”.
•
Only settings information from the same model can be loaded.
•
When transferring settings information, a Wi-Fi connection is automatically
created.
(iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
•
You can save or load the settings information of items that are the same as those
in [Save/Restore Camera Setting] under the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu. (List of
Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying: 736)
Bluetooth
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera to a PC
637
Sending Images from the Camera to a PC
Send recorded images to the PC connected with Wi-Fi.
Getting started:
•
Turn on the PC.
•
Create a destination folder for images.
•
If the workgroup of the destination PC has been changed from the standard setting,
change the corresponding setting of the camera in [PC Connection]. ([PC
Connection]: 654)
Create a Destination Folder for Images
When using Windows (Example for Windows 10)
1 Select the destination folder and then right-click.
2 Select [Properties] and then enable folder sharing.
When using Mac (Example for macOS 12.0)
1 Select the destination folder and then click the items in the following order.
[File] [Get Info]
2 Enable folder sharing.
Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10, Windows 11
Mac: macOS 12.0 to 12.7, 13.0 to 13.6, 14.1 to 14.2
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera to a PC
638
1
Select the method for sending images on the camera.
≥ [] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [New
Connection] [Send Images to PC While Recording]/[Send
Images Stored in the Camera to PC]
2
Connect the camera and PC by Wi-Fi.
≥Select [Via Network] ([Via Network]: 642) or [Direct] ([Direct]:
646), and then connect.
3
Enter the computer name of the PC you want to connect
to (for Mac, the NetBIOS name).
•
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 90)
•
Create a PC account name (up to 254 characters) and password (up to
32 characters) consisting of alphanumeric characters.
A destination folder may not be created if the account name includes
non-alphanumeric characters.
•
When the computer name (NetBIOS name for Mac) contains a space (blank
character), etc., it may not be recognized.
In that case, we recommend changing the name to one consisting only of 15 or
less alphanumeric characters.
•
Refer to the operating instructions for your PC or Help on the OS for detailed
setting procedures.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera to a PC
639
4
Select a folder for storing images.
•
Folders sorted by sent date will be created in the selected folder, and images
will be saved there.
5
Check the send settings and then press .
•
To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (Image Send Settings: 651)
6
(When [Send Images to PC While Recording] is
selected) Take pictures.
•
[ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
•
To end the connection, follow the steps below:
[] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Yes]
(When [Send Images Stored in the Camera to PC] is
selected) Select an image. (Selecting Images: 652)
•
To end the connection, select [Exit].
•
If the screen for a user account and password entry appears, enter the one you
set on your PC.
•
When the firewall of the OS, security software, etc. is enabled, connecting to the
PC may not be possible.
•
When recording, recording is prioritized so it will take time for sending to
complete.
•
If the camera is turned off, or the Wi-Fi is disconnected before sending is
completed, then sending will not restart.
•
You may not be able to delete files or use the [Playback] menu while sending.
•
When the following function is being used, [Wi-Fi Function] is not available:
– [Auto Transfer]
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Sending Images from the Camera to a PC
640
Images That Can be Sent
The images that can be sent depend on the method used for sending
them.
Images that can be sent
[Send Images to PC While Recording]
[Send Images Stored in the Camera to
PC]
JPEG/RAW JPEG/RAW/MP4(Lite)/MP4/MOV
•
Depending on the OS version, these may not be displayed correctly.
•
Sending may not be possible depending on your device.
•
It may not be possible to send images recorded with devices other than this
camera, or images edited or processed on a PC.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
641
Wi-Fi Connections
≥ [Via Network]: 642
≥ [Direct]: 646
≥ Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings: 648
≥ Fn Button Assigned with [Wi-Fi]: 650
When [New Connection] has been selected in [Wi-Fi Function] in [Wi-Fi] of
the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, select the connection method from either [Via
Network] or [Direct] to connect.
On the other hand, when you use [Select a destination from History] or
[Select a destination from Favorite], the camera connects to the selected
device with the previously-used settings.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
642
[Via Network]
Connect the camera and destination device through the wireless access
point.
Select the method for connecting to a wireless access point.
Settings: [WPS (Push-Button)]/[WPS (PIN code)]/[From List] ([WPS
(Push-Button)]: 643, [WPS (PIN code)]: 643, [From List]: 644)
•
After selecting [Via Network] once, the camera will connect to the
previously-used wireless access point.
To change the wireless access point used for connection, press [DISP.] and
change the connection destination.
•
Check the operating instructions and settings of the wireless access point.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
643
[WPS (Push-Button)]
Press the WPS button on the wireless access point to set up a connection.
Press the wireless access point WPS button until it switches to WPS
mode.
Example)
[WPS (PIN code)]
Enter a PIN code into the wireless access point to set up a connection.
1 On the camera screen, select the wireless access point you are connecting to.
2 Enter the PIN code displayed on the camera screen into the wireless access
point.
3 Press of the camera.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
644
[From List]
Searches for a wireless access point to use, and connects to this.
1 Select the wireless access point you are connecting to.
•
Press [DISP.] to run a wireless access point search again.
•
If no wireless access point is found (Connecting by Manual Input: 645)
2 (If network authentication is encrypted) Enter the encryption key.
•
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 90)
•
Confirm the encryption key of the wireless access point.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
645
Connecting by Manual Input
1 In the screen in Step 1 of “[From List]”, select [Manual Input]. ([From List]: 644)
2 Enter the SSID of the wireless access point you are connecting to, and then
select [Set].
•
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 90)
3 Select the network authentication.
[WPA3-SAE]/[WPA3/WPA2]/[WPA2-PSK]/[WPA2/WPA-PSK]
Supported encryption: [TKIP], [AES]
[No Encryption]
4 (When other than [No Encryption] is selected) Enter the encryption key and then
select [Set].
•
Check the SSID, network authentication, encryption, and encryption key of the
wireless access point you are using.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
646
[Direct]
Directly connect the camera and the destination device.
Select the method for connecting with the destination device.
[WPS Connection]
[WPS (Push-Button)]: Press the WPS button on the destination device to connect.
•
On the camera, press [DISP.] to extend the connection wait time.
[WPS (PIN code)]: Enter the PIN code into the camera, and connect.
[Manual Connection]
Search for the camera on the destination device to connect.
1 Select the network authentication.
[WPA3]/[WPA3/WPA2]
•
If [Wi-Fi Password] in [Wi-Fi Setup] is [OFF], this is not displayed if the
connected device is [Smartphone].
2 Enter the SSID and password displayed on the camera into the device.
•
If [Wi-Fi Password] in [Wi-Fi Setup] is [OFF], the password is not displayed if
the connected device is [Smartphone].
Select the SSID to establish a connection. (Connecting Without Using
Password Authentication: 614)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
647
•
Please also refer to the operating instructions for the device to be connected.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
648
Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings
Use the Wi-Fi connection history to connect using the same settings as
previously.
1
Display the Wi-Fi connection history.
≥ [] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Select a
destination from History]/[Select a destination from Favorite]
2
Select the History item to connect to.
•
Press [DISP.] to confirm details of the connection history.
Register to Favorite
You can register the Wi-Fi connection history to Favorite.
1 Display the Wi-Fi connection history.
•
[] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Select a destination
from History]
2 Select the History item to register and then press 1.
3 Enter a registration name and then select [Set].
•
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 90)
•
A maximum of 30 characters can be entered. A two-byte character is treated
as two characters.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
649
Editing Items Registered in Favorite
1 Display items registered to Favorite.
•
[] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Select a destination
from Favorite]
2 Select the History item to edit in Favorite and then press 1.
[Remove from Favorite]
[Change the Order in Favorite]
Specify the destination location of the desired item to change the display order.
[Change the Registered Name]
Enter characters to change the registered name.
•
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 90)
•
The number of items that can be saved in History is limited. Register
frequently-used connection settings to Favorite.
•
When [Reset] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu is used to reset the network
settings, the content registered in History and Favorite is deleted.
•
If the device you want to connect to (PC, etc.) is connected to a wireless access
point other than the camera, you cannot connect the device to the camera using
[Direct].
Change the Wi-Fi settings of the device you want to connect to so that the
access point to be used is set to the camera. You can also select [New
Connection] and reconnect the devices. (Sending Images from the Camera to
a PC: 637)
•
It may be difficult to connect to networks to which many devices are connected.
In these cases, connect using [New Connection].
•
When the following function is being used, [Wi-Fi Function] is not available:
– [Auto Transfer]
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Connections
650
Fn Button Assigned with [Wi-Fi]
You can perform the following operations by pressing the Fn button
assigned with [Wi-Fi] after connecting to Wi-Fi. (Fn Buttons: 488)
[Terminate the Connection]
Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
[Change the Destination]
Terminates the Wi-Fi connection, and allows you to select a different Wi-Fi connection.
[Change Settings for Sending Images]
Sets the image size, file format, and other items for sending recorded images.
(Image Send Settings: 651)
[Register the Current Destination to Favorite]
Registers the current connection destination or method so that you can easily connect
with the same connection settings next time.
[Network Address]
Displays the MAC address and IP address of the camera. ([Network Address]: 654)
•
Depending on the Wi-Fi function being used or the connection destination, you may
not be able to perform some of these operations.
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Send Settings and Selecting Images
651
Send Settings and Selecting Images
≥ Image Send Settings: 651
≥ Selecting Images: 652
Image Send Settings
Set the size, file format, and other items for sending the image to the
destination device.
1
After Wi-Fi connection, the send settings confirmation
screen will be displayed, so press [DISP.].
2
Change the send settings.
[Size]
Resize the image to send.
[Original]/[Change] ([L], [M], [S], [XS], or [VGA])
[File Format]
Sets the file format of images to send.
[MP4(Lite)]/[JPG]/[RAW]
•
This setting is possible when the destination supports the sending of RAW
images from this camera. (Images That Can be Sent: 640)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – Send Settings and Selecting Images
652
Selecting Images
When sending by [Send Images Stored in the Camera to PC], select the
images using the following procedure.
1
Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select].
2
Select the image.
[Single Select] setting
1 Press 21 to select an image.
2 Press .
[Multi Select] setting
1 Press 3421 to select an image and then press . (Repeat this)
•
To cancel the setting, press again.
2 Press [DISP.] to execute.
321
654
vr
ュリヴヱハ
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – [Wi-Fi Setup] Menu
653
[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu
This configures the settings required for the Wi-Fi function.
The settings cannot be changed when connected to Wi-Fi.
Displaying the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu.
≥ [] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup]
[Wi-Fi Frequency Bands]
This sets the frequency band used for direct connection with a smartphone.
[2.4GHz]: Connection uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band.
[5GHz]: Connection uses the 5 GHz frequency band.
•
Depending on the region, local regulations, etc. may prohibit you from using the 5
GHz frequency band outdoors. If this is the case, when outdoors, connect to the
smartphone using [2.4GHz] for the Wi-Fi connection.
[Priority of Remote Device]
This sets either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used
during remote recording. (Operation Method During Remote Recording: 623)
[Wi-Fi Password]
You can use a password to connect for enhanced security. (Connecting to a
Smartphone ([Wi-Fi connection]): 612)
Wi-Fi / Bluetooth – [Wi-Fi Setup] Menu
654
[PC Connection]
You can set the workgroup.
To send images to a PC, you need to connect to the same workgroup as the
destination PC.
(The default setting is “WORKGROUP”.)
•
To change the workgroup name, press and enter the new workgroup name.
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 90)
•
To return to the default settings, press [DISP.].
[Device Name/Password]
You can change the camera name (SSID) and password.
•
Press [DISP.] to change the device name and password.
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 90)
•
The number of characters you can enter is a maximum of 32 for the device name
and between 8 and 63 for the password.
[Wi-Fi Function Lock]
To prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-Fi function by a third party and to
protect personal information in the camera and included with images, protect the Wi-Fi
function with a password.
[Setup]: Enter any 4-digit numbers as the password.
•
How to enter characters (Entering Characters: 90)
[Cancel]: Cancel the password.
•
Once a password is set, you are required to enter it each time you use the Wi-Fi
function.
•
If you forget your password, you can use [Reset] in the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu to
reset the network settings and thereby reset the password.
[Network Address]
Displays the MAC address and IP address of the camera.
•
When the following function is being used, [Network Address] is not available:
– Tethered recording
655
Connecting to Other Devices
This chapter describes connections with other devices, for example, HDMI
devices, such as TVs, and PCs.
Connect using either the HDMI socket or the USB port on the camera.
≥ Connecting: 656
≥ Viewing on a TV: 658
≥ Importing Images to a PC: 662
≥ Storing on a Recorder: 667
≥ Tethered Recording: 668
Connecting to Other Devices – Connecting
656
Connecting
HDMI socket
Connect the camera and HDMI device (TV, etc.) with a
commercially available HDMI micro cable.
•
Use a Premium High Speed HDMI micro cable (Type D –Type A plug) with the length
less than 3 m (9.8 feet).
•
Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(Inserting these at an angle may cause deformation or malfunction)
•
Do not connect the cable to the wrong terminals. This may cause a malfunction.
Connecting to Other Devices – Connecting
657
USB port
Use a USB connection cable (commercially available) to
connect the camera to a PC or recorder.
•
Use a USB connection cable that complies with the USB standards.
Connecting to Other Devices – Viewing on a TV
658
Viewing on a TV
You can connect the camera to a TV or external monitor to view recorded
pictures and videos.
Getting started:
•
Turn off the camera and TV.
1
Connect the camera and TV with a commercially
available HDMI micro cable. (HDMI socket: 656)
2
Turn on the TV.
3
Switch the TV input to HDMI input.
4
Turn on the camera.
5
Display the playback screen.
≥Press [ ].
≥The recorded images are displayed on the camera and TV.
Connecting to Other Devices – Viewing on a TV
659
•
With the default settings, pictures are output at the optimal resolution for the
connected TV.
The output resolution can be changed in [Output Resolution(Playback)].
([Output Resolution(Playback)]: 564)
•
Depending on the aspect ratio, gray bands may be displayed on the top and
bottom or the left and right of images.
You can change the band color in [Background Color(Playback)] in [HDMI
Connection] of the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu. ([Background Color(Playback)]:
565)
•
HDMI output is not possible if you connect a USB connection cable at the same
time while [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)].
•
Change the screen mode on your TV if images are displayed with the top or
bottom cut off.
•
Please also refer to the operating instructions for the TV.
Connecting to Other Devices – Viewing on a TV
660
Using VIERA Link
VIERA Link (HDAVI Control™) is a function that allows you to use your
remote control for the Panasonic TV for easy operations when the camera
has been connected to a VIERA Link compatible device using an HDMI
micro cable for automatic linked operations.
(Not all operations are possible.)
1 Connect the camera to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link using a
commercially available HDMI micro cable. (HDMI socket: 656)
2 Turn on the camera.
3 Turn on the VIERA Link.
•
[] [] [HDMI Connection] [VIERA Link (CEC)] [ON]
4 Display the playback screen.
•
Press [ ].
•
The recorded images are displayed on the TV. (The monitor of the camera will
turn off.)
5 Operate with the remote control for the TV.
Power off link
If you turn off the TV with its remote control, the camera will also turn off.
Automatic input switching
If you turn on the camera and then press [ ], the input of the TV automatically
switches to input to which this camera is connected.
Furthermore, when the TV power is in the standby state, it turns on automatically.
(When “Power on link” on the TV is set to “Set”)
•
To use VIERA Link, you need to also configure the settings on the TV.
For the setting procedure, refer to the operating instructions for the TV.
Connecting to Other Devices – Viewing on a TV
661
•
VIERA Link is a unique Panasonic function built on an HDMI control function
using the standard HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) specification.
Linked operations with HDMI CEC compatible devices made by other companies
are not guaranteed.
•
The camera supports “VIERA Link Ver.5”. “VIERA Link Ver.5” is the standard for
Panasonic’s VIERA Link compatible devices. This standard is compatible with
Panasonic’s conventional VIERA Link devices.
•
Operation using the buttons on the camera will be limited.
Connecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC
662
Importing Images to a PC
≥ Copying Images to a PC: 663
≥ Installing Software: 666
If you connect the camera to a PC, you can copy the recorded images to
the PC.
You will need to use software that is compatible with the recorded video
format in order to play back or edit video on the PC.
You can also use software for processing and editing RAW images.
(Installing Software: 666)
Connecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC
663
Copying Images to a PC
After connecting to the PC, you can copy the recorded images by dragging
files and folders on this camera to the PC.
Getting started:
•
Turn on the camera and PC.
1
Connect the camera and PC with the USB connection
cable (commercially available). (USB port: 657)
2
Press 34 to select [PC(Storage)] and then press .
≥Windows: The drive (“LUMIX”) is displayed in [This PC].
≥Mac: The drive (“LUMIX”) is displayed on the desktop.
3
Drag the files and folders from the camera to the PC.
•
The camera can be connected to a PC running any of the following OSs which
can detect mass storage devices.
Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10, Windows 11
Mac: macOS 12.0 to 12.7, 13.0 to 13.6, 14.0 to 14.2
•
Mac:
Supported by “Final Cut Pro X”.
For details on “Final Cut Pro X”, please contact Apple Inc.
Connecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC
664
Folder Structure Inside Card
(A) The camera’s setup information
(B) Images
(C) Folder number
(D) JPG: JPEG format pictures
RW2: RAW format pictures
MP4: MP4(Lite) videos, MP4 videos
MOV: MOV videos
(E) File number
(F) Color space
P: sRGB
_: AdobeRGB
CAMSET
AD_LUMIX
DCIM
(A)
100XXXXX
PXXX0001.JPG
(B)
(D)
(E)
(F)
(C)
Connecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC
665
•
If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the camera
will be automatically connected to the PC without the [USB Mode] selection
screen being displayed. ([USB Mode]: 563)
•
Take care not to turn off the camera while images are being imported.
•
After importing of the images is completed, perform the operation to safely
remove the USB connection cable on the PC.
•
Turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection cable before removing
the card from the camera. Otherwise, the recorded data may be damaged.
Connecting to Other Devices – Importing Images to a PC
666
Installing Software
Install the software to process and edit RAW images.
SILKYPIX Developer Studio SE
This software processes and edits RAW images.
Edited images can be saved in a format (JPEG, TIFF, etc.) that can be
displayed on a PC.
Check the following site and then download and install the software:
http://www.isl.co.jp/SILKYPIX/english/p/
Operating environment
≥ Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10 (64 bit), Windows 11
Mac: macOS 10.13 to 10.15, 11, 12, 13, 14
•
For more information such as how to use “SILKYPIX Developer Studio”, refer to the
Help or the Ichikawa Soft Laboratory’s support site.
•
To download the software, your PC needs to be able to connect to the internet.
•
Supported OSs are current as of May 2024 and are subject to change.
Connecting to Other Devices – Storing on a Recorder
667
Storing on a Recorder
By connecting the camera to a Panasonic Blu-ray disc recorder or DVD
recorder, you can store the pictures and videos.
Getting started:
•
Turn on the camera and recorder.
1
Connect the camera and recorder with the USB
connection cable (commercially available). (USB port:
657)
2
Press 34 to select [PC(Storage)] and then press .
3
Operate the recorder to store the images.
•
If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the camera
will be automatically connected to the recorder without the [USB Mode] selection
screen being displayed. ([USB Mode]: 563)
•
Take care not to turn off the camera while storage is in progress.
•
Images such as 4K videos may not be supported depending on your recorder.
•
Turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection cable before removing
the card from the camera. Otherwise, the recorded data may be damaged.
•
For the storage and playback procedures, refer to the operating instructions for
the recorder.
Connecting to Other Devices – Tethered Recording
668
Tethered Recording
≥ Installing Software: 669
≥ Operating the Camera from a PC: 670
If you install the “LUMIX Tether” camera control software on your PC, you
can connect the camera to the PC via USB and then control the camera
from the PC and record while checking the live view on the PC screen
(tethered recording).
In addition, you can output via HDMI to an external monitor or TV during
tethered recording.
Connecting to Other Devices – Tethered Recording
669
Installing Software
“LUMIX Tether”
This software is for controlling the camera from a PC.
It allows you to change various settings and to record remotely and then
save the images to the PC.
Check the following site and then download and install the software:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_lumixtether.html
(English only)
Operating environment
≥ Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10 (64 bit), Windows 11
Mac: macOS 12.0 to 12.7, 13.0 to 13.6, 14.0 to 14.2
≥ Interface
USB port (SuperSpeed USB (USB 3.1))
•
Supported OSs are current as of May 2024 and are subject to change.
•
To download the software, your PC needs to be able to connect to the internet.
•
For how to operate the software, refer to the operation guide for “LUMIX Tether”.
Connecting to Other Devices – Tethered Recording
670
Operating the Camera from a PC
Getting started:
•
Turn on the camera and PC.
•
Install “LUMIX Tether ” on PC.
1
Connect the camera and PC with the USB connection
cable (commercially available). (USB port: 657)
2
Press 34 to select [PC(Tether)] and then press .
≥[ ] is displayed on the camera’s screen.
3
Use “LUMIX Tether” to operate the camera from the PC.
•
If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Tether)] in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu, the camera
will be automatically connected to the PC without the [USB Mode] selection
screen being displayed. ([USB Mode]: 563)
•
The Wi-Fi/Bluetooth functions are not available while there is a PC connection
with [PC(Tether)].
671
Materials
This chapter describes procedures to try when there is a problem and
provides information about the specifications for your reference.
≥ Digital Camera Accessory System: 672
≥ Using Optional Accessories: 673
≥ Monitor Displays: 676
≥ Message Displays: 694
≥ Troubleshooting: 698
≥ Cautions for Use: 713
≥ Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time
with the Battery: 723
≥ Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with
Cards: 728
≥ List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying:
736
≥ List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode: 758
≥ Specifications: 765
≥ Trademarks and Licenses: 784
Materials – Digital Camera Accessory System
672
Digital Camera Accessory System
(Product numbers correct as of May 2024.)
*1 Supplied with an AC adaptor, an AC cable/AC mains lead and a USB connection
cable. (Charging time: Approx. 175 min)
*2 A separately available AC adaptor and USB connection cable are required. It is
recommended to use the Panasonic AC Adaptor (DMW-AC11: optional).
*3 Supplied with an AC cable/AC mains lead and USB connection cable.
*4 Use if the attached lens interferes with the tripod head.
•
Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.
•
For lens-related optional accessories such as compatible lenses and filters, refer to
our catalogs/website, etc.
•
For the latest information on optional accessories, refer to our catalogs/website, etc.
Product name Product number
Battery Pack DMW-BLK22
Battery Charger DMW-BTC15
*1
/DMW-BTCD15
*2
AC Adaptor DMW-AC11
*3
DC Coupler DMW-DCC18
*2
LED Video Light VW-LED1
Stereo Shotgun Microphone DMW-MS2
Stereo Microphone VW-VMS10
Tripod Grip DMW-SHGR2
Tripod Adaptor DMW-TA1
*4
Materials – Using Optional Accessories
674
Tripod Grip (Optional)
Attach a Tripod Grip (DMW-SHGR2: optional) to use it as a grip for
recording while walking, a tripod, or a Shutter Remote Control.
•
Connect the grip cable to the [USB] socket on the camera.
•
Always use a genuine Panasonic Tripod Grip (DMW-SHGR2: optional).
•
Do not carry just by holding the hand strap when the camera is attached.
•
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the Tripod Grip.
Materials – Using Optional Accessories
675
DC Coupler (Optional)
Using a DC Coupler (DMW-DCC18: optional) means you do not have to
worry about the remaining battery charge.
•
A separately available AC adaptor and USB connection cable are required. It is
recommended to use the Panasonic AC Adaptor (DMW-AC11: optional).
•
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the AC Adaptor and DC
Coupler.
Materials – Monitor Displays
676
Monitor Displays
≥ Recording Screen: 676
≥ Playback Screen: 689
•
The screen is an monitor display example of when [Monitor Disp. Set] is set to
[].
Recording Screen
(1)
AWBc AWBw
2500K
White balance (White Balance (WB): 299)/
Color Temperature (Color Temperature Setting: 304)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
ISO
SS
FF
POPPOP
ISO
SS
FF
Fn3Fn3Fn3
Fn6Fn6Fn6
OFFOFFOFF
Fn4Fn4Fn4
Fn5Fn5Fn5
Fn2Fn2Fn2
AWB
BKT
AEL BKT
AFSAFS
999
ISO
100
F
3.560
24m59s24m59s
GPS
APS-C
L
FINE
RAW
+
+
1
/
3
1
1
Materials – Monitor Displays
677
White Balance Bracket, White Balance Bracket (Color
Temperature) ([More Settings] (White Balance Bracket): 248)
Adjusting the white balance (Adjusting the White Balance:
305)
AWB lock setting ([AWB Lock Setting]: 521)
Photo Style ([Photo Style]: 307)
Filter setting ([Filter Settings]: 320)/
Filter effect adjustment (Adjusting the Filter Effect: 322)
LUT View Assist ([Log View Assist]: 416)
HLG View Assist ([HLG View Assist]: 420)
Picture quality ([Picture Quality]: 110), Picture size ([Picture
Size]: 108)
Hybrid Zoom (Photo) ([Hybrid Zoom(Photo)]: 194)
Hybrid Zoom (Video) ([Hybrid Zoom(Video)]: 201)
Crop Zoom (Photo) ([Crop Zoom(Photo)]: 191)
Crop Zoom (Video) ([Crop Zoom(Video)]: 197)
Recording file format ([Rec. File Format]: 122)/
Recording quality ([Rec Quality]: 123)
Recording file format ([Rec. File Format]: 122)/
Recording quality ([Rec Quality]: 123)
59.94p
60/59.94p
Recording frame rate ([Rec Quality]: 123)/
Slow & Quick setting (Slow & Quick Video: 393)
Focus mode (Selecting the Focus Mode: 139, Record Using
MF: 183)
Focus Limiter ([Focus Limiter]: 151)
Focus Bracket ([More Settings] (Focus Bracket): 247)
AFL AF Lock (Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 290)
BKT
AWB
AWB
AWB
AWBL
EXPS
MOV
4K 420/10-L
AFS
AFC MF
AFS
BKT
Materials – Monitor Displays
678
MFL Focus ring lock ([Focus Ring Lock]: 526)
Focus Peaking ([Focus Peaking]: 188)
FULL APS-C
Image area of video ([Image Area of Video]: 136)
AF mode (Selecting the AF Mode: 159)
AF detection setting (Automatic Detection: 162)
Drive mode (Selecting the Drive Mode: 205)
Connected to Wi-Fi (Checking operation of the Wi-Fi and
Bluetooth functions: 588)
Connected to Bluetooth (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 606)
GPS Location logging ([Location Logging]: 631)
Image stabilizer (Image Stabilizer: 255)
Camera shake alert (Using the Image Stabilizer: 257)
Materials – Monitor Displays
679
(2)
(3)
Self-timer (Recording Using the Self-timer: 236)
Silent mode ([Silent Mode]: 249)
APS-C Image area of video ([Image Area of Video]: 136)
Anamorphic Desqueeze Display ([Anamorphic Desqueeze
Display]: 423)
Overlay indication ([Sheer Overlay]: 542)
LUT View Assist ([Log View Assist]: 416)
Color shading compensation ([Color Shading Compensation]:
335)
Built-in microphone, External microphone ([Sound Rec Level
Disp.]: 361, External Microphones (Optional): 368)
Sound recording quality ([Sound Rec Quality]: 365)
Sound recording level limiter ([Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 366)
Mute ([Mute Sound Input]: 362)
Sound recording level ([Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 361)
Exposure meter ([Expo.Meter]: 541)
Materials – Monitor Displays
680
(4)
(5)
Histogram ([Histogram]: 536)
AF area (AF Area Operations: 177)
Spot metering target ([Metering Mode]: 267)
Center marker ([Center Marker]: 547)
Self-timer (Recording Using the Self-timer: 236)
Operation lock ([Operation Lock Setup]: 531)
24m59s Elapsed recording time (Basic Video Operations: 113)
Time code (Time Code: 373)
Image being sent ([Auto Transfer]: 629)
¥
Focus (turns green) (Basic Picture Operations: 103)/
Recording state (turns red) (High Resolution mode: 215,
Basic Video Operations: 113)
Focus (in low light AF situations) (Low illumination AF: 143)
Focus (Starlight AF) (Starlight AF: 143)
Recording mode (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
Program Shift (Program Shift: 271)
LOW
STAR
Materials – Monitor Displays
681
Metering mode ([Metering Mode]: 267)
AE Lock (Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 290)
60 Shutter speed (Basic Picture Operations: 103)
F3.5 Aperture value (Basic Picture Operations: 103)
Aperture Bracket ([More Settings] (Aperture Bracket): 246)
Exposure compensation value (Exposure Compensation:
286)
Exposure Bracket ([More Settings] (Exposure Bracket): 245)
Manual Exposure Assist (Manual Exposure Assist: 281)
ISO sensitivity (ISO Sensitivity: 292)/
Dual Native ISO setting ([Dual Native ISO Setting]: 296)
Card access indication (turns red) (Basic Video Operations:
113)
No card
Card full
999
Number of pictures that can be taken (Number of Pictures
That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards: 728)
r20
Number of pictures that can be taken continuously (Number of
Pictures That Can Be Taken Continuously: 212)
24m59s Video recording time (Video Recording Time: 729)
Battery indication (Power Indications: 46)
Power supply (Using the Camera While Supplying It with
Power (Supplying Power): 45)
AE
A
E
L
F3.5
BKT
BKT
+
1
/
3
ISO
100
Materials – Monitor Displays
682
(6)
Touch Tab ([Touch Settings]: 530)
Temperature rise warning icon (Recording: 699,Wi-Fi
Function: 707)
Fn button (Use [Fn2] to [Fn6] (Touch Icons): 501)
Crop Zoom (Photo) ([Crop Zoom(Photo)]: 191)/
Crop Zoom (Video) ([Crop Zoom(Video)]: 197)
Touch AF, Touch Shutter (Touch AF/Touch Shutter: 97)
Exposure compensation (Exposure Compensation: 286)
Touch AE (Touch AE: 100)
Focus Peaking ([Focus Peaking]: 188)
Fn2
AE
Materials – Monitor Displays
683
(Setting a Filter with Touch Operation: 323)// (Operations During
Video Recording: 345)
Filter effect adjustment (Adjusting the Filter Effect: 322)
Filter on/off (Setting a Filter with Touch Operation: 323)
EXPS Filter setting ([Filter Settings]: 320)
F Aperture value (Operations During Video Recording: 345)
SS Shutter speed (Operations During Video Recording: 345)
Exposure compensation (Operations During Video Recording:
345)
ISO ISO sensitivity (Operations During Video Recording: 345)
Sound recording level adjustment (Operations During Video
Recording: 345)
Slow & Quick setting (Operations During Video Recording:
345)
Materials – Monitor Displays
684
Control Panel
(1)
(2)
Recording mode (Selecting the Recording Mode: 70)
1/60 Shutter speed (Basic Picture Operations: 103)
F3.5 Aperture value (Basic Picture Operations: 103)
Battery indication (Power Indications: 46)/
Power supply (Using the Camera While Supplying It with
Power (Supplying Power): 45)
ISO sensitivity (ISO Sensitivity: 292)/
Dual Native ISO setting ([Dual Native ISO Setting]: 296)
Exposure compensation value (Exposure Compensation:
286)/
Manual Exposure Assist (Manual Exposure Assist: 281)
F3.5
1/60
999
AWB
Fn
0
0
ISO
100
AFS
FINE
3:2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
ISO
100
0
0
Materials – Monitor Displays
685
(3)
Drive mode (Selecting the Drive Mode: 205)
Focus mode (Selecting the Focus Mode: 139, Record Using
MF: 183)
AF mode (Selecting the AF Mode: 159)
FINE Picture quality ([Picture Quality]: 110)
APS-C
Image area of video ([Image Area of Video]: 136)/
Recording file format ([Rec. File Format]: 122)/
Recording quality ([Rec Quality]: 123)
30fps
Picture size/Aspect ratio ([Picture Size]: 108)
Slow & Quick setting (Slow & Quick Video: 393)
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection state (Checking operation of the
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions: 588)
Fn button settings (Fn Buttons: 488)
AFS
L
3:2
Fn
Materials – Monitor Displays
686
(4)
Photo Style ([Photo Style]: 307)
AWB White balance (White Balance (WB): 299)
i.Dynamic Range ([i.Dynamic Range]: 289)
Metering mode ([Metering Mode]: 267)
No card
Card full
999
Number of pictures that can be taken (Number of Pictures
That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards: 728)
r20
Number of pictures that can be taken continuously (Number of
Pictures That Can Be Taken Continuously: 212)
R24m59s Video recording time (Video Recording Time: 729)
---- No card
Materials – Monitor Displays
687
Control Panel (Creative Video Mode/Slow & Quick Mode)
(1)
(2)
Frame rate ([Rec Quality]: 123)/
Slow & Quick setting (Slow & Quick Video: 393)
Shutter speed (Shutter-Priority AE Mode: 276)
Aperture value (Aperture-Priority AE Mode: 273)
Exposure mode (Setting the Exposure for Recording Videos:
343)
Exposure compensation value (Exposure Compensation:
286)/
Manual Exposure Assist (Manual Exposure Assist: 281)
Image area of video ([Image Area of Video]: 136)
Time code (Time Code: 373)
Recording state (Screen Displays While Video Recording:
115)
FULL
FPS
30
F3.5
1/60
100
AWB
IRISSHUTTER
ISO WBPHOTO STYLE
TC
DF
00:00:00:00
REC
1
1
3
4K 29.97
p
420/10-L
MOV
24m59s
AUTO
CH1
-2
-36 -12 -6-24 0
CH2
-6
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
(5)
OFF
48kHz/24bit
FPS
60
SHUTTER
1/60
IRIS
F3.5
00:00:00:00
TC
DF
REC
Materials – Monitor Displays
688
(3)
(4)
(5)
Recording file format ([Rec. File Format]: 122)/
Recording quality ([Rec Quality]: 123)
Video recording time (Video Recording Time: 729)
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection state (Checking operation of the
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions: 588)
Battery indication (Power Indications: 46)/
Power supply (Using the Camera While Supplying It with
Power (Supplying Power): 45)
Built-in microphone, External microphone ([Sound Rec Level
Disp.]: 361, External Microphones (Optional): 368)
Sound recording quality ([Sound Rec Quality]: 365)
Sound recording level limiter ([Sound Rec Level Limiter]: 366)
Mute ([Mute Sound Input]: 362)
Sound recording level ([Sound Rec Level Disp.]: 361)
ISO sensitivity (ISO Sensitivity: 292)/
Dual Native ISO setting ([Dual Native ISO Setting]: 296)
Photo Style ([Photo Style]: 307)/
LUT View Assist ([Log View Assist]: 416)/
HLG View Assist ([HLG View Assist]: 420)
White balance (White Balance (WB): 299)
4K 29.97
p
420/10-L
MOV
24
m
59
s
100
ISO
AUTO
Materials – Monitor Displays
689
Playback Screen
(1)
Playback mode ([Playback Mode]: 479)
Recording date and time (Setting the Clock (When Turning On
for the First Time): 63)
¿3 Rating ([Rating]: 483)
Video playback (Playing Back Videos: 446)
Protected picture ([Protect]: 483)
GPS Location logging ([Location Logging]: 631)
Obtaining information
2024.12.1 10:00 100-0001 1/999
8m30s
ISO
100F3.560
±
0
3
GPS
L
FINE
(4)
(1)
(5)
(2)
(3)
2024.12. 1 10:00
Materials – Monitor Displays
690
(2)
100-0001 Folder/file number ([Folder / File Settings]: 556)
1/999 Image number/Total number of images
Number of group images/
Number of files
8m30s Video recording time (Playing Back Videos: 446)
Slow & Quick video (Slow & Quick Video: 393)
LUT View Assist ([Log View Assist]: 416)
HLG View Assist ([HLG View Assist]: 420)
SLF
ILOHV
XX
s
XX
m
XX
s
Materials – Monitor Displays
691
(3)
(4)
(5)
Playback (video) (Playing Back Videos: 446)
Group images (Group Images: 461)
Time code (Time Code: 373)
Sound recording quality ([Sound Rec Quality]: 365)
Recording file format ([Rec. File Format]: 122)/
Recording quality ([Rec Quality]: 123)
59.94p
60/59.94p
Frame rate ([Rec Quality]: 123)/
Slow & Quick setting (Slow & Quick Video: 393)
FULL APS-C
Image area of video ([Image Area of Video]: 136)
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection state (Checking operation of the
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions: 588)
Silent mode ([Silent Mode]: 249)
Recording information
Battery indication (Power Indications: 46)
Power supply (Using the Camera While Supplying It with
Power (Supplying Power): 45)
MOV
4K 420/10-L
Materials – Monitor Displays
692
Detailed information display
(1) Recording date and time (Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First
Time): 63)
(2) Folder/file number ([Folder / File Settings]: 556)
(3) Recording information (basic)
(4) Recording information (advanced)
Histogram display
100
100-0001
ISOISO
0
F3.5
60
2024.12. 1 10:00
s
RGB
1/5
FINE
AFS
5500
0
STD.
L
3:2
1
(4)(3)(2)(1)
2/5
R
Y
B
G
100
100-0001
ISOISO
0
F3.5
60
2024.12. 1 10:00
Materials – Monitor Displays
693
Photo Style display
White balance display
Lens information display
(5) The focal length corresponding to the angle of view when using a full-frame lens
with the [Aspect Ratio] set to [3:2]
3/5
100
100-0001
ISOISO
0
F3.5
60
2024.12. 1 10:00
100
100-0001
ISOISO
0
F3.5
60
2024.12. 1 10:00
4/5
5500K
1
G
M
AB
5/5
100
100-0001
ISOISO
0
F3.5
60
2024.12. 1 10:00
(5)
Materials – Message Displays
694
Message Displays
Meanings of main messages displayed on the camera screen, and
response methods.
Card
[Memory Card Error]/[Format this card?]
•
It is a format that cannot be used with the camera.
Either insert another card, or back up any necessary data before formatting.
([Card Format]: 555)
[Memory Card Error]/[This memory card cannot be used]
•
Use a card compatible with the camera. (Memory Cards That Can Be Used: 23)
[Insert memory card again.]/[Try another card]
•
Unable to access the card. Reinsert the card.
•
Insert a different card.
[Read Error]/[Write Error]/[Please check the card]
•
Failure to read or write data.
Turn off the camera, reinsert the card, and then turn it on again.
•
The card may be broken.
•
Insert a different card.
Materials – Message Displays
695
[Recording was cancelled due to the limitation of the writing
speed of the card]
•
The card does not meet the writing speed requirements for recording.
Use a card of a supported Speed Class. (SD Cards That Can Be Used with This
Camera: 24)
•
If the recording stops even when you are using a card that meets the specified
Speed Class rating, the data writing speed of the card is getting slow.
We recommend backing up data, and formatting. ([Card Format]: 555)
Materials – Message Displays
696
Lens
[The lens is not attached properly. Do not push lens release button
while lens is attached.]
•
Remove the lens once, and then attach it again without pressing the lens release
button. (Attaching a Lens: 54)
Turn on the camera again, and if it is still displaying, contact the dealer.
[Lens attachment failed. Please make sure the lens is attached
correctly.]
•
Remove the lens from the camera body and gently wipe the contacts on the lens and
the camera body using a dry cotton swab.
Attach the lens, turn on the camera again, and if it is still displaying, contact the
dealer.
Battery
[This battery cannot be used]
•
Use a genuine Panasonic battery.
If this message is displayed even when a genuine Panasonic battery is used, contact
the dealer.
•
If the terminal of the battery is dirty, remove the dirt and dust from the terminal.
[The life span of this battery is starting to decline and should be
considered for replacement. To maintain reliability refrain from
using this battery.]
•
The battery has deteriorated. Try not to use that battery.
Materials – Message Displays
697
Others
[Some pictures cannot be deleted]/[This picture cannot be
deleted]
•
Images that do not comply with the DCF standard cannot be deleted.
Back up any necessary data before formatting the card. ([Card Format]: 555)
[A folder cannot be created]
•
The maximum number of folder numbers has been reached, so new folders cannot
be created.
After formatting the card, execute [File Number Reset] in the [Setup] ([Card/File])
menu. ([File Number Reset]: 558)
[Please turn camera off and then on again]/[System Error]
•
Turn off and on the camera.
If the message is displayed even when doing this several times, contact the dealer.
Materials – Troubleshooting
698
Troubleshooting
≥ Power, Battery: 698
≥ Recording: 699
≥ Video: 704
≥ Playback: 705
≥ Monitor: 706
≥ Wi-Fi Function: 707
≥ TV, PC: 711
≥ Others: 712
First, try out the following procedures.
If the problem is not resolved, it may be improved by selecting
[Reset] ([Reset]: 89) on the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu.
Power, Battery
The camera turns off automatically.
•
[Power Save Mode] is enabled. ([Power Save Mode]: 48)
The battery becomes flat too quickly.
•
When connected to Wi-Fi, the battery drains quickly.
Turn the camera off frequently such as by using [Power Save Mode] ([Power Save
Mode]: 48).
•
When [Continuous AF] is set to [MODE2], the battery drains faster. Battery
consumption can be reduced by setting to [MODE1] or [OFF]. ([Continuous AF]:
349)
Materials – Troubleshooting
699
Recording
Recording stops before finishing. Cannot record. Cannot use
some functions.
•
The temperature of the camera rises more readily in the following circumstances:
when the ambient temperature is high, during continuous use such as when
recording high-definition video or outputting via HDMI. When the temperature of the
camera rises, [ ] appears blinking on the screen. If you continue to use the
camera, a message indicating that the camera cannot be used is displayed on the
screen and some functions, such as recording and HDMI output, will be stopped.
Wait for the camera to cool down and for the message indicating that the camera
can be used again. When the message indicating that it can be used again is
displayed, turn the camera off then on again.
•
If you continue to use the camera even after some functions have been stopped,
depending on the ambient temperature and the operating status, the temperature of
the camera may not cool down and the power may be turned off automatically.
Cannot record images. The shutter will not operate immediately
when the shutter button is pressed.
•
If [Focus/Shutter Priority] is set to [FOCUS], then recording will not take place until
focus is achieved. ([Focus/Shutter Priority]: 524)
The recorded image is whitish.
•
Images may look whitish when the lens or image sensor gets dirty with fingerprints or
similar.
If the lens is dirty, turn the camera off, then wipe the lens surface with a soft, dry
cloth.
For information about how to clean the image sensor (Dirt on the Image Sensor:
714)
Materials – Troubleshooting
700
The recorded image is too bright or dark.
•
Ensure AE Lock is not set where it is not appropriate. (Locking Focus and
Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 290)
Multiple images are recorded at once.
•
When drive mode is set to [ ] (Burst Shot), pressing and holding the shutter
button will take burst pictures. (Selecting the Drive Mode: 205)
•
When [Bracketing] is set, then pressing the shutter button records multiple images
while automatically changing the settings. (Bracket Recording: 241)
The subject is not focused properly.
•
Confirm the following details:
– Is the subject outside of the focus range?
– Is [Shutter AF] set to [OFF]? ([Shutter AF]: 527)
– Is [Focus/Shutter Priority] set to [RELEASE]? ([Focus/Shutter Priority]: 524)
– Is AF Lock (Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 290) set where it is not
appropriate?
– Is [Focus Limiter] set to [ON]? ([Focus Limiter]: 151)
– Is [AF Micro Adjustment] set? ([AF Micro Adjustment]: 155)
Cannot focus or zoom with the lens.
•
Confirm the following details:
– Is [Focus Ring Lock] set to [ON]? ([Focus Ring Lock]: 526)
Materials – Troubleshooting
701
The recorded image is blurred. The image stabilizer is not
effective.
•
The shutter speed will become slower and the image stabilizer function may not
work properly when recording in dark places.
In these cases, use a tripod and the self-timer when recording.
The recorded image looks rough. Noise appears on the picture.
•
Try the following:
– Reduce the ISO sensitivity. (ISO Sensitivity: 292)
– Increase [Noise Reduction] of [Photo Style] to the positive direction, or adjust each
item other than [Noise Reduction] to the negative direction. (Adjusting Image
Quality: 312)
•
When the camera is used continuously, the temperature inside the camera may rise
and this may cause lower image quality. We recommend turning off the camera
whenever you are not actually recording.
The subject appears distorted on the image.
•
When a moving subject is recorded, the subject may appear distorted in the picture.
This is a characteristic of the CMOS sensor that is the image sensor of the camera,
and is not a malfunction.
Materials – Troubleshooting
702
Striping or flicker may appear under lighting such as fluorescent
or LED lighting.
•
This is characteristic of CMOS sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup sensors.
This is not a malfunction.
•
Lowering the shutter speed may reduce the effect of the horizontal stripes.
•
If flicker or horizontal stripes are noticeable when recording video, this can be
mitigated by fixing the shutter speed.
Either set [Flicker Decrease (Video)] ([Flicker Decrease (Video)]: 377), or fix the
shutter speed with the [ ]/[S&Q] mode (Recording Modes Specifically for
Video (Creative Video/S&Q): 341).
•
You can make finer adjustments to shutter speed by using [Synchro Scan(Photo)] or
[Synchro Scan(Video)]. ([Synchro Scan(Photo)]: 251, [Synchro Scan(Video)]: 425)
Stripes appear in high ISO sensitivity.
•
Stripes may appear in high ISO sensitivity or depending on the lens you use.
Decrease the ISO sensitivity. (ISO Sensitivity: 292)
Materials – Troubleshooting
703
The brightness or coloring of the recorded image is different from
the actual scene.
•
When recording under lighting such as fluorescent or LED lighting, increasing the
shutter speed may introduce slight changes to brightness or coloring.
These are a result of the characteristics of the light source and do not indicate a
malfunction.
•
When recording subjects in extremely bright locations or recording under lighting
such as fluorescent, LED, mercury, or sodium lighting, the coloring or screen
brightness may change or horizontal striping may appear on the screen.
Bright spot not in subject is recorded.
•
Pixels may be missing from the image sensor.
Perform [Pixel Refresh]. ([Pixel Refresh]: 569)
Materials – Troubleshooting
704
Video
Cannot record videos.
•
Try again after either returning the [System Frequency] to the original setting or
inserting another card.
•
When using a large capacity card, you may not be able to record for a while after
turning on the camera.
In videos, abnormal clicking and buzzing sounds are recorded.
The recorded audio is very quiet.
•
Depending on the recording conditions or the lens used, the sound of aperture and
focus actions may be recorded in videos.
You can set the focus operation during video recording to [OFF] in [Continuous AF]
([Continuous AF]: 349).
•
Do not block the microphone hole during video recording.
An operation sound is recorded in a video.
•
We recommend setting the [ ]/[S&Q] mode and recording with touch operation if
you are bothered about the operation sounds during recording. (Operations
During Video Recording: 345)
Materials – Troubleshooting
705
Playback
Cannot play back. There are no recorded pictures.
•
Folders and images processed on a PC cannot be played on the camera.
•
Some images are not displayed when the [Playback Mode] is set. Set to [Normal
Play]. ([Playback Mode]: 479)
•
Videos recorded with a different [System Frequency] setting cannot be played back.
Return the [System Frequency] setting to the one you used during the recording.
([System Frequency]: 120)
Materials – Troubleshooting
706
Monitor
The monitor turns off when the camera is turned on.
•
If no operations are performed during the set time period, [Auto Monitor Off] ([Auto
Monitor Off]: 49) is activated, and the monitor turns off.
It may flicker for an instant or the brightness of the screen may
change significantly for an instant.
•
This occurs when the shutter button is pressed halfway, or when the subject
brightness changes, making the lens aperture change.
This is not a malfunction.
Materials – Troubleshooting
707
Wi-Fi Function
A Wi-Fi connection cannot be established. Radio waves get
disconnected. Wireless access point is not displayed.
General tips for using a Wi-Fi connection
•
Use within the communication range of the device to be connected.
•
Usage near devices that utilize the 2.4 GHz frequency such as microwave ovens
and cordless telephones may result in the radio wave being lost.
Use the camera at a sufficient distance from these devices.
•
When the remaining battery level is low, it may not be possible to connect to or
maintain communication with other devices.
(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)
•
If you place the camera on a metal table or shelf, the radio waves may be adversely
affected. In such cases, you may not be able to establish a connection.
Move the camera away from the metal surface.
Wireless access point
•
Confirm that the connected wireless access point can be used.
•
Confirm the radio wave conditions of the wireless access point.
– Move the camera closer to the wireless access point.
– Change the location and angle of the wireless access point.
•
Depending on the wireless access point, the radio wave may not be displayed even
though it is present.
– Turn off and then on the wireless access point.
– If the wireless channel of the wireless access point cannot be set automatically,
manually set the channel supported by the camera.
– If the wireless access point SSID is set not to broadcast, it may not be detected.
Enter the SSID, and then connect. (Connecting by Manual Input: 645)
•
Depending on the wireless access point, connection may be automatically
disconnected after specific time has passed.
Reconnect the connection again.
Materials – Troubleshooting
708
Cannot connect with a wireless access point.
•
The wireless access point information set on the camera is wrong.
Check the authentication type and encryption key. (Connecting by Manual Input:
645)
•
Radio waves from other devices may block the connection to a wireless access
point.
Check the status of other devices that are connected to the wireless access point as
well as the status of other wireless devices.
Wi-Fi connection on an iOS device fails.
•
Follow the message displayed to allow connection to the camera.
If you still cannot connect, select the SSID of the camera on the Wi-Fi setup screen
of the smartphone to connect.
If the SSID is not displayed, turn off and on the camera, then perform the Bluetooth
connection settings again.
Wi-Fi connection with a smartphone is not possible.
•
Change the access point to connect to in the smartphone Wi-Fi settings to the
camera.
When trying to connect to a PC by Wi-Fi, this does not recognize
the user name and password, and connection is not possible.
•
Depending on the version of the OS, there are two types of user account (local
account/Microsoft account).
Ensure you use the local account user name and password.
Materials – Troubleshooting
709
The PC is not recognized when I use a Wi-Fi connection. The
camera cannot be connected to the PC using the Wi-Fi function.
•
At the time of purchase, this camera is set to use a workgroup name of
“WORKGROUP”.
If you have changed the workgroup name of the PC, this will not be recognized.
In the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu, [PC Connection], change the workgroup name of the PC
to which to connect. ([PC Connection]: 654)
•
Check that the login name and password are correctly typed.
•
When the clock settings of the PC connected to the camera differs considerably from
those of the camera, the camera cannot be connected to the PC depending on the
OS.
Sending of videos/images fails midway. There are some videos/
images that cannot be sent.
•
Is the size of the image too large?
– Reduce the image size at [Size] ([Size]: 651), and then send.
– Transmit after dividing the video with [Video Divide] ([Video Divide]: 453).
•
File format of the video that can be sent differs depending on the destination.
(Images That Can be Sent: 640)
•
If sending of videos/images fails, we recommend transferring them over a USB
connection cable.
I have forgotten the password for the Wi-Fi.
•
In the [Setup] ([Setting]) menu, [Reset], reset network settings. ([Reset]: 89)
However, all information set in [Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth] will also be reset.
Materials – Troubleshooting
710
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function stops. Unusable.
•
When the temperature of the camera rises while using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function,
[ ] appears blinking on the screen. [ ] is displayed steadily if you continue to
use the camera and the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function stops. (The settings cannot be
changed either.)
You can use the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function again when the camera temperature cools
and the [ ] indicator disappears. If the setting for [Bluetooth] was [ON] before the
function stopped, the camera automatically reconnects.
Materials – Troubleshooting
711
TV, PC
The TV images are displayed with gray bands.
•
Depending on the [Aspect Ratio], gray bands may be displayed on the top and
bottom or the left and right of the images. You can change the band color in
[Background Color(Playback)] in [HDMI Connection] of the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu.
([Background Color(Playback)]: 565)
Images cannot be imported even when connected to a PC.
•
Set the [USB Mode] of the camera to [PC(Storage)]. ([USB Mode]: 563)
•
Turn the camera off and on.
Materials – Troubleshooting
712
Others
When the camera is shaken, a rattling sound is heard from the
camera.
•
The sound is caused by the in-body stabilizer. This is not a malfunction.
There is rattling noise from the lens when the camera is turned on
or off, or when the camera is swung. There is a sound from the
lens when recording.
•
This is the sound of the internal lenses moving or the aperture operating. It is not a
malfunction.
An unreadable language was selected by mistake.
•
Reselect the language from the menu using the following procedure:
[] [] [] Select desired language ([Language]: 570)
The camera becomes warm.
•
The camera surface and back of the monitor may become warm during use, but this
does not indicate a problem with performance or quality.
Materials – Cautions for Use
713
Cautions for Use
The Camera
Keep this unit as far away as possible from electromagnetic
equipment (such as microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.).
•
If you use this unit on top of or near a TV, the pictures and/or sound on this unit may
be disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation.
•
Do not use this unit near cell phones because doing so may result in noise adversely
affecting the pictures and/or sound.
•
Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures may be distorted, by strong magnetic
fields created by speakers or large motors.
•
Electromagnetic wave radiation may adversely affect this unit, disturbing the pictures
and/or sound.
•
If this unit is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops functioning
properly, turn this unit off and remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor. Then
reinsert the battery or reconnect AC adaptor and turn this unit on.
Do not use this unit near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines.
•
If you record near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures and/
or sound may be adversely affected.
Do not extend the cords or the cables.
Do not spray the camera with insecticides or volatile chemicals.
•
If the camera is sprayed with such chemicals, the body of the camera may be
damaged and the surface finish may peel off.
Do not keep products made of rubber, PVC or similar materials in
contact with the camera for a long period of time.
Materials – Cautions for Use
714
Cleaning
Before cleaning the camera, remove the battery or the DC Coupler,
and disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet. Then wipe
the camera with a dry, soft cloth.
•
When the camera is soiled badly, it can be cleaned by wiping the dirt off with a wrung
wet cloth, and then with a dry cloth.
•
Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinners, alcohol, kitchen cleansers, etc., as
there is a possibility that these can deform the surfaces of the camera, such as those
of the external case and the mount, or cause peeling of the coatings.
•
When using a chemical cloth, be sure to follow the accompanying instructions.
Dirt on the Image Sensor
If dirt gets inside the mount when changing lenses, depending on the
recording conditions, it may adhere to the image sensor and appear on the
recorded picture.
To prevent debris or dust adhering to internal parts of the body, avoid
changing the lens in a dusty environment and always fit the body cap or a
lens when storing the camera.
Remove any dirt on the body cap before attaching it.
Dust reduction function
The camera has a dust reduction function that will blow off the dirt and dust
that have affixed to the front of the image sensor.
If the dirt is particularly noticeable, from the [Setup] ([Others]) menu,
perform [Sensor Cleaning]. ([Sensor Cleaning]: 570)
Materials – Cautions for Use
715
Removing dirt on the image sensor
The image sensor is very precise and delicate, so be sure to observe the
following when you do have to clean it yourself.
•
Blow dust off the surface of the image sensor using a commercially available blower.
Do not blow the dust off with excessive power.
•
Do not put the blower further inside than the lens mount.
The blower can scratch the image sensor if it touches.
•
Do not use any objects except a blower brush to clean the image sensor.
•
If you cannot remove the dirt or dust with the blower, consult the dealer or
Panasonic.
Monitor
•
Do not push hard on the monitor.
This may cause irregular coloration or malfunction.
•
Extremely high precision technology is employed to produce the monitor screen.
However there may be some dark or bright spots, or spots that light constantly (red,
blue, or green) on the screen.
This is not a malfunction.
Though the monitor screen parts are produced with highly controlled precision
technology, some pixels may be inactive or always lit.
The spots will not be recorded on images on a card.
Materials – Cautions for Use
716
Lens
•
When using this lens, take care not to drop, bump, or apply undue force to it.
Doing so may cause malfunction or damage to this lens and the digital
camera.
•
Do not aim the lens at the sun or strong light sources.
The concentrated light may cause fire or damage.
•
Do not allow strong light beams, such as laser light, to be directly exposed to this
camera (lens). These can destroy the image sensor and cause the camera to
malfunction.
•
Images may be affected by dust, dirt, and soiling (water, oil, fingerprints, etc.) on the
lens surface.
Before and after recording, use a blower to blow off dust and dirt from the surface of
the lens, then lightly wipe with a soft dry cloth to remove soiling.
•
When the camera is not being used, attach the lens cap and lens rear cap to prevent
dust and dirt from adhering to or entering the camera.
•
To protect the lens contact points (A), do not do the following.
These may cause a malfunction.
– Touch the lens contact points.
– Soil the lens contact points.
– Place the lens with its mount surface facing down.
•
To improve the dust and splash resistant performance of the interchangeable lens
(S-R2060/S-R28200/S-R1840), a lens mount rubber is used in the mount.
– The lens mount rubber will leave scuff marks on the digital camera mount, but this
does not impact performance.
– To replace the lens mount rubber, contact Panasonic.
(A)
Materials – Cautions for Use
717
Battery
The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery.
It is highly sensitive to temperature and humidity, and the effect on
performance increases as the temperature rises or drops.
Do not let the battery terminals (B) become soiled.
•
Wipe with a dry cloth if they become soiled.
Always remove the battery after use.
•
Place the removed battery in a plastic bag, etc., and keep away from metallic objects
(clips, etc.) for storage or transport.
If you drop the battery accidentally, check to see if the body of the
battery and the contacts are deformed.
•
Damage to the camera will result if a battery with deformed contacts is inserted into
the camera.
Dispose of unusable battery.
•
The battery has a limited life.
•
Do not throw the battery into fire because it may cause an explosion.
Do not allow battery terminals to come into contact with metal objects
(such as necklaces, hairpins, etc.).
•
This can cause short-circuiting or heat generation and you may be badly burned if
you touch a battery.
(B)
Materials – Cautions for Use
718
Card
Do not leave the card in areas with high temperatures, direct sunlight,
or areas prone to electromagnetic waves and static.
Do not bend or drop the card.
Do not subject the card to strong vibration.
•
Otherwise, the card and recorded data may be damaged.
•
Put the card in the card case or the storage bag after use and when storing or
carrying the card.
•
Do not allow dirt, water or other foreign objects to get into the contacts on the card.
Additionally, do not touch the contacts with your hands.
Materials – Cautions for Use
719
Personal Information
Personal information is stored within the camera and in recorded images.
We recommend that you enhance security by setting a Wi-Fi password and
Wi-Fi function lock to protect personal information. ([Wi-Fi Setup] Menu:
653)
•
Images may contain information that can be used to identify the user, such as
recording dates and times, and location information.
Disclaimer
•
Information including personal information may be altered or vanish due to
erroneous operation, effect of static electricity, accident, malfunction, repair, or other
handlings.
Please note in advance that Panasonic is not liable in any way for any direct or
indirect damage from the alteration or vanishing of information or personal
information.
When requesting a repair or transferring/disposing of the camera
•
After making a copy of personal information, be sure to delete information, including
personal information, such as wireless LAN connection settings that you have
registered or saved within the camera with [Reset] ([Reset]: 89).
•
Reset the settings to protect the personal information. ([Reset]: 89)
•
Remove the card from the camera.
•
Settings may return to factory default when camera is repaired.
•
Please contact the dealer where you purchased the camera or Panasonic if above
operations are not possible due to malfunction.
Materials – Cautions for Use
720
Points to remember when disposing of/transferring the memory card
Format or delete using the camera or a PC will only modify the file management
information, so it will not delete the data in the card completely.
We recommend physically destroying the card or using commercially available PC
data deletion software to delete the card data completely when disposing of/
transferring the card.
You are responsible for handling of data on cards.
When Not Using the Camera for a Long Period of Time
•
Ensure you remove the battery and card from the camera.
If the battery is left in the camera, it may over-discharge, and be rendered unusable
even after charging.
•
Store the battery in a cool and dry place with a relatively stable temperature.
(Recommended temperature: 15 oC to 25 oC (59 oF to 77 oF); recommended
humidity: 40 %RH to 60 %RH)
•
If storing for a long period of time, it is recommended that the battery be charged
once per year, fully drained in the camera, then removed from the camera and then
stored again.
•
We recommend storing the camera with a desiccant (silica gel) when you keep it in a
closet or a cabinet.
•
Check all the parts before recording when you have not used the camera for a long
period of time.
Image Data
•
Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to
inappropriate handling.
Panasonic will not be liable for any damage caused due to loss of recorded data.
Materials – Cautions for Use
721
Tripod
•
Make sure the tripod is stable when the camera is attached to it.
•
When using a tripod, removal of the battery may not be possible.
•
Care is required because tightening the screw excessively may damage the camera,
or cause the rating label to come off.
•
Depending on the type of tripod you are using, the lens may interfere with the tripod
head if the lens you are using has a large diameter.
Attempting to tighten the tripod screws in this case may cause damage to the
camera or the lens.
We recommend using the Tripod Adaptor (DMW-TA1: optional).
•
Please also refer to the operating instructions for the tripod.
Shoulder Strap
•
If you attach a heavy interchangeable lens to the camera body, do not carry the
camera by the shoulder strap.
Hold the camera and the lens when carrying them.
Materials – Cautions for Use
722
Wi-Fi Function
Use the camera as a wireless LAN device.
When using devices or computer systems that require more reliable security than
wireless LAN devices, ensure that the appropriate measures are taken for safety
designs and defects for the systems used.
Panasonic will not take any responsibility for any damage that arises when using the
camera for any purpose other than as a wireless LAN device.
Use of the Wi-Fi function of the camera is presumed to be in
countries where it is sold.
There is the risk that the camera violates the radio wave regulations if used in
countries other than those where it is sold, and Panasonic takes no responsibility for
any violations.
There is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be
intercepted.
Please note that there is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be
intercepted by a third party.
Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity
or interference.
•
Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or interference,
such as near microwave ovens.
These may cause the interruption of the radio waves.
•
Using the camera near devices such as microwave ovens or cordless telephones
that use the 2.4 GHz radio wave band may cause a decrease in performance in both
devices.
Do not connect to the wireless network you are not authorized to use.
When using Wi-Fi, wireless networks (SSID) that you are not allowed to use may be
displayed, but you should not connect to these as it may be viewed as unauthorized
access.
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery
723
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and
Available Recording Time with the Battery
Listed below are the numbers of pictures that can be taken and the time
lengths available for recording when the supplied battery is being used.
•
The number of pictures that can be taken is according to the CIPA (Camera &
Imaging Products Association) standards.
•
Using a Nextorage SDXC memory card.
•
The values listed are approximate.
Recording Pictures (When Using the Monitor)
When the interchangeable lens (S-R2060) is used
When the interchangeable lens (S-R28200) is used
When the interchangeable lens (S-R1840) is used
Number of pictures that can be taken 470
Number of pictures that can be taken 430
Number of pictures that can be taken 450
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery
724
Recording Videos (When Using the Monitor)
When the interchangeable lens (S-R2060) is used
[Rec. File
Format]
[Rec Quality]
Continuous available
recording time
(minutes)
Actual available
recording time
(minutes)
[Image Area of Video] [Image Area of Video]
[FULL]
[APS-C]
[FULL]
[APS-C]
[MP4(Lite)]
[3.8K/10bit/50M/30p]
[3.8K/10bit/50M/25p]
100 120 120 50 60 60
[MP4]
[4K/10bit/100M/60p]
[4K/10bit/100M/50p]
100 100 50 50
[4K/8bit/100M/30p]
[4K/8bit/100M/25p]
120 110 110 60 55 55
[FHD/8bit/20M/30p]
[FHD/8bit/20M/25p]
120 120 130 60 60 65
[MOV]
[6K/30p/420/10-L] (3:2)
[6K/25p/420/10-L] (3:2)
90 45
[4K/30p/420/10-L]
[4K/25p/420/10-L]
110 110 110 55 55 55
[FHD/30p/420/10-L]
[FHD/25p/420/10-L]
120 110 130 60 55 65
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery
725
When the interchangeable lens (S-R28200) is used
[Rec. File
Format]
[Rec Quality]
Continuous available
recording time
(minutes)
Actual available
recording time
(minutes)
[Image Area of Video] [Image Area of Video]
[FULL]
[APS-C]
[FULL]
[APS-C]
[MP4(Lite)]
[3.8K/10bit/50M/30p]
[3.8K/10bit/50M/25p]
100 110 110 50 55 55
[MP4]
[4K/10bit/100M/60p]
[4K/10bit/100M/50p]
100 100 50 50
[4K/8bit/100M/30p]
[4K/8bit/100M/25p]
110 110 110 55 55 55
[FHD/8bit/20M/30p]
[FHD/8bit/20M/25p]
120 110 120 60 55 60
[MOV]
[6K/30p/420/10-L] (3:2)
[6K/25p/420/10-L] (3:2)
80 40
[4K/30p/420/10-L]
[4K/25p/420/10-L]
110 100 100 55 50 50
[FHD/30p/420/10-L]
[FHD/25p/420/10-L]
120 110 120 60 55 60
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery
726
When the interchangeable lens (S-R1840) is used
•
Actual available recording time is the time available for recording when repeating
actions such as turning the camera on and off, starting/stopping recording, etc.
[Rec. File
Format]
[Rec Quality]
Continuous available
recording time
(minutes)
Actual available
recording time
(minutes)
[Image Area of Video] [Image Area of Video]
[FULL]
[APS-C]
[FULL]
[APS-C]
[MP4(Lite)]
[3.8K/10bit/50M/30p]
[3.8K/10bit/50M/25p]
100 110 110 50 55 55
[MP4]
[4K/10bit/100M/60p]
[4K/10bit/100M/50p]
100 100 50 50
[4K/8bit/100M/30p]
[4K/8bit/100M/25p]
110 110 110 55 55 55
[FHD/8bit/20M/30p]
[FHD/8bit/20M/25p]
120 110 130 60 55 65
[MOV]
[6K/30p/420/10-L] (3:2)
[6K/25p/420/10-L] (3:2)
90 45
[4K/30p/420/10-L]
[4K/25p/420/10-L]
110 110 110 55 55 55
[FHD/30p/420/10-L]
[FHD/25p/420/10-L]
120 110 120 60 55 60
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Available Recording Time with the Battery
727
Playback (When Using the Monitor)
When the interchangeable lens (S-R2060) is used
When the interchangeable lens (S-R28200) is used
When the interchangeable lens (S-R1840) is used
Playback time (minutes) 270
Playback time (minutes) 250
Playback time (minutes) 260
•
The number of pictures that can be taken and the available recording time vary
depending on the surrounding environment and the usage conditions.
For example, these will reduce in the following case:
– In low-temperature environments, such as on ski slopes.
•
If the usage duration drops significantly even when the battery is fully charged,
then the battery is at the end of its service life.
Replace with a new battery.
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards
728
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and
Video Recording Time with Cards
Listed below are the numbers of pictures and the time lengths of videos
that can be recorded on a card.
•
Using a Nextorage SDXC memory card.
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken
•
The listed values are a guide to the minimum number of pictures to be taken.
This may vary depending on the recorded subject.
•
[Aspect Ratio]: [3:2]; [Picture Quality]: [FINE]
•
[Aspect Ratio]: [3:2]; [Picture Quality]: [RAW+FINE]
[Picture Size]
Card capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB
[L] (24M) 4290 8640 17190 33720
[M] (12M) 7870 15840 31050 60920
[S] (6M) 13890 27960 53480 104920
[XS] (2.5M) 24850 50030 87500 171670
[Picture Size]
Card capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB
[L] (24M) 830 1690 3410 6690
[M] (12M) 920 1850 3740 7340
[S] (6M) 970 1950 3940 7730
[XS] (2.5M) 1000 2010 4060 7960
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards
729
Video Recording Time
•
“h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second.
•
Video recording time is the total time of all the videos which have been recorded.
•
The values listed are approximate.
•
[Rec. File Format]: [MP4(Lite)]
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB
[3.8K/10bit/50M/30p] 2h40m 5h25m 11h05m 21h50m
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB
[3.8K/10bit/50M/25p] 2h40m 5h25m 11h05m 21h50m
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards
730
•
[Rec. File Format]: [MP4]
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB
[4K/10bit/100M/60p]
[4K/8bit/100M/30p]
[4K/8bit/100M/24p]
1h20m 2h40m 5h30m 10h55m
[4K/10bit/72M/30p]
[4K/10bit/72M/24p]
1h50m 3h45m 7h45m 15h10m
[FHD/8bit/28M/60p] 4h45m 9h40m 19h45m 38h50m
[FHD/8bit/20M/30p] 6h25m 12h55m 26h20m 51h45m
[FHD/8bit/24M/24p] 5h35m 11h20m 23h00m 45h20m
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB
[4K/10bit/100M/50p]
[4K/8bit/100M/25p]
1h20m 2h40m 5h30m 10h55m
[4K/10bit/72M/25p] 1h50m 3h45m 7h45m 15h10m
[FHD/8bit/28M/50p] 4h45m 9h40m 19h45m 38h50m
[FHD/8bit/20M/25p] 6h25m 12h55m 26h20m 51h45m
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards
731
•
[Rec. File Format]: [MOV]
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB
[6K/30p/420/10-L] (3:2)
[6K/24p/420/10-L] (3:2)
[6K/30p/420/10-L] (17:9)
[6K/24p/420/10-L] (17:9)
[5.9K/30p/420/10-L]
[5.9K/24p/420/10-L]
[3.3K/48p/422/10-L]
[3.3K/48p/420/10-L]
[C4K/60p/422/10-L]
[C4K/60p/420/10-L]
[C4K/48p/422/10-L]
[C4K/48p/420/10-L]
[4K/60p/422/10-L]
[4K/60p/420/10-L]
[4K/48p/422/10-L]
[4K/48p/420/10-L]
40m00s 1h20m 2h45m 5h25m
[3.3K/30p/422/10-L]
[3.3K/30p/420/10-L]
[3.3K/24p/422/10-L]
[3.3K/24p/420/10-L]
[C4K/30p/422/10-L]
[C4K/30p/420/10-L]
[C4K/24p/422/10-L]
[C4K/24p/420/10-L]
[4K/30p/422/10-L]
[4K/30p/420/10-L]
[4K/24p/422/10-L]
[4K/24p/420/10-L]
[FHD/120p/422/10-L]
[FHD/120p/420/10-L]
53m00s 1h45m 3h40m 7h10m
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards
732
[FHD/60p/422/10-L]
[FHD/60p/420/10-L]
[FHD/48p/422/10-L]
[FHD/48p/420/10-L]
[FHD/30p/422/10-L]
[FHD/30p/420/10-L]
[FHD/24p/422/10-L]
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]
1h15m 2h40m 5h25m 10h40m
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards
733
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB
[6K/25p/420/10-L] (3:2)
[6K/25p/420/10-L] (17:9)
[5.9K/25p/420/10-L]
[3.3K/50p/422/10-L]
[3.3K/50p/420/10-L]
[C4K/50p/422/10-L]
[C4K/50p/420/10-L]
[4K/50p/422/10-L]
[4K/50p/420/10-L]
40m00s 1h20m 2h45m 5h25m
[3.3K/25p/422/10-L]
[3.3K/25p/420/10-L]
[C4K/25p/422/10-L]
[C4K/25p/420/10-L]
[4K/25p/422/10-L]
[4K/25p/420/10-L]
[FHD/100p/422/10-L]
[FHD/100p/420/10-L]
53m00s 1h45m 3h40m 7h10m
[FHD/50p/422/10-L]
[FHD/50p/420/10-L]
[FHD/25p/422/10-L]
[FHD/25p/420/10-L]
1h15m 2h40m 5h25m 10h40m
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards
734
[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
64 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB
[6K/24p/420/10-L] (3:2)
[6K/24p/420/10-L] (17:9)
[5.9K/24p/420/10-L]
[3.3K/48p/422/10-L]
[3.3K/48p/420/10-L]
[C4K/48p/422/10-L]
[C4K/48p/420/10-L]
[4K/48p/422/10-L]
[4K/48p/420/10-L]
40m00s 1h20m 2h45m 5h25m
[3.3K/24p/422/10-L]
[3.3K/24p/420/10-L]
[C4K/24p/422/10-L]
[C4K/24p/420/10-L]
[4K/24p/422/10-L]
[4K/24p/420/10-L]
53m00s 1h45m 3h40m 7h10m
[FHD/48p/422/10-L]
[FHD/48p/420/10-L]
[FHD/24p/422/10-L]
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]
1h15m 2h40m 5h25m 10h40m
Materials – Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and Video Recording Time with Cards
735
•
The number of pictures that can be taken and the available recording time will be
shorter depending on the SD card used when recording with [Segmented File
Recording].
•
Depending on the recording conditions and the type of card, number of pictures
that can be taken, video recording time vary.
•
[9999+] is displayed on the recording screen if the remaining number of pictures
that can be taken is 10000 or more.
•
The continuous recordable time for videos is displayed on the screen.
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
736
List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/
Settings Available for Copying
: Using [Reset], the function to return to default settings
: Using [Save to Custom Mode], the function to save settings details in the Custom
mode
: Using [Save/Restore Camera Setting], the function to copy settings details
Menu Default setting
[Photo]: [Image Quality]
[Photo Style] [ ]
[Metering Mode] [ ]
[Aspect Ratio] [3:2]
[Picture Quality] [FINE]
[Picture Size] [L] (24M)
[High Resolution
Mode Setting]
[Handheld High-Res] [OFF]
[Picture Quality] [COMBINED]
[Picture Size] [XL]
[Simul Record Normal
Shot]
[ON]
[Shutter Delay] [2 SEC]
[Motion Blur Processing] [MODE1]
[Dual Native ISO Setting] [AUTO]
[ISO Sensitivity
(photo)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
Setting]
[100]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting]
[AUTO]
[Synchro Scan(Photo)] [OFF]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
737
[Min. Shutter Speed] [AUTO]
[i.Dynamic Range] [OFF]
[Vignetting Comp.] [ON]
[Color Shading Compensation] —
[Diffraction Compensation] [OFF]
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect] [OFF]
[Simultaneous Record w/o
Filter]
[OFF]
Menu Default setting
[Photo]: [Focus]
[Focus Mode] [AFS]
[AF Detection Setting] [OFF]
[Detecting Subject]
[Type of Subject] [HUMAN]
[Target Parts]
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] [Set 1]
[Focus Limiter]
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[AF Assist Light] [ON]
[Focus Peaking]
[ON] / [OFF] [ON]
[SET] —
[Focus Frame Moving Speed] [FAST]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
738
Menu Default setting
[Photo]: [Others (Photo)]
[Bracketing]
[Bracketing Type] [OFF]
[More Settings] —
[Silent Mode] [OFF]
[Hybrid
Zoom(Photo)]
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[Crop
Zoom(Photo)]
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode] [ ]
[Body(B.I.S.) /
Lens(O.I.S.)]
[]
[When to Activate] [HALF-SHUTTER]
[E-Stabilization (Video)] [OFF]
[Boost I.S. (Video)] [OFF]
[Anamorphic (Video)] [OFF]
[Lens Information] [Lens1]
[Burst Shot Setting] [H]
[Shutter Delay] [OFF]
[Time Lapse/
Animation]
[Mode] [Time Lapse Shot]
[Shooting Interval Setting] [ON]
[Start Time] [Now]
[Image Count] [1]
[Shooting Interval] [1m00s]
[Exposure Leveling] [OFF]
[Create New Folder At
Rec]
—
[Self Timer]
[ ] / [ ] / [ ] /
[ ] to [ ]
[]
[SET] —
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
739
Menu Default setting
[Video]: [Image Quality]
[Exposure Mode] [P]
[Photo Style] [ ]
[Metering Mode] [ ]
[Dual Native ISO Setting] [AUTO]
[ISO Sensitivity
(video)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
Setting]
[100]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting]
[AUTO]
[Synchro Scan(Video)] [OFF]
[Flicker Decrease (Video)] [OFF]
[Master Pedestal Level] [0]
[SS/Gain Operation] [SEC/ISO]
[i.Dynamic Range] [OFF]
[Vignetting Comp.] [ON]
[Color Shading Compensation] —
[Diffraction Compensation] [OFF]
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect] [OFF]
[Simultaneous Record w/o
Filter]
[OFF]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
740
Menu Default setting
[Video]: [Image Format]
[Rec. File Format]
When [System
Frequency] is set to
[59.94Hz (NTSC)] or
[50.00Hz (PAL)]:
[MP4(Lite)]
When [System
Frequency] is set to
[24.00Hz (CINEMA)]:
[MOV]
[Image Area of Video] [FULL]
[Rec Quality]
When [System
Frequency] is set to
[59.94Hz (NTSC)]:
[3.8K/10bit/50M/30p]
When [System
Frequency] is set to
[50.00Hz (PAL)]: [3.8K/
10bit/50M/25p]
When [System
Frequency] is set to
[24.00Hz (CINEMA)]:
[4K/24p/420/10-L]
[Rec Quality (My List)] —
[Slow & Quick Setting] [30fps]
[Time Code]
[Time Code Display] [OFF]
[Count Up] [REC RUN]
[Time Code Value] —
[Time Code Mode] [DF]
[HDMI Time Code Output] [OFF]
[Luminance Level] [64-940]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
741
Menu Default setting
[Video]: [Focus]
[Focus Mode] [AFS]
[AF Detection Setting] [OFF]
[Detecting Subject]
[Type of Subject] [HUMAN]
[Target Parts]
[AF Custom
Setting(Video)]
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[Focus Limiter]
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[Continuous AF] [MODE1]
[AF Assist Light] [ON]
[Focus Peaking]
[ON] / [OFF] [ON]
[SET] —
[Focus Frame Moving Speed] [FAST]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
742
Menu Default setting
[Video]: [Audio]
[Sound Rec Level
Disp.]
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[Mute Sound Input] [OFF]
[Sound Rec Gain Level] [STANDARD]
[Sound Rec Level Adj.] [0dB]
[Sound Rec Quality] [48kHz/24bit]
[Sound Rec Level Limiter] [ON]
[Wind Noise Canceller] [STANDARD]
[Wind Cut] [OFF]
[Mic Socket] [ ]
[Special Mic.] [STEREO]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
743
Menu Default setting
[Video]: [Others (Video)]
[Silent Mode] [OFF]
[Hybrid
Zoom(Video)]
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[Crop Zoom(Video)]
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode] [ ]
[Body(B.I.S.) /
Lens(O.I.S.)]
[]
[When to Activate] [HALF-SHUTTER]
[E-Stabilization (Video)] [OFF]
[Boost I.S. (Video)] [OFF]
[Anamorphic (Video)] [OFF]
[Lens Information] [Lens1]
[Self Timer Setting]
[Self Timer] [ ]
[Self Timer For Video] [OFF]
[Focus Transition]
[Focus Position Setting] —
[Focus Transition Speed] [M]
[Focus Transition Rec] [OFF]
[Focus Transition Wait] [OFF]
[Segmented File Recording] [OFF]
[Live Cropping] [OFF]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
744
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [Image Quality]
[Photo Style
Settings]
[Show/Hide Photo Style] —
[My Photo Style Settings] —
[Reset Photo Style] —
[LUT Library] —
[ISO Increments] [1/3 EV]
[Extended ISO] [OFF]
[Exposure Offset
Adjust.]
[Multi Metering] [±0EV]
[Center Weighted] [±0EV]
[Spot] [±0EV]
[Highlight Weighted] [±0EV]
[Face Priority In Multi Metering] [ON]
[AWB Lock Setting]
[Operation Syncs With
Shutter]
[OFF]
[Lock Hold With Fn
Button]
[ON]
[Color Space] [sRGB]
[Exposure Comp. Reset] [OFF]
[Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] [ON]
[CreativeVideo
Combined Set.]
[F/SS/ISO/Exposure
Comp.]
[]
[White Balance] [ ]
[Photo Style] [ ]
[Metering Mode] [ ]
[AF Mode] [ ]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
745
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [Focus/Shutter]
[Focus/Shutter
Priority]
[AFS] [FOCUS]
[AFC] [BALANCE]
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] [OFF]
[AF/AE Lock Hold] [OFF]
[AF+MF] [OFF]
[MF Assist]
[Focus Ring] [ON]
[AF Mode] [ON]
[MF Assist Display] [PIP]
[Max. Magnification in
"FULL"]
[20x]
[MF Guide] [ ] / [ ]
*1
[Focus Ring Lock] [OFF]
[Show/Hide AF
Mode]
[Tracking] [ON]
[Full Area AF] [ON]
[Zone(Horizontal/Vertical)] [ON]
[Zone] [ON]
[1-Area+] [ON]
[Pinpoint] [ON]
[Pinpoint AF
Setting]
[Pinpoint AF Time] [MID]
[Pinpoint AF Display] [PIP]
[AF-Point Scope
Setting]
[Keep Enlarged Display] [OFF]
[PIP Display] [PIP]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
746
*1 Default setting specifications vary depending on the country or area where the
camera was purchased.
[Shutter AF] [ON]
[Human Eye Detection Display] [ON]
[Half-Press Shutter] [OFF]
[Assign REC to Shutter Button] [ON]
[Quick AF] [OFF]
[Looped Focus Frame] [OFF]
[Enlarged Live
Display(Video)]
[Keep Enlarged Display] [ON]
[PIP Display] [PIP]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
747
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [Operation]
[Q.MENU Settings]
[Layout Style] [MODE1]
[Item Customize (Photo)] —
[Item Customize (Video)] —
[Touch Settings]
[Touch Screen]
[PARTIAL]
[Touch Tab] [OFF]
[Touch AF] [AF]
[Operation Lock
Setup]
[Cursor] [ ]
[Touch Screen] [ ]
[Dial] [ ]
[DISP. Button] [ ]
[Fn Button Set]
[Setting in REC mode] —
[Setting in PLAY mode] —
[ISO Displayed
Setting]
[Front Dial] [ ]
[Exposure Comp.
Disp. Setting]
[Cursor Buttons (Up/
Down)]
[OFF]
[Front Dial] [ ]
[Dial Set.]
[Assign Dial (F/SS)] [SET1]
[Rotation (F/SS)] [ ]
[Exposure Comp.] [OFF]
[Dial Operation Switch
Setup]
—
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
748
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [Monitor / Display (Photo)]
[Auto Review]
[Duration Time (photo)] [OFF]
[Playback Operation
Priority]
[OFF]
[Constant Preview]
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[Histogram] [OFF]
[Photo Grid Line] [OFF]
[Live View Boost]
[MODE1] / [MODE2] /
[OFF]
[OFF]
[SET] [M]
[Night Mode] [OFF]
[Monitor Display
Settings]
[Monitor Disp. Set] [ ]
[Horizontal Image
Flip(Monitor)]
[AUTO]
[Vertical Image
Flip(Monitor)]
[AUTO]
[Expo.Meter] [OFF]
[Focal Length] [ON]
[Blinking Highlights] [OFF]
[Sheer Overlay]
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[I.S. Status Scope] [OFF]
[Level Gauge] [ON]
[Luminance Spot Meter] [OFF]
[Framing Outline] [OFF]
[Show/Hide Monitor
Layout]
[Control Panel] [ON]
[Black Screen] [ON]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
749
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [Monitor / Display (Video)]
[Log View Assist]
[LUT Select(V-Log)] [Vlog_709]
[LUT View Assist
(Monitor)]
[OFF]
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] [OFF]
[HLG View Assist]
[Monitor] [MODE2]
[HDMI] [AUTO]
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] [OFF]
[Monochrome Live View] [OFF]
[Center Marker] [OFF]
[Safety Zone Marker] [OFF]
[Frame Marker]
[ON] / [OFF] [OFF]
[SET] —
[Zebra Pattern]
[ZEBRA1] / [ZEBRA2] /
[ZEBRA1+2] / [OFF]
[OFF]
[SET] —
[WFM/Vector Scope] [OFF]
[Color Bars] [SMPTE]
[Video-Priority Display] [OFF]
[Red REC Frame Indicator] [OFF]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
750
*1 The adjustment value for the focus point cannot be registered.
*2 The settings information cannot be loaded onto a camera different from the one
where the camera settings were saved.
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [IN/OUT]
[HDMI Rec Output]
[Info Display] [ON]
[HDMI Recording Control] [OFF]
[Sound Output (HDMI)] [ON]
[Enlarged Live Display] [OFF]
Menu Default setting
[Custom]: [Lens / Others]
[Lens Focus Resume] [OFF]
[Lens Fn Button Setting] [Focus Stop]
[Focus Ring
Control]
[NON-LINEAR] /
[LINEAR]
[NON-LINEAR]
[SET] [300°]
[AF Micro Adjustment] [OFF]
*1
*2
[Lens Information] [Lens1]
[Lens Info. Confirmation] [ON]
[Vertical Position Info (Video)] [ON]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
751
Menu Default setting
[Setup]: [Card/File]
[Card Format] —
[Folder / File
Settings]
[Select Folder] —
[Create a New Folder] —
[File Name Setting] [Folder Number Link]
[File Number Reset] —
[Copyright
Information]
[Artist] [OFF]
[Copyright Holder] [OFF]
[Display Copyright Info.] —
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
752
Menu Default setting
[Setup]: [Monitor / Display]
[Power Save Mode]
[Sleep Mode] [1MIN.]
[Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] [ON]
[Auto Monitor Off] [1MIN.]
[Monitor Frame Rate] [30fps]
[Monitor Settings] —
[Monitor Backlight] [AUTO]
[Level Gauge
Adjust.]
[Adjust.] —
[Level Gauge Value
Reset]
—
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
753
Menu Default setting
[Setup]: [IN/OUT]
[Beep]
[Beep Volume] [ ]
[AF Beep Volume] [ ]
[AF Beep Tone] [ ]
[Shutter Vol.] [ ]
[Shutter Tone] [ ]
[Wi-Fi] —
[Bluetooth] —
[USB]
[USB Mode]
[ ] [Select on
connection]
[USB Power Supply] [ON]
[HDMI Connection]
[Output
Resolution(Playback)]
[AUTO]
[LUT View Assist (HDMI)] [OFF]
[HLG View Assist (HDMI)] [AUTO]
[VIERA Link (CEC)] [OFF]
[Background
Color(Playback)]
[]
[Photo Luminance Level] [16-255]
[Network Connection Light] [ON]
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
754
Menu Default setting
[Setup]: [Setting]
[Save to Custom Mode] —
[Load Custom Mode] —
[Custom Mode
Settings]
[Limit No. of Custom
Mode]
[3]
[Edit Title] —
[How to Reload Custom
Mode]
—
[Select Loading Details] —
[Save/Restore
Camera Setting]
[Save] —
[Load] —
[Delete] —
[Keep Settings While
Format]
[OFF]
[Reset] —
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
755
*1 Default setting specifications vary depending on the country or area where the
camera was purchased.
*2 Depending on the country or area where the camera was purchased, this is not
displayed due to differences in specifications.
Menu Default setting
[Setup]: [Others]
[Clock Set] 0:00:00 1/1/2024
[Time Zone]
*
1
[System Frequency]
[59.94Hz (NTSC)] /
[50.00Hz (PAL)]
*1
[Pixel Refresh] —
[Sensor Cleaning] —
[Language]
*
1
[Firmware Version] —
[Approved Regulations]
*2
—
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
756
Menu Default setting
[My Menu]: [Edit My Menu]
[Add] —
[Sorting] —
[Delete] —
[Display from My Menu] [OFF]
Menu Default setting
[Playback]: [Playback Mode]
[Playback Mode] [Normal Play]
[Slide Show] —
[Rotate Disp.] [ON]
[Picture Sort] [DATE/TIME]
[Magnify from AF Point] [OFF]
[LUT View Assist (Monitor)] [OFF]
[HLG View Assist (Monitor)] [MODE2]
[Anamorphic Desqueeze Display] [OFF]
[Behavior After Video Playback] [End Playback]
Menu Default setting
[Playback]: [Process Image]
[RAW Processing] —
[Time Lapse Video] —
[Stop Motion Video] —
Materials – List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available for Copying
757
Menu Default setting
[Playback]: [Add/Delete Info.]
[Protect] —
[Rating] —
Menu Default setting
[Playback]: [Edit Image]
[Resize] —
[Rotate] —
[Video Divide] —
[Video Repair] —
Menu Default setting
[Playback]: [Others]
[Delete Confirmation] ["No" first]
[Delete All Images] —
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
758
List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each
Recording Mode
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Photo]: [Image Quality]
[Photo Style]
[Metering Mode]
[Aspect Ratio]
[Picture Quality]
[Picture Size]
[High Resolution
Mode Setting]
[Handheld High-Res]
[Picture Quality]
[Picture Size]
[Simul Record Normal
Shot]
[Shutter Delay]
[Motion Blur Processing]
[Dual Native ISO Setting]
[ISO Sensitivity
(photo)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
Setting]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting]
[Synchro Scan(Photo)]
[Min. Shutter Speed]
[i.Dynamic Range]
[Vignetting Comp.]
[Color Shading Compensation]
[Diffraction Compensation]
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect]
[Simultaneous Record w/
o Filter]
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
759
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Photo]: [Focus]
[Focus Mode]
[AF Detection Setting]
[Detecting Subject]
[Type of Subject]
[Target Parts]
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)]
[Focus Limiter]
[AF Assist Light]
[Focus Peaking]
[ON] / [OFF]
[SET]
[Focus Frame Moving Speed]
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
760
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Photo]: [Others (Photo)]
[Bracketing]
[Bracketing Type]
[More Settings]
[Silent Mode]
[Hybrid Zoom(Photo)]
[Crop Zoom(Photo)]
[Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode]
[Body(B.I.S.) /
Lens(O.I.S.)]
[When to Activate]
[E-Stabilization (Video)]
[Boost I.S. (Video)]
[Anamorphic (Video)]
[Lens Information]
[Burst Shot Setting]
[Shutter Delay]
[Time Lapse/Animation]
[Self Timer]
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
761
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Video]: [Image Quality]
[Exposure Mode]
[Photo Style]
[Metering Mode]
[Dual Native ISO Setting]
[ISO Sensitivity
(video)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
Setting]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting]
[Synchro Scan(Video)]
[Flicker Decrease (Video)]
[Master Pedestal Level]
[SS/Gain Operation]
[i.Dynamic Range]
[Vignetting Comp.]
[Color Shading Compensation]
[Diffraction Compensation]
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect]
[Simultaneous Record w/
o Filter]
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
762
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Video]: [Image Format]
[Rec. File Format]
[Image Area of Video]
[Rec Quality]
[Rec Quality (My List)]
[Slow & Quick Setting]
[Time Code]
[Time Code Display]
[Count Up]
[Time Code Value]
[Time Code Mode]
[HDMI Time Code
Output]
[Luminance Level]
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Video]: [Focus]
[Focus Mode]
[AF Detection Setting]
[Detecting Subject]
[Type of Subject]
[Target Parts]
[AF Custom
Setting(Video)]
[ON] / [OFF]
[SET]
[Focus Limiter] [OFF]
[Continuous AF]
[AF Assist Light]
[Focus Peaking]
[ON] / [OFF]
[SET]
[Focus Frame Moving Speed]
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
763
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Video]: [Audio]
[Sound Rec Level Disp.]
[Mute Sound Input]
[Sound Rec Gain Level]
[Sound Rec Level Adj.]
[Sound Rec Quality]
[Sound Rec Level Limiter]
[Wind Noise Canceller]
[Wind Cut]
[Mic Socket]
[Special Mic.]
Materials – List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
764
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Video]: [Others (Video)]
[Silent Mode]
[Hybrid Zoom(Video)]
[Crop Zoom(Video)]
[Image Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode]
[Body(B.I.S.) /
Lens(O.I.S.)]
[When to Activate]
[E-Stabilization (Video)]
[Boost I.S. (Video)]
[Anamorphic (Video)]
[Lens Information]
[Self Timer Setting]
[Self Timer]
[Self Timer For Video]
[Focus Transition]
[Segmented File Recording]
[Live Cropping]
Materials – Specifications
765
Specifications
The specifications are subject to change for performance enhancement.
Digital camera body (DC-S9):
Information for your safety
Type
≥ Type
Digital Single Lens Mirrorless camera
≥ Lens mount
Leica Camera AG L-Mount
≥ Recording media
SD memory card / SDHC memory card
*1
/ SDXC memory card
*1
*1 Compliant with UHS-I/UHS-II UHS Speed Class 3, UHS-II Video Speed Class 90
Power source:
9.0 V
Power consumption:
3.9 W (when recording with the monitor), 3.3 W (when playing back with the
monitor)
[When using the interchangeable lens (S-R2060)]
4.2 W (when recording with the monitor), 3.6 W (when playing back with the
monitor)
[When using the interchangeable lens (S-R28200)]
4.0 W (when recording with the monitor), 3.4 W (when playing back with the
monitor)
[When using the interchangeable lens (S-R1840)]
Materials – Specifications
766
Image sensor
≥ Image sensor
35 mm full-frame (35.6 mm×23.8 mm) CMOS sensor, a total of approx.
25,300,000 pixels, primary color filter
≥ Effective number of pixels of the camera
Approx. 24,200,000 pixels
Latitude
14+ stops ([V-Log])
Recording format for still images
≥ File format for still images
JPEG (DCF compliant, Exif 3.0 compliant) / RAW
≥ Picture size (pixels)
When the aspect ratio setting is [4:3]
[L]: 5328×4000 (3536×2656)
*2
[M]: 3792×2848 (2560×1920)
*2
[S]: 2688×2016 (1840×1376)
*2
[XS]: 1712×1280 (1712×1280)
*2
High Resolution mode ([XL]): 10656×8000
High Resolution mode ([LL]): 7552×5664
When the aspect ratio setting is [3:2]
[L]: 6000×4000 (3984×2656)
*2
[M]: 4272×2848 (2880×1920)
*2
[S]: 3024×2016 (2064×1376)
*2
[XS]: 1920×1280 (1920×1280)
*2
High Resolution mode ([XL]): 12000×8000
High Resolution mode ([LL]): 8496×5664
Materials – Specifications
767
When the aspect ratio setting is [16:9]
[L]: 6000×3368 (3984×2240)
*2
[M]: 4272×2400 (2880×1624)
*2
[S]: 3024×1704 (2064×1160)
*2
[XS]: 1920×1080 (1920×1080)
*2
High Resolution mode ([XL]): 12000×6736
High Resolution mode ([LL]): 8496×4784
When the aspect ratio setting is [1:1]
[L]: 4000×4000 (2656×2656)
*2
[M]: 2848×2848 (1920×1920)
*2
[S]: 2016×2016 (1376×1376)
*2
[XS]: 1280×1280 (1280×1280)
*2
High Resolution mode ([XL]): 8000×8000
High Resolution mode ([LL]): 5664×5664
When the aspect ratio setting is [65:24]
[L]: 6000×2208
When the aspect ratio setting is [2:1]
[L]: 6000×3000
*2 Figures in parentheses are for APS-C lenses
≥ Image quality for pictures
Fine / Standard / RAW+Fine / RAW+Standard / RAW
Materials – Specifications
768
Recording format for video
≥ Video format
MP4 (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.265/HEVC)
MP4 (Lite) (H.265/HEVC)
MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.265/HEVC)
≥ Audio compression format
MP4 / MP4 (Lite): AAC (2ch, 48 kHz/16 bit)
MOV: LPCM (2ch, 48 kHz/24 bit, 96 kHz/24 bit)
≥ System frequency
59.94 Hz / 50.00 Hz / 24.00 Hz
≥ Image quality for video
Refer to the “[Rec Quality]” pages for information about resolution, recording frame
rate, and other elements of recording quality. ([Rec Quality]: 123)
Materials – Specifications
769
≥ S&Q (Slow & Quick)
[System Frequency]: [59.94Hz (NTSC)]
When [Image Area of Video] is set to [FULL]
[FHD/60p/420/10-L]
*3
/ [FHD/30p/420/10-L]
*3
/ [FHD/24p/420/10-L]
*3
Frame rate: 1 fps to 180 fps
When [Image Area of Video] is set to [APS-C]
[C4K/30p/420/10-L] / [C4K/24p/420/10-L] / [4K/30p/420/10-L] / [4K/24p/420/10-L]
Frame rate: 1 fps to 60 fps
[FHD/60p/420/10-L]
*3
/ [FHD/30p/420/10-L]
*3
/ [FHD/24p/420/10-L]
*3
Frame rate: 1 fps to 180 fps
[System Frequency]: [50.00Hz (PAL)]
When [Image Area of Video] is set to [FULL]
[FHD/50p/420/10-L]
*3
/ [FHD/25p/420/10-L]
*3
Frame rate: 1 fps to 180 fps
When [Image Area of Video] is set to [APS-C]
[C4K/25p/420/10-L] / [4K/25p/420/10-L]
Frame rate: 1 fps to 60 fps
[FHD/50p/420/10-L]
*3
/ [FHD/25p/420/10-L]
*3
Frame rate: 1 fps to 180 fps
[System Frequency]: [24.00Hz (CINEMA)]
When [Image Area of Video] is set to [FULL]
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]
*3
Frame rate: 1 fps to 180 fps
When [Image Area of Video] is set to [APS-C]
[C4K/24p/420/10-L] / [4K/24p/420/10-L]
Frame rate: 1 fps to 60 fps
[FHD/24p/420/10-L]
*3
Frame rate: 1 fps to 180 fps
*3 There is cropping for 151 fps or more
Materials – Specifications
770
Monitor
≥ Type
Aspect ratio 3:2, 3.0 inches, approx. 1,840,000 dots monitor, capacitive touch screen
≥ Field of view ratio
Approx. 100 %
Materials – Specifications
771
Focus
≥ AF type
TTL type based on image detection (image plane phase detection AF/contrast AF)
≥ Focus mode
AFS / AFC / MF
≥ AF mode
Tracking
*4
/ Full Area AF
*4
/ Zone (Horizontal/Vertical)
*4
/ Zone
*4
/
1-Area+Supplementary
*4
/ 1-Area
*4
/ Pinpoint
Focus area selection is possible by touching
*4 Automatic detection (Human, Animal, Car, Motorcycle) can be switched ON/OFF
≥ AF Micro Adjustment
Yes (All / Adjust By Lens)
Exposure control
≥ Light metering system, Light metering mode
1728-zone metering, multi-metering / center-weighted metering / spot metering /
highlight-weighted metering
≥ Metering range
EV 0 to EV 18 (F2.0 lens, ISO100 conversion)
≥ Exposure
Program AE (P) / Aperture-Priority AE (A) / Shutter-Priority AE (S) / Manual
Exposure (M)
≥ Exposure compensation
1/3 EV steps, ±5 EV
≥ ISO sensitivity for still images (standard output sensitivity)
Normal: AUTO / 50
*5
/ 100 to 51200 / 102400
*5
/ 204800
*5
[V-Log]: AUTO / 320
*5
/ 640 to 51200
*5 When [Extended ISO] is set
•
Switchable between 1/3 EV and 1 EV steps
Materials – Specifications
772
≥ ISO sensitivity for video (standard output sensitivity)
Normal: AUTO / 50
*6
/ 100 to 51200 / 102400
*6
/ 204800
*6
[V-Log]: AUTO / 320
*6
/ 640 to 51200
HLG: AUTO / 400 to 51200 / 102400
*6
/ 204800
*6
*6 When [Extended ISO] is set
•
Switchable between 1/3 EV and 1 EV steps
≥ Dual Native ISO setting
Normal:
[AUTO]: Base sensitivity: 100 / 640 (dB display values are based on 100)
AUTO / 50
*7
/ 100 to 51200 / 102400
*7
/ 204800
*7
[LOW]: Base sensitivity: 100
AUTO / 50
*7
/ 100 to 800
[HIGH]: Base sensitivity: 640
AUTO / 320
*7
/ 640 to 51200 / 102400
*7
/ 204800
*7
[V-Log]:
[AUTO]: Base sensitivity: 640 / 4000 (dB display values are based on 640)
AUTO / 320
*7
/ 640 to 51200
[LOW]: Base sensitivity: 640
AUTO / 320
*7
/ 640 to 5000
[HIGH]: Base sensitivity: 4000
AUTO / 2000
*7
/ 4000 to 51200
HLG:
[AUTO]: Base sensitivity: 400 / 2500 (dB display values are based on 400)
AUTO / 400 to 51200 / 102400
*7
/ 204800
*7
[LOW]: Base sensitivity: 400
AUTO / 400 to 3200
[HIGH]: Base sensitivity: 2500
AUTO / 2500 to 51200 / 102400
*7
/ 204800
*7
Materials – Specifications
773
Cinelike D2/Cinelike V2:
[AUTO]: Base sensitivity: 200 / 1250 (dB display values are based on 200)
AUTO / 100
*7
/ 200 to 51200 / 102400
*7
/ 204800
*7
[LOW]: Base sensitivity: 200
AUTO / 100
*7
/ 200 to 1600
[HIGH]: Base sensitivity: 1250
AUTO / 640
*7
/ 1250 to 51200 / 102400
*7
/ 204800
*7
*7 When [Extended ISO] is set
Image stabilizer
≥ Image stabilizer type
Compliant with Image sensor shift type, 5-axis stabilizer, Dual I.S.2
≥ Image stabilizer effect
In-body image stabilizer: 5.0 stops
[Focal length f=60 mm, using an interchangeable lens (S-R2060)]
Dual I.S.2: 6.5 stops
[Focal length f=200 mm, using an interchangeable lens (S-E70200)]
(Based on the CIPA standard, Yaw/Pitch direction)
Materials – Specifications
774
White balance
≥ White balance mode
AWB / AWBc / AWBw / Daylight / Cloudy / Shade / Incandescent lights / Set mode 1,
2, 3, 4 / Color temperature 1, 2, 3, 4
AWB lock supported
Shutter
≥ System
Electronic shutter
≥ Shutter speed
Pictures:
Time (max. approx. 60 seconds
*8
), 60
*8
seconds to 1/8000 of a second
*8 When the ISO sensitivity is higher than 1600, the shutter speed will be faster
than 60 seconds.
Videos:
1/25
*9
of a second to 1/16000 of a second
*9 When [Exposure Mode] is set to [M] in Creative Video mode and focus mode is
set to [MF], this can be set up to 1/2 of a second
Materials – Specifications
775
Burst recording
≥ Electronic shutter
[SH] / [SH PRE]: 30 frames/second ([AFS], [AFC], [MF])
High speed: 9 frames/second ([AFS], [MF]) / 8 frames/second ([AFC])
Medium speed: 5 frames/second ([AFS], [AFC], [MF])
Low speed: 2 frames/second ([AFS], [AFC], [MF])
≥ Maximum number of frames recordable (SH burst recording)
[FINE] / [STD.] / [RAW+FINE] / [RAW+STD.] / [RAW]: 36 frames
≥ Maximum number of frames recordable (High speed, medium speed, low
speed)
High speed:
[FINE] / [STD.]: 120 frames or more
[RAW+FINE] / [RAW+STD.]: 35 frames or more
[RAW]: 55 frames or more
Medium speed:
[FINE] / [STD.]: 200 frames or more
[RAW+FINE] / [RAW+STD.]: 50 frames or more
[RAW]: 200 frames or more
Low speed:
[FINE] / [STD.]: 200 frames or more
[RAW+FINE] / [RAW+STD.]: 200 frames or more
[RAW]: 200 frames or more
•
Using a Nextorage SDXC memory card compliant with UHS-II UHS Speed Class 3
(When recording is performed under the test conditions specified by Panasonic)
Zoom
≥ Hybrid Zoom (Photo)/Crop Zoom (Photo)
Max. Approx. 3x ([Minimum Image Size]: when [XS] is selected)
≥ Hybrid Zoom (Video)/ Crop Zoom (Video)
Max. Approx. 3x
*10
([Rec Quality]: when FHD video is selected)
*10 Max. Approx. 2× when using APS-C lenses
Materials – Specifications
776
Microphone / Speaker
≥ Microphone
Stereo
≥ Speaker
Monaural
Interface
≥ USB
USB Type-C
®
, USB 10Gbps
≥ HDMI
HDMI Type D
≥ [MIC]
‰3.5 mm stereo mini jack
Mic Input (Plug-in Power) / Mic Input / Line Input (Operate the menu to switch
between these inputs)
Standard input level: −55 dBV (Mic Input) / −10 dBV (Line Input)
Splash Resistant
No
External dimensions / Mass (Weight)
≥ External dimensions
Approx. 126.0 mm (W)×73.9 mm (H)×46.7 mm (D)
(4.96″ (W)×2.91″ (H)×1.84″ (D))
(excluding the projecting parts)
≥ Mass (Weight)
Approx. 486
g
/1.08 lb (camera body, with battery and card)
Approx. 403
g
/0.89 lb (only camera body)
Materials – Specifications
777
Operating environment
≥ Recommended operating temperature
0 oC to 40 oC (32 oF to 104 oF)
≥ Permissible relative humidity
10 %RH to 80 %RH
Wi-Fi
≥ Compliance standard
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (standard wireless LAN protocol)
≥ Frequency range used (central frequency)
Specifications vary depending on the country or area where the camera was
purchased.
Refer to the “Operating Instructions / Owner’s Manual <Quick Start Guide>”
(supplied) for details.
≥ Encryption method
Wi-Fi compliant WPA™ / WPA2™ / WPA3™
≥ Access method
Infrastructure mode
Bluetooth
≥ Compliance standard
Bluetooth v5.0, Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE)
≥ Frequency range used (central frequency)
2402 MHz to 2480 MHz
The symbols on this product (including the accessories) represent the
following:
DC
Materials – Specifications
778
35 mm full-frame interchangeable Lens:
S-R2060 “LUMIX S 20-60mm F3.5-5.6”
≥ Mount
Leica Camera AG L-Mount
≥ Focal length
f=20 mm to 60 mm
≥ Lens construction
11 elements in 9 groups (2 aspherical lenses, 3 ED lenses, 1 UHR lens)
≥ Aperture type
9 diaphragm blades / circular aperture diaphragm
≥ Maximum aperture
F3.5 (Wide) to F5.6 (Tele)
≥ Minimum aperture value
F22
≥ Angle of view
94o (Wide) to 40o (Tele)
≥ In focus distance
0.15 m (0.49 feet) to ¶ (Wide to focal length 26 mm) / 0.4 m (1.31 feet) to ¶ (Tele)
(from the focus distance reference line)
≥ Maximum image magnification
0.43× (focal length 26 mm)
≥ Optical Image Stabilizer
No
Materials – Specifications
779
≥ Filter diameter
67 mm
≥ Maximum diameter
‰77.4 mm (3.0″)
≥ Overall length
Approx. 87.2 mm (3.4″) (from the tip of the lens to the base side of the lens mount)
≥ Mass (Weight)
Approx. 350
g
(0.77 lb)
≥ Dust and splash resistant
Yes
≥ Recommended operating temperature
−10 oC to 40 oC (14 oF to 104 oF)
≥ Permissible relative humidity
10 %RH to 80 %RH
Materials – Specifications
780
35 mm full-frame interchangeable Lens:
S-R28200 “LUMIX S 28-200mm F4-7.1 MACRO O.I.S.”
≥ Mount
Leica Camera AG L-Mount
≥ Focal length
f=28 mm to 200 mm
≥ Lens construction
17 elements in 13 groups (1 aspherical lens, 4 ED lenses, 1 UHR lens)
≥ Aperture type
9 diaphragm blades / circular aperture diaphragm
≥ Maximum aperture
F4 (Wide) to F7.1 (Tele)
≥ Minimum aperture value
F32 (Wide) to F45 (Tele)
≥ Angle of view
75o (Wide) to 12o (Tele)
≥ In focus distance
0.14 m (0.46 feet) to ¶ (Wide) / 0.65 m (2.13 feet) to ¶ (Tele) (from the focus
distance reference line)
≥ Maximum image magnification
0.50× (Wide)
≥ Optical Image Stabilizer
Yes
Materials – Specifications
781
≥ Filter diameter
67 mm
≥ Maximum diameter
‰77.3 mm (3.04″)
≥ Overall length
Approx. 93.4 mm (3.68″) (from the tip of the lens to the base side of the lens mount)
≥ Dust and splash resistant
Yes
≥ Recommended operating temperature
−10 oC to 40 oC (14 oF to 104 oF)
≥ Permissible relative humidity
10 %RH to 80 %RH
≥ Mass (Weight)
Approx. 413
g
(0.91 lb)
Materials – Specifications
782
35 mm full-frame interchangeable Lens:
S-R1840 “LUMIX S 18-40mm F4.5-6.3”
≥ Mount
Leica Camera AG L-Mount
≥ Focal length
f=18 mm to 40 mm
≥ Lens construction
8 elements in 7 groups (3 aspherical lenses, 2 ED lenses, 1 UHR lens)
* The protective glass is not included
≥ Aperture type
7 diaphragm blades / circular aperture diaphragm
≥ Maximum aperture
F4.5 (Wide) to F6.3 (Tele)
≥ Minimum aperture value
F22 (Wide) to F32 (Tele)
≥ Angle of view
100o (Wide) to 57o (Tele)
≥ In focus distance
0.15 m (0.49 feet) to ¶ (Wide to focal length 21 mm) / 0.35 m (1.15 feet) to ¶ (Tele)
(from the focus distance reference line)
≥ Maximum image magnification
0.28× (focal length 21 mm)
≥ Optical Image Stabilizer
No
Materials – Specifications
783
≥ Filter diameter
62 mm
≥ Maximum diameter
‰67.9 mm (2.67″)
≥ Overall length
Approx. 40.9 mm (1.61″) (from the tip of the lens to the base side of the lens mount
when the lens barrel is retracted)
≥ Mass (Weight)
Approx. 155
g
(0.34 lb)
≥ Dust and splash resistant
Yes
≥ Recommended operating temperature
−10 oC to 40 oC (14 oF to 104 oF)
≥ Permissible relative humidity
10 %RH to 80 %RH
Materials – Trademarks and Licenses
784
Trademarks and Licenses
•
L-Mount is a trademark or registered trademark of Leica Camera AG.
•
“Nextorage” is a registered trademark or trademark of Nextorage corporation.
•
SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
•
The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, HDMI Trade dress and
the HDMI Logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing
Administrator, Inc.
•
USB Type-C
®
and USB-C
®
are registered trademarks of USB Implementers Forum.
Materials – Trademarks and Licenses
785
•
QuickTime and the QuickTime logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Apple Inc., used under license therefrom.
•
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Holdings Corporation.
•
Adobe is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the
United States and/or other countries.
•
Windows is a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
•
Apple, Final Cut Pro, Mac, and macOS are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Apple Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
•
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
•
Google, Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google LLC.
Materials – Trademarks and Licenses
786
•
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Panasonic Holdings Corporation is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
•
“Wi-Fi
®
” is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
•
“WPA™”, “WPA2™”, and “WPA3™” are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
•
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.
•
Other names, company names, product names mentioned in this document are
trademarks or registered trademarks of the companies concerned.
Materials – Trademarks and Licenses
787
This product incorporates the following software:
(1) the software developed independently by or for Panasonic,
(2) the software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic,
(3) the software licensed under the GNU General Public License, Version 2.0 (GPL
V2.0),
(4) the software licensed under the GNU LESSER General Public License, Version
2.1 (LGPL V2.1), and/or
(5) open source software other than the software licensed under the GPL V2.0 and/
or LGPL V2.1.
The software categorized as (3) - (5) are distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Please refer to
the detailed terms and conditions thereof displayed by selecting [MENU/SET]
[Setup] [Others] [Firmware Version] [Software info].
At least three (3) years from delivery of this product, Panasonic will give to any third
party who contacts us at the contact information provided below, for a charge no more
than our cost of physically performing source code distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code covered under GPL V2.0 or
LGPL V2.1, as well as the respective copyright notice thereof.
Contact Information: [email protected]
The source code and the copyright notice are also available for free in our website
below.
https://panasonic.net/cns/oss/index.html
This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal use of
a consumer or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode video
in compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that
was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from
a video provider licensed to provide AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be
implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA,
L.L.C.
See http://www.mpegla.com
Materials – Trademarks and Licenses
788
Ecodesign information
The following is Ecodesign information required by EU Commission Regulation.
•
For guidance on how to activate and deactivate the wireless network port, see:
– Wi-Fi / Bluetooth: 588
Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries
Only for European Union and countries with recycling systems
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying
documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and
batteries must not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used
batteries, please take them to applicable collection points in
accordance with your national legislation.
By disposing of them correctly, you will help to save valuable
resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health
and the environment.
For more information about collection and recycling, please contact
your local authority.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in
accordance with national legislation.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom symbol):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In
this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the
chemical involved.
F-1
Firmware Update
≥ Firmware Ver. 1.1: F-3
≥ Firmware Ver. 1.3: F-23
≥ Firmware Ver. 1.6: F-25
The firmware has been updated to improve camera capabilities, add
functionality, and enhance security.
The following pages describe the details of the firmware update.
•
To check the firmware version of the camera, select [Firmware Version] in the
[Setup] ([Others]) menu.
•
For the latest information on the firmware or to download/update the firmware,
visit the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/download/index4.html
(English only)
Firmware Update
F-2
About Applications/Software
When you have updated the firmware for the camera, use the latest
version of the application for your smartphone or the software for your PC.
“LUMIX Lab ”
•
Install or update the application on your smartphone.
“LUMIX Sync”
•
Install or update the application on your smartphone.
“LUMIX Tether ”
•
Check the following site and then download and install the software:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_lumixtether.html
(English only)
Firmware Ver. 1.1 – [Video Record Limit] Menu Has Been Added
F-4
[Video Record Limit] Menu Has Been
Added
You can now use a menu to set whether to limit continuous recording time
for video or not.
[] [] [Video Record Limit]
•
When set to [ON], a single recording stops once the recording time exceeds the
following:
•
When set to [OFF], you can keep recording with no limit on continuous video
recording time. However, when the camera’s internal temperature becomes high,
recording may stop to protect the camera.
You can record for a longer time, but the camera body will become hot.
Use a tripod, etc., because recording with a handheld camera for long periods can
cause low temperature burns.
•
Set to [ON] when recording with a handheld camera.
Restarting Video Recording After Stopping Due to
Temperature Increase in the Camera
If video recording stops due to temperature increase in the camera, the
temperature in the camera needs to be lowered before video recording can
be started again.
•
We recommend turning the camera off to lower the temperature in the camera.
•
The continuous recording time for video after restarting depends on the standby time
(the amount of time the camera was off for).
[Rec Quality] Continuous recording time
6K video, 5.9K video 10 minutes
3.8K video, 3.3K video,
C4K video, 4K video
15 minutes
FHD video 20 minutes
Firmware Ver. 1.1 – Frame Marker Function Has Been Enhanced
F-5
Frame Marker Function Has Been
Enhanced
A maximum of 3 frames can be displayed.
You can set different aspect ratios, frame colors, and frame sizes/positions
for each of the frames.
≥ Composition of [SET] Menus Has Been Changed: F-6
≥ The Setting Method for [CUSTOM] in [Frame Aspect] Has Been
Changed: F-8
Firmware Ver. 1.1 – Frame Marker Function Has Been Enhanced
F-6
Composition of [SET] Menus Has Been Changed
[] [] Select [Frame Marker]
[Frame 1]/[Frame 2]/[Frame 3] Settings
[ON] Displays the frame on the recording screen.
[OFF] —
[SET]
[Frame 1]
Refer to “[Frame 1]/[Frame 2]/[Frame 3]
Settings”.
[Frame 2]
[Frame 3]
[Frame Mask]
Sets the opacity of the outside of the frame.
[100%]/[75%]/[50%]/[25%]/[OFF]
[Live View
Frame
Adjustment]
When set to [ON], the [Change Size/Position]
setting screen is displayed when you touch a
frame in the recording screen.
[ON]/[OFF]
[Frame Aspect]
Sets the aspect ratio of the frame.
[2.39:1]/[2.35:1]/[2.00:1]/[17:9]/[1.85:1]/[16:9]/
[3:2]/[4:3]/[5:4]/[7:6]/[1:1]/[6:7]/[4:5]/[3:4]/
[2:3]/[9:16]/[9:17]/[CUSTOM]/[OFF]
[Frame Color] Sets the color of the frame.
[Change Size/Position] Sets the size and position of a frame.
Firmware Ver. 1.1 – Frame Marker Function Has Been Enhanced
F-7
When [Change Size/Position] Is Selected
You can change the size and position of the frame while maintaining the
aspect ratio of the frame.
•
You can change the height, width, and position of the frame if you select [CUSTOM]
in [Frame Aspect]. (The Setting Method for [CUSTOM] in [Frame Aspect] Has
Been Changed: F-8)
≥ Press
3421
to move the center position.
≥ Set the size with [ ] or [ ].
•
The position of the frame can be moved by dragging the center frame inside the
frame in the recording screen. The size of the frame can be changed by dragging the
frame at the top right of the frame.
≥ Press [Q] to switch the frame to be changed.
(A) Center coordinates (0 being the center of the screen)
(B) Frame size
•
Frame size can be set in the range between 20 % and 100 %.
•
The first press of [DISP.] returns the frame position to the center.
The second press returns the frame size to the default.
X,Y=(±0,±0)
100%
(A) (B)
Firmware Ver. 1.1 – Frame Marker Function Has Been Enhanced
F-8
The Setting Method for [CUSTOM] in [Frame Aspect]
Has Been Changed
The [CUSTOM] setting in [Frame Aspect] is performed with [Change Size/
Position].
1
Select [SET] in the [Frame Marker] menu.
2
Select one of [Frame 1] to [Frame 3] and then select
[CUSTOM] in [Frame Aspect].
3
Select [Change Size/Position].
≥ Press
3421
to move the center position.
≥ Set the height of the frame with [ ], and the width with [ ].
•
The position of the frame can be moved by dragging the center frame inside the
frame in the recording screen. The height and width of the frame can be changed by
dragging the frame at the top or right edge of the frame.
≥ Press [Q] to switch the frame to be changed.
(A) Center coordinates (0 being the center of the screen)
(B) Height and width of the frame
•
Frame size can be set in the range between 20 % and 100 %.
•
The first press of [DISP.] returns the frame position to the center.
The second press returns the frame size to the default.
X,Y=(±0,±0)
100%
70%
(A) (B)
Firmware Ver. 1.1 – Automatic Detection Function Has Been Enhanced
F-9
Automatic Detection Function Has Been
Enhanced
It is now possible to set the subjects [TRAIN] and [AIRPLANE] for
automatic detection.
Furthermore, you can now select the [Target Parts] for [CAR] and
[MOTORCYCLE].
≥ How to Set Automatic Detection: F-9
≥ Types of Automatic Scene Detection (Intelligent Auto Mode): F-12
How to Set Automatic Detection
When automatic detection is enabled, subjects for recording are
automatically detected and the camera focuses.
1
Set [AF Detection Setting] to [ON].
≥ [ ]/[ ] [] [AF Detection Setting] [ON]
•
You can also press 3 in the AF mode selection screen to switch automatic
detection [ON]/[OFF].
•
Not all subjects can be detected according to the settings.
•
When [Detecting Subject] ([Type of Subject]) is [ANIMAL], some subjects that are
not animals may be detected as animals.
Firmware Ver. 1.1 – Automatic Detection Function Has Been Enhanced
F-10
2
Select [Detecting Subject].
≥ [ ]/[ ] [] [Detecting Subject]
•
Select [Type of Subject] and [Target Parts].
•
It is also possible to select by pressing [DISP.] in the AF mode selection
screen.
[Type of
Subject]
[HUMAN]
Detects humans.
Select either [Eye/Face/Body] or [Eye/Face] for the
[Target Parts].
•
[ ] or [ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
[ANIMAL]
Detects animals.
Select either [Body] or [Eye/Body] for the [Target
Parts].
•
Animals that can be detected are birds, canines
(including wolves, etc.), and felines (including
lions, etc.).
•
[ ] or [ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
[CAR]
Detects cars (mainly for motor sports).
Select either [Entire Subject] or [Main Part Priority]
for the [Target Parts].
•
[ ] or [ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
[MOTORCYCLE]
Detects motorcycles (mainly for motor sports).
Select either [Entire Subject] or [Helmet Priority] for
the [Target Parts].
•
[ ] or [ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
[TRAIN]
Detects railroad cars.
Select either [First Car] or [Main Part Priority] for
the [Target Parts].
•
[ ] or [ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
[AIRPLANE]
Detects aircraft and helicopters.
Select either [Airframe] or [Nose Priority] for the
[Target Parts].
•
[ ] or [ ] is displayed on the AF mode icon.
Firmware Ver. 1.1 – Automatic Detection Function Has Been Enhanced
F-11
[Target
Parts]
Select the part to be brought into focus.
The parts you can select depend on the [Type of Subject] setting.
•
[AF Detection Setting] is applied to all AF modes excluding [ ].
•
When a person’s eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be brought
into focus.
The exposure will be adjusted to the face. (When [Metering Mode] is set to [ ])
•
Depending on [Detecting Subject], the number of subjects that can be detected
at once with [ ] of the AF mode will be different.
[HUMAN] ([Eye/Face/Body], [Eye/Face]): Maximum 15 (maximum 3 bodies
detected)
[ANIMAL] ([Body]), [CAR], [MOTORCYCLE], [TRAIN], [AIRPLANE]: Maximum 3
[ANIMAL] ([Eye/Body]): Maximum 1
•
Automatic detection may not be available due to the camera settings.
Firmware Ver. 1.1 – Automatic Detection Function Has Been Enhanced
F-12
Types of Automatic Scene Detection (Intelligent
Auto Mode)
*1 Detected when [Detecting Subject] ([Type of Subject]) in the [Photo] ([Focus])
menu is set to [HUMAN].
*2 Detected when [Detecting Subject] ([Type of Subject]) in the [Photo] ([Focus])
menu is set to other than [HUMAN].
Taking pictures Recording video
i-Portrait
*1
i-Scenery
i-Macro
i-Night Scenery
i-Food
i-Sunset
i-Low Light
*2
Firmware Ver. 1.1 – Functions Added to “LUMIX Lab”
F-13
Functions Added to “LUMIX Lab”
The following functions have been added to “LUMIX Lab”:
≥ [Remote shooting]: F-13
≥ [Shutter Remote Control]: F-16
≥ Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone with Simple
Operations: F-18
[Remote shooting]
You can use the smartphone to record from a remote location while
viewing the live view images from the camera.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 592)
•
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Lab”.
1
Select [Remote shooting] in the [Camera] screen.
•
Connect to the camera with Wi-Fi. Select [Join] to start the connection.
(A) [Remote shooting]
(A)
Firmware Ver. 1.1 – Functions Added to “LUMIX Lab”
F-14
2
Start recording.
•
The recorded image is saved on the camera.
(B) Takes a picture
(C) Starts/ends the video recording
•
When used in combination with [Auto Transfer], it is possible to automatically
transfer the remotely recorded images to a smartphone.
•
If [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON] using the setting menu for remote recording, it is
enabled when you return to the camera screen from the remote recording
screen.
•
Certain features, including some settings, may not be available.
(B) (C)
Firmware Ver. 1.1 – Functions Added to “LUMIX Lab”
F-15
Operation Method During Remote Recording
Set either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be
used during remote recording.
Touch [ ] in the “LUMIX Lab” remote recording screen.
•
The icon switches each time you touch it.
(Camera prioritized)
Operation is possible on both the camera and the smartphone.
•
The camera’s dial settings, etc. cannot be changed with the smartphone.
(Smartphone prioritized)
Operation is possible only on the smartphone.
•
The camera’s dial settings, etc. can be changed with the smartphone.
•
To end remote recording, press any of the buttons on the camera to turn on the
screen, and select [End].
•
The default setting is [ ] (Camera prioritized).
Firmware Ver. 1.1 – Functions Added to “LUMIX Lab”
F-16
[Shutter Remote Control]
You can use the smartphone as a remote control for the shutter.
Getting started:
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 592)
•
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Lab”.
1
Select [Shutter Remote Control] in the [Camera] screen.
(D) [Shutter Remote Control]
2
Start recording.
Starts/ends the video recording
Takes a picture
(D)
LOCK
Firmware Ver. 1.1 – Functions Added to “LUMIX Lab”
F-17
Bulb Recording
The shutter can be kept open from the start to end of recording, which is
useful for recording of starry skies or night scenery.
Getting started:
•
Set the camera to [M] mode.
•
Set the camera shutter speed to [T] (Time).
1 Touch [ ] to start recording (keep touching, without removing your finger).
2 Remove your finger from [ ] to end recording.
•
Slide [ ] in the direction of [LOCK] to record with the shutter button locked
in a fully-pressed state.
(Slide [ ] back to its original position or press the camera shutter button to
end recording)
•
During [B] (Bulb) recording, if the Bluetooth connection is broken, then carry
out Bluetooth connection again, then end recording from the smartphone.
•
When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], [Shutter Remote Control] cannot be used.
Firmware Ver. 1.1 – Functions Added to “LUMIX Lab”
F-18
Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone
with Simple Operations
You can transfer pictures to a smartphone connected by Bluetooth just by
pressing [Q] during playback.
You can also use the menu to connect easily.
•
You can also perform the same operation by pressing the Fn button registered with
[Send Image (Smartphone)].
Getting started:
•
Install “LUMIX Lab” on your smartphone.
•
Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (Connecting to a Smartphone
(Bluetooth Connection): 592)
•
Press [ ] on the camera to display the playback screen.
Send a single image
1 Press 21 to select the image.
2 Press [Q].
3 Select [Single Select].
•
To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.].
4 Select [OK] on the smartphone.
•
This connects automatically using Wi-Fi.
Send multiple images
1 Press [Q].
2 Select [Multi Select].
•
To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.].
3 Select the images and then transfer.
21: Select images
: Set/Cancel
[DISP.]: Transfer
4 Select [OK] on the smartphone.
•
This connects automatically using Wi-Fi.
Firmware Ver. 1.1 – Functions Added to “LUMIX Lab”
F-19
Using the menu to transfer easily
[] [] [Bluetooth] [Send Image (Smartphone)]
Settings: [Single Select]/[Multi Select]
•
If [Single Select], press 21 to select the image and then press to execute.
•
If [Multi Select], use the same operation as with “Send multiple images”. (Send
multiple images: F-18)
•
It is not possible to transfer images with file sizes exceeding 4 GB.
•
Images recorded using the following function cannot be transferred:
– [MOV] videos
•
When recording, recording is prioritized so it will take time for sending to
complete.
•
If the camera is turned off, or the Wi-Fi is disconnected before sending is
completed, then sending will not restart.
•
You may not be able to delete files or use the [Playback] menu while sending.
•
When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], [Send Image (Smartphone)] cannot be used.
Firmware Ver. 1.1 – Additions/Changes to Other Functions
F-20
Additions/Changes to Other Functions
≥ Menu Name of [Priority of Remote Device] Has Been Changed: F-20
≥ Composition of [Bluetooth] Menus Has Been Changed: F-21
Menu Name of [Priority of Remote Device] Has Been
Changed
The name of the [Priority of Remote Device] menu has been changed.
[] [] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup] [Prio. Remote
Device(LUMIX Sync)]
You can set whether operations with the camera or the smartphone are prioritized
during remote recording using LUMIX Sync.
Firmware Ver. 1.1 – Additions/Changes to Other Functions
F-21
Composition of [Bluetooth] Menus Has Been
Changed
The composition of the [Bluetooth] menus in the [Setup] ([IN/OUT]) menu
has been changed.
[Bluetooth
®
]
[Bluetooth Function]
[Pairing]
[Add New Device]
[Delete]
[Send Image (Smartphone)]
[Auto Transfer]
[Location Logging]
[LUMIX Sync Settings]
[Remote Wakeup]
[Returning from Sleep Mode]
[Auto Clock Set]
[Wi-Fi network settings]
Firmware Ver. 1.1 – Added Menus
F-22
Added Menus
Specifications information for the menus added by the firmware update.
List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available
for Copying
: Using [Reset], the function to return to default settings
: Using [Save to Custom Mode], the function to save settings details in the Custom
mode
: Using [Save/Restore Camera Setting], the function to copy settings details
Menu Default setting
[Setup]: [Monitor / Display]
[Video Record Limit] [ON]
Firmware Ver. 1.3 – Functional Changes to Enhance Security
F-24
Functional Changes to Enhance Security
≥ Changes to Wi-Fi Functionality: F-24
Changes to Wi-Fi Functionality
In order to enhance security, password authentication will always be used
when establishing direct Wi-Fi connections between the camera and a
smartphone.
For this reason, the [Wi-Fi Password] menu item in [Wi-Fi Setup] has been
removed, and [Wi-Fi Password] will always be [ON].
When connecting to Wi-Fi via a wireless access point, the [TKIP] of
encryption method and [No Encryption] in [Security type] are no longer
supported.
For European and Ukrainian models (DC-S9E/DC-S9KE/DC-S9HE/
DC-S9NE)
The functionality to send images to a PC via Wi-Fi is no longer supported.
•
The [Send Images to PC While Recording]/[Send Images Stored in the Camera to
PC] menus in [Wi-Fi Function] can no longer be selected.
The composition of the menu to connect a smartphone with Wi-Fi has also been
changed to the following:
[]
[]
[Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Control
With Smartphone]
•
The [PC Connection] menu item in
[Wi-Fi Setup]
has been removed.
Firmware Ver. 1.6 – Focus Ring Function Has Been Enhanced
F-26
Focus Ring Function Has Been Enhanced
To enhance the functionality of [Focus Ring Control] in the [Custom] menu
it has been changed to [Focus Ring Setting During AF] and [Focus Ring
Setting During MF].
Settings such as [Select Function to Assign] and [Direction of Ring
Rotation] are now possible.
[] [] Select [Focus Ring Setting During AF]/
[Focus Ring Setting During MF]
[Focus Ring Setting During AF]
[Select Function to Assign]
[Front Dial] / [Aperture] / [Shutter Speed] / [Crop
Zoom] / [Exposure Comp.] / [Sensitivity] / [White
Balance] / [Color Temperature] / [AF Mode] / [Photo
Style] / [No Setting]
[Setting]
[Direction of Ring Rotation] / [Aperture Increment] /
[Rotational Angle of the Ring]
Sets the function assigned to the focus ring when the camera is in AF mode. (When
using supported lenses)
•
Set the rotational direction when changing the setting value with [Direction of Ring
Rotation].
•
[Aperture Increment] is displayed when [Select Function to Assign] is set to
[Aperture].
•
[Rotational Angle of the Ring] is displayed when [Select Function to Assign] is set
to [Crop Zoom].
Firmware Ver. 1.6 – Focus Ring Function Has Been Enhanced
F-27
[Focus Ring Setting During MF]
[Focus Ring Control] [NON-LINEAR] / [LINEAR] / [SET]
Sets the amount of focus movement by the focus ring when the camera is in MF
mode. (When using supported lenses)
[NON-LINEAR]: Focus responds by accelerating according to rotation speed of the
focus ring.
[LINEAR]: Focus responds at a constant amount according to the rotational angle of
the focus ring.
•
When using lenses equipped with focus clutch mechanisms, set the lens to AF
and the camera to MF.
[SET]: Sets the rotational angle of the focus ring for when [LINEAR] is selected.
•
Angles that cannot be set with the attached lens are not displayed.
[Direction of Ring Rotation] []/ []
Sets the rotational direction by the focus ring when the camera is in MF mode.
(When using supported lenses)
[ ]: The focus point is moved closer when the ring is rotated clockwise.
[ ]: The focus point is moved further away when the ring is rotated clockwise.
Firmware Ver. 1.6 – [Shutter Speed Limiter] Has Been Added
F-28
[Shutter Speed Limiter] Has Been Added
[Shutter Speed Limiter] has been added to the [Video] menu.
You can change the lower limit of the shutter speed according to the
recording frame rate of the video. When you set to [ON], you can limit the
shutter speed so that it does not go below the frame rate. If you want to
make the shutter speed longer than the frame rate, set to [OFF].
Set [Shutter Speed Limiter].
≥ [] [] [Shutter Speed Limiter]
[ON]
Limits the shutter speed so it does not go below the frame rate.
[OFF]
No limit is placed on the shutter speed so it does not go below the frame rate.
Firmware Ver. 1.6 – [Shutter Speed Limiter] Has Been Added
F-29
Minimum shutter speed
*1 The lower limit of the shutter speed has been changed when the video recording
frame rate is 47.95p.
*2 [ ] mode:
Can be set when [Exposure Mode] is [M]. (Setting the Exposure for Recording
Videos: 343)
[M] mode:
Can be set when [Auto Exposure in P/A/S/M] is [OFF]. ([Auto Exposure in P/A/S/
M]: 522)
Recording
frame rate
of the video
[Shutter Speed Limiter]
[ON] [OFF]
[AFS]/[AFC] [MF] [AFS]/[AFC] [MF]
23.98p/
24.00p/
25.00p
1/25 of a second
1/2 of a
second
*2
29.97p 1/30 of a second
47.95p
1/50 of a second
1/25 of a second ([iA]/[S]
*1
/
[M]
*1
)
1/50 of a second ([P]/[A])
48.00p
50.00p
59.94p 1/60 of a second
1/30 of a second ([iA]/[S]/[M])
1/60 of a second ([P]/[A])
100.00p 1/100 of a second
119.88p 1/125 of a second
Firmware Ver. 1.6 – Additions/Changes to Other Functions
F-30
Additions/Changes to Other Functions
≥ Changes to the Functionality of My Menu: F-30
Changes to the Functionality of My Menu
When registering menu items shared by both the [Photo] menu and the
[Video] menu ([Photo Style], etc.) in My Menu, it is now possible to register
the items as single menu items.
Firmware Ver. 1.6 – Added Menus
F-31
Added Menus
Specifications information for the menus added by the firmware update.
List of Default Settings/Custom Saving/Settings Available
for Copying
: Using [Reset], the function to return to default settings
:
Using [Save to Custom Mode], the function to save settings details in the Custom mode
: Using [Save/Restore Camera Setting], the function to copy settings details
List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording Mode
Menu Default setting
[Video]: [Image Quality]
[Shutter Speed Limiter] [ON]
[Custom]: [Lens / Others]
[Focus Ring Setting
During AF]
[Select Function to
Assign]
[OFF]
[Setting] —
[Focus Ring Setting
During MF]
[Focus Ring Control] [NON-LINEAR]
[Direction of Ring
Rotation]
Menu iA P A S M S&Q
[Video]: [Image Quality]
[Shutter Speed Limiter]
